UK AUTO MANUAL.book

PART 1
Version 12.0
Developed by: PC|SCHEMATIC A/S Bygaden 7 4040 Jyllinge Denmark
T: +45 4678 8244
www.pcschematic.com
info@pcschematic.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1
PREFACE...................................................................................................... 7
UNICODE .................................................................................................... 10
SURVEY ................................................................................................13
QUICK SURVEY OF THE MANUAL........................................................... 15
GETTING STARTED.................................................................................19
WINDOWS................................................................................................... 21
KEYBOARD SHORT-CUTS........................................................................ 27
THE ON-LINE MANUAL ............................................................................. 32
THE WORK AREA ...................................................................................... 35
SCREEN / IMAGE FUNCTIONS ................................................................. 38
BASIC DRAWING FACILITIES ...................................................................45
ON DRAWING OBJECTS ........................................................................... 47
LINES .......................................................................................................... 65
ARCS/CIRCLES .......................................................................................... 97
TEXTS ......................................................................................................... 99
SYMBOLS ................................................................................................. 133
FUNCTIONS ON COMPONENT LEVEL................................................... 220
AREAS ...................................................................................................... 232
SUB DRAWINGS ...................................................................................... 244
RENAME SYMBOLS................................................................................. 278
INSERTING IMAGES ................................................................................ 286
SURVEY AND REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ............................................289
THE EXPLORER WINDOW: THE PROJECTS TAB ................................ 291
THE OBJECT LISTER .............................................................................. 296
FIND AND REPLACE................................................................................ 306
DESIGN CHECK ....................................................................................... 310
PRINTING.................................................................................................. 314
WINDOWS EXPLORER AS SYMBOL/PROJECT MENU ........................ 321
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ................................................................ 322
REFERENCES ......................................................................................353
AUTOMATICALLY UPDATED REFERENCES ........................................ 355
Automation 12.0
Page 3
CONTACT MIRRORS AND REFERENCE CROSSES ............................. 362
CURRENT PATH NUMBERS / REFERENCE SYSTEM........................... 367
WIRE NUMBERS .................................................................................. 375
AUTOMATIC WIRE NUMBERING ............................................................ 377
MANUAL PLACING OF WIRE NUMBERS............................................... 386
WIRE NUMBER FILES.............................................................................. 389
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS ....................................................................... 395
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS ........................................................................ 397
AUTOMATIC GENERATION OF SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS .................. 399
Automation 12.0
Page 4
PART 2
PLC FUNCTIONS..................................................................................433
SURVEY OF PLC FUNCTIONS ................................................................ 435
WORKING WITH PLC’S ........................................................................... 436
READING PLC I/O LISTS ......................................................................... 449
PLC I/O ADDRESSING VIA EXCEL ......................................................... 452
CONNECTION SYMBOL FOR SIGNAL BUSES...................................... 454
INSTALLATION DRAWING .......................................................................457
CREATING A GROUND PLAN................................................................. 459
LAYERS, ELEVATION AND SCALING.................................................... 465
TIPS FOR INSTALLATION DRAWING .................................................... 471
THE PANEL BUILDER.............................................................................. 473
WORKING WITH PROJECTS ..................................................................481
ON PROJECTS ......................................................................................... 483
PAGES AND CHAPTERS......................................................................... 485
PROJECT TEMPLATES AND STANDARD PROJECTS......................... 504
COPYING FULL PROJECTS INTO OTHER PROJECTS ........................ 506
SEVERAL PROJECTS SIMULTANEOUSLY ........................................... 509
INSERTING LOGOS IN PROJECTS ........................................................ 517
LISTS ..................................................................................................519
INSERT DRAWING HEADERS/FORMULAS ........................................... 521
LIST SETTINGS ........................................................................................ 532
COMPONENT GROUPING ....................................................................... 546
INSERTING UNIT DRAWINGS ................................................................. 558
DATABASES.........................................................................................559
USING THE DATABASE .......................................................................... 561
CREATING COMPONENTS IN THE DATABASE.................................... 579
DATABASE SETTINGS ............................................................................ 598
CHOOSING A DATABASE....................................................................... 613
PROGRAMMABLE BARCODE SCANNERS ........................................... 615
MECHANICAL LOAD FROM THE DATABASE....................................... 616
FROM MECHANICAL TO ELECTRICAL DRAWING ............................... 625
EXPORT / IMPORT ................................................................................627
EXPORTING LIST FILES.......................................................................... 629
DWG AND DXF FILES .............................................................................. 640
INTEGRATION WITH MICROSOFT EXCEL ............................................ 646
INSERTING FILES FROM OTHER PROGRAMS / OLE .......................... 647
PLACING SYMBOLS VIA LISTS.............................................................. 654
Automation 12.0
Page 5
OPENING FILES FROM THE TOOLS MENU........................................... 659
PC|SCHEMATIC VIEWER......................................................................... 660
CREATE SYMBOLS, LISTS AND PROJECTS ............................................ 663
PLANNING AHEAD................................................................................... 665
PAGE DATA AND PROJECT DATA DATAFIELDS ................................ 669
CREATING SYMBOLS.............................................................................. 676
CREATING DATA SYMBOLS................................................................... 711
CREATING SIGNAL SYMBOLS ............................................................... 717
CREATING DRAWING HEADERS ........................................................... 721
CREATING LISTS ..................................................................................... 732
CREATING UNIT DRAWINGS .................................................................. 748
CREATING TEMPLATES.......................................................................... 752
UPDATING, MODULES AND LICENSES ................................................... 761
MODULES ................................................................................................. 763
UPDATE AND AUTOMATIC INFORMATION........................................... 765
ADAPTING THE SYSTEM TO YOUR NEEDS.......................................... 767
SHORT-CUT KEYS ................................................................................... 769
COLORS.................................................................................................... 773
TANKING LICENSES................................................................................ 775
PREVENTING REPETITIVE STRAIN INJURIES...................................... 782
ACCESS CODES, REGISTRATION ETC. .................................................. 785
PASSWORDS ON PROJECTS................................................................. 787
LOCKING PROJECT FILES ..................................................................... 788
REVISION CONTROL ............................................................................... 790
REGISTRATION OF PC|SCHEMATIC FILE TYPES ................................ 795
INDEXING.................................................................................................. 798
STARTING FUNCTIONS, BATCH PRINTING AND DDE......................... 802
COMPRESSED SAVING / ZIPPING PROJECTS ..................................... 806
APPENDICES ....................................................................................... 807
SETTINGS ................................................................................................. 809
DATAFIELDS ............................................................................................ 834
THE DATABASE FIELD PCSTYPE.......................................................... 843
THE DATABASE FIELD PINDATA........................................................... 845
THE DATABASE FIELD PINDATA: COUNTING ..................................... 846
DICTIONARY............................................................................................. 850
Automation 12.0
Page 6
Preface
PREFACE
Automation is a CAD-program for documenting PLC, wiring and power control circuit diagrams, and can furthermore be used for any kind of electrical installations.
The program is developed by the Danish software house PC|SCHEMATIC A/S.
In the same family of CAD programs you will find:
- PC|SCHEMATIC PowerDistribution for registration and survey of LV installations, for e.g. operations and maintenance.
- PC|SCHEMATIC Tele for registration and survey of tele installations, for e.g.
documentation, maintenance and operations.
- PC|SCHEMATIC Loop GI for automatic geneartion of loop diagrams based on
information from a database or for instance from Excel
PC|SCHEMATIC A/S also develop software for interfaces, as well as user-defined
modules and applications, for the PC|SCHEMATIC programs.
Furthermore you can use Automation as a general CAD drawing tool. The program uses PC|SCHEMATIC’s own file formats, but supports the CAD file formats
DWG and DXF.
Automation RUNS UNDER WINDOWS VISTA
Automation IS "VISTA READY", AND FUNCTIONS CORRECTLY UNDER WINDOWS VISTA. QUITE A FEW CHANGES HAVE BEEN MADE TO ACCOMPLISH
THIS. PLEASE NOTE THAT THE PROGRAM WILL BEHAVE SLIGHTLY DIFFERENT
IN SOME SITUATIONS WHEN USING WINDOWS VISTA.
Special in version 12: Unicode
In Automation version 12 it is important to know that projects are saved in unicode. This has the consequence, that projects created in previous versions, now
must be converted to version 12. Read more about this in “Unicode” on page 10.
Designing your own functions in Automation
You can now create your own functions in Automation by using the bulid-in interface for COM/OLE automation. The documentation for how to do this can be downloaded at www.pcschematic.com. You can also access the special forum for COM/
OLE automation for the Automation program at the PC|SCHEMATIC userforum
(direct address for the COM/OLE section at the forum: http://forums.pcschematic.com/forums/59.aspx).
Symbols and databases
All symbols in the program are created by PC|SCHEMATIC A/S, with license from
Danish Standard / IEC. Where no overall standard exists, the symbols have been
created in co-operation with either trade organisations, component vendors or
Automation users.
Automation 12.0
Page 7
Preface
Automation includes a database program, for which many vendors have created
special databases. These can be loaded directly into the program. The extra
advantage of these PC|SCHEMATIC databases, are that they, beyond the common
database information — such as EAN number, description and prices —, contain
electrical as well as mechanical symbols for the components. You also have the
option to create your own component databases.
When buying the program, you will get access to component databases from several component vendors. These databases are created in Access format.
Furthermore, Automation can use databases, which are supported by ODBC,
MDAC (Microsoft Data Access Components — standard on Windows 2000 and
later) and BDE (or the so-called native drivers). In praxis this means that the program supports practically all database formats for Windows — for instance Oracle
and Microsoft SQL Server.
Reducing Repetitive Strain Injuries
Along with the program comes the specially designed Mouse Chasing System for
learning the program short-cut keys while working.
Support and Update
Support and updates are available, but the terms can differ from country to country.
Please contact your local PC|SCHEMATIC agent for detailed information.
PC|SCHEMATIC A/S participates in a continuous dialog with the users of the program. The input from this dialog is the basis for the future development of the program.
OTHER
MANUALS
For Automation the following additional manuals exist:
— The Quick start manual, which gives you a quick introduction to Automation.
— The Information & Installation manual, which gives you practical information
as well as information on how to install the program. You also get information on
how to install the license server software for multiuser network licenses.
— The Project Generator manual, which describes automatic generation of projects in Automation.
— The Tools manual, which describes how you can document symbols in projects
or libraries automatically, how to set up parameters for DWG/DXF import/export,
how to use the PC|SCHEMATIC Translator program, for translating project texts,
as well as how you automatically create graphical terminal plans, graphical cable
plans and graphical connection plans.
— The Datbase manual, which describes how to use the PC|SCHEMATIC Database program for creating and maintaining your database for Automation.
VIDEOS
AND ARTICLES AT WWW.PCSCHEMATIC.COM
At www.pcshcematic.com you can watch videos showing many of the available
optionsin Automation.
Automation 12.0
Page 8
Preface
At www.pcshcmeatic.com you can also a read survey article about the program, as
well as articles about the basic drawing functions, PLC functions. lists and about
working with projects.
PC|SCHEMATIC
FORUM AND
FAQ
At www.pcschematic.com you also have access to the PC|SCHEMATIC forum,
where you can exchange experiences with other PC|SCHEMATIC users.
Automation 12.0
Page 9
Unicode
UNICODE
Starting from version 12, Automation is now able to handle multiple regional character sets simultaneously. This is because the program now handles unicode.
WHAT
IS
UNICODE?
Up until now language settings of computers and programs have been more or
less permanent. In Denmark, Germany, UK and other countries, our computers
used a character set – WESTERN EUROPE/LATIN 1. This character set contains
the letters and characters in western European alphabets, including Æ, Ø, Å, Ä, Ö
and Ü. Other language areas have their own character sets, as for instance China,
Japan and Russia.
Previously, it was only possible to work with one regional character set at a time.
You could “cheat” the program to work with a different character set (like Russian)
by changing some program settings — in Automation in Settings => System.
This way it was possible — on for instance a English Windows installation — to
work with a project, which was originally created using another character set.
Unicode, on the contrary, contains (almost) all existing characters — more than
100.000, each having its own meaning. "UNI CODE" = "one code".
When you have a program that supports Unicode, this program can show letters/
characters from any alphabet in the same file. In Automation this means that
when you have a project file, that will be used in Russia, this file can contain a
Danish/English text and Russian characters.
This is because each character has its own unique code. However, the used font
must contain all the needed characters. And this is not the case with all fonts.
The PC|SCHEMATIC font contains characters for Eastern and Western Europe
and Russia.
SYSTEM
SETTINGS FOR CONVERSION INTO
UNICODE
The basic setting for conversion to Unicode-format, is made under Settings =>
System.
What happens during the conversion, is that all old files must be translated to the
new format — that is converted from one character set to another. The program will
guess the character set, as you can see in “Opening an existing project in version
12” on page 11.
THE PC|SCHEMATIC
FONT AND
UNICODE
The PC|SHCEMATIC font is not a Windows font and therefore it has limited Windows functionality. However, it conforms to the standards requirements concerning
texts in technical documentation, and the font will be the standard font in most projects. It will also be converted to Unicode-format in all existing projects, that you
continue to work with. New projects are saved in this format automatically.
Automation 12.0
Page 10
Unicode
OPENING
AN EXISTING PROJECT IN VERSION
12
When you open a project created before version 12, the following dialog box appears:
You can choose not to display the dialog box again by selecting Do NOT show this
message again at the bottom of the dialog box.
If you click the Char. set button, you will enter a dialog box, where you can see the
recommended character set for the actual project. If this is not the correct character set, click Select character set where you can see all supported character sets.
IMPORTANT TO CHOOSE THE CORRECT CHARACTER SET
IT IS IMPORTANT, THAT YOU CHOOSE THE RIGHT CHARACTER SET FOR OLD
FILES, AS YOU MIGHT RISK SAVING THE PROJECT IN A FORMAT THAT MAKES
SHOWING OR RECOVERY OF THE ORIGINAL CHARACTERS IMPOSSIBLE.
THE PROGRAM CREATES BACKUPS OF OLD FILES IN THE OLD FORMAT, IF
YOU CHOOSE TO. THOSE BACKUPS WILL BE SAVED AS
FILENAME(ANSI).~PR/~SY. THIS MEANS, THAT IF YOU HAVE CHOSEN THE
WRONG CODEPAGE FOR CONVERSION, YOU CAN GO BACK TO THE ORIGINAL
FORMAT AND TRY AGAIN.
— IF YOU HAVEN’T CREATED PROJECTS INCLUDING ”FOREIGN” ALPHABETS/
CHARACTERS, YOU WILL NOT EXPERIENCE ANY PROBLEMS, AND IT WILL BE
SAFE FOR YOU TO TICK OFF THE DIALOG WHEN YOU SEE IT THE FIRST TIME.
The following character sets are supported:
• Central Europe
• Cyrillic
• Western Europe/Latin 1
• Greek
• Turkish
• Hebrew
• Arabic
• Baltic
• Vietnam
• Thai
Automation 12.0
Page 11
Unicode
• Japanese Shift-JIS
• Simplified Chinese GBK
• Korean
• Traditional Chinese Big5
TEXTS
IN SYMBOLS ARE CONVERTED AUTOMATICALLY
Conversion of old symbols function as as described above, but you will not enter
the dialog when you load a new symbol. However, it is important that your settings
are correct, and we recommend that you keep the setting for automatic backups in
old version.
MODULE
FOR CONVERTING PROJECTS TO
UNICODE
You can also install a module to convert projects from versions prior to version 12:
1) Choose File => Modules
2) In the dialog box Modules: Click on Convert files from ver. 11 or older and
click Install
3) In the dialog box Modules: Click Close
4) Close all active Automation projects
5) Choose Tools => Convert files from ver. 11 or older:
6) Select a folder and click Convert to convert all projects in the folder.
Automation 12.0
Page 12
Survey
In this section you get a first impression of how
to get started with the program.
To get the most of the manual, you should read
this short section before going any further.
Quick survey of the manual
QUICK SURVEY OF THE MANUAL
To make the program as easy accessible as possible, the user interface for Automation have been developed as close to the Windows version of the Microsoft®
Office-package as possible.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES THE CONTENTS OF THIS
MANUAL.
If you are not familiar with Windows, you may read the brief introduction in the
chapter “Windows” on page 21.
The manual itself is divided in sections. Below you can get a survey of the contents
of these sections.
THE
CONTENTS OF
PART 1
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
SUBJECTS
"GETTING
STARTED"
(P. 19)
SCREEN FUNCTIONS
INTRODUCTION TO WINDOWS
THE ONLINE MANUAL
THE PROGRAM WORK AREA
BASIC IMAGE FUNCTIONS
"BASIC DRAWING FACILITIES"
(P. 45)
DETAILED DESCRIP-
"SURVEY AND
REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS"
(P. 289)
DESCRIPTION OF
IN THE PROGRAM
ETC.
TION OF THE BASIC
DRAWING FACILITIES.
HOW TO FIND PAGES
AND OBJECTS IN PROJECTS, PERFORM
DESIGN CHECK AND
PRINT.
DESCRIPTION OF
HOW TO USE REFE-
DRAWING DIAGRAMS / WORKING WITH LINES,
SYMBOLS, TEXTS AND AREAS
TRANSFERRING PROPERTIES BETWEEN OBJECTS
ALIGNING AND TRIMMING FUNCTIONS
AUTOMATIC LINE DRAWING / ROUTER
MOUNTING CORRECT DRAWING
TEXT LINKS
FUNCTIONS ON COMPONENT LEVEL
SUB DRAWINGS / DRAG’N DRAW
RENAME SYMBOLS
USING THE BUILD-IN EXPLORER
USING THE OBJECT LISTER
FIND AND REPLACE
DESIGNCHECK
PRINTING
USING THE WINDOWS EXPLORER AS PROJECT/
SYMBOL MENU
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
RENCE DESIGNATIONS.
Automation 12.0
Page 15
Quick survey of the manual
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
SUBJECTS
"REFERENCES"
(P. 353)
DESCRIPTION OF
AUTOMATICALLY UPDATED REFERENCES
CONTACT MIRRORS
REFERENCE CROSSES
CURRENT PATH NUMBERS / REFERENCE SYSTEM
HOW TO USE REFERENCES IN THE PROGRAM.
"WIRE NUMBERS"
(P. 375)
THE
DESCRIPTION OF
HOW TO USE WIRE
NUMBERS.
CONTENTS OF
AUTOMATIC WIRE NUMBERING
MANUAL PLACING OF WIRE NUMBERS
WIRENUMBER FILES
PART 2
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
SUBJECTS
"PLC FUNCTIONS"
(P. 433)
DESCRIPTION OF
PLC FUNCTIONS.
SURVEY OF PLC FUNCTIONS
WORKING WITH PLC’S
SIGNAL BUSES
READING PLC I/O FILES
PLC I/O ADDRESSING VIA MICROSOFT EXCEL
"INSTALLATION DRAWING"
(P. 457)
DETAILED DESCRIP-
WORKING IN DIFFERENT LAYERS AND ELEVATIONS
SCALING
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS
INSERTING IMAGES
"WORKING
WITH PROJECTS"
(P. 481)
THINGS YOU NEED TO
JECTS.
PROJECT CHAPTERS
PAGE AND PROJECT TEMPLATES
TEMPLATE PROJECTS
COPYING BETWEEN PROJECTS
WORKING WITH MORE THAT ONE PROJECT OPEN
STARTING ANOTHER PROJECT BY CLICKING
"LISTS"
(P. 519)
HOW TO INSERT DRAWING HEADERS/
LISTS.
INSERTING DRAWING HEADER/LIST
LIST SETTINGS
COMPONENT GROUPING
UNIT DRAWINGS
"DATABASES"
(P. 559)
HOW TO USE THE
USING AND CHOOSING A DATABASE
GRAPHICAL CREATION OF COMPONENTS IN THE
TION OF THE MORE
DRAWING FACILITIES.
KNOW WHEN YOU
ARE CREATING PRO-
DATABASE IN YOUR
PROJECTS.
ON PROJECTS
WORKING WITH PAGES, PAGE TYPES AND PAGE
FUNCTIONS
DATABASE
PROGRAMMABLE BARCODE SCANNERS
DATABASE SETTINGS
REFERENCES FROM MECHANICAL TO ELECTRICAL
PAGES
MECHANICAL SYMBOLS FROM THE DATABASE
"EXPORT /
IMPORT"
(P. 627)
DESCRIPTION OF
HOW TO IMPORT/
EXPORT FILES.
LIST FILES
DWG AND DXF FILES
INTEGRATION WITH MICROSOFT EXCEL
INSERTING OBJECTS FROM OTHER PROGRAMS /
OLE OBJECTS
PLACING SYMBOLS VIA LISTS
PC|SCHEMATIC VIEWER
Automation 12.0
Page 16
Quick survey of the manual
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
SUBJECTS
"CREATE SYMBOLS, LISTS
AND PROJECTS"
(P. 663)
HOW TO ADAPT SYMBOLS, LISTS AND
CREATING STANDARD PROJECTS AND TEMPLATES
SPECIFYING WHICH DATAFIELDS CAN BE USED IN
DATAFIELDS TO MEET
YOUR SPECIFIC
NEEDS, AND HOW TO
CREATE PROJECTS
THAT CAN BE USED
PROJECTS
DESIGNING SYMBOLS
DESIGNING SIGNAL SYMBOLS
DESIGNING DRAWING HEADERS/LISTS
DESIGNING UNIT DRAWINGS
AS TEMPLATES FOR
OTHER PROJECTS.
"UPDATING,
MODULES AND
LICENSES". (P.
761)
INFORMATION ABOUT
NETWORK SECURITY
CHECKS, HOW TO
INSTALL AND UPDATE
ADDITIONAL PROGRAM MODULES, AND
HOW TO ADAPT THE
SYSTEM TO YOUR
NEEDS.
"APPENDICES"
(P. 807)
FOR REFERENCE,
AND FOR ADJUSTING
THE PROGRAM SETTINGS.
HOW
PASSWORDS ON PROJECTS
LOCKING PROJECT FILES
INSTALLING MODULES
REVISION MANAGEMENT
ADAPTING THE SYSTEM
SHORT-CUT KEYS
SYSTEM COLORS
REGISTERING PC|SCHEMATIC FILE TYPES
INDEXING
DDE AND STARTING FUNCTIONS
ZIPPING / COMPRESSED SAVING
THE MOUSE CHASING SYSTEM
PROGRAM SETTINGS
DICTIONARY
DATAFIELDS
SPECIAL CHARACTERS IN THE PROGRAM
INDEX
TO GET STARTED
Start by installing the program, as described in “Installation” on page 27, or get the
info from the Information & Installation manual.
Then proceed directly to the Quick start manual. Here you get a quick introduction
to the program, and get ready to carry on with the detailed description of the program in “Basic Drawing facilities” on page 45.
Later on, you may return to the remaining part of “Getting started” on page 19, and
get a better idea of the construction of the program.
You should also read “On projects” on page 483, which gives you a summary of the
possibilities when you are working with projects in Automation.
— Use the chapter headings as well as the index, to receive information on the
desired subjects as quickly as possible. The first chapter in some of the sections
also contains a general overview of the section.
You can also use the program on-line manual, as described in “The On-line
manual” on page 32.
Overall planning
In the section “Create Symbols, Lists and Projects” on page 663, you can get information on how to prepare your projects as easy as possible. In this section you
design your own symbols and lists, and specify which datafields can be used in the
project.
Automation 12.0
Page 17
Quick survey of the manual
Appendix
In the last section of the manual, you can read about the various program settings,
and how to adjust these to your needs. Here you will also find a dictionary, explaining commonly used terms in Automation, in Windows or in the manual itself.
Finally, you can see the special characters, that can be applied in your project diagrams.
Finding your way around the projects
To find your way around the projects, it is recommended to read “Getting started”
on page 19, as well as the chapter “Find and Replace” on page 306.
PC|SCHEMATIC website
For direct access to PC|SCHEMATIC’s homepage, choose Help => Http://
www.pcschematic.com. Here you can for instance get information about the
latest updates in the program.
Here you can also sign up for an e-mail service, which informs you when there are
news on the Automation support page.
TYPOGRAPHY
IN THE MANUAL
The following typographical elements are applied in the manual:
TYPOGRAPHY
USE
ITALICS
TEXTS WRITTEN IN ITALICS ARE TEXTS YOU HAVE TO TYPE IN YOURSELF.
BOLD
BOLD TEXTS — NOT INCLUDING HEADINGS — ARE USED FOR PROGRAM
FUNCTIONS, BUTTONS AND MENUS.
BOLD AND ITALICS
ARE APPLIED FOR FIELD NAMES OR OPTIONS YOU CAN CLICK ON IN DIALOG BOXES.
KEYS
<>
[]
THE CONTROL KEY IS WRITTEN AS <CTRL>, THE ESCAPE KEY AS
<ESC>, THE ENTER KEY AS <ENTER>, THE DELETE KEY AS <DEL>,
WHILE THE SPACEBAR IS WRITTEN AS [SPACEBAR]. SINGLE LETTERS IN
BRACKETS SUCH AS FOR INSTANCE [Z] SPECIFIES THAT THE "Z" KEY IS A
SHORT-CUT KEY.
IF IT SAYS [CTRL+G] THIS MEANS THAT YOU MUST PRESS DOWN THE
"CONTROL" KEY AND THEN PRESS DOWN THE "G" KEY TO ACTIVATE THE
SHORT-CUT.
[CTRL+G]
MENUS
=>
FILE => SAVE MEANS THAT YOU MUST CLICK ON THE MENU FILE (IN THE
MENU BAR ON THE UPPER PART OF THE SCREEN) AND THEN CHOOSE
THE MENU OPTION SAVE.
Furthermore, when you must click on one of the program buttons, this button will
be displayed in the left margin of the text — facing where the button is mentioned.
Buttons mentioned shortly after another, will be displayed following the order in
which they are mentioned in the text.
Automation 12.0
Page 18
Getting started
This section describes:
- Working with Windows programs....................(p. 21)
- Keyboard short-cuts ......................................... (p. 27)
- The On-line Manual ........................................... (p. 32)
- The Work area.................................................... (p. 35)
- Applying basic Image functions....................... (p. 38)
Reading this section will save time using the program.
On www.pcschematic.com you can see product
videos, which can give you a survey of various
functions in the program.
Windows
WINDOWS
This chapter describes how to use the basic Windows functions. Please skip this
chapter if you are an experienced Windows user.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— MENUS .................................................................................................... (P. 21)
— DIALOG BOXES ......................................................................................... (P. 22)
— SHORT-CUT MENUS AND RIGHT-CLICKING .................................................. (P. 23)
— SWITCHING BETWEEN OPEN WINDOWS ....................................................... (P. 23)
— USING THE MOUSE ................................................................................... (P. 23)
— DOCKING WINDOWS AND TOOLBARS .......................................................... (P. 24)
MENUS
When you have opened a project in Automation, the uppermost line of the screen,
will look like this:
This line is called the Menu bar, and clicking on any
of the words here will make various menus appear.
Here you specify which commands you want to execute in the program.
Choosing menus and commands in Automation follows the common directions for Windows. Below you
will see the View menu, as an illustration of how to
choose a command using the menus. Click on View
in the menu bar, and the following menu will appear:
— As you can see, the letter V is underlined in the
word View. This means that you can also choose this
command by pressing [Alt+v].
Click on the option you want to choose — for
instance Screen. You can also choose by using the
arrow keys on the keyboard, and then press <Enter>
when you have found the desired function.
Most of the commands have an underlined letter.
Once the menu have been chosen, you can choose
the command by pressing down the underlined letter.
In the menu to the left, Zoom can for instance be
chosen by pressing down [z].
If the command has got a short-cut key — which
means the command can be chosen without activating the menu at all — the short-cut combination is
displayed to the right of the command. You can for
instance choose Redraw by pressing down [Ctrl+g].
Automation 12.0
Page 21
Windows
If an option is dimmed — written in grey — you are not allowed to execute this
command for the moment.
Three dots succeeding an option — for instance Select page... — signifies that
you by clicking there will get more options — for instance in a new menu or a dialog
box.
DIALOG
BOXES
Below you will see a part of a dialog box (Settings => Pointer/Screen), together
with an explanation of the various elements of the dialog box:
Tabs
Selected tab
Round buttons within
an area signifies mutually exclusive options.
In this case it is therefore only possible to
specify that the gird
(please refer to the dictionary) is turned off,
dotted or squared.
Click on the downarrow, and a drop down
menu will display which
options you have got.
In this case you will
see a list containing
the possible units of
measurement.
Squares signifies functions you can enable or
disable. When you
have chosen a function, a check mark is
placed within the
square. In this case
both Hints and Page
tabs are selected.
The functions are not
mutually exclusive, and
can therefore be chosen at the same time.
SELECTING
ELEMENTS IN LISTS
When elements are listed in a dialog box, these elements can be selected as
described in “Selecting objects in the Object Lister” on page 298.
— See for instance “Copying, Cutting and Pasting more than one page” on
page 494.
SORTING
DATA IN COLUMNS
When a dialog box contains multiple columns, the contents of the dialog box can
typically be sorted alphabetically based on the contents of the individaul columns,
as described in “The sorting order of the data in the Object Lister” on page 298.
Automation 12.0
Page 22
Windows
OK and Cancel
In most of the dialog boxes there will be an OK and a Cancel button as well. The
OK button causes you to leave the dialog box, and the settings you have specified
will be effectuated. Clicking on the Cancel button, causes you to leave the dialog
box without activating the changes you specified.
Please note that the buttons OK and Cancel is not displayed in the figure above.
However, they are located in the lower part of the dialog box.
In stead of clicking Cancel you can press <Esc>.
Using the keyboard in dialog boxes
— See “Keyboard short-cuts” on page 27.
SHORT-CUT
MENUS AND
RIGHT-CLICKING
When you right-click on something in a project, you
will practically always get a so-called short-cut
menu. This menu gives you some options, which
are relevant for what you clicked on.
It will therefore frequently be most efficient to rightclick on an object and see which options you get.
The displayed menu appears by right-clicking on a
page — the "paper" — in a project.
On new keyboards there also exists a short-cut
menu key. Pressing this key has the same function
as right-clicking on an object.
SWITCHING
BETWEEN WINDOWS
When you want to change between several active projects (windows), press down
<Ctrl> while pressing <Tab>. You then switch to another active project. You can
also choose Window in the menu bar on the upper part of the screen, and then
click on the open project you want to work on. If you have several project windows
open simultaneously, you can also just click on the project you wish to work on. —
Please refer to “Several Projects Simultaneously” on page 509.
When you press down the <Alt> key, and then press <Tab>, you can change to
other active programs.
THE
MOUSE
When you are working with Windows, you are using the mouse a great deal of the
time. The operations you can perform with the mouse are displayed below:
OPERATION
DESCRIPTION
CLICK
PRESS DOWN AND RELEASE THE LEFT MOUSE BUTTON ONCE.
DOUBLE-CLICK
PRESS DOWN THE LEFT MOUSE BUTTON TWICE. IT IS IMPORTANT
THAT YOU DO NOT MOVE THE MOUSE WHILE CLICKING.
Automation 12.0
Page 23
Windows
OPERATION
DESCRIPTION
RIGHT-CLICK
PRESS DOWN AND RELEASE THE RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON ONCE.
DRAG AND DROP
TO SELECT AN OBJECT POINT AT THE OBJECT WITH THE MOUSE
CURSOR, AND PRESS THE LEFT MOUSE BUTTON. KEEP THE MOUSE
BUTTON PRESSED DOWN WHILE MOVING THE MOUSE POINTER
ACROSS THE SCREEN.
YOU SAY THAT YOU DRAG THE MOUSE
WHEN YOU RELEASE THE MOUSE BUTTON,
THE OBJECT IS PLACED WHERE YOU POINT WITH THE MOUSE CURSOR.
YOU CAN MOVE BOTH OBJECTS, PROJECT PAGES AND ELEMENTS
IN LISTS BY DRAG AND DROP.
— SEE “MOVING A PLACED SYMBOL” ON PAGE 169, “DRAGGING A
ACROSS THE SCREEN.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION TO A NEW POSITION IN THE DIALOG BOX
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS” ON PAGE 329 AND “DRAG PAGES
510.
BETWEEN PROJECTS” ON PAGE
The small arrow you control on the screen by moving the mouse, is called the
mouse pointer. In Windows you can for instance specify the appearance of the
mouse pointer, how rapidly it moves across the screen, and how fast you have to
click when you double-click. Please refer to your Windows manual for further
details.
DOCKING WINDOWS
AND
TOOLBARS
In many Windows programs you can move the toolbars and dock windows to the
sides of the screen. In the following you can see how to do this in Automation.
Moving the Explorer window
When you start Automation for the first time, the Explorer window is docked to
the left toolbar. This means that it is placed at a fixed position just next to the left
toolbar.
If you want to place the Explorer window at
another location, you point at the two horizontal
lines at the top of the Explorer window.
Then press down the mouse button, drag the window to another location on the screen, and release
the mouse button.
If you just place it on the middle of the screen, it will
cover for the details on the project page. When it is
docked it is not in the way for viewing the page.
The Explorer window can be either a free window, or be docked to the left or to the
right side of the screen.
Automation 12.0
Page 24
Windows
Docking a window
When you wish to dock the window,
click on its title bar, keep the mouse
button pressed down, and move the
window.
The frame of the window is now displayed as a grey box.
When the mouse pointer — and not the edge of
the grey box — is pointing on the edge you
wish to dock the window to, release the mouse
button.
Just before you release the button, the window
will snap to its docked position.
Docking the Survey window
The Survey window can be docked in either
the upper or the lower part of the Explorer window. Please note, that it is docked inside the Explorer window.
DOCKING
THE
PICKMENU
The pickmenu can also either be a free window, be docked below the upper toolbars, or be docked in either of the sides in the program window.
You can only dock one window along any edge of the program window. This means
that if you have docked the Explorer window to the left-hand side, you will not be
allowed to dock the pickmenu to the left-hand side as well.
Docking the Command Toolbar
The command toolbar can be docked, so that it is placed after the program toolbar
using drag and drop.
Program toolbar
Command toolbar (for symbols)
The command toolbar can not be moved/docked.
Automation 12.0
Page 25
Windows
Status button / Info function for last save
In the right-hand side of the Status bar at the
bottom of the screen, you will find a Status button / Info function for when the project was last
saved.
When you click on it, it will display the period of
time since last save. The function is activated
automatically after 30 minutes, and is subsequently activated every five minutes, if the project is not saved. When you right-click on the
button, a menu is displayed from which you can disable the automatic popup information.
Automation 12.0
Page 26
Keyboard short-cuts
KEYBOARD SHORT-CUTS
To reduce the risk for repetitive strain injuries from using the mouse too much, it is
possible to work with Automation using the keyboard. This chapter describes
these options.
Furthermore, general Windows principles for working without the mouse can be
applied.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— CHOOSING MENU POINTS USING THE KEYBOARD .........................................(P. 27)
— CHOOSING BUTTONS/FUNCTIONS USING THE KEYBOARD ..............................(P. 28)
— CHOOSING IN DIALOG BOXES WITH THE KEYBOARD .....................................(P. 28)
— SELECTION IN PICKMENUS USING THE KEYBOARD .......................................(P. 29)
— PLACING OBJECTS USING THE KEYBOARD ...................................................(P. 29)
— CHOOSING OBJECTS USING THE KEYBOARD ................................................(P. 30)
— CHOOSING MORE THAN ONE OBJECT WITH THE KEYBOARD ..........................(P. 30)
— CHOOSING SYMBOLS WITH THE KEYBOARD .................................................(P. 30)
— INCREASE/DECREASE SHORT-CUT USING THE KEYBOARD ............................(P. 31)
— SHORT-CUTS FOR ACTIVATING THE PENCIL .................................................(P. 31)
CONCURRENT LEARNING OF SHORT-CUT KEYS
IN “PREVENTING REPETITIVE STRAIN INJURIES” ON PAGE 782, YOU CAN SEE
HOW YOU CAN LEARN THE SHORT-CUT KEYS FOR THE COMMANDS YOU TYPICALLY CLICK ON WITH THE MOUSE — WHILE WORKING WITH THE PROGRAM.
CHOOSING
MENU POINTS USING THE KEYBOARD
Choosing menu points using the keyboard follows the common Windows standards, as described in “Menus” on page 21.
— Please also refer to “Short-cut Keys” on page 769, where you will find a survey
of the default short-cut keys, and you can read about how to define short-cut keys
for all menu points in the toolbar.
Automation 12.0
Page 27
Keyboard short-cuts
CHOOSING
BUTTONS/FUNCTIONS USING THE KEYBOARD
You can create short-cut keys for all
buttons in the program. This is done
by creating a short-cut key for the
menu point that the button represents.
If for instance you wish to create a
short-cut key for the Page menu
button, you must create a short-cut
key for the menu point View =>
Select page.
Please note that the Page menu
button is displayed in front of the
menu point, so that you can find the
function in the menu easily.
There are menu points for all buttons in the program.
— See “Short-cut Keys” on
page 769 to see how to create keyboard short-cuts for all buttons.
Short-cuts displayed as hints
When you let the mouse cursor rest over a button, the
short-cut key is displayed as a hint in brackets after the button name.
CHOOSING
IN DIALOG BOXES USING THE KEYBOARD
When you have opened a dialog box, you can choose the different fields, buttons
or tabs by pressing down the <Alt> key, and press on the key for the underscored
character for the option in the menu.
Press down <Alt> and press <d>
to select the tab Ref.design.
Automation 12.0
Page 28
Keyboard short-cuts
If for instance you wish to choose the tab Ref.design. in the dialog box Component data above, press down the <Alt> tab, and press the <d> button — because
d is the underscored character on the tab.
If you wish to select OK, press down the <Alt> key, and press the <O> key.
Using the tab key
In each dialog box there is pre-defined order, in which you jump between the different options in the dialog box.
When you press the <Tab> key, you jump to the next option in the pre-defined
order.
When you press down <Shift> and press the <Tab> key, you jump back to the previous option.
SELECTION
IN
PICKMENUS
USING THE KEYBOARD
When you have selected a pickmenu for a component, the field with the first symbol in the pickmenu is highlighted. This indicates that you will get this symbol in the
cross hairs, if you press <Enter>. You can use the right and the left arrow key to
select another symbol in the pickmenu:
Left-arrow key
Right-arrow key
To use the keyboard to select symbols in the stationary pickmenu at the top of the
screen, you must select View => Activate Pickmenu (Short-cut:
<Shift+Ctrl+F12>).
Left-arrow key
PageUp
Right-arrow key
PageDown
You can then select the symbols by pressing the key-arrows, and change between
the different pickmenus by pressing the <PageUp> and <PageDown> keys. When
you press <Enter> you get the selected symbol in the cross hairs.
If a symbol has different states, you can select the symbol states by pressing the
arrow-down and arrow-up keys.
PLACING
OBJECTS USING THE KEYBOARD
When you have an object in the cross hairs, place it like this:
Automation 12.0
Page 29
Keyboard short-cuts
1) Use the arrow-keys, which moves the objects with snap (see “Snap” on
page 42) in the direction of the chosen arrow.
2) Press <Enter> to place the object. — If you hereby enter a dialog box, please
refer to “Choosing in dialog boxes using the keyboard” on page 28.
3) Press <Esc> to remove the object from the cross hairs.
SELECTING
OBJECTS USING THE KEYBOARD
To move the cross hairs to select an object, do this:
1) Press down the <Alt> key, and use the arrow-keys: The cross hairs now jump
to the next object on the page, in the direction specified by the arrow key.
2) Press <Enter>, and the object is selected.
3) Press <Enter> once more, and you enter the component data dialog box /
the text dialog box.
You can now edit data for the selected object.
SELECTING
MORE THAN ONE OBJECT USING THE KEYBOARD
To select more than one object using the keyboard, do this:
1) When the cross hairs is above an object: Press down <Ctrl> and press the
<Enter> key.
2) Move the cross hairs to the next object, press down <Ctrl> and press
<Enter> — etc. until all desired objects are selected.
3) To enter for instance the dialog box Component data: Place the cross hairs
over one of the selected objects, and press <Enter> (without pressing down
<Ctrl>).
You can now edit data for the selected objects.
SELECTING
SYMBOLS USING THE KEYBOARD
Type in the symbol file name
When working with symbols, and you press down the [k] key, you enter the dialog
box Place symbol, where you are asked to type in a symbol file name. — Read
more about this in “Typing in the symbol file name directly” on page 148.
Type in the symbol article number
When working with symbols, and you press down the [v] key, you enter the dialog
box Place symbol, where you are asked to type in a symbol article number. —
Read more about this in “Typing in the Article Number directly” on page 149.
Automation 12.0
Page 30
Keyboard short-cuts
Type in the symbol type
When working with symbols, and you press down the [v] key, you enter the dialog
box Place symbol, where you are asked to type in a symbol type. — Read more
about this in “Typing in the Symbol Type directly” on page 150.
INCREMENT/DECREMENT
USING THE KEYBOARD
See how to increment/decrement names for symbols, connection points and texts
in “Short-cut keys for counting on texts” on page 117.
SHORT-CUTS
FOR ACTIVATING THE
PENCIL
When you are pressing a short-cut key to change from working with one type of
drawing objects to another, you can activate the Pencil simultaneously, if you press
the short-cut key twice.
Please note, that the short-cut key <Insert> always can be applied for the Pencil.
Lines
If for instance you press [l] to work with lines, you can press <Insert> to activate the
Pencil.
You can also press [l][l] — which is pressing [l] twice. If you then want to deactivate
the Pencil, you can do this by pressing [l] once more.
Circles
Correspondingly, the short-cut [c][c] will make you change to Circles with the Pencil active.
Texts
If you press [t][t], you activate Texts, and the cursor will be placed in the text field in
the texts toolbar.
Symbols
If you press [s][s], you get the last selected symbol into the cross hairs. If you have
not chosen a symbol since you opened the project, you enter the Symbol menu.
If you have a symbol in the cross hairs and press [s], the symbol disappears from
the cross hairs. When you press [s] once more, the symbol returns to the cross
hairs.
Zoom
When you want to make a new Zoom, you can apply the short-cut key [z]. If you on
the other hand press [z][z], the full project page is displayed.
Automation 12.0
Page 31
The On-line manual
THE ON-LINE MANUAL
When using this on-line manual, you have the benefit of reading the manual
directly on the screen while working with the program. The contents is identical to
the A4 printable manual, only have the pages been adapted for reading on the
screen.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— OPENING THE ON-LINE MANUAL ................................................................(P. 32)
— THE TABLE OF CONTENTS ..........................................................................(P. 33)
— THE BUTTONS IN THE ON-LINE MANUAL .....................................................(P. 33)
— ZOOMING AND ADAPTING TO YOUR SCREEN ...............................................(P. 33)
— DIRECT ACCESS TO THE INDEX ..................................................................(P. 34)
— RETURNING TO Automation...................................................................(P. 34)
— PRINTING FROM THE ON-LINE MANUAL .......................................................(P. 34)
OPENING
THE
ON-LINE
MANUAL
To open the On-line manual choose Help and select the manual.
Click to view a
chapter
Zoom
Fit the manual
to your screen
About the electronical manual
Return
Up and
down
Click directly to
Index
Page no.
Click on the
+ to see the
sub-chapters
Click to view the
sub-chapters
Click to jump to
other chapters
Automation 12.0
Page 32
The On-line manual
THE TABLE
OF
CONTENTS
In the left-hand side of the manual, you can click
directly on the section you wish to read.
A + in front of a section means that the chapter
is divided into subsections.
When you click directly on a title of a section,
the chosen section is displayed.
You can adjust the size of the table of
contents on the screen. This is done
by pointing on the line between the
table of contents and the manual text,
and then drag the line to either the left
or the right.
You can turn the displaying of the
table of contents on and off by pressing [F5].
THE
Table of contents
Manual
Drag the line to the right or to the left
BUTTONS IN THE UPPER-RIGHT CORNER
In the upper-right corner of the on-line manual,
you will find these four buttons.
When you click the ? button, you enter this
chapter about using the on-line manual.
If you click the Return button, you jump back
to the last page that you have viewed in the online manual.
When you click the up and down buttons, you
leaf one page up or down respectively. You can
also use the [PageUp] and [PageDown] buttons on the keyboard.
ZOOMING
AND
ADAPTING
About the electronical manual
Return to the last
page you read
One page up
One page down
TO YOUR SCREEN
When you open the on-line manual initially, it is opened to a size fitting your screen.
If you need to zoom in on a detail in the manual, you click the Zoom button in the
upper-left corner of your screen.
To re-size the on-line manual to fit your screen, you click the Fit in Window button
on the upper part of the screen, or press [Ctrl+0].
Automation 12.0
Page 33
The On-line manual
DIRECT
ACCESS TO THE INDEX
On the right-hand side of the on-line manual, you have direct access to the index.
To find an explanation about fx. the selection function, you click S index letter in
the right-hand side of the manual. This then looks up under S in the index. Now
click on the dotted line after the word Selection, to bring up to the desired information.
Please note, that it is important that the cursor on screen has the
appearance of a hand with a pointing index-finger, when you click the
dotted line — or the page number. If this is not the case, you zoom in
on the text, and therefore can no longer see the full page on screen.
Click the Fit in Window button or press [Ctrl+0] to restore full page view.
RETURNING
TO Automation
In order to return to Automation, you
just click on its program Windows button at the bottom of your screen — or
press down the <Alt> button while
pressing the <Tab> button.
Click here
The reason why you have to change back and forth in this way, is because that the
manual is a document in the independent program Adobe Acrobat reader.
PRINTING
FROM THE ON-LINE MANUAL
If you wish to read the manual on print, it is recommended to see the printed
manual. To print out directly from the on-line manual, just click the Print button on
the Acrobat program, and specify what to print out.
Please note, that the on-line manual buttons will also be printed.
Automation 12.0
Page 34
The Work Area
THE WORK AREA
After starting Automation, you must choose whether to start a new project, or to
continue working on an existing project.
Because this chapter exclusively deals with the work area on the screen, click the
the New document (New project) button. (If you choose File => New, you can
choose between different page and project templates, as described in “Pages and
Chapters” on page 485).
The program automatically starts up showing the dialog box Project data, with the
tab Settings activated.
At the top of the dialog box Settings you will find some tabs, each containing a
menu defining various program, page and project settings.
Click Cancel, OK or press the <Esc> key to leave the dialog box. — You can read
more about this dialog box in “Settings” on page 809.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES THE WORK AREA OF THE PROGRAM.
When you have opened a project, your screen should look like this:
1
2
3
4
5
6
15
7
8
14
9
10
11
12
13
— Please note that you can change the position of the windows and the toolbars,
as described in “Docking Windows and Toolbars” on page 24.
Automation 12.0
Page 35
The Work Area
1. The menu bar
In the menu bar you find the menus, that contains all the functions in the program.
Choosing a subject in the menu bar, is either done using the mouse or by pressing
down the <Alt> key while typing in the first underlined character in the menu. Files
will for instance be selected by pressing [Alt+f]. — See “Menus” on page 21.
2. The program toolbar
The program toolbar contains program buttons. Here you can choose between the
various program functions. The most common file and printing facilities are placed
here, as well as the more general drawing and editing tools.
3. The command toolbar
The command toolbar has a varying appearance depending on which object type
is selected in the program tool bar. It contains function and editing tools for the various drawing facilities: Lines, Symbols, Texts, Arcs and Areas. The different appearances of the toolbar for each of these is described in “Basic Drawing facilities” on
page 45.
4. The pickmenu
Here you place the symbols, line types, text types and arc types you use the most,
so that you can fetch them right away, and place directly in the diagram pages.
When for instance you click on a symbol in the pickmenu, Automation change to
working with symbols automatically, and you get the selected symbol in the cross
hairs.
By clicking on the tabs at the bottom of the pickmenu, you select which of the
created to display. (The pickmenu was previously named the pickmenu because it
contained symbols only).
The pickmenu is described in “Fetching symbols from the Pickmenu” on page 136.
The pickmenu can be docked as described in “Docking the Pickmenu” on page 25.
5. The help frame
The help frame displays the standard margin on the paper. It can be deactivated
easily — see “Pointer/Screen” on page 815. It is also possible to activate a printer
help frame, displaying the margins of your printer.
6. The Explorer window
The Explorer window contains the Projects tab and the SubDrawings tab:
The Projects tab in the Explorer window
On the Projects tab you can get information about all open projects. You get a survey of the project pages, and a survey of all components on these pages. When for
instance you click on an page symbol for a project page, the page is displayed on
the screen. — See “The Explorer window: The Projects tab” on page 291.
The SubDrawings tab in the Explorer window
The SubDrawings tab is applied for handling e.g. placing, editing and displaying
sub drawings. For instance you can drag sub drawings into the the active project
page, or create new sub drawings based on copied areas from the active project.
Automation 12.0
Page 36
The Work Area
— Read more about this in “Sub drawings” on page 244.
7. The left toolbar
The left toolbar contains various page and zoom functions, and — at the bottom —
information about the page settings and status. These functions are elaborated in
“Screen / Image Functions” on page 38.
8. The work area
The work area on the screen corresponds to the size of paper you have chosen to
work on.
The size of the paper is specified in Settings => Page setup, as described in
“Page setup” on page 822, or by inserting a drawing header, as described in
“Insert drawing headers/formulas” on page 521.
9. The survey window
The survey window gives you a survey of the entire page. The part of the page that
you are currently viewing on screen at the present (the zoom), is represented by
the black box. — See “The Survey window” on page 41.
10. Page history buttons
By clicking on the Page history buttons, you can jump to the previously active
pages in the project. — See “The Page history buttons” on page 486.
11. The status line
Among others you can see here coordinates, layer titles, guiding texts as well as
various messages. When you let the mouse pointer rest over for instance a button
on the screen, an explanatory text will appear here.
12. Current path numbers
Current path numbers are displayed in two different places: At the location you
specify in your project, as well as on the lower part of the screen. When you zoom
in on a part of a diagram, the current path numbers will still be displayed on the
lower part of the screen. Thus you will always know where you are on the diagram.
— See “Current path numbers / Reference System” on page 367.
13. Page tabs
Click on the page tabs to jump back and forth between the pages. — See “Direct
access to menus and Tabs” on page 43 and “Choosing pages outside the Page
menu” on page 485.
14. Scrollbars
Having zoomed in on an area, you can make the area move by dragging the scrollbars. — See “The Scrollbars” on page 39.
15. Chapter tabs
When you click on a chapter tab, you jump to the first page in the selected chapter.
— See “Chapters” on page 498.
Automation 12.0
Page 37
Screen / Image Functions
SCREEN / IMAGE FUNCTIONS
This chapter has to do with the screen-related functions in the program. All buttons
having this type of function, are located on the left hand side toolbar.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— THE FUNCTIONS ZOOM, SCROLL AND REDRAW .......................................... (P. 38)
— HOME VIEW AND REDRAW ......................................................................... (P. 40)
— SET USER HOME VIEW .............................................................................. (P. 40)
— SHOW EXPANDED DRAWING AREA .............................................................. (P. 41)
— THE EXPLORER WINDOW .......................................................................... (P. 42)
— THE SURVEY WINDOW .............................................................................. (P. 41)
— SNAP ....................................................................................................... (P. 42)
— GRID........................................................................................................ (P. 43)
— THE CROSS HAIRS .................................................................................... (P. 43)
— DIRECT ACCESS TO MENUS AND TABS ....................................................... (P. 43)
— GENERAL PROTECTION ERROR .................................................................. (P. 44)
ALL SHORT-CUT KEYS CAN BE CHANGED
PLEASE NOTE, THAT YOU CAN USE MANY SHORT-CUT KEYS IN THE PROGRAM. YOU CAN SEE THE PREDEFINED SHORT-CUT KEYS IN “SHORT-CUT
KEYS” ON PAGE 769. THERE IT IS ALSO DESCRIBED HOW TO DEFINE YOUR
OWN SHORT-CUT KEYS.
ZOOM, SCROLL, REDRAW
In Automation you can specify which part of the page you wish to see on the
screen.
Zoom
When you want magnify a part of
the page, you can click on the
Zoom button, and then select an
area on the screen using the
mouse. Do this:
1) Click here, and keep the mouse
button pressed down
1) Click and keep the mouse
button pressed down.
2) Drag the mouse over the
area you wish to enlarge,
and let go of the mouse
button.
2) Drag the mouse cursor across the
screen, and release the mouse button
when the desired area is selected
Automation 12.0
Page 38
Screen / Image Functions
When you release the mouse button, the chosen area is now enlarged.
View => Zoom or the short-cut key [z] has a similar effect.
On a three-button mouse, the button in the middle can also be used for zoom.
The Zoom All function
When you choose View => Zoom All, a zoom is made so that all objects in the
work area is displayed — in the closest zoom possible.
If there only are a few objects placed next to each other, the program will zoom in
on these objects.
If there, on the other hand, are placed objects outside the boundaries of the page,
the program will zoom out, so that it becomes possible to select these objects.
Zoom in/out
To zoom in, you can choose View => Zoom in (short-cut [Ctrl+Home]), and to
zoom out you can choose View => Zoom out (short-cut [Ctrl+End]).
— Please also see “Zoom and Scroll for mouse with a wheel” on page 39.
The Scrollbars
When you press down the <Ctrl> key, you can use the arrow
keys to move the zoom — e.g. the short-cut key [Ctrl+RightArrow].
Having zoomed in on an area, you can also apply the scrollbars in the right side and the bottom of the screen. When
you click on a scroll bar and drag it to another location, the
displayed zoom is moved correspondingly.
The use of scrollbars can be activated/deactivated as
described in “Pointer/Screen” on page 815.
Scrollbar
Zoom and Scroll for mouse with a wheel
If you have a mouse with a wheel, the button in the middle — the wheel — can also
be used for zooming. This gives the following options:
PRESS
RESULTS IN
<WHEEL FORWARDS>
THE ZOOM IS MOVED UPWARDS ON THE PAGE
<WHEEL BACKWARDS>
THE ZOOM IS MOVED DOWNWARDS ON THE PAGE
<SHIFT+WHEEL FORWARDS>
THE ZOOM IS MOVED TO THE LEFT
<SHIFT+WHEEL BACKWARDS>
THE ZOOM IS MOVED TO THE RIGHT
<CTRL+WHEEL FORWARDS>
ZOOMS IN WHERE THE CROSS HAIRS IS LOCATED
<CTRL+WHEEL BACKWARDS>
ZOOMS OUT WHERE THE CROSS HAIRS IS LOCATED
Keep page zoom
By choosing Settings => Pointer/Screen, you can decide whether to keep the
zoom when changing back and forth between pages in the project. You specify the
zoom settings by deselecting Keep zoom and Keep page zoom. Read more
about this in “Pointer/Screen” on page 815.
Automation 12.0
Page 39
Screen / Image Functions
View previous zoom
When you select View => Previous zoom, you jump back to the previously applied
zoom on the active page. Because the program memorizes the two last applied
zooms, you can jump back and forth between these by using this function.
As a short-cut for this function, you can use the <Tab> key, and you can also activate the function by pressing the <Ctrl> key while clicking the Zoom button.
All pages memorizes the two most recently applied zooms, until the project is closed. Please note that this enables you to use the <Tab> button to jump directly
from full screen to the most recently applied zoom.
HOME
VIEW AND
REDRAW
When you click the Zoom to page button, the entire page will be shown on the
screen area. Choosing View => Home view gives the same result.
The short-cut keys are [Home] or [z][z].
To refresh the image on screen, click on the Redraw button. Alternatively select
View => Redraw; the short-cut key is [Ctrl+g].
This updates the image on the screen, as well as the survey window.
SET USER HOME
VIEW
When you only want Automation to display a specified section of the page when
you click on the Home view button, do the following:
1) Choose View => Set User Home view.
2) The mouse cursor now changes appearance to a two-way arrow: Click to
specify one corner of the new home view, and click once again to specify the
opposite corner of the home view. (This is done similar to making a zoom —
see “Zoom” on page 38).
The next time you click on the Home view button — or press [Home] — the specified area is displayed on the screen. This is the consequence for all project pages
having the same page size, as the page you set the home view for — for instance
A4 horizontal.
If you wish to create other Home views for other page formats, this is also possible.
Short-cut to creating User Home view
1) Click on the Zoom button.
2) The mouse cursor changes appearance to a two-way arrow: Click to specify
one corner of the new Home View, and press <Ctrl> down and click once
again to specify the opposite corner of the Home view. (See “Zoom” on
page 38).
Display the full page, and not just the User Home view
When you wish to see the full page, and not just the defined Home view, press [zz].
Automation 12.0
Page 40
Screen / Image Functions
Remove Home View settings
When you want the Home view button to display the full page again, you choose
View => Set User Home view again. You then get the following message:
Click Remove to make the Home view button display the full page again, or click
New to create a new Home view.
EXPANDED
DRAWING AREA
When you select View => Clean screen, the active project page will fill all of the
program window. This makes the program toolbars and the Explorer window invisible.
You return to normal viewing by selecting View => Clean screen again.
The default short-cut key for the function is <Ctrl+0>.
THE SURVEY
WINDOW
The survey window is an independent window
which can be docked inside the Explorer window,
or be placed anywhere on the screen. — For
further details about the location of the Survey
window, please refer to “Docking Windows and
Toolbars” on page 24.
Moving the displayed area
A black box within the window shows which section of the drawing (which zoom) is
presently being displayed on the full screen. Click on the black box and drag it until
it covers the part of the drawing you want to see on screen. When the mouse pointer is pointing on the black box, you will be noticed that you are now able to move
the box.
Zooming in the Survey window
You can zoom in and out using the survey window. By placing the mouse pointer
on the boundary of the black box, it will change into a two-way arrow. You can now
resize the zoom by dragging the boundary.
Objects displayed in the Survey window
Objects (see “On Drawing objects” on page 47) located on the page, will also be
displayed in the survey window. This gives you the option to keep the survey of the
page while working in a zoom. You can select a new zoom using the placed objects
as guides. Texts will not be displayed in the Survey window.
Automation 12.0
Page 41
Screen / Image Functions
The survey window is updated when you click Redraw or display a new project
page.
Placing the Survey window
You can move the survey window by clicking on the windows menu bar, keeping
the mouse button pressed down, and then drag the window to a new preferred
location. The window can be enlarged or reduced by dragging its corners.
When you close down the program, the size and position of the window is memorised.
The Survey window can be activated/deactivated by choosing View => Survey
window. Short-cut key [F12].
Docking the Survey window in the Explorer window
See how to dock the Survey window inside the Explorer window in “Docking the
Survey window” on page 25.
THE EXPLORER
WINDOW
In the left side of the screen you find the Explorer window. From here you can for
instance choose what to display on the screen, change page data and project data,
change symbol and cable component data, find symbols and close projects.
— Read more about this in “The Explorer window: The Projects tab” on page 291.
SNAP
When you place an object on a drawing, it is important that you can position it
exactly where you want it. To support this, you can specify that objects only may be
located in fixed spots, located at intervals of for instance 2.50mm. — If you then
want to place a symbol, you will only be allowed to move it in steps of 2.50mm on
the screen, which enables you to place the symbols accurately.
If the distance between the points where you can place the symbols is 2.50mm,
you say that the snap is 2.50mm.
By clicking the Snap button in the left toolbar, you can toggle between normal snap
(for instance 2.50mm) and fine snap (for instance 0.50mm).
If you are working in fine snap, the lower part of the left toolbar will display a red
background under the size of the snap.
Choose Settings => Page settings to change the snap settings — or click on “2.5”
in the lower part of the left toolbar.
If you have an object on the cross hairs that you want to place, you can place it
using fine snap by pressing down <Shift>. After you place the object, the program
automatically change back to normal snap.
Please note that 2.50mm is standard normal snap size for electro-technical drawings.
Automation 12.0
Page 42
Screen / Image Functions
GRID
The dots you see placed on the entire page in a drawing, is called the grid of the
drawing. You can change the distance between the dots by choosing Settings =>
Page settings.
Choosing Settings => Pointer/Screen, you can disable the function completely, or
choose to use squares instead of dots. See “Pointer/Screen” on page 815.
The size of the grid — in millimetres — only relates to what you see on screen, and
not to the real size of the drawing. Thus changing the scale of the page from 1:1 to
1:50, will not make the grid change on the screen.
THE
CROSS HAIRS
While you are working on a project drawing, the location of the cursor is indicated
by a crossing vertical and horizontal line. This is called the cross hairs.
In Settings => Pointer/Screen you can see the
cross hairs is set to be displayed right angled.
When you draw Straight lines (see “Straight
lines” on page 66), a line will be displayed starting from where you clicked last, pointing towards the cross hairs.
When you select Cross hairs displayed right angled, you will see the line that
would be drawn if you clicked in this very moment. This line will not always be
shown ending up in the cross hairs — due to the snap applied.
If the function is not selected, the line will always be shown from the place you
clicked last and directly to the cross hairs. But this line is not necessarily the exact
line that would be drawn if you clicked.
When Cross hairs figure with snap is selected, the figure (for instance a symbol)
you have in the cross hairs will be shown in the nearest snap — exactly where it
will be located when you click.
DIRECT
ACCESS TO MENUS AND
TABS
In the lower left-hand corner of the screen, you will se various information about fx.
the snap settings and the title of the present layer. Clicking on these fields brings
you directly into the menus, where these settings can be altered.
Snap
Grid
Page type
Page size
Page status
Scale
Coordinates Page tabs Layer name
Automation 12.0
Page 43
Screen / Image Functions
When you let the mouse cursor rest an instance over one of the fields, an
explanatory text is displayed — as for Snap on the figure above.
Page status
In the field Page status the following status options exists:
S:
The page has not been changed since last save.
S:+
The page has been changed since last save.
S:R+ The page has been changed since last revision start/stop, and has
been changed since last save.
Page tabs
By clicking on the page tabs, you jump back and forth between the project
pages. You can also use the short cut keys [PageUp] and [PageDown] to
jump between the project pages.
Chapter tabs
When you click on a chapter tab in the right-hand side of the screen, the
first page in the displayed chapter is displayed.
GENERAL
PROTECTION ERROR
If a General protection error occur, the line at the bottom of the screen starts flashing on a red background, giving a warning that the project should be saved
under a new name, and that the program should be restarted.
At the same time this window is displayed:
Here you can tell us what happened just before the error occured, which we would
very much like to know, so taht we can correct it as soon as possible.
When you want to save the project, you automatically enter the dialog box Save
as, to prevent that you save what might be a project containing errors, so that this
project replace, the last saved version of the project. However, if you do let this project replace the last saved version of the project, Automation automatically creates a backup file (extension .~pr), so that the original version of the project also
can be opened succeedingly.
Automation 12.0
Page 44
Basic Drawing facilities
This section describes the basic drawing facilities
in PC|SCHEMATIC Automation. Following topics
are described:
- Working with drawing objects ......................... (p. 47)
- Transferring data between objects................. (p. 55)
- Align, Space and Trim functions ...................... (p. 59)
- Lines..................................................................... (p. 65)
- Arcs/Circles......................................................... (p. 97)
- Texts..................................................................... (p. 99)
- Symbols............................................................. (p. 133)
- Functions on Component level .....................(p. 220)
- Areas..................................................................(p. 232)
- Sub drawings....................................................(p. 244)
- Rename symbols.............................................(p. 278)
- Insert image ......................................................(p. 286)
Read survey article
Please read the survey article about drawing
functions at www.pcschematic.com.
On Drawing objects
ON DRAWING OBJECTS
Any object you place on a drawing has got to be one of four different types of drawing objects: It is either a symbol, a text, a line or a circle.
Also there is the Area-command, which makes it possible to work independently of
object types.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— THE BASIC WORKING MODES OF THE PROGRAM .......................................... (P. 48)
— SELECTING OBJECTS ................................................................................. (P. 49)
— AUTO COMMAND CHANGE .......................................................................... (P. 51)
— HOW TO WORK WITH SELECTED OBJECTS................................................... (P. 51)
— SHOW OBJECT BELOW CURSOR ................................................................. (P. 53)
— THE UNDO FUNCTION ................................................................................ (P. 54)
— TRANSFERRING PROPERTIES BETWEEN OBJECTS ....................................... (P. 56)
— ALIGN, TRIM AND SPACE ........................................................................... (P. 59)
— INVISIBLE OBJECTS .................................................................................... (P. 62)
In the Menu bar and the Program toolbar you have different options at hand,
depending on which type of objects you have chosen to work with.
The buttons for command change
The buttons, you have to click on to select the various objects, look like this:
Symbols [s]
Texts [t]
Lines [l]
Circles [c]
Areas [a]
WHEN YOU CLICK ONE OF THESE BUTTONS YOUR OPTIONS CHANGE:
— THE PROGRAM TOOLBAR CHANGES
— THE OPTIONS IN THE PROGRAM MENUS CHANGES
— YOU ARE ONLY ALLOWED TO WORK WITH OBJECTS OF THE CHOSEN
TYPE
— Please see “Auto command change” on page 51 also.
Automation 12.0
Page 47
On Drawing objects
WORKING
WITH THE PROGRAM
In Automation there are two different modes to work in.
Which mode you work in is determined by the Draw button (the Pencil).
You either:
a) Draw/place new objects (activated/highlighted Pencil), or you work on
b) Already placed objects (not activated Pencil)
New objects
When you draw/place new objects, you do so like this:
1) Select the type of objects you wish to work with
2) Activate the Pencil
3) Draw / place the objects
Thus if you want to draw a line, you first click on the Lines button (1), then click on
the Pencil (2), and draw the line (3).
Please note that in several occasions the program activates the Pencil by itself. For
instance this happens when you have typed in a text in the text field, or when you
have picked a symbol in order to place it.
Already placed objects
If you, on the other hand, have to work with objects that have already been placed,
the procedure is like this:
1) Select the type of objects you wish to work with — see “Auto command
change” on page 51 also
2) Deactivate the pencil (Press <Esc>)
3) Select the object(s) you want to deal with
4) State what you want to do with the objects
If for instance you want to copy a symbol, you first click the Symbols button (1) and
deactivate the pencil pressing <Esc> (2). Then select the symbol by clicking on it
(3), and specify that you wish to copy the symbol by clicking Copy (4).
The copied symbol can now be placed.
Displaying relative coordinates
When moving or copying objects, the object coordinates are displayed in the status
line at the bottom of the screen.
Automation 12.0
Page 48
On Drawing objects
SELECTING
OBJECTS
When you wish to do something with an existing object, you first have to select the
object. This takes place in the following way:
Click on the button which corresponds to the type of the object — for instance the
Texts or the Symbols button. Make sure that the Pencil button is not selected; click
on it or use <Esc>. Click on the object you wish to select.
The selection will be indicated as a colored field surrounding each chosen object
individually.
Below you can see how deselected as well as selected objects appear on screen:
Deselected
Selected
When working with symbols, please note that a selection can include the entire
symbol, or just one of its connection points.
If you select a text, the text toolbar (see “Dictionary” on page 850) will tell you
which type of text you have chosen.
Remarks about selecting lines
A line is constructed of segments, depending on how many breaks it contains. First
time you click on a line, all segments in the line will be selected. If you click at the
line once more, only the segment you click on gets selected.
Electrical lines will be selected up to the next electrical point.
Selection by right-clicking
By right-clicking on an object (of the chosen object type), you will select the object
and at the same time a short-cut menu will appear. In this menu you can e.g.
choose Move, Copy or Delete. — Please refer to “Short-cut menus and Rightclicking” on page 23 for further details.
Selecting more objects of the same kind in one window
You can select more than one object of the same type at the same time. If for
instance you want to select all texts in an area, click on the Texts button and select
the desired area with the mouse. Do this by clicking in one corner of the area, and
then, still pressing down the mouse button, drag the mouse to the opposite corner
of the area. Thus a rectangle will be drawn with dashed lines, having one corner
where you first clicked and the opposite corner where the mouse pointer is located
Automation 12.0
Page 49
On Drawing objects
now. When all the desired objects are inside the rectangle, you let go of the mouse
button. The texts in the area have now been selected.
1) Click here
3) Place the cursor here and let go
2) Press down mouse button and drag
If you wish to deselect one or more objects inside the window, press down the
<Ctrl> key and click on the object(s). If you also wish to select objects outside the
area, also press down the <Ctrl> key, and click on these objects.
Selecting more objects of the same kind using the mouse
Select the kind of objects you want to work with; for instance Symbols.
Press the <Ctrl> key while clicking on the desired objects. If you have selected a
symbol you do not want after all, then click on the symbol again — still pressing the
<Ctrl> key.
Selecting different types of objects in an area
Click on the Area button. Mark up a window as described in “Selecting more
objects of the same kind in one window” on page 49. Hereby all object types inside
the window are selected. If you wish to deselect one of the selected objects, press
the <Ctrl> key and click on the object. If you also wish to select objects outside the
area, also press down the <Ctrl> key, and click on these objects. — Read more
about areas in “Areas” on page 232.
Selecting on different Layers and in different elevations
The ways of selecting objects described above, all assumes that you are working
in the same layer as the objects you wish to select. — Read more about selecting
and layers in “Selecting objects on different layers” on page 468, and read more
about layers in general in “Layers, Elevation and Scaling” on page 465.
Selecting everything on a page
You can select everything on a page (including different layers) by selecting Edit
=> Select all => All on page. Short-cut [Ctrl+a]. If the Area button is selected all
objects on the page will be selected. If Symbols are selected, all symbols on the
page will be selected — and so on.
Automation 12.0
Page 50
On Drawing objects
AUTO
COMMAND CHANGE
If you want Automation to change command for you automatically, choose Functions => Auto command change.
When this function is activated, Automation automatically changes between Symbols, Lines, Texts and Circles when you want to select, move or delete objects.
The program automatically changes to the correct command when the object is
selected.
The function can be deactivated by choosing Functions => Auto command
change again.
The function can also be activated/deactivated by clicking the Auto command
change button, placed to the left of the Lines button.
— Please see “Show object below cursor” on page 53 also.
WORKING
WITH SELECTED OBJECTS
When you want to copy, move, delete or rotate objects, you have to:
1) Choose the type of objects you are interested in
2) Select the objects you want to deal with
3) Copy / move / delete / rotate the objects
Step one and two are dealt with in “Selecting objects” on page 49, and step three
will be elaborated in the sections to follow.
To see how to place / draw new objects, you have to read the following sections:
“Lines” on page 65, “Arcs/Circles” on page 97, “Texts” on page 99 and “Symbols”
on page 133.
Where no further remarks are added, the following functions covers working with
Symbols, Texts, Lines, Circles and Areas.
Moving selected objects
When you want to move selected objects, you have three options at hand:
a) Click the Move button. You thereby get the selected objects in the cross
hairs, and just have to click where you want them placed.
b) Use click and draw: Click on the selected object(s), keep the mouse button
pressed down, and drag them across the screen. Let go of the mouse button
when you can see the objects where you want them located. Read more
about drag and drop in “The mouse” on page 23.
c) Right-click inside the window. A menu emerge, and you choose Move. You
get the selected object(s) in the cross hairs, and can move them across the
screen. Click when the objects are where you want them located.
Remarks about moving Symbols
When you have to move a symbol that is connected to lines, you can do this in two
different ways:
Automation 12.0
Page 51
On Drawing objects
a) The symbol remain connected to the lines: Click on the symbol, and drag it to
the place you want it located.
b) The lines are parked and the symbol can be moved freely: Press down the
<Ctrl> key while clicking on the symbol, and drag it to where you want it placed.
You can also move the symbol freely by clicking on the symbol, and then press
down <Ctrl> while clicking Move.
Furthermore, if you place a two-poled symbol on top of a conducting line, the symbol will automatically be connected to the line.
Copying selected objects
When you want to copy one or more selected objects, you have got two options:
a) Click the Copy button. You now get a copy of the selected object(s) in the
cross hairs, and can place the objects as many times as you want by clicking.
b) Right-click on one of the selected objects. A menu emerge, and you choose
Copy. You now likewise get a copy of the objects in the cross hairs, and can
place the objects as many times as you want by clicking.
Deleting selected objects
If you want to delete one or more selected objects, you have also got two options:
a) Click the Delete button or press <Del>. Hereby the objects are removed form
the screen.
b) Right-click on one of the selected objects. Choose Delete in the emerging
menu. The objects are removed from the screen.
Please remember that you can undo your actions clicking the Undo button.
If parts of the deleted objects remain on screen, click the Redraw button to get the
page refreshed.
Remarks when deleting a symbol
If you delete a symbol having conducting lines connected to it, the lines will be parked.
Rotating a selected object
This function works for Texts, Symbols and Arcs, but not for lines. The function
also works for Areas, and lines within the selected area will also be rotated.
All objects are rotated counter-clockwise.
There are four ways of rotating objects:
a) Press the [spacebar]. The object will be rotated 90 counter-clockwise.
b) Right-click on the object and choose Rotate.
Automation 12.0
Page 52
On Drawing objects
c) Click on the Rotate button in the toolbar.
d) Click in the field V:, type in the rotation angle and press <Enter>. The angle
can have an accuracy of 1/10 degree. You can also click the down-arrow in
the field, select an angle, and press <Enter>.
Remarks about rotating symbols
A symbol connected to conducting lines in both ends, will rotate 180 degrees, and
the connection to the lines will be exchanged. Press down <Ctrl> when you click
Rotate if you want the symbol to rotate only 90 degrees, and the lines will keep
their original connections to the connection points.
Rotating areas
You can also rotate an entire area in one operation. To this, you must first have the
area in the cross hairs in connection with either moving or copying, as described in
“Rotating areas” on page 241.
SHOW
OBJECT BELOW CURSOR
The function View => Show object below cursor temporarily frames the objects
below the cursor, as the cursor is moved across the project page.
For Symbols
For Lines
For lines it is also specified where you would connect to the line, if you clicked on it
at the given moment.
— Please see “Auto command change” on page 51 also.
Automation 12.0
Page 53
On Drawing objects
UNDO
An important function to know when working
with objects, is the Undo function.
Click here, and the Undo
list is displayed
When you click the Undo button once (shortcut key [z]), you undo the last action the program has performed.
If you let the mouse cursor rest above the
Undo button, the operation that you can
undo, is displayed as a hint.
Undoing multiple actions/levels
When you click the down-button next to the
Undo button, a list of the most recently performed actions are displayed. Here you can
specify how many actions you wish to undo.
Place the cursor here,
and the next points in the
list are displayed
When for instance you click Connection
data -X3:2 in the figure to the right, all of the
latest actions are undone, including when the connection data for
-X3:2 was changed.
See how many actions you undo
To begin with, the list only displays the five latest actions. When you place the cursor above the last point in the list, five more actions are displayed. This continues
until you see all of the actions that can be undone.
The last point in the list also displays how many actions you have selected in the
list at any moment.
Specifying the number of undo levels
Under Settings => System you can specify how many actions/levels it shall be
possible to undo at your system. — See “Undo levels” on page 829.
Some functions can not be undone
Please note that there are functions which you can not undo, such as using the
automatic wire numbering or placing a drawing header on a page. In the first case
you can save the project before assigning the wire numbers, and in the last case
you have to take action yourself to remove the drawing header.
Automation 12.0
Page 54
On Drawing objects
TRANSFERRING DATA / PROPERTIES
BETWEEN
OBJECTS
You can transfer two types of information between objects of the same type in
Automation:
- Component Data, which contains information about the physical components
attached to the objects, and
- Object properties, which only have to do with the appearance of the objects
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— HOW TO TRANSFER COMPONENT DATA BETWEEN OBJECTS ........................(P. 55)
— HOW TO TRANSFER OBJECT PROPERTIES BETWEEN OBJECTS.....................(P. 56)
— TRANSFERRING OBJECT PROPERTIES TO MORE THAN ONE OBJECT ..............(P. 56)
Transferring Component Data for Symbols or Lines
It is only possible to transfer component data between symbols or lines.
Transfer component data for Symbols
When you transfer component data from one symbol to another, start by clicking
the Symbols button, and deactivate the Pencil (Press <Esc>).
COPYING THE COMPONENT DATA
Right-click on the symbol you want to transfer component data from, and choose
Component data. — Or click on the symbol and then click on the Object data button.
In the upper left hand corner of the Component data dialog box you click the Copy component data button.
Leave the menu by pressing <Esc>.
TRANSFERRING COMPONENT DATA TO A SYMBOL
Right-click on the symbol you want to transfer the component data to, and click the
Paste component data button.
You have now transferred component data from one symbol to another.
Correct the symbol name if you want to, and click OK.
TRANSFERRING COMPONENT DATA TO MORE THAN ONE SYMBOL
If you want to transfer the copied component data to more than one symbol, you
can for instance drag a window around the relevant symbols, as described in
“Selecting more objects of the same kind in one window” on page 49.
Then right-click inside the selected area, and choose Component data. Insert the
copied component data by choosing Edit => Paste.
Please note, that if for instance Type and Article data are dimmed when you enter
the dialog box, this tells you that the selected symbols do not have identical contents in these fields.
Automation 12.0
Page 55
On Drawing objects
Transfer article data for Lines
If you want to transfer line article data from one line to another, the procedure is the
same as described in “Transfer component data for Symbols” on page 55. The only
difference is that you have to activate the Lines button instead of the Symbols button, and then choose Line article data.
Transferring Object properties between Objects
To all objects there are attached information about the attributes of the object, the
so-called object properties. These attributes are for instance called line properties
or text properties.
Below you can see which type of information you can transfer between the various
types of objects:
OBJECT
INFORMATION THAT CAN BE TRANSFERRED
PROPERTIES
LINE PROPERTIES
THE TYPE, WIDTH, LINE DISTANCE AND COLOR, AS WELL AS WHETHER
THE LINE IS A CONDUCTING LINE AND WHETHER IT IS A JUMPER LINK
— SEE E.G. “LINES” ON PAGE 65. — BUT NOT THE COURSE OF THE
SLANTED OR CURVED
LINE.
DURING THE CREATION OF A SYMBOL, FOLLOW CONNECTED IS ALSO
TRANSFERRED. SEE “CREATING SYMBOLS” ON PAGE 676.
LINE, OR IF IT IS DRAWN AS FOR INSTANCE A
TEXT PROPERTIES
ALL INFORMATION IN THE DIALOG BOX TEXT PROPERTIES (P. 118).
THE TEXT ITSELF, AND THE ANGLE IT MIGHT BE ROTATED WITH, IS NOT
TRANSFERRED.
CIRCLE/ARC PRO-
ALL INFORMATION IN THE CIRCLES TOOLBAR (P. 97).
PERTIES
SYMBOL PROPER-
ONLY THE SCALE OF THE SYMBOL.
TIES
Changing object properties on existing object
Select an object. In the toolbar (or in the dialog box Text properties for texts) you
make the desired changes. Click on the Transfer properties button.
The changes have now been transferred to the chosen object.
Transfer object properties from one object to another
Select the object that carries the desired object properties, and click on the Copy
properties button — or press down <Shift> while clicking on the object.
Select the object you want to transfer the properties to, and click on Transfer properties.
TRANSFER
OBJECT PROPERTIES TO MORE THAN ONE OBJECT
It is possible to transfer object properties to several objects in a single operation.
For instance you can give a number of texts the same height and/or color.
In this example you can se how this is done by placing the two texts Text1 and
Text2 — each carrying different text properties — and then give both texts the
same height without changing the other attributes of the texts.
Automation 12.0
Page 56
On Drawing objects
Place Text1
Click on Texts, click in the text
field in the texts toolbar, type in
Text1, and click on the Text properties button.
Set Height to 2.5, Width to
AUTO, Alignment to left-down
and Color to Black.
Click on OK and place the text
somewhere on the page.
Place Text2
Then click in the text field in the
texts toolbar once more, but type
in Text2 this time. Click on Text
properties, and set Height to
5.0, Width to AUTO, Alignment
to centre-centre and Color to
Red.
Click OK, and place the text on
the page.
Transfer text properties
Select both of the texts, click on the
Copy properties button and then
on Text properties.
In the dialog box you now see
which text properties the selected
texts have in common — in this
case both has the Width AUTO.
Now set Height to 8.0 and click
OK.
As you can see, the texts now have
the same height, but their other
attributes have not been changed.
Automation 12.0
Page 57
On Drawing objects
Text1 is still black and aligned left-down, while Text2 still is aligned centre-centre
and red.
You can use the same procedure for lines and circles.
Automation 12.0
Page 58
On Drawing objects
ALIGNING
AND
SPACING
FUNCTIONS
In Automation you also have some functions for trimming and spacing objects.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— THE ALIGN FUNCTION ................................................................................(P. 59)
— THE SPACE FUNCTION............................................................................... (P. 60)
The Align function
As you will see, it is possible to align objects in Automation.
In the following example symbols will be used, but you can do exactly the same
using texts or circles.
These three symbols are to be aligned, at the same height as the symbol to the
left:
Make sure that the Symbols button is activated, then click on the right most symbol. Now press down <Ctrl> while clicking on the symbol in the middle. (Alternatively, you could drag a window around the two symbols). These two symbols have
now been selected:
Select Edit => Align, or right-click inside the window and choose Align.
A rubber band starting in the symbol in the middle and ending in the cross hairs is
now displayed. (See the guiding text in the bottom right-hand corner of the screen).
Automation 12.0
Page 59
On Drawing objects
Click on the symbol to the left, and the two selected symbols are aligned with the
symbol.
If the symbols had been closer to be arranged on a vertical line, they would have
been placed on a vertical line instead.
Please note that the determining symbol may also be one of the selected symbols.
The Space function
There exists a similar function, placing symbols with fixed intervals. Unlike Align
you relocate all the symbols when you use the Space command.
In the following example symbols are used once again, but texts or circles could be
used as well.
Activate the Symbols
button, and place
some symbols as
shown on the figure.
Then mark up a window surrounding the
symbols, and choose
Edit => Space — or
right-click and choose
Space.
Please note the guiding text in the bottom
right-hand corner of
the screen.
A rubber band starting in the symbol in
the middle and ending
in the cross hairs is
now displayed.
Click where you want
the first of the symbols to
be located.
A dialog box appear on
screen, and you fill it out as
shown.
Click OK.
Automation 12.0
Page 60
On Drawing objects
The symbols are now
placed aligned, with an
interval of 20mm between them, sorted by
name.
If you set the interval to
be zero for X and Y, you
will be asked to point
out where the first and last symbols have to be located.
When there is not enough space to place the symbols, you will be asked to point
out a new starting point, from where the remaining symbols can be placed.
Sort by name
When you select Sort by name — only possible for symbols — the symbols are
placed sorted by their names. If you have marked up the window around the symbols from left to right, the symbols will correspondingly be placed from left to right.
The first sorting criterion is the symbol name, then the Component Group number.
If these are still identical, the are sorted according to the first connection name. —
Read more about component grouping in “Component Grouping” on page 546.
Automation 12.0
Page 61
On Drawing objects
MAKING
OBJECTS INVISIBLE
All drawing objects — Symbols, Lines, Texts and Circles/Arcs — can be made
invisible. This means that the objects will not be displayed on print, but will be displayed as dimmed, when the project pages are displayed on the screen.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— MAKING SYMBOLS INVISIBLE .......................................................................(P. 62)
— MAKING LINES INVISIBLE ............................................................................(P. 63)
— MAKING TEXTS INVISIBLE ...........................................................................(P. 63)
— MAKING CIRCLES/ARCS INVISIBLE ..............................................................(P. 63)
— MAKING AREAS INVISIBLE ..........................................................................(P. 63)
— SUB DRAWINGS AND INVISIBLE OBJECTS .....................................................(P. 64)
Making symbols invisible
You can make symbols invisible like this:
a) Via the Component data dialog box: Click on the Symbols button, doubleclick on the symbol, which opens the dialog box Component data, where
you remove the check mark in front of Visible, and click OK.
Or:
b) By right-clicking: Click on the Symbols button, right-click on the symbol, and
choose Invisible.
If you right-click after having selected an area in which both visible and invisible
symbols exists, you will both be able to choose Visible and Invisible. You can then
choose whether all symbols in the area shall be visible or invisible:
For symbols with reference crosses, the reference crosses also becomes invisible.
— Please read “Visible” on page 156 also.
Automation 12.0
Page 62
On Drawing objects
Making lines invisible
Choose Lines, select an area
containing the lines you wish
to make invisible.
Then do the following:
a) Via the dialog box Line
article data: Right-click
and choose Component data.
In the dialog box Line
article data: Remove
the Visible check mark,
and click OK.
Or:
Right-click and choose
Component data
b) Directly from the right-click menu: Right-click in the area, and click on Invisible.
The lines are made visible again by right-clicking and then choosing Visible, or by
entering the Line article data dialog box, and setting a check mark in front of Visible.
Making texts invisible
You can make texts invisible like this:
a) Via the Text properties dialog box: Click the Texts button, click on the text,
click on the Text properties button, remove the check mark in front of Visible text, and click OK. — See “Visible text” on page 121.
Or:
b) By right-clicking: Click the Texts button, right-click on the text and choose
Invisible.
Invisible texts are not displayed on screen, and can be selected by pressing the
<Alt> button while clicking where the text would have been, if it was visible.
To make the text visible again, you must then click on the Text properties button,
select Visible text, and click OK.
Making circles/arcs invisible
Choose Circles, right-click on the circle reference point, and choose Invisible.
To make the text visible again, right-click on the
circle reference point again, and choose Visible.
Making areas invisible
1) Click on the Area button and select the
area — see “Areas” on page 232.
Automation 12.0
Page 63
On Drawing objects
2) Right-click in the area and choose Invisible.
If you right-click after having selected an area in which both visible and invisible
objects exists, you will both be able to choose Visible and Invisible. Hereby you
choose whether to make all objects in the area either visible or invisible. — See the
image below “Making symbols invisible” on page 62.
Sub drawings and Invisible objects
When inserting sub drawings, the functions described above makes it easy to subsequently make parts of the sub drawings invisible.
— See “Sub drawings” on page 244.
Automation 12.0
Page 64
Lines
LINES
When you work with lines, you always start by clicking the Lines button — or by
using the short-cut key [l]. — See “Auto command change” on page 51 also. If you
want to draw lines, you then click the Pencil, or right-click on the drawing area and
choose Draw Line.
The general short-cut key for the Pencil is the [Ins] key, but you can also use the [l]
key when you are working with Lines. Pressing the [Ins] or the [l] key activates/
deactivates the Pencil.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— THE TWO TYPES OF LINES IN Automation ..............................................(P. 66)
— THE FUNCTIONS IN THE LINES TOOLBAR .....................................................(P. 66)
— DISCONNECTING DRAWN LINES ..................................................................(P. 70)
— LINES IN THE PICKMENU ............................................................................(P. 71)
— CONDUCTING (ELECTRICAL) LINES .............................................................(P. 71)
— ARTICLE DATA ON LINES ............................................................................(P. 72)
— AUTOMATIC INSERTION OF ELECTRICAL POTENTIALS ...................................(P. 74)
— JUMPER LINKS...........................................................................................(P. 79)
— AUTOMATIC LINE DRAWING / ROUTER .........................................................(P. 81)
— EXTENDED LINES ......................................................................................(P. 82)
— FOLLOW CONNECTED LINES .......................................................................(P. 82)
— THE TRIM LINE FUNCTION ..........................................................................(P. 84)
— DRAWING BY MEASURES ............................................................................(P. 85)
— MEASUREMENT OBJECTS ...........................................................................(P. 87)
— MOUNTING CORRECT DRAWING ..................................................................(P. 92)
— See how to move, copy and delete lines in “Working with selected objects” on
page 51, and see how to transfer data between lines in “Transferring Data / Properties between Objects” on page 55.
AUTOMATIC LINE DRAWING
YOU CAN ALSO USE THE AUTOMATIC LINE DRAWING FUNCTION (ROUTER) IN
Automation. THIS FUNCTION CAN BE ACTIVATED WHEN YOU ARE WORKING
WITH LINES AND SYMBOLS.
— SEE “AUTOMATIC LINE DRAWING / ROUTER” ON PAGE 81.
AUTOMATIC INSERTION OF ELECTRICAL POTENTIALS
Automation CAN INSERT ELECTRICAL POTENTIALS AT THE UPPER AND
LOWER PART OF DIAGRAM PAGES AUTOMATICALLY. — SEE “AUTOMATIC
INSERTION OF ELECTRICAL POTENTIALS” ON PAGE 74.
Automation 12.0
Page 65
Lines
THE
TWO TYPES OF LINES IN Automation
You can draw two different types of lines in Automation:
a) Conducting (electrical) lines
b) Non conducting / free lines
If Conducting lines is active, the line can only be used as an electric connection.
If not active, the line will be a general purpose (non conducting) line that can be
used anywhere within the project.
When you click the Lines button, Conducting lines will be activated automatically.
Conducting lines are described in further detail in “Conducting (electrical) lines” on
page 71.
JUMPER LINKS
IT IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO DRAW JUMPER LINKS, AS DESCRIBED IN “JUMPER
LINKS” ON PAGE 79.
THE LINES
TOOLBAR
The toolbar for lines looks like this:
In the following you can see the functions of the buttons in the toolbar. — Please
note that you can also place lines in the pickmenu, as described in “Lines in the
Pickmenu” on page 71.
Straight lines
When you are drawing Straight lines, the lines are automatically drawn either
right-angled or diagonally, then see “Pointer/Screen” on page 815).
Deactivate the Conducting lines button (click on the leftmost button if it is highlighted), and activate the Straight
lines button. Click where you want your line to start.
Then click once for each time you want your line to change
direction, and double click to stop drawing the line — or click
once and press <Esc> to stop drawing.
If the Pencil is deactivated (press <Esc>), you can change the course of the line by
clicking and dragging in its terminal points, or where the line breaks.
When you try to move a line by dragging the line from a connection point, an extra
line point is inserted on the line.
If you want to insert an extra line point, you can right-click on the line, and choose
Insert Line Point.
Automation 12.0
Page 66
Lines
Slanted lines
When you draw Slanted lines, you determine the angles of the lines yourself.
Click the Slanted lines button, and draw a line like the
one you see here.
The line will become as you draw it, depending on the
snap you are working in. — Read more about snap in
“Snap” on page 42.
If the Pencil is deactivated (press <Esc>), you can
change the course of the line by clicking and dragging in
its terminal points, or where it changes its direction.
Breaks on the line is indicated as for straight lines.
Angled lines
Drawing Angled lines you only
have to point out where the line
starts and ends. The program then
creates an angled line automatically. To let the line bend in the
opposite direction, press the
[spacebar].
Click here
... and here
These are applied automatically in
connection with mounting correct
drawing. Please refer to “Mounting
correct drawing” on page 92 for
further details.
Curved lines
Click the Curved lines button.
Using this command enables you to draw curves. Click where you want the turnings of the curve. Note the marks (+) that appear on the curve when you finish
drawing it.
If the Pencil is deactivated (press <Esc>), you can change the
curve by clicking and dragging in its marks (+).
Curved lines can only be drawn using solid lines.
Round lines
Click the Round lines button.
This command enables you to create coherent round lines.
These can be used for corrections or for “comics bobbles.”
Round lines are half circles, drawn counter-clockwise. Round
lines can only be drawn using solid lines.
As for curved lines, you can change the round lines by clicking and dragging in the marks (+).
Automation 12.0
Page 67
Lines
Rectangles
Click the Rectangle button.
Thus you draw a rectangle: Click where you want one of the corners to be located,
drag the mouse, and when the rectangle is as desired, click again. You have now
drawn a rectangle.
Filled areas
If you activate the Filled areas button before you start drawing, you can fill out
colored areas in rectangles, circles and ovals as you draw lines. If Filled areas can
not be selected, the button will be dimmed.
Line type: T
Click in the field specifying line types and select the type you wish to use for drawing.
These line types can be used
as conducting lines
These line types can not be
used as conducting lines
— Please note that the lower of the line types to the left is yellow/green, for PE
connections.
Automation 12.0
Page 68
Lines
Line width: B
Here you determine the width of the pen used to draw the
line. If the line type is hatched or similar, the line width is the
width of the two borders of the line. (See the figure).
Line distance
Line distance: A
For line types that are drawn with two full drawn lines (as a
hatched line), you must specify the distance between these
two lines. This is called the line distance, and it is measured
from the centre of the one line to the centre of the other (See
the figure).
Line color: F
When determining the color of the line, you can choose fourteen different colors. The color NP (Non Printable) will be
shown on the screen, but will not be printed.
Line width
Extend line
See how to use the Extend line button in “Extended lines” on page 82.
Conducting lines
See how to use the Conducting lines button in “The two types of lines in Automation” on page 66.
Jumper links
See how to work with Jumper links in “Jumper links” on page 79.
Follow connected
When you are working in the Edit symbol mode, the button Follow connected also
appears in the toolbar for Lines. Read more about this in “Follow connected lines”
on page 82.
Insert potential
See how to use the Insert potential button for automatic insertion of electrical
potentials in “Automatic insertion of electrical potentials” on page 74.
Automation 12.0
Page 69
Lines
DISCONNECTING
DRAWN LINES
You can disconnect a drawn line, and subsequently connect the end point of the
line elsewhere in the diagram page. This can be done:
- For lines connected to symbols
- For lines connected to other lines
To move the end point for a drawn line, do this:
1) Press the <Ctrl> key while clicking on the line close to the end point. (Do not
click directly on the end point, because this makes it unclear which of the
lines meeting in the point, that you wish move).
2) Drag the end point to its new position.
3) Release the mouse button. The end point of the line is now moved.
1
2
3
Automation 12.0
Page 70
Lines
LINES
IN THE
PICKMENU
To get quick access to drawing lines with predefined properties, you can place lines
with the desired properties in the pickmenu at the upper part of the screen.
Symbols/drawing objects displayed in all pickmenus
Click on a line, and
place it in the diagram
Select different menus
in the pickmenu
When you click on one of the lines in the pickmenu, the program automatically
changes to working with Lines and the Pencil button is activated. You can then
draw lines with the selected properties. — Read more about line properties in
“Transferring Data / Properties between Objects” on page 55.
To insert a line type in the pickmenu, right-click on an empty cell in the pickmenu,
and select Place Line. The currently applied line type is hereby inserted in the
selected cell in the pickmenu.
If the pickmenu is not displayed on the screen, you can activate the pickmenu by
selecting Settings => Pointer/Screen and click on Pickmenu.
The pickmenu can also contain symbols, texts and arcs. — Read more about the
pickmenu in “Fetching symbols from the Pickmenu” on page 136 and “Adapting the
Pickmenu” on page 173.
CONDUCTING (ELECTRICAL)
LINES
A conducting line is an electrical line. It can start and end in electrical points only.
An electrical point can be another conducting line, a connection point on a symbol
or a signal.
To specify that a line has to be conducting, you must activate the Conducting
lines button.
If you try to start or end a conducting line without specifying
a electrical connection, you
will be asked about a signal
name or whether the line
should be parked.
A signal symbol with a signal
name signifies an electrical
connection.
This means that all electrical
points with identical signal
names, are the same electrical
potential.
— Read more about signal
symbols in “Signal symbols”
on page 196, and about reference designations on signal symbols in “Variant
names on signal symbols” on page 202.
Automation 12.0
Page 71
Lines
Parking
If you want to wait to decide what the conducting line is to be connected to, you
choose Parking. Thus the line gets no electrical connection. However, this is just a
temporary solution, and there should never be parked lines in a completed project.
Warning when connecting non conducting lines to symbols
If you connect a non conducting line with a symbol, you will be warned about this.
You will be allowed to do so if you insist, but the program draws no connection dot.
Show conducting
At any time you can choose Functions => Show conducting to see which lines
are conducting. Conducting lines turn green, and non conducting lines turn red. To
disable this function choose Functions => Show conducting once more.
Transferring data for conducting lines
Please note that non conducting lines can become electrical by using the transfer
data function.
— Read more about this in “Transferring Data / Properties between Objects” on
page 55.
ARTICLE
DATA ON LINES
When you wish to place article data on a line, deselect the Pencil and double-click
on the line — or right-click on the line, and select Line article data. You then enter
the dialog box Line article data:
Specify if the
line is visible
Here you can for instance click on Database, to fetch article data from the database — see “Using the database” on page 561, in particular “Using the database for Lines” on page 561.
— Please note that you can also attach article data to cable symbols, as described
in “Working with cable symbols” on page 210.
Automation 12.0
Page 72
Lines
Visible Line article data
When you select Visible for one of the article data fields, the contents of this field
is displayed on the diagram, as illustrated for the Type field in the figure below.
When article data for a line is set to be visible, these are placed above the midle of
the longest segment on the line. If this segment later disappears — e.g. by deletion
or because a symbol is placed —, the text is made invisible.
You can move these article data texts, as you can move any other text in the program.
If you select Replace line texts, the texts are placed where the program would
place these.
Pop-up information with Line article data
If Settings => Pointer/Screen => Show popup information is selected, article
data for lines are displayed when the cursor is placed over lines — when the Pencil
is not activated.
Datafields for Line article data
In all electrical lists — this meaning terminal, cable, connection and PLC lists —
you can insert datafields with Line-name, Line-type, Line-article no. and Linefunction. — See “Datafields” on page 834.
Automation 12.0
Page 73
Lines
AUTOMATIC
INSERTION OF ELECTRICAL POTENTIALS
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— INSERTING ELECTRICAL POTENTIALS AUTOMATICALLY .................................(P. 74)
— PLACING ELECTRICAL POTENTIALS ON THE UPPER PART OF THE PAGE .........(P. 75)
— PLACING ELECTRICAL POTENTIALS ON THE LOWER PART OF THE PAGE ........(P. 75)
— POSITION FOR THE ELECTRICAL POTENTIALS ...............................................(P. 76)
— REFERENCE TEXTS FOR AUTOMATICALLY PLACED ELECTRICAL POTENTIALS ..(P. 76)
— REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR AUT. PLACED ELECTRICAL POTENTIALS ......(P. 76)
— SETTINGS FOR AUTOMATICALLY PLACED ELECTRICAL POTENTIALS ...............(P. 76)
— INSERTING SIGNAL NAMES IN THE SIGNAL NAME LIST ..................................(P. 78)
Inserting electrical potentials automatically
When you wish to let Automation insert electrical potentials automatically, click
the Insert Potential button, or choose Insert => Insert Potential.
You then enter the dialog box Insert potential, where you specify which electrical
potentials to insert:
From this dialog box you can place one or more electrical potentials, either on the
upper or the lower part of the page — or both at the same time:
Automation 12.0
Page 74
Lines
Inserting electrical potentials on the upper part of the page
In the Number field in the dialog
box, you specify the number of
potentials you wish to place at the
upper part of the page.
The signal names that
will be inserted
Subsequently, you can specify
which signal names to insert.
You have two options:
a) All signal names are fetched
from the Signal name list:
Select a signal name below
Signal name, and click on
Follow list from selected.
The names for the selected
Because Number is set to 4
Number of potentials, are
these four signal names are
selected from the Signal
inserted from the list
name list, starting from the
selected signal name. If
Number is set to 4, and you have clicked on L1 — as in the figure above —
the potential names L1, L2, L3 and N are inserted.
b) The signal names are incremented starting with the selected Signal name:
Choose a signal name under Signal name, and click on Count up from
selected. The name on the first signal name is then selected from the Signal
name list, and the subsequent names are incremented by one, as they are
placed.
If Number is set to 4, and you have clicked on L1, the electrical potentials L1,
L2, L3 and L4 are inserted.
To only place electrical potentials on the upper part of the page, click the Upper
button in the right-hand side of the dialog box.
— Please also refer to “Specify Level for the electrical potentials” on page 76,
“Reference text for automatically placed electrical potentials” on page 76, “Reference designations for automatically placed electrical potentials” on page 76, “Settings for automatically placed electrical potentials” on page 76 and “Signal names
on the Signal name list - for automatically inserted electrical potentials” on
page 78.
Inserting electrical potentials on the lower part of the page
In the Number field below Lower potential in the dialog box, you specify the number of potentials you wish to place on the lower part of the page.
You can then specify which signal names you wish to apply, following the same
principles as described in "Inserting electrical potentials on the upper part of the
page" på side 75.
To only insert potentials on the lower part of the page, click the Lower button in the
right-hand side of the dialog box.
If you wish to insert potentials on the upper and the lower part of the page in the
same operation, click the Both button.
Automation 12.0
Page 75
Lines
— See also “Specify Level for the electrical potentials” on page 76, “Reference text
for automatically placed electrical potentials” on page 76, “Reference designations
for automatically placed electrical potentials” on page 76, “Settings for automatically placed electrical potentials” on page 76 and “Signal names on the Signal
name list - for automatically inserted electrical potentials” on page 78.
Specify Level for the electrical potentials
If it says 1 in the Level field, the first electrical potential is placed where the function is set up to place the first electrical potential.
If it e.g. says 3 in the Level field, the potentials are placed starting from where the
function would have placed the third potential.
— See “Settings for automatically placed electrical potentials” on page 76.
Reference text for automatically placed electrical potentials
To use references for the inserted electrical potentials, select With reference, and
type in a reference pretext in the Reference text field — if desired.
Reference designations for automatically placed electrical potentials
If you wish to attach reference designations to the automatically inserted electrical
potentials, click on Select below Reference designations, and choose a reference designation as described in “Choosing reference designations when placing
symbols” on page 337.
If you want to display the full reference designation for the potentials, select Show
full Reference designation, as described in “Show full Reference designation” on
page 338.
THE SELECTED LINE TYPE IS USED
WHEN INSERTING ELECTRICAL POTENTIALS AUTOMATICALLY, THE LINE TYPE
YOU HAVE SELECTED BEFORE CHOOSING INSERT => INSERT POTENTIAL IS
USED FOR DRAWING THE POTENTIALS.
— SEE “LINE TYPE: T” ON PAGE 68.
Settings for automatically placed electrical potentials
The placing positions for the automatically placed electrical potentials can be set
up individually for each individual page size.
This can be done by choosing Insert => Insert Potential, and then click on Setup.
You then enter the dialog box Insert potential - Setup:
Automation 12.0
Page 76
Lines
Select page size for the settings
Y-position for the
upper potential
Distance between
potentials
Y-position for the
lower potential
X-position for right and left
side side of potentials
Click here to apply the
settings
Here you choose — at the top — which page size you wish to edit the settings for,
make the changes, click on Apply, and then click OK.
Symbols inward
If you want to place the text for the signal symbols above the electrical potentials,
click on Symbols inward.
Choosing signal symbols
To select which signal symbol to apply, click the SGSIGNAL button, and you enter
the Symbol menu, where you select the symbol.
Individual setup of signal symbols
If you wish to use an individual setup for the applied signal symbols, click on Individual setup of signal symbols.
Automation 12.0
Page 77
Lines
The dialog box then changes appearance, and you get the option to make an individual Symbol inward setup, and to choose signal symbol for all four possible
positions for the signal symbols:
Click here for an individual setup for the applied signal symbols
Signal names on the Signal name list - for automatically inserted electrical
potentials
To specify which potential names that
appears in the Signal name list — see
“Inserting electrical potentials on the
upper part of the page” on page 75 —,
you must choose Insert => Insert
potential, click on Setup, and here
click on the tab Signals.
Here the columns Upper signal names
and Lower signal names appears, for
specifying the signal names in the Signal name list for the upper and lower
electrical potentials respectively.
Edit the lists as described below, and
then click Apply.
ADDING A SIGNAL NAME
Click on the Plus button, and type in a new signal name.
REMOVING A SIGNAL NAME
Click on the signal name in the list, and click the Minus button.
MOVING A SIGNAL NAME IN THE LIST
Click on the signal name in the list, and click the Up / Down arrows, until the name
has the desired position in the list.
Automation 12.0
Page 78
Lines
JUMPER
LINKS
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— ON DRAWING JUMPER LINKS ......................................................................(P. 79)
— DRAWING JUMPER LINKS ...........................................................................(P. 79)
— JUMPER LINKS IN LISTS AND TERMINAL PLANS ............................................(P. 80)
On drawing Jumper links
In Automation it is possible to work with jumper links. Succeedingly, these jumper
links can be included in terminal lists and terminal plans automatically. Jumper
links are not assigned wire numbers during automatic wire numbering.
Drawing jumper links
To draw jumper links, do the following:
1) Click on the Lines button, and click on the Pencil.
2) Click on the Jumper links button, and draw the jumper links.
Jumper links can be drawn from all types of connection points. Jumper links can
not start on the middle of another line, or on the middle of another jumper link.
When you start and end drawing a jumper link, a short message is displayed, informing you that you are drawing a jumper link.
Jumper lines in the pickmenu Lines and Texts
You can also place jumper links by clicking on the tab for the pickmenu Lines and
Texts, and click on one of the jumper line symbols in the pickmenu.
The dot in the middle of the jumper line symbols displays the colour of the jumper
lines.
Automation 12.0
Page 79
Lines
THE LINE SETTINGS ARE MEMORIZED
THE PROGRAM AUTOMATICALLY USE THE LINE SETTINGS, WHICH YOU USED
THE LAST TIME YOU WERE DRAWING JUMPER LINKS.
WHEN YOU FINISH DRAWING JUMPER LINKS, THE PROGRAM AUTOMATICALLY
CHANGE BACK TO THE LINE SETTINGS, WHICH YOU USED BEFORE DRAWING
JUMPER LINKS.
— READ MORE ABOUT LINE SETTINGS IN “THE LINES TOOLBAR” ON
PAGE 66.
Changing jumper links to electrical lines - or the reverse
You can change a jumper link to an electrical line — or change an electrical line to
a jumper link — by transferring line properties, as described in “Transferring Object
properties between Objects” on page 56.
Show jumper links
When you choose Functions => View Jumper Links, all jumper links are displayed as green lines on the screen, while everything else are displayed in red. To
disable the function, choose Functions => View Jumper Links once again.
Jumper links in Lists and Terminal plans
Under Functions => Datafield, you will
now find the datafield Terminals list =>
Jumper link.
This datafield is displayed graphically in
terminals lists. The result of placing this
datafield can be seen in the list to the right.
When the datafield is placed on the lefthand side of the terminals, you must make
it right-adjusted, so that it expands to the
left.
When the datafield is placed on the righthand side of the terminals, you must correspondingly make it left-adjusted, so that it
expands to the right.
Jumper links in terminal plans
Place rightadjusted data
fields here
Place leftadjusted data
fields here
Jumper links can also be included in terminal plans. Here a special terminal symbol for displaying jumper links have been
designed.
Read more about this in the PC|SCHEMATIC Tools manual.
Automation 12.0
Page 80
Lines
AUTOMATIC
LINE DRAWING
/ ROUTER
When you place symbols in a project, you can make Automation draw the symbol
connections automatically.
When drawing lines, you can also let the program do a part of the job for you.
SHORT-CUT KEYS FOR OPTIMAL USE OF THE ROUTER
TO MAKE THE ROUTER FUNCTION THE BEST, YOU MUST CREATE SHORTCUTS KEYS FOR THE ROUTER FUNCTIONS YOU USE THE MOST.
SEE “USER DEFINED SHORT-CUT KEYS” ON PAGE 771.
Automatic line drawing when placing symbols
To use the router when placing Symbols,
you first choose Router => Active, to set a
check mark in front of Active.
To deactivate the router, choose Router =>
Active again, so that the check mark disappears.
You will find the following options in the
Router menu:
ROUTER =>
FUNCTION
ACTIVE [½]
STARTS AND STOPS THE ROUTER
ONLY NOT CONNECTED
SYMBOLS BY MOVE
THE ROUTER IS ACTIVATED WHEN A SYMBOL IS MOVED, IF THE
SYMBOL IS NOT CONNECTED.
ONLY IF ALL IN DIRECTION
POSSIBLE
THERE WILL ONLY BE ROUTED WHEN ALL CONNECTIONS IN THE
CHOSEN DIRECTION CAN BE ROUTED.
ONLY TO NEAREST DIRECTION [2]
THERE WILL ONLY BE ROUTED FROM THE SIDE OF THE SYMBOL,
WHICH I CLOSEST TO A LINE OR OTHER CONNECTION POINTS.
HORIZONTAL
THERE WILL ONLY BE ROUTED HORIZONTALLY.
LEFT
THERE WILL ONLY BE ROUTED TO THE LEFT.
RIGHT
THERE WILL ONLY BE ROUTED TO THE RIGHT.
VERTICAL
THERE WILL ONLY BE ROUTED VERTICALLY.
UP
THERE WILL ONLY BE ROUTED UPWARDS.
DOWN
THERE WILL ONLY BE ROUTED DOWNWARDS.
REVERSE ORDER [3]
CHANGES THE ROUTING ORDER, WHEN ROUTING TO MORE THAN
ONE LINE.
SKIP OVER LINE [<]
THE ROUTER SKIPS A LINE AND ROUTES TO THE NEXT LINE.
ROUTE [1]
IF AN ALREADY PLACED SYMBOL IS SELECTED, THE SYMBOL CAN
BE ROUTED.
Automation 12.0
Page 81
Lines
The router for lines
To apply the router for drawing Lines
choose Router => Active, to set a
check mark in front of Active.
To disable the router choose Router
=> Active again, and the check mark
disappears.
You have the following options in the
Router menu for lines:
1) Place the cursor here
2) Press the [<] button until the
desired line is selected
3) Click to draw the connection
ROUTER =>
FUNCTION
ACTIVE [½]
STARTS AND STOPS THE ROUTER.
ANGLED [CTRL-SPACEBAR]
CHANGES BETWEEN STRAIGHT AND ANGLED LINES
HORIZONTAL LINES
ROUTES ONLY HORIZONTAL LINES.
VERTICAL LINES
ROUTES ONLY VERTICAL LINES.
UP/LEFT
ROUTES UP/LEFT WHEN WORKING WITH ANGLED LINES.
DOWN/LEFT
ROUTES DOWN/LEFT WHEN WORKING WITH ANGLED LINES.
DOWN/RIGHT
ROUTES DOWN/RIGHT WHEN WORKING WITH ANGLED LINES.
UP/RIGHT
ROUTES UP/RIGHT WHEN WORKING WITH ANGLED LINES.
SKIP OVER LINE [<]
THE ROUTER SKIPS A LINE AND ROUTES TO THE NEXT LINE.
Pressing the spacebar changes the direction of the router.
EXTENDED
LINES
On all types of lines, you can determine that they shall be
extended. Select the Extend line button on the toolbar.
The line will now start half a line width before its starting
point, and end half a line width after its ending point.
The lower example on the figure is drawn using Extend
line.
When you draw continuously without stopping when the
line breaks, extend lines will be chosen automatically.
The upper example is drawn as two independent lines,
without selecting Extend line.
FOLLOW
CONNECTED LINES
This button exists in Edit symbol only. If the symbol is
designed using Follow connected lines, the lines in the symbol will automatically
get the same width and color as the conducting lines that are connected to the
symbol in the project.
Automation 12.0
Page 82
Lines
In the symbol to the left all lines are drawn using Follow connected. Therefore all
lines in the symbol gets the same width and color as the conducting line, that can
be seen between the connection points of the two symbols. The other symbol is
designed without Follow conducting.
A symbol designed using Follow connected, adapt to the last line that was connected to the symbol.
Follow connected can be deactivated as a general setting
Follow connected on symbols can be activated/deactivated by choosing Settings
=> Text/Symbol defaults, and then activate/deactivate Activate Follow connected on symbols.
— See “Text/Symbol defaults” on page 831, especially “Activate Follow connected
on symbols” on page 832.
Automation 12.0
Page 83
Lines
THE TRIM
LINE FUNCTION
The Trim line command can be used for two purposes:
1) To extend a line, so that it meets another line.
2) To truncate a line, so that it meets another line.
Extend a line using Trim line
Do this to extend the vertical
line (in the figure), so that it
meets the horisontal line:
1) Click the Lines button,
and press <Esc> to
disable the Pencil.
2
2) Select the vertical line
by clicking on it.
3) Choose Edit => Trim
line.
4) A thin line starting from
the selected symbol
and ending in the cross
hairs is now displayed:
Click on the horizontal
line.
4
5) The vertical line is
extended, so that it
meets the horizontal.
5
Trimming the selected
end
Before applying the Trim line
command, please click closest to that end of the line,
which you wish to trim:
Click here before
selecting Trim line,
to trim this end
Automation 12.0
Page 84
Lines
DRAWING
BY MEASURES
It is also possible to type in the exact measures of what you want to draw.
In the status line at the bottom of the screen, you can see the X-Y co-ordinates for
the cursors location on the screen.
The co-ordinates to the left state the absolute location, while the co-ordinates to
the right states the co-ordinates relative to where you last clicked (also called the
relative co-ordinates).
Click on the X-Y co-ordinate field in the status line, or use the short-cut [Ctrl+i]. You
now see a dialog box for typing in co-ordinates.
You can also enter this dialog box choosing Functions => Coordinates.
When you want to draw by measures, you have three options at hand:
Absolute coordinates
The measures are typed in referring to the
origo of the page, located in the lower-left
corner of the page.
Relative coordinates
The measures are typed in referring to the
point last chosen on the page.
Polar coordinates
Here you draw by determining the length
of the line, and the angle between the line
and a horizontal line.
As an example of how to use absolute and relative co-ordinates, you can now draw
a rectangle of 100 x 50 mm in different ways.
Click the Lines button, select line type, deactivate Conducting lines, and activate
the Pencil.
Using Absolute coordinates
Click on the X-Y co-ordinate field — or press [Ctrl+i] — and choose Absolute.
Type in the X and Y co-ordinates, to state where the line shall start in relation to the
origo of the page.
Start in the point 50, 100.
In the X field you type 50, in the Y field 100. You do not have to state it is in millimetres, due to the system settings. Click OK. (This setting can be changed in Settings => Screen/Pointer. Read more about this i “Pointer/Screen” on page 815).
Click on the X-Y co-ordinate field: Set X to 150 and Y to 100. Click OK.
Click on the X-Y co-ordinate field: Set X to 150 and Y to 150. Click OK.
Click on the X-Y co-ordinate field: Set X to 100 and Y to 150. Click OK.
Automation 12.0
Page 85
Lines
Click on the X-Y co-ordinate field: Set X to 100 and Y to 100. Click OK.
Press <Esc>. The rectangle is complete.
Using Relative coordinates
Start the line by clicking somewhere on the screen.
Click on the X-Y co-ordinate field — or press [Ctrl+i] — and choose Relative.
Press [Ctrl+i]: Set X to 100 and Y to 0. Click OK.
Press [Ctrl+i]: Set X to 0 and Y to 50. Click OK.
Press [Ctrl+i]: Set X to -100 and Y to 0. Click OK.
Press [Ctrl+i]: Set X to 0 and Y to -50. Click OK.
Press <Esc>. The rectangle is complete.
Using the Rectangle command with relative coordinates
Click on the Lines, the Rectangle and the Pencil buttons.
Start the rectangle by clicking where you want one of the corners of your rectangle.
Click on the X-Y co-ordinate field — or use short-cut [Ctrl+i] — and choose Relative.
To specify the opposite corner of the rectangle, you set X to 100 and Y to 50.
Click OK.
The rectangle is now complete.
Automation 12.0
Page 86
Lines
MEASUREMENT
OBJECTS
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— INSERTING MEASUREMENT OBJECTS ..........................................................(P. 87)
— FREE MEASUREMENT .................................................................................(P. 89)
— ROTATING MEASUREMENT OBJECTS ...........................................................(P. 89)
— EDITING THE MEASUREMENT START AND END POINTS ................................(P. 90)
— EDITING MEASUREMENT DATA ....................................................................(P. 91)
— MEASUREMENT OBJECTS AND LAYERS .......................................................(P. 91)
— DELETING MEASUREMENT OBJECTS ...........................................................(P. 91)
MEASUREMENT ONLY ON GROUND PLAN / MECHANICAL PAGES
YOU CAN ONLY INSERT MEASUREMENT OBJECTS ON PAGES WITH THE PAGE
TYPE GROUND PLAN / MECHANICAL.
— SEE “PAGE TYPE” ON PAGE 501.
Inserting measurement objects
To place measurement objects, which can
place and calculate measurements between two points, choose Functions =>
Measurement.
The starting point for the measurement object
You now get a pencil in the cross hairs,
which tells you, that you can now point out
the starting point of the measurement
object.
If you want to start the measurement from
a symbol — e.g. from the symbol reference point or from a corner point on the
symbol —, the program automatically
examines the symbol definition, and finds
the exact coordinates from this point.
If filled lines are applied, you can both
measure from the center of the lines, and
from the edges of the lines.
Circles can furthermore be measured at
intervals of 90 degrees — see the figure
to the right.
Automation 12.0
Page 87
Lines
As displayed in the figure below, the program shows exactly which point you are
selecting:
Click to point out the start point for the measurement object.
— When you wish to place a measurement object, which apparently does not
relate to the placed objects on the drawing, please refer to “Free measurement” on
page 89.
Pointing out the end point for the measurement object and place the
measurement
Now click where you wish to place the end point for the measurement object.
You now get the text containing the measurement itself in the cross hairs. — When
start and end points does not have the same vertical or horizontal coordinates, you
can rotate the measurement, as described in “Rotating the measurement object
with the [Spacebar]” on page 89.
Click to place the measurement object.
Automation 12.0
Page 88
Lines
Specifying the Measurement data
You now enter the dialog box Measurement:
Here you can specify the appearance of the measurement object, whether to
attach a unit specification to the measurement, and how many decimals to apply.
At the bottom of the dialog box, you can choose which font you wish to use for the
measurement texts, by clicking the Text properties button.
Click OK, and the measurement is placed on the drawing:
Free measurement
When you choose Functions => Measurement, the program will suggest start
and end points for the measurement object, based on the objects in the diagram.
If you press the <Ctrl> button, you can place the start and end points for the measurement object freely. This is called free measurement in Automation.
Rotating the measurement object with the [Spacebar]
When the start and end points of a measurement object do not have the same
coordinates vertically or horizontally, you can — when you have pointed out the
Automation 12.0
Page 89
Lines
end point for the measurement object — use the [Spacebar] to rotate the measurement object:
Editing the measurement start and end points
To edit the coordinates of start and/or end point of a measurement object, do the
following:
1) Click on the Texts button, and select the measurement object by clicking on
the measurement text:
Click here
2) Now click on the measurement start/end point, and drag it to the desired
position:
Automation 12.0
Page 90
Lines
3) Release the mouse button, and the position of the start/end point(s) have
now been changed:
Editing Measurement data
To change the appearance of a measurement object, do this:
1) Click on the Texts button, rightclick on the measurement text,
and choose Measurement data.
2) You now enter the Measurement
data dialog box, where you can
edit the appearance of the measurement object — see “Specifying the Measurement data” on
page 89.
Measurement objects and Layers
When you press the <Alt> key, the measurement function is able to see objects
placed in other layers on the page. You can therefore choose to place the measurement objects in other layers on the page. When printing the page, it is then possible to control whether to print the measurement objects or not.
— See “Layers, Elevation and Scaling” on page 465, in particular “Printing pages
with layers” on page 468.
Deleting a measurement object
To delete a measurement object, click the Texts button, select the measurement
text, and click the Delete button.
Automation 12.0
Page 91
Lines
MOUNTING
CORRECT DRAWING
Automation is able to support mounting correct drawing automatically. — In the
IEC 61082 standard this is also called combined circuit and connection diagram.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— ON MOUNTING CORRECT DRAWING ............................................................ (P. 92)
— ACTIVATING MOUNTING CORRECT DRAWING ............................................... (P. 93)
— CHOOSING MOUNTING CORRECT DRAWING IN EXISTING PROJECT ................ (P. 94)
— SIGNAL NAMES IN MOUNTING CORRECT DRAWING ...................................... (P. 95)
— SUB DRAWINGS AND MOUNTING CORRECT DRAWING ................................... (P. 95)
— CHANGING TO MOUNTING CORRECT DRAWING ........................................... (P. 95)
— CHANGING TO NOT MOUNTING CORRECT DRAWING .................................... (P. 96)
— CONVERTING PROJECTS FROM VERSION 8.0 AND PREVIOUS........................ (P. 96)
MOUNTING CORRECT DRAWING RECOMMENDED
IF YOU ARE NOT SURE WHETHER TO DRAW MOUNTING CORRECT OR NOT IN
YOUR DOCUMENTATION, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO DO SO IN Automation.
THIS IS BECAUSE YOU CAN EASILY CONVERT MOUNTING CORRECT DRAWN
PROJECTS TO NORMAL DRAWING MODE WITH CONNECTION DOTS, AS
DESCRIBED IN “CHANGE TO NOT MOUNTING CORRECT DRAWING” ON
PAGE 96.
On mounting correct drawing
In Automation you can create mounting correct drawings on equal terms with how
you normally draw diagrams with connection dots:
• Where a connection dot automatically occur in normal diagram drawings, a
branch figure is inserted in mounting correct drawing mode.
• You can start and end lines on other lines — with automatical insertion of
branch figures.
• You can also use automatical line drawing / the router for mounting correct
drawn lines, starting/ending on other lines. — See “Automatic line drawing /
Router” on page 81.
• Placing sub drawings by drag’n draw or by selecting Insert => Insert sub drawing also handles mounting correct drawing. — See “Sub drawings and
mounting correct drawing” on page 95.
• Branch figures are moved automatically along with the lines, which they are placed on. You can therefore move e.g. an electrical potential L1 — which is placed on the upper part of a page — up or down, just by moving one single line,
branch figure or signal symbol on the electrical potential.
In mounting correct drawing mode, there are no limitations on what you are allowed to draw. Errors in mounting correct drawing, are exclusively found via the
Design Check function. — See “Design check for Mounting correct drawing” on
page 95.
Automation 12.0
Page 92
Lines
Activating Mounting correct drawing
When you want to work in mounting correct drawing mode, you choose Settings
=> Project data, and select Mounting correct drawing.
Click here
Bend size
If you are already working in a project, you will be told if the project is not drawn
mounting correct, when you enable Mounting correct drawing. Please read more
about this in “Choosing Mounting correct drawing in an existing project” on
page 94.
Bend
On the Project data tab, you also specify
the size of the bend of the lines on mounting
correct drawings.
In the Bend field you can change the size of
the bend by clicking the down-arrow, and
selecting a bend size. In the figure to the
right, you can see how the size of the bend
is specified.
Bend size
It is recommended not to use the bend size
5.0mm, because this does not give a clear
result when e.g. three electrical potentials
are placed with a distance of 5,0 mm.
It is recommended to use a bend size of 2,0 or 2,5 mm.
CHANGING THE APPLIED BEND SIZE IN A PROJECT
If you change the bend size used in a project, you will be asked whether to change
the bend size in the existing branch figures in the project.
Automation 12.0
Page 93
Lines
Branch figures
After the bend size, you can choose which brand figure that the program shall suggest initially, when drawing mounting correct:
In mounting correct drawing mode, the program will automatically place the latest
applied branch figure. When pressing the <Spacebar> repeatedly before drawing
further, you can change to one of the other branch figures.
Changing branch figures on lines
When you wish to use another
branch figure on a line, then deactivate the Pencil, click on the
branch figure and press the
<Spacebar> until the desired figure
appears.
Having deselected the Pencil, you
can also right-click on the branch
figure, select Select figure, and
select the new branch figure — as
illustrated to the right.
Choosing Mounting correct drawing in an existing project
When you are working in a project, and select Mounting correct drawing, you will
be informed if the project is not drawn mounting correct at the time being.
Automation 12.0
Page 94
Lines
Design check for Mounting correct drawing
To locate the parts that are not mounting correct, you can then choose Functions
=> Design check, and enable Mounting correct.
When you click OK you get a list of the parts of the project, which are not mounting
correct.
Starting from this list, you can then make sure that your project are mounting correct drawn.
— Read more about design check in “Design Check” on page 310.
Signal names in Mounting correct drawings
— See “Variant names on signal symbols” on page 202.
Sub drawings and mounting correct drawing
It is an advantage to draw all of your sub drawings mounting correct. Hereby you
can use them for both mounting correct drawing, and for not mounting correct drawing.
When you drag one of these sub drawings into a project, which is not in mounting
correct drawing mode, the branch figures are automatically converted to connection dots.
By drawing the sub drawings mounting correct, you therefore only need to maintain
one single set of sub drawings, which can be applied for both purposes.
Change from Non mounting correct to Mounting correct drawing
Projects, which are drawn non mounting correct, can get branch figures inserted in
stead of the connection dots like this:
1) Select Mounting correct in Settings => Project data.
2) Select Functions => Special Functions => Convert Dots to Branches.
— Please check that Automation have inserted appropriate branch figures where
it is not obvious which figure to insert.
Automation 12.0
Page 95
Lines
Change to Not mounting correct drawing
Projects, which are drawn mounting correct, can have inserted connection dots in
stead of branches like this:
1) De-select Mounting correct in Settings => Project data.
2) Select Functions => Special Functions => Convert Branches to Dots.
Converting mounting correct projects from version 8.0 and previous
Starting from Automation 9.0 an improved workflow for mounting correct drawing
have been introduced. To convert mounting correct drawings from version 8.0 and
previously, select Functions => Special Functions => Convert to Branches.
The connection dots in the proejct will then be converted to branch figures
anywhere this is possible, and double-lines will be removed. — Please check that
Automation have inserted appropriate branch figures where it is not obvious
which figure to insert.
Wire numbers when converting mounting correct drawings from previous versions
When converting mounting correct drawn projects from version 8.0 and previous,
wire numbers will be moved, so that they uniquely identify which lines they are attached to.
Automation 12.0
Page 96
Arcs/Circles
ARCS/CIRCLES
When you want to draw circles, you click the Circles button and activate the Pencil. Circles have the short-cut key [c]. — See “Auto command change” on page 51
also.
The general short-cut key for the Pencil is the [Ins] key, but you can also use the [c]
key when you are working with Circles. Pressing the [Ins] or the [c] key activates/
deactivates the Pencil.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES HOW TO WORK WITH CIRCLES AND ARCS.
— Se how to move, copy, rotate and delete circles and arcs in the section “Working
with selected objects” on page 51, and see how to transfer data between circles/
arcs in “Transferring Data / Properties between Objects” on page 55.
Please note, that circles and arcs can not be rotated.
The Circles toolbar
The toolbar for circles looks like this:
R is for the radius of the circle/arc.
V1 is for the arc start angle, V2 is for the arc end angle.
The drawing is made counter-clockwise.
To draw a full circle V1 has to be 0 and V2 has to be
360.
To draw a quarter circle V1 can be 180 while V2 is 270.
To draw a half circle V1 can be 45 while V2 is 225.
Whether the circle is to be filled out, is determined by
clicking the Filled circles button on the toolbar.
Line width is determined in the field B:, while the color
of the line and filling is determined in the field F:.
Selected arcs can be rotated by pressing the [Spacebar].
Circles / Arcs in the Pickmenu
To get fast access to drawing arcs with predefined properties, you can place arcs
with the desired properties in the pickmenu at the upper part of the screen. This is
done as described for lines in “Lines in the Pickmenu” on page 71.
Automation 12.0
Page 97
Arcs/Circles
Ellipses
Using the circle command also enables you
to draw ellipses. The last field E: in the toolbar of the circle command is an ellipse factor.
If the factor is set to 1 you will get an ordinary
circle. Apart from this, see the impact of the
different factors on the figure below.
When you fill out both V1 and V2 you can
also draw arcs.
Converting circles and ellipses to lines
When you want to change a circle to lines, you do this by selecting the circle and
then choosing Edit => Convert to lines.
When you do this, the circle is converted to lines.
To select these lines, you now have to click the Lines button.
Invisible arcs / circles
— See “Making circles/arcs invisible” on page 63.
INSERT CLOUD
To insert a cloud to mark corrections easily, do this:
1) Choose Insert => Insert Cloud.
2) A pencil is now displayed in the
cross hairs: Click to point out
one corner for the cloud.
3) Click to point out the opposite
corner.
The cloud is now drawn.
The applied line color and type is
memorized for the next time you draw
a cloud.
Automation 12.0
Page 98
Texts
TEXTS
When you want to work with texts, you always start by clicking the Texts button —
or press the short-cut key [t]. If you want to place new texts you click the Pencil
button. — See “Auto command change” on page 51 also.
The general short-cut key for the Pencil is the [Ins] key, but you can also use the [t]
key when you are working with Texts. Pressing the [Ins] or the [t] key activates/
deactivates the Pencil.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— THE TEXT TYPES IN Automation ............................................................ (P. 99)
— PROJECT AND PAGE DATA ...................................................................... (P. 111)
— GENERAL TEXT FUNCTIONS ..................................................................... (P. 112)
— LOCKING TEXT TYPES ............................................................................. (P. 115)
— COUNTING ON TEXTS .............................................................................. (P. 116)
— THE APPEARANCE OF TEXTS / TEXT PROPERTIES ..................................... (P. 118)
— WHICH TEXTS ARE DISPLAYED IN PROJECTS ............................................. (P. 123)
— THE READING DIRECTION FOR TEXTS ....................................................... (P. 126)
— TEXT LINKS ............................................................................................. (P. 128)
— See how to move, copy, delete and rotate texts in “Working with selected
objects” on page 51, and see how to transfer data between texts in “Transferring
Data / Properties between Objects” on page 55.
TEXT
TYPES IN Automation
There are various types of texts in Automation, as you will see below.
TEXT TYPE
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
FREE TEXTS
TEXTS, THAT CAN BE USED ANYWHERE IN THE PROJECT.
99
SYMBOL TEXTS
TEXTS, THAT ARE ATTACHED TO EACH SYMBOL, CONTAINING
104
INFORMATION ON THE COMPONENT THAT IS COVERED BY THE
SYMBOL.
CONNECTION
TEXTS, THAT ARE ATTACHED TO EACH OF A SYMBOLS CONNECTION POINTS.
106
POINT TEXTS
DATAFIELDS
TEXT FIELDS THAT ARE FILLED OUT AUTOMATICALLY.
107
When the word text is mentioned in this manual, we will be referring to free texts —
unless specified otherwise.
GENERAL
PURPOSE
/ FREE
TEXTS
General purpose/free texts are texts that can be applied anywhere in diagrams, in
symbol definitions (see “Creating Symbols” on page 676) or in drawing headers/
formulas.
Automation 12.0
Page 99
Texts
The free texts can not be transferred to project lists — as opposed to the other
types of texts.
If a free texts is a part of a symbol definition — see “Creating Symbols” on
page 676 —, it can not be changed in a diagram later on.
Type in and place a free text
Click on the Texts and the Pencil button — or click inside the text field on the texts
toolbar.
Text type
Type in the text here
Type in the text as displayed above and press <Enter>. Please note that the toolbar
informs you that you are dealing with a free text.
The text is now in the cross hairs. Click where you wish to place it.
You have now placed a free text on a project page.
When the Pencil is not activated, you can press the short-cut key [k], and you enter
the dialog box Place text where you also can type in a text and then place it.
From here it is now possible to use the automatic counting functions, which can be
found in the Texts toolbar. — Read more about these in “Counting on texts” on
page 116.
Editing texts in projects
When you want to edit a text in a project, do the following:
1) Disable the Pencil (press <Esc>)
2) Click on the text and press the short-cut key [k]
3) Correct the text and press <Enter> — or click OK
If you press [F7] to enter the Object Lister, you can see all the project texts in one
place. From there you can also edit the texts.
— See “Checking and editing project texts via the Object Lister” on page 304.
Autocompletion of texts
Automation memorizes all of the texts which have been used in the program.
Automation 12.0
Page 100
Texts
While you type in texts, the program therefore gives you some suggestions to
which text you are typing in.
You can then choose between the suggestions in the list, or continue typing in the
text.
If no list appears with texts having the same initial letters, you can press
[Ctrl+Spacebar] and get a list of matching texts, that do not have the same initial
letters.
Creating a list of texts
As mentioned, the program memorizes all the texts you type in.
If you also want to add texts from existing projects, do like this:
1) Open the project containing the texts
2) Choose Functions => Special functions => Transfer Project Texts to
Auto Completion function
This procedure is repeated for all the projects you want to transfer texts from.
Deleting texts from the autotext function
To delete texts from the autotext function, click on the undesired text in the autotext
scroll menu, and press <Delete>.
Click here and
press <Delete>
Automation 12.0
Page 101
Texts
Special characters
In the project pages you may also need special characters, which are not available
on your keyboard. This goes for the signs for earth, frame and alternating current
and characters from other european languages.
To insert a special character, right-click in the text field in the text toolbar, and
choose Insert char:
In the dialog box Insert char you then select the desired character, and click
Insert.
— Please refer to “Texts in more than one line” on page 112, “Negate (invert) text”
on page 112 and “Underline text” on page 113.
SPECIAL CHARACTERS AND WINDOWS
THE FONTS YOU GET WITH OLDER VERSIONS OF WINDOWS, DOES NOT CONTAIN SPECIAL CHARACTERS. WHEN A SPECIAL CHARACTER DOES NOT EXIST
IN A SELECTED FONT, A SQUARE IS DISPLAYED IN STEAD OF THE SPECIAL
CHARACTER IN THE DIALOG BOX ABOVE.
THE FONTS YOU GET WITH WINDOWS VISTA AND SUCCEEDING VERSIONS
CONTAINS SPECIAL CHARACTERS.
THE PC|SCHEMATIC FONT CONTAINS THE NECESSARY SPECIAL CHARACTERS.
Automation 12.0
Page 102
Texts
Default text properties for free texts
To edit the default text properties (text size etc.) which Automation suggests for
free texts, do this:
1) Choose Settings => Text/Symbol defaults.
2) On the tab Text/Symbol defaults: Click on Free, click on Free text and click
the Text properties button:
3) In the dialog box Text properties: Specify the desired text properties, as
described in “Specifying text properties / Appearance of text” on page 118,
and click OK.
4) In the dialog box Text/Symbol defaults: Click the Save as default button, if
you also want to apply these settings in other projects.
5) Click OK.
Automation 12.0
Page 103
Texts
TEXTS
CONNECTED TO SYMBOLS
Symbols have attached symbol texts, and if the symbol has connection points,
these have attached connection texts as well.
The fields for these texts can not be removed. However they neither have to be filled out nor visible. — Read more about symbol texts in “Creating Symbols” on
page 676.
The symbol texts
To each symbol, some symbol texts are attached, which can contain the symbol/
component name as well as other information about the component, which the
symbol represents.
These symbol texts exist:
TEXT TYPE
DESCRIPTION
S NAME
THE NAME OF THE SYMBOL/COMPONENT — I.E. -K1, -Q34.
S TYPE
DESCRIBES THE TYPE OF THE COMPONENT — CAN BE FILLED OUT VIA THE
DATABASE.
S ARTICLE NO
A TEXT TELLING EXACTLY WHICH COMPONENT A SYMBOL DESCRIBES. THIS
BEING EITHER A EAN 13 NUMBER OR A STOCK NUMBER. CAN BE FILLED
OUT VIA THE DATABASE.
S FUNCTION
THIS TEXT IS USED TO DESCRIBE THE FUNCTION OF THE SYMBOL. CAN BE
FILLED OUT VIA THE DATABASE.
The information that you type into the symbol texts, can be used when for instance
you want to generate parts lists automatically.
Filling out the symbol texts
When you place a symbol you automatically enter the Component data dialog
box, where you can enter various information about the symbol, or just click OK
and return later to fill in the missing data.
If you do not enter the Component data dialog box automatically, you can enable
this function by entering Settings => Pointer/Screen and select Ask for Names.
— Read more about this in “Pointer/Screen” on page 815.
When you return later to type in the symbol texts, you have to start by clicking the
Symbols button, or use the short-cut key [s]. Then right-click on the symbol whose
symbol texts you want to change, and choose Component data in the appearing
menu.
Instead of right-clicking, you can select the symbol by clicking and then click the
Data button in the program toolbar.
Automation 12.0
Page 104
Texts
You now enter the dialog box Component data, that for instance could be filled out
like this:
Here you can fill out the symbol texts, and decide which of the symbol texts that
should be displayed together with the symbol in the project. It is also possible to
type in the connection point names. This is described in “Placing and Naming symbols” on page 151.
Click OK when the data are as you want them to be.
Editing the symbol texts directly on a Diagram page
A symbol with visible symbol texts could look like this:
— Please note that references are only displayed when the symbol has references.
— See “Creating Symbols” on page 676, especially “Position for references to
other symbols” on page 678.
You can change the contents of a visible symbol text directly on a
diagram page, by first clicking on Texts, then disable the Pencil
(press <Esc>), and click on the text you wish to change. In the
texts toolbar you will see which type of symbol text you have selected.
To indicate to which symbol the symbol text is connected, a line is being displayed
going from the reference point of the symbol to the symbol text. Click in the text
field of the toolbar — or press [k] —, edit the text, and press <Enter>. The symbol
text has now been changed.
Automation 12.0
Page 105
Texts
Changing between the symbol texts by pressing [F5]/[F6]
Once you have selected a symbol text, you can change back and forth between the
symbol texts connected to the same symbol by pressing [F5] and [F6]. When a
symbol has references, pressing [F5]/[F6] will also jump to the reference text.
Please refer to “Locking text types” on page 115 for an easier way to change symbol texts.
Moving symbol texts on a Diagram page
To move a symbol text you also have to activate the Texts button. Then you can
move the text as you can move any other object in Automation, for instance using
drag and drop.
If you press down <Shift> while moving the text, you can place the text using fine
snap — read more about snap in “Snap” on page 42.
CONNECTION
POINT TEXTS
These texts are connected to the connection points of the symbol — where you
connect conducting lines to the symbol — and contain information about these.
The following types of connection point texts exist:
CONNECTION POINT TEXT
CONTENTS
NAME (C.NAME)
THE CONNECTION NUMBER OF THE CONNECTION POINT.
FUNCTION (C.FUNC)
THE FUNCTION OF THE CONNECTION POINT.
LABEL (C.LABEL)
THE SHORT DESCRIPTION (FOR INSTANCE FOR PLC DRAWINGS).
DESCRIPTION (C.DESCR)
THE LONG DESCRIPTION (FOR INSTANCE FOR PLC DRAWINGS).
Connection point texts are filled out and moved like symbol texts. — Please refer to
“Texts connected to symbols” on page 104 and “Symbol Connection points” on
page 182.
When you have selected a connection point text, you can change back and forth
between the texts connected to the connection point by pressing [F5] and [F6].
Automation 12.0
Page 106
Texts
DATAFIELDS
Another type of texts are called datafields. These can be filled out automatically by
the program. Like free texts, they can be applied anywhere in drawings, in symbols
and in drawing headers/formulas.
Choosing Settings you can specify the contents of some datafields once and for
all. What you type in here will be inserted into the project any time you place one of
these datafields. If you change the contents of one of the datafields in Settings,
the project will be updated automatically. Read more about how to do this in “Project and Page data” on page 111.
— Please refer to “Page data and Project data Datafields” on page 669 for further
details.
To insert a datafield choose Insert => Insert datafield.
You now enter the Datafield dialog box:
Explanatory
text about the
datafield
The selected
datafield
The selected
field type
Click here for
drop-down menu
Supplementary
information
The various groups of datafields have the following contents:
DATAFIELD
CONTENTS
SYSTEM DATA
DATA ABOUT YOUR SYSTEM. FOR INSTANCE USER NAME WHICH IS
THE NAME OF THE PERSON THAT IS TYPED IN AS USER IN SETTINGS => SYSTEM. DATE AND TIME ARE THE ACTUAL DATE AND
TIME, MINUTES AND SECONDS.
PROJECT DATA
DATA CONCERNING THE ACTUAL PROJECT. YOU CAN DEFINE
THESE IN SETTINGS => PROJECT DATA.
PAGE DATA
DATA CONCERNING THE PAGE YOU ARE WORKING ON IN THE PROJECT. THERE ARE SOME PRE-DEFINED PAGE DATA DATAFIELDS,
SUCH AS THE PAGE NUMBER. YOU CAN DEFINE ADDITIONAL PAGE
DATA DATAFIELDS IN SETTINGS => PAGE DATA.
Automation 12.0
Page 107
Texts
DATAFIELD
CONTENTS
SYMBOL DATAFIELDS
DATAFIELDS YOU CAN DEFINE BY YOURSELF. — READ MORE
ABOUT THESE IN “CREATING DATA SYMBOLS” ON PAGE 711.
YOU CAN ALSO PLACE SYMBOL DATAFIELDS FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL
FIELD IN THE DATABASE. IN THE LIST OF SYMBOLDATA DATAFIELDS, THESE FIELDS ARE ASSIGNED THE NAMES DB[XXXXX],
WHERE XXXXX IS THE NAME ON THE DATAFIELD IN THE DATABASE.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DATAFIELDS FOR TABLES OF CONTENTS.
PARTS/COMPONENTS
DATAFIELDS FOR PARTS- AND COMPONENTS LISTS.
LISTS
TERMINALS LIST /
CABLE LIST
DATAFIELDS FOR TERMINALS- AND CABLES LISTS. IN THE SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION BOX YOU CAN FOR INSTANCE DETERMINE
WHETHER A DATAFIELD IS FOR THE
EXTERNAL OR THE INTERNAL
PART OF THE LIST.
PLC LIST
DATAFIELDS FOR PLC LISTS.
— See the survey of datafields in “Datafields” on page 834.
The other fields in the menu have following functions:
FIELD
FUNCTION
ACTIVATE NEXT
IS USED FOR LISTS WHEN A CERTAIN GROUP OF INFORMATIONS MUST BE
REPEATED SEVERAL TIMES ON A PAGE. EACH TIME THE PROGRAM MEETS
ACTIVATE NEXT, THE NEXT SET OF INFORMATION ON THE LIST CAN BE
FILLED INTO THE LIST. SEE “DICTIONARY” ON PAGE 850.
WRAP TEXT
IF THE TEXT CONTAINS MORE CHARACTERS THAN STATED IN THE WIDTH
FIELD, THE REMAINING PART OF THE TEXT WILL NOT BE DISPLAYED. IF
YOU ACTIVATE WRAP TEXT, THE TEXT WILL CONTINUE ON AN EXTRA LINE
BELOW.
KEEP LINEBREAK
(^)
WHEN YOU SELECT KEEP LINEBREAK (^), THE DATAFIELD WILL ALSO
HAVE THE SPECIFIED LINEBREAK IN THE LISTS CREATED FROM THE PROJECT.
ONLY SHOW TEXT
ON DATA
THIS OPTION ONLY APPEAR WHEN SOMETHING HAS BEEN TYPED INTO
THE TEXT FIELD. IF YOU ACTIVATE THIS FUNCTION, THERE WILL NOT BE
PRINTED ANYTHING ON THE SCREEN IN CASES WHERE THE TEXT FIELD IS
FILLED OUT, BUT THERE ARE NO ACTUAL DATA IN THE DATAFIELD ITSELF.
ESPECIALLY USED IN LISTS.
THE RED ARROW
TRANSFERS THE SELECTED DATAFIELD TEXT TO THE TEXT FIELD.
FILL CHARACTER
A CHARACTER THAT WILL BE FILLED IN FROM THE END OF THE TEXT AND
IN THE REMAINING WIDTH OF THE DATAFIELD. FOR INSTANCE A LINE OF
DOTS IN A TABLE OF CONTENTS BETWEEN THE PAGE TITLE AND THE
PAGE NUMBER.
(3) ON THE FOLLOWING FIGURE.
TEXT
HERE YOU CAN TYPE IN A TEXT TO PRECEDE THE CONTENTS OF THE
DATAFIELD. (1) ON THE FOLLOWING FIGURE.
WIDTH
THE MAXIMUM WIDTH OF THE DATAFIELD (NUMBER OF CHARACTERS).
Automation 12.0
Page 108
Texts
Two inserted datafields could for instance look like this:
The text in the
Text field (1)
The name of datafield itself (2)
Fill characters (3)
Please note that this is how datafields look like when you are in Edit symbols — for
instance because you want to create a list (Read more about creating lists in
“Creating Lists” on page 732). If you just insert a datafield on a page, you will not
see the name of the datafield itself (2), but the contents of the datafield.
Use Insert => Insert Datafield to select a datafield you want to insert. Click OK
when the settings are as you want them.
You now get the chosen datafield into the cross hairs, and click where you want to
place it.
When you want to edit a placed datafield, you right-click on the datafield and
choose Datafield. This brings you into the Datafield dialog box.
Inserting the contents of the datafield in the text
By applying the % character, you can insert the contents of the datafield in the
middle of the text in the Text field.
The following options exist:
INSERT
DESCRIPTION
%S
INSERTS THE VALUE/CONTENTS OF THE DATAFIELD UNCHANGED.
IF YOU TYPE IN "PRICE: %S $" — AND THE CONTENTS OF THE DATAFIELD IS 25 —
THIS RESULTS IN THE TEXT "PRICE: 25 $"
— WHEN YOU HAVE TYPED IN THE CONTENTS OF THE DATAFIELD WITH NO DECIMALS, THE CONTENTS IS DISPLAYED WITHOUT DECIMALS. IF YOU HAVE TYPED IN
THE CONTENTS WITH DECIMALS, THE CONTENTS IS DISPLAYED WITH DECIMALS.
%F
INSERTS THE VALUE OF THE DATAFIELD AS FLOATING POINT VALUE, WHEN POSSIBLE.
Automation 12.0
Page 109
Texts
INSERT
DESCRIPTION
%.1F
INSERTS THE CONTENTS OF THE DATAFIELD AS FLOATING POINT WITH ONE DECIMAL. YOU CAN CHOOSE FROM 0 TO 9 DECIMALS.
IF YOU WRITE "PRICE: %.2F $"— AND THE CONTENTS OF THE DATAFIELD IS 25 —
THIS RESULTS IN THE TEXT "PRICE: 25,00 $"
IF YOU WRITE "%.3F KG." — AND THE CONTENTS OF THE DATAFIELD IS 17,65 —
THIS RESULTS IN THE TEXT "17,650 KG."
%-
NO DATAFIELD VALUE IS INSERTED, AND THE TEXT IS ENDED RIGHT BEFORE THE %
CHARACTER. IF FOR INSTANCE YOU WRITE "TOTALPRICE:%" THE TEXT "TOTALPRICE:" IS INSERTED IF THE CONTROLLING DATAFIELD HAS A CONTENT.
THIS CAN FOR INSTANCE BE USED AT THE BOTTOM LINE OF A LIST, WHERE THE
DATAFIELD PRICE 1 TOTAL DOES NOT HAVE A CONTENT UNTIL ALL PAGES IN THE
LIST HAVE BEEN ADDED. TO MAKE THIS WORK, YOU MUST PLACE THE DATAFIELD
PRICE 1 TOTAL WITH THE TEXT "TOTAL PRICE:%-" IN THE LEFT SIDE OF THE BOTTOM LINE, AND PLACE THE DATAFIELD PRICE TOTAL IN THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE
BOTTOM LINE WITH THE TEXT "%S $"
SELECT ONLY SHOW TEXT ON DATA FOR BOTH DATAFIELDS.
When you want to use the % character in a text, just type the % character twice. If
you write "%.2f %%" this can result in the text "5,00 %".
Automation 12.0
Page 110
Texts
PROJECT
AND
PAGE
DATA
When you open a new project, the program will show you the tab Project data
from the Settings dialog box. In this dialog box you also find the tab for Page data.
Here you can fill in various data for your project.
To fill out a field, you just click inside the field, and type in the information. You can
jump between the fields by pressing the <Tab> key.
If you do not wish to enter these data now, press <Esc> or click Cancel.
If you want to fill out or change data later, choose Settings => Project data / Page
data. Or you can click the Project data or the Page data button. You can also
right-click on a project page, and select Page data.
If you want to change the name of a datafield in the Project or Page data menu
(the grey fields in the left hand side of the menu), just right-click on the field name
you want to change. Then a menu appears, from which you can change the name
of the field, delete the field, or add new datafields. However, you will not be allowed
to change the names of project- or page datafields, that are being used in the present project. You can change the contents of the fields at any time.
— Read more about this in “Page data and Project data Datafields” on page 669.
Remember to click Redraw to see the effects of the changes in your project.
See how you design drawing headers in “Creating Drawing Headers” on page 721,
and how to design your own lists in “Creating Lists” on page 732.
Activating the Auto text function for Page title
To activate the auto text function when typing in a Page title, press [Ctrl+Spacebar]. — See “Autocompletion of texts” on page 100.
Automation 12.0
Page 111
Texts
GENERAL
TEXT FUNCTIONS
When you are working with texts, there are some text functions you can apply for
all text types.
Changing a text
If you want to change a text on a drawing, you first select the text by disabling the
Pencil (press <Esc>), and then click on the text. The text is now in the text field on
the toolbar. Click inside the field, correct the text, and press <Enter>.
If you double-click on the text in the text field, the text will be selected, and you can
type in another text instead.
When a text is selected, you can also press the short-cut key [k], and you will enter
a dialog box where you also can type in the text.
When you select a text, the type of the text is displayed in the texts toolbar.
Changing a text in the cross hairs
When you have a text in the cross hairs, click in the text field (or press [k]), type in
a new text, press <Enter> and place the text. This can also be done while copying.
Texts in more than one line
Insert the character ^ where you want a line break. — On your keyboard it is probably located to the left of the <Enter> key. The character will not appear before
you type in the following character.
— See also “Line length” on page 120 and “Wrap text” on page 120.
Negate (invert) text
Type in the text in the text field, select it and press [Ctrl+PageUp]. The negate bar
will only be placed above the selected part of the text.
Alternatively you can select the text in the toolbar, right-click and choose Negate.
If you deselect the Pencil (press <Esc>) and right-click on a text, you can also
choose Negate.
You can remove the negation by selecting the text, and then choose Negate again.
NEGATED TEXTS AND CHANGING FONTS
IF YOU CHANGE FONT, YOU MUST BE AWARE THAT THIS CAN HAVE AN
EFFECT ON NEGATED TEXTS. — SEE “SPECIAL CHARACTERS WHEN
CHANGING THE PC|SCHEMATIC FONT TO A WINDOWS FONT” ON
PAGE 119.
Automation 12.0
Page 112
Texts
Underline text
Select the text as mentioned above and press [Ctrl+PageDown] — or select the
text, right-click and choose Underline.
If you deselect the Pencil (press <Esc>) and right-click on a text, you can also
choose Under line.
You can remove the underline by selecting the text, and then choose Underline
again.
UNDERLINED TEXTS AND CHANGING FONTS
IF YOU CHANGE FONT, YOU MUST BE AWARE THAT THIS CAN HAVE AN
EFFECT ON UNDERLINED TEXTS. — SEE “SPECIAL CHARACTERS WHEN
CHANGING THE PC|SCHEMATIC FONT TO A WINDOWS FONT” ON
PAGE 119.
Cut, copy and insert a text in the text field
A text in the text field can be transferred to the Windows clipboard, either by copying or by cutting from the text.
If you want to transfer text from the text field to the clipboard, you select the text
you want to transfer, right-click and choose Copy in the menu that appear. A copy
of the text is now placed on the clipboard.
If you want to transfer a text from the clipboard to a text field, then activate the
Texts button. Right-click in the text field and choose Insert. Press <Enter> and
place the text on the drawing.
The text stays on the clipboard until another text is transferred to the clipboard.
Swopping texts
To swop texts and datafields, you can apply the function Edit => Swop texts:
1) Select a text by clicking on it.
2) Choose Edit => Swop texts.
3) Click on the other text, that you want to swop the text with.
You can also right-click on a text, and choose Swop texts.
Automation 12.0
Page 113
Texts
Information on texts
When you have chosen Texts and right-click on a text and choose Information,
you enter the dialog box Information, which contains information about the text.
Here you find information about the text height, width, position, the used font, line
length of the text, wrap text information etc.
Automation 12.0
Page 114
Texts
LOCKING
TEXT TYPES
On the toolbar for texts it is possible to lock which type of texts you want to work
with, as well as to carry out continuous counting on texts of the type chosen.
Increment/decrement
Interval for incrementing/decrementing
Specify numbering system
Lock text type
Locking a text type
On the toolbar for texts, you can specify, that you only want to work
with texts of a specific text type.
If for instance you choose the type S.Name, only texts of the type
Symbol name can be selected in the project. If you then drag a window around some symbols in a project, only their symbol names are
selected.
When you have locked the type to Symbol name, you can then assign a name to a
symbol by typing in the name in the text field in the texts toolbar, press <Enter>,
and click on the symbol.
Doing it this way, you do not have to click on the reference point for the text Symbol name of the symbol.
If you want to place a connection point text, you lock the relevant text type, and
click on the connection point itself.
When the text type is set to All, the selection of texts function on all text types.
RESET THE TEXT TYPE TO ALL AFTER USING THIS FUNCTION
TO BE ABLE TO SELECT ALL TYPES OF TEXTS IN THE PROJECT SUBSEQUENTLY, YOU SHOULD SET THE TEXT TYPE TO ALL AFTER USING THIS
FUNCTION.
Automation 12.0
Page 115
Texts
COUNTING
ON TEXTS
When you want to place texts with increasing or decreasing numbers, you
can specify according to which numbering system the texts shall be
incremented/decremented. Here you can choose between binary, octal,
decimal and hexadecimal. You can also choose to increment/decrement
upper- or lower case letters (ALFA or alfa respectively).
The initial value is typed into the text field in the texts toolbar.
If the texts are to be incremented following a specified interval, you type in the
interval in the Interval field, as displayed on page 115.
When you click on +, the text in the text field is incremented with the value specified
in the Interval field. This increment follows the number system chosen. If the interval is set to 1, and the number system to dec, the text K1 will be incremented to
K2.
If you click on - instead, the text will be decremented following similar guidelines.
When you press down <Ctrl> and click on +, the text will be incremented automatically each time you click on a new text.
Therefore, when you have chosen the text type S.Name, have typed in K1 in the
Text field and 2 in the Interval field, and then press down <Ctrl> and click on +, the
first symbol you click on will get the symbol name K1, the following K3, then K5
and so on.
If you press down <Ctrl> and click on -, the texts will be decremented automatically
following the same directions.
Apply counting on texts in areas
To increment/decrement texts in areas, you do the following:
1) Click on Texts
2) Specify text type, interval and numbering system, as described above
3) Select the area containing the texts you want to count up/down (se below)
4) Type in the initial value in the text field in the toolbar
5) Press down <Ctrl> and click on +
6) Press <Enter>
The selected texts are now counted up according to the directions you have specified.
Automation 12.0
Page 116
Texts
Please note, that the program registers where you clicked the first, when you
selected the area. The counting of the texts starts from there.
Click in the left-hand side first when you select the area,
if you want the counting to be performed from left to right
If the counting should be carried out starting from the left-hand side, you therefore
start by clicking in the left-hand side, when you select the area.
Texts can be counted up on several symbols at the same time — as illustrated on
the figure above.
— Please refer to “Changing symbol names in an Area” on page 180 to see alternative ways to apply automatic counting on symbol names, and to “Choosing connection points in Areas” on page 184 to see how to do it for connection point
names.
Short-cut keys for counting on texts
When you have selected a symbol, a text or a connection point on a symbol — or
have a text in the cross hairs —, it is possible to increment or decrement the text/
symbol name/connection name.
To increment, choose Functions => Count up, or press the [+] key on the numerical keyboard.
To decrement, choose Functions => Count down, or press the [-] key on the
numerical keyboard.
Increment/decrement is done according to the interval specified in the Texts toolbar.
— Both short-cut keys can be changed as described in “User defined short-cut
keys” on page 771.
Automation 12.0
Page 117
Texts
SPECIFYING
TEXT PROPERTIES
/ APPEARANCE
OF TEXT
Exit any dialog box that might be activated, click on the Texts button, and press the
Text properties button.
Font
When changing the various text settings, you click the down-arrow at the left hand
side of the dialog box, and click on your choice in the drop down box that emerge.
Editing the properties of placed texts
When you want to edit the properties of a placed text, you first click the Texts button. Then click on the text, and click the Text properties button. — Or: Right-click
on the text, and select Text properties.
Then make the changes described in this section.
SELECTING TEXT PROPERTIES VIA THE PICKMENU
YOU CAN SELECT DIFFERENT SETS OF TEXT PROPERTIES VIA THE PICKMENU,
AS DESCRIBED IN “TEXTS IN THE PICKMENU” ON PAGE 122.
If for instance you want to type in the text height directly, you can also click in the
Height field itself, and type in the desired height.
The Text properties dialog box contains the following fields:
Automation 12.0
Page 118
Texts
Fonts
Here you choose which font you want to use.
On the list you can choose between the PC|SCHEMATIC
font and the other fonts you have on the PC.
Please note that the Windows fonts should only be applied
when strictly necessary. This is because they are not to be
used on diagrams according to the EN standards, and
because they take up extra space in the PC memory.
It can be an advantage to use these fonts in drawing headers, in tables of contents and in lists.
The PC|SCHEMATIC font follows the EN standards, and
should therefore be used on diagrams.
Special characters when changing the PC|SCHEMATIC font to a Windows font
If you change texts written with the PC|SCHEMATIC font to be written with a Windows font, use of special characters such as negated characters, underlined characters will give an incorrect result. Earth characters and other special characters
might also give an incorrect result, depending on which font you use.
— See “Exporting PDF files” on page 319 also.
SPECIAL CHARACTERS AND WINDOWS
THE FONTS YOU GET WITH OLDER VERSIONS OF WINDOWS, DOES NOT CONTAIN SPECIAL CHARACTERS. WHEN A SPECIAL CHARACTER DOES NOT EXIST
IN A SELECTED FONT, A SQUARE IS DISPLAYED IN STEAD OF THE SPECIAL
CHARACTER IN THE DIALOG BOX ABOVE.
THE FONTS YOU GET WITH WINDOWS VISTA AND SUCCEEDING VERSIONS
CONTAINS SPECIAL CHARACTERS.
THE PC|SCHEMATIC FONT CONTAINS THE NECESSARY SPECIAL CHARACTERS.
Height
States the height of the text.
Width
States the width of the text. The width specifies the distance between characters
and their appearance.
Selecting AUTO sets the width to 2/3 of the height of the text.
Automation 12.0
Page 119
Texts
Alignment
There are nine different alignment options, such as centre-centre as shown
above. When the text is placed in a point,
it is actually the reference point of the
text that is located in this point — as you
can see on the figure.
In the field Alignment you determine
where the reference point will be located
in relation to the text.
If the text is rotated, it will be rotated
around the reference point.
These reference points applies for both the Automation font and for Windows
fonts — see “Fonts” on page 119.
Shortcut for changing text alignment
When you have selected a text, you can change the text alignment by pressing the
<Shift> key while pressing the <Spacebar>.
When you have a text in the cross hairs, you can also change the text alignment by
pressing the <Shift> key while pressing the <Spacebar>.
Frame
If you want a frame around the text, you pick one of the options in this field.
Color
States the color of text and frame. If you choose the color NP (Non Printable), you
will see the text on the screen, but not on print.
— See “Visible text” on page 121 and “Making objects invisible” on page 62.
Line length
Here you can specify the maximal number of characters that can be included in the
text line. If the text is longer than this, the extra characters are truncated.
Wrap text
Set a check mark here if the text shall continue on a new line, if the line length is
exceeded.
Suppress lineshift char
When you select Suppress lineshift char, the manually entered lineshift characters are suppressed. This function is activated individually, via the Text properties
dialog box, for each individual text you wish to use it on.
The function can e.g. be used in connection with PLC reference symbols, when
you do not wish to display the I/O connection description text with the same
lineshifts, which is adapted to the design of the PLC symbol. — See “Working with
PLC’s” on page 436.
Automation 12.0
Page 120
Texts
The function can also be used in connection with text links, where you wish to suppress the lineshifts for some of the texts in the text link. — See “Text links” on
page 128.
Check marks
Bold text, Italic text, Visible text and Fixed text direction are enabled and disabled by clicking inside the check boxes. A check mark is displayed when they are
enabled.
Bold text
The text will be bold.
Italic text
The text will be in italics.
Underlined text
The text will be underlined.
Visible text
If you remove the check mark in the Visible text check box, the text will not be
shown in the project. Thus if you remove the check mark for a text containing a
symbol name, the name of the symbol will not be shown in the project.
If you then click Symbols, right-click on the symbol and choose Component data,
you can see that it now is stated here as well, that the symbol name is not visible.
You can turn symbol texts on and off in the Component data dialog box and in the
dialog box Text properties.
Fixed text direction
If this option is chosen, the text will always be directed as it is when you place it on
the page. Therefore, if you change the general Reading direction of the page, the
text will not change direction. Read more about reading direction in “Specify reading direction” on page 126.
When you have finished specifying the text properties, you click OK.
Not translated
In the field Not translated you can specify not to translate this text, when translating project texts via the translation program PC|SCHEMATIC Translator.
Select text properties from Text/Symbol defaults
In the Text properties dialog box it is also possible to select the settings in the dialog box from the settings for a specified text type in Settings => Text/Symbol
defaults.
Automation 12.0
Page 121
Texts
When you click on the down-arrow in the Std.Text field in
the upper part of the dialog box, you get a list of the various text types, you can set the standard size for under
Settings => Text/Symbol defaults.
Please note, that you can also select the default settings
for free texts.
If for instance you click on S.Type, the settings in the dialog box Text properties will then become the same as
the current default settings for symbol type texts.
This makes it easier to place free texts having the same
appearance as for instance symbol texts.
— Please refer to the “Text/Symbol defaults” on page 831 for further details on the
default settings for texts.
Texts in the Pickmenu
To get fast access to drawing texts with predefined properties — see “Specifying
text properties / Appearance of text” on page 118 —, you can place texts with the
desired properties in the pickmenu at the upper part of the screen.
Symbols/drawing objects displayed in all pickmenus
Select different menus
in the pickmenu
Click on a text, and place texts
with the specified properties
When you click on one of the texts in the pickmenu, the program automatically
changes to working with Texts, and the cursor is placed in the text-field in the texts
toolbar.
When you subsequently type in at text and press <Enter>, you get the text in the
cross hairs. When you place the text in the project, the text gets the selected properties.
To insert a text type in the pickmenu, right-click on an empty cell in the pickmenu,
and select Place Text. The currently applied text properties are hereby inserted in
the cell in the pickmenu.
If the pickmenu is not displayed on the screen, you can activate the pickmenu by
selecting Settings => Pointer/Screen and click on Pickmenu.
The pickmenu can also contain symbols, lines and arcs. — Read more about the
pickmenu in “Fetching symbols from the Pickmenu” on page 136 and “Adapting the
Pickmenu” on page 173.
Automation 12.0
Page 122
Texts
TEXTS
DISPLAYED IN THE PROJECT (GENERAL SETTING)
Entering Settings => Text/Symbol defaults you can — as a general project setting — specify which types of texts that can be displayed in the project.
If you here decide that Symbol article number is not to be shown in the project,
you will not be able to display the number for any symbol in the project — not even
though you select the Visible field for Name in the Component data dialog box for
the symbols in the project.
If you, on the other hand, in Symbol defaults have determined that for instance
texts of the type Symbol article number can be shown in the project, you can for
each individual symbol state that for this symbol, the number is not to be shown.
— Read more about this in “Texts connected to symbols” on page 104.
In the left hand side of the Text defaults section you determine which type of texts
you want to change the settings for. On the right hand side you determine whether
the various texts can be displayed in the project.
The contents of the right hand side of the text defaults vary depending on the text
type chosen.
If for instance you want the option to display texts of the type Symbol article number in the project, you first click on Symbol, then on Article, and finally you select
the Displayed in project box.
Click against Capital letters if you want the text in capital letters only. Hereby can
only type in capitals, when you type in the text. Already placed texts are not changed.
Name format for symbol names
For symbol names you can determine whether the placing of the symbol on page
and current path shall be included in the symbol name. Read more about this in
“Naming symbols due to page and current path number” on page 370.
Automation 12.0
Page 123
Texts
Transfering text settings to project texts
If you wish to transfer the text settings for the selected text type to the project, click
the Transfer text settings to project button.
All project texts of the selected type hereby gets the settings (text height etc.) specified on the tab Text/Symbol std.
Transferring text settings for symbol names
When you click the Transfer text settings to project button for symbol names,
you must subsequently specify whether to change the settings for Component
names, Signal names or Wire numbers:
Select name type, and click OK.
Save as default
If you want to save the current settings as future standard, you click the Save as
default button. Click OK. Please note that you only change the default settings for
the type of text you are displaying in the dialog box at the present. If you click on
the button with the settings shown above, you will only change the settings for symbol names.
If you want to change the default settings for more text types, you have to click the
Save as default button each time you have changed the settings for one single
text type.
If you want to fetch the current default settings for the text type chosen, you click
the Load defaults button.
If you just want to see what the default settings are, you click the Show defaults
button, which only displays the default settings as long as you press down the
mouse button.
When you have saved settings as standard, new projects will get these settings.
Previously created projects will not be changed.
When you return to the drawing, it is a good idea to click the Redraw button, to
update the drawing with the new settings.
Changing text properties
On this tab you can also change the default appearance / which text properties the
program shall suggest for the various text types.
When you have clicked your way to a text type, you determine its appearance by
clicking the Text properties button. You now enter directly into the Text properties
Automation 12.0
Page 124
Texts
dialog box, as described in “Specifying text properties / Appearance of text” on
page 118.
Other text standards
When you click on Reference, you can
determine the appearance of the current
path numbers by clicking on Horizontal
reference and Vertical reference respectively.
If you click on Reference cross you can
determine the appearance of the texts in the
reference crosses that are placed in the project subsequently.
Clicking on Symbol reference, likewise
determine the appearance of the reference
texts between symbols that are placed in the project succeedingly. Signal reference can only be changed in the Edit symbol mode.
Text standards for Symbol and Connection
Please note that text defaults for Symbol and Connection only cover the text properties that will be suggested when you are designing symbols. Therefore they can
only be changed in the Design/Edit symbol mode.
Already designed symbols will not be effected by the changes.
Automation 12.0
Page 125
Texts
SPECIFY
READING DIRECTION
The corners of a piece of paper is always numbered in such a way, that the bottom
left hand corner has got number zero, the bottom right hand corner has number
one, the upper right hand corner number two, and the upper left hand corner has
number three.
Corner 3
Corner 2
Corner 3
Corner 2
Corner 0
Corner 1
Corner 0
Corner 1
Whether the paper is in portrait or in landscape does not change this.
The texts on a drawing will normally only be read seen from two directions.
The texts on a landscape drawing will normally be read seen from the bottom right
hand corner (corner one). However, if you are drawing on a landscape page, which
you later print out and rotate to place it in a folder, you must choose reading direction 0 (texts are read from corner zero). The texts then appears correctly when placed in the folder.
The reading direction can be changed in Settings => Page setup => Reading
direction. You can choose reading direction 0, 1, 2, 3 or -1. The number state the
corner from which the texts can be read. This means that the rotation of texts, or of
symbols with texts, will change automatically according to the chosen setting. If
you wish to change the reading direction on a drawing, you just change the setting,
and the texts will change accordingly.
Reading direction -1
Reading direction -1
Reading direction 1
Reading direction 1
Reading direction -1
Reading direction 1
Reading direction -1
Reading direction 0
Reading direction 0
Reading direction 0
Reading direction 0
Reading direction 1
If you set the reading direction to -1 the texts will keep the orientation they have
when you place them in the project. Thus they will not be oriented according to a
specific reading direction.
If you have got a drawing in landscape, which after printing have to be inserted into
a portfolio, you have to set the reading direction to 0.
Please note that you have got the option to place individual texts with fixed reading
direction. These will not be altered according to the general reading direction in
Page setup. This facility can for instance be applied in company logos/drawings.
See how to place texts with fixed reading direction in “Specifying text properties /
Appearance of text” on page 118.
— See “Position of names when placing symbols” on page 127.
Automation 12.0
Page 126
Texts
Position of names when placing symbols
THIS ONLY APPLIES FOR SYMBOLS OF THE TYPE NORMAL
PLEASE NOTE, THAT THIS FUNCTION ONLY APPLIES FOR SYMBOLS OF THE
TYPE NORMAL.
When symbols are rotated, symbol and connection names can be positioned in
two different ways:
a) Names are not rotated, and they are positioned above or to the left of the
symbol, or
b) Names are rotated with the symbol
Rotation 0
Rotation 90
Rotation 180
Rotation 270
a)
With Automatic orientation of name
b)
Without Automatic orientation of name
How names are positioned in the project, is specified like this:
1) Choose Settings => Text/symbol defaults
2) Below Text standards: Select Symbol or Connection
3) Select — or deselect — Automatic orientation of name
The setting only applies for symbols subsequently placed in the project. Already
placed symbols are not affected.
By default, Automatic orientation of name is selected for both symbol and connection names.
ROTATION: THE RELATION BETWEEN TEXT AND SYMBOL IS FIXED
WHEN YOU ROTATE A SYMBOL, THE SYMBOL TEXTS WILL BE ROTATED WITH
THE SYMBOL.
Automation 12.0
Page 127
Texts
TEXT
LINKS
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— WHAT IS A TEXT LINK?.............................................................................(P. 128)
— INDICATION OF LINKED TEXTS ...................................................................(P. 128)
— CREATING LINKED TEXTS FROM THE TEXTS COMMAND ...............................(P. 128)
— CREATING LINKED TEXTS FROM THE SYMBOLS COMMAND .........................(P. 129)
— THE DIALOG BOX TEXT LINK .....................................................................(P. 131)
— EDITING A TEXT LINK ...............................................................................(P. 131)
— DELETING A TEXT LINK .............................................................................(P. 132)
— TEXT LINKS AND LOADING PLC I/O LISTS ..................................................(P. 132)
— MAINTAINING TEXT LINKS .........................................................................(P. 132)
What is a text link?
To ensure that all project texts referring to the same contents are always identical,
Automation contains a function named text links. When you have linked two — or
more — texts, and edit one of these texts, the other linked texts are changed automatically.
Any function, from which you can edit texts in the program, updates linked texts
automatically when editing — see “Where to edit texts in link lists” on page 132.
This is also the case when importing PLC I/O data — see “Text links and importing
PLC I/O lists” on page 132.
Indication of linked texts
When a text is linked, this is indicated in dialog boxes by a Flash in front of the text
— for instance in the Component data dialog box:
This is also the case in the Object Lister — see “The Object Lister” on page 296.
In diagrams linked texts are indicated by an arrow drawn through the reference
point of the text:
Creating a text link from the Texts command
There are different ways of creating text links in Automation. When working with
texts, do the following:
Automation 12.0
Page 128
Texts
1) Select a text in the project — for instance click at the Texts button, then rightclick on the text reference point, and choose Text link:
2) The dialog box Text link is displayed: Click on a new text in the project, and
click on the Add text to link button to link the new text to the text in the dialog box:
3) Continue adding texts to the text links until all relevant texts are linked.
4) Close the dialog box Text link by clicking on the Close button in the upper
right-hand corner of the dialog box.
— See “Creating text links from Component data and Connection data” on
page 129 also.
Creating text links from Component data and Connection data
When working with symbols, you can link symbol texts like this:
1) Click on Symbols — to start working with symbols.
2) Right-click on a symbol and select Component data.
Automation 12.0
Page 129
Texts
3) In the dialog box Component data: Right-click in one of the text fields (see
“Symbol names and Connection names can not be linked” on page 130), and
select Text link.
4) You now enter the dialog box Text link, from which you can link texts. — If
the dialog box Text link is already open, the selected text is added to the
active link list in the dialog box Text link).
5) Close the dialog box Component data for the selected symbol, and add
new texts to the link via the Component data dialog box for other symbols in
the project, or shift to the Texts command and link more texts as described in
“Creating a text link from the Texts command” on page 128.
6) Continue linking texts until all relevant texts are linked.
7) Close the dialog box Text links by clicking the Close button in the upper
right-hand corner of the dialog box.
You can do exactly the same for connection points in the dialog box Connection
data.
SYMBOL NAMES AND CONNECTION NAMES CAN NOT BE LINKED
IN THE DIALOG BOX COMPONENT DATA YOU CAN LINK ALL TEXTS — EXCEPT
THE SYMBOL NAME.
IN THE DIALOG BOX CONNECTION DATA YOU CAN LINK ALL TEXTS — EXCEPT
THE CONNECTION NAME.
Automation 12.0
Page 130
Texts
The dialog box Text link
In the dialog box Text link a list of all texts which are linked together — a link list —
is displayed:
Here you have the following options:
Linking texts to the texts in the link list
When working with Texts, and the dialog box Text link is open, you can add new
texts to the link list by clicking on a text in the project, and then click on the Add
text to link button in the dialog box Text link.
Removing texts from the selected link
When working with Texts, and the dialog box Text link is open, you can remove a
text from the link list by clicking on the text in the dialog box, and then click on the
Remove text from link button in the dialog box Text link.
Show text location
To jump to a text in the project from the dialog box Text link, you have the two following options:
a) Click on the text in the dialog box Text link, and click on the Show text location button, or
b) Double-click on the text in the dialog box Text link
The program now displays the page in the project where the text is placed, and
selects the text. The dialog box Text link remains active on the screen.
Load link list of selected text
When the dialog box Text link is open, and you select a new text in Automation,
and click on the Load link list of selected text button, the link list of the selected
text is loaded in the dialog box.
Editing text links
When you wish to add texts to a link list after closing the dialog box Text link — or
you wish to delete texts from the link list — do this:
1) Click on the Texts button — to work with texts.
Automation 12.0
Page 131
Texts
2) Right-click on one of the texts in the link list, and open the dialog box by
selecting Text link.
3) In the dialog box Text link: Add texts to the link list as described in “Creating
a text link from the Texts command” on page 128, or remove a text from the
link list by clicking on the Remove text from link button.
4) When you have finished editing: Close the dialog box by clicking on the
Close button in the upper-right corner of the dialog box.
The text used in the text link list can also be edited from the Object Lister, just like
you edit non-linked texts. — See “The Object Lister” on page 296.
Deleting a text link list
1) Click on the Texts button — to work with texts.
2) Right-click on one of texts in the link list, and open the dialog box Text link
by selecting Text link.
3) Click on the Remove text from link button in the dialog box until only one
text remains in the dialog box.
4) The links are now deleted: Close the dialog box.
Text links and importing PLC I/O lists
When you import a PLC I/O list in Automation — see “Reading PLC I/O lists” on
page 449 — and a text hereby is changed (a PLC input/output description), which
is linked to other texts in the project, these texts are automatically changed to the
imported text.
Where to edit texts in link lists
The texts in the link lists can be maintained the following places:
- From the Symbols command: In the dialog boxes Component data and Connection data — see “Creating text links from Component data and Connection
data” on page 129
- From the Texts command — see “Editing text links” on page 131
- From the Object Lister — see “The Object Lister” on page 296
- During import — see for instance “Text links and importing PLC I/O lists” on
page 132
When you edit a linked text, all of the other linked texts are changed accordingly —
no matter which way you edit the text.
Automation 12.0
Page 132
Symbols
SYMBOLS
In Automation you apply symbols when you want to represent an electrical component on a drawing. If for instance you want to place a lamp, you find the symbol
for a lamp, and place it on the drawing.
When you want to work with Symbols, you always start by clicking the Symbols
button — or use the short-cut key [s]. — See “Auto command change” on page 51
also.
The general short-cut key for the Pencil is the [Ins] key, but you can also use the [s]
key when you are working with Symbols. Pressing the [Ins] or the [s] key activates/
deactivates the Pencil.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— FETCHING SYMBOLS WITH AND WITHOUT USING THE DATABASE ...............(P. 135)
— PLACING AND NAMING SYMBOLS ..............................................................(P. 151)
— SYMBOL SUB NAMES ...............................................................................(P. 160)
— SYMBOLS WITH STATES ...........................................................................(P. 162)
— UPDATING SYMBOLS FROM THE DATABASE ...............................................(P. 166)
— MOVING AND DELETING PLACED SYMBOLS ...............................................(P. 168)
— THE SYMBOL TOOLBAR ............................................................................(P. 171)
— ADAPTING THE PICKMENU ........................................................................(P. 173)
— CHANGING SYMBOL NAMES IN AREAS.......................................................(P. 180)
— SYMBOL CONNECTION POINTS .................................................................(P. 182)
— CHOOSING CONNECTION POINTS IN AREAS...............................................(P. 184)
— THE PINSWOP FUNCTION .........................................................................(P. 185)
— REPLACING SYMBOLS ..............................................................................(P. 187)
— AUTOMATIC CREATION OF SYMBOLS .........................................................(P. 190)
— THE SHOW NET FUNCTION AND THE NETLISTER .......................................(P. 195)
— USING SIGNAL SYMBOLS .........................................................................(P. 196)
— USING TERMINAL SYMBOLS ......................................................................(P. 207)
— USING MULTILAYER TERMINAL SYMBOLS ...................................................(P. 208)
— USING CABLE SYMBOLS ..........................................................................(P. 210)
— USING ACCESSORY SYMBOLS ..................................................................(P. 217)
— SYMBOL FOLDERS IN Automation ........................................................(P. 217)
FUNCTIONS ON COMPONENT LEVEL
MORE SYMBOL FUNCTIONS ARE DESCRIBED IN “FUNCTIONS ON COMPONENT LEVEL” ON PAGE 220. THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN COMPONENTS
AND SYMBOLS ARE DESCRIBED IN “THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN SYMBOLS
AND COMPONENTS” ON PAGE 221.
— Please refer to “Creating Data symbols” on page 711 to see how to use data
symbols.
Automation 12.0
Page 133
Symbols
See how to move, copy, delete and rotate symbols in the section “Working with
selected objects” on page 51, and see how to transfer object properties between
symbols in “Transferring Component Data for Symbols or Lines” on page 55.
PLC FUNCTIONS
READ MORE ABOUT THE SPECIAL OPTIONS FOR WORKING WITH PLC SYMBOLS IN “PLC FUNCTIONS” ON PAGE 433.
Designing your own symbols
If you can not find the symbol you need among the symbols that come with Automation, then read “Creating Symbols” on page 676, to see how you design your
own symbols.
Automation 12.0
Page 134
Symbols
FETCHING
SYMBOLS
When working with symbols, you always start by clicking the Symbols button or by
pressing the short-cut key [s].
Beyond copying an already placed symbol, there are several ways of fetching a
symbol in Automation:
WAY TO FETCH SYMBOLS
PAGE
FROM THE PICKMENU
136
FROM THE SYMBOL MENU
140
FROM THE DATABASE
147
TYPING IN A SYMBOL FILENAME
148
TYPING IN AN ARTICLE NUMBER
149
TYPING IN A SYMBOL TYPE
150
DIRECT CREATION OF SYMBOLS
190
FROM WINDOWS EXPLORER
321
USING A BARCODE SCANNER
615
Some of the functions are handy when you work without
using the database, others when you know the exact article
number of the component you want, others again when you
know which type of component you want, but do not know
its exact article number.
AUTOMATIC LINE DRAWING WHEN PLACING
SYMBOLS
WHEN YOU PLACE A SYMBOL YOU CAN USE THE
ROUTER FUNCTION, WHICH DRAWS THE LINES CONNECTING THE SYMBOL TO THE DIAGRAM AUTOMATICALLY. — READ MORE ABOUT THIS IN “AUTOMATIC
LINE DRAWING / ROUTER” ON PAGE 81.
Automation 12.0
Page 135
Symbols
1. Fetching symbols from the Pickmenu
When working in Automation, you have the Pickmenu available on the upper part
of the screen. Here you place the symbols — and other drawing objects — you use
the most.
Symbols/drawing objects displayed in all pickmenus
Select different menus
in the pickmenu
Click on a symbol, and place it
in the diagram
When you click on a symbol in the pickmenu, you get the symbol in the cross hairs,
and can place it in the project. The program changes automatically to work with
Symbols, and the Pencil is activated.
If the pickmenu is not displayed, choose Settings => Pointer/Screen and click on
Pickmenu.
OTHER POSSIBILITIES WHEN USING THE PICKMENU
— CHANGING BETWEEN MENUS IN THE PICKMENU .........................................(P. 136)
— SYMBOLS / DRAWING OBJECTS DISPLAYED IN ALL PICKMENUS ...................(P. 137)
— SYMBOLS WITH COMPONENT DATA IN THE PICKMENU ................................(P. 137)
— ENTERING THE DATABASE USING THE PICKMENU .......................................(P. 138)
— ALTERNATIVE ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS ........................................................(P. 138)
— SYMBOLS WITH STATES IN THE PICKMENU ................................................(P. 139)
— POSSIBILITIES AND LIMITATIONS WHEN USING THE PICKMENU ....................(P. 139)
The pickmenu can also contain line types, text types and arcs. — Read more about
the pickmenu in “Lines in the Pickmenu” on page 71, “Texts in the Pickmenu” on
page 122 and “Circles / Arcs in the Pickmenu” on page 97.
Selecting the different Pickmenus
The pickmenu contains several different menus, which you select by clicking on the
tabs at the bottom of the pickmenu.
Click to select a new menu
in the pickmenu
— See how to create new menus in the pickmenu in “Creating new menus in the
Pickmenu” on page 175.
Automation 12.0
Page 136
Symbols
Symbols/ Drawing objects displayed in all Pickmenus
Displayed in
all pickmenus
Symbols / drawing objects with a small triangle in the
upper-left corner of the pickmenu cell, are displayed in
all menus in the pickmenu.
— See how to give a symbol / drawing object this status
in “Inserting a Symbol / Drawing object in all Pickmenus” on page 173.
Displayed in selected
pickmenu only
Symbols with component data in the pickmenu
The symbols in the pickmenu can be attached to components in the database. This
way you automatically attach component data to the symbols when you place them
in diagrams.
When you click on a symbol/component that contains more than one function in
the database, you get a pickmenu containing the electrical symbols for the component.
Click on one of the symbols and place it. Press [Ctrl+F9] to get this pickmenu for
the component on screen again. — See “The function Show available” on
page 224 or “The function Show available window” on page 226.
When you let the cursor rest for a moment over one of the symbols in the pickmenu, the component data is displayed below the symbol (as a hint) and at the bottom line of the screen.
SYMBOLS WITH MULTIPLE SETS OF DATA IN THE PICKMENU
You can also assign multiple sets
of component data to a symbol (a
cell) in the pickmenu. This way
the same cell can contain the
same component with e.g. different capacities.
When you let the mouse rest over
a cell containing multiple sets of
component data, a submenu is
displayed for the different sets. —
See “Automatic popup of submenus in the pickmenu” on
page 174.
You can see that a symbol cell contains component data, by the light-blue rectangle in the lower-right corner of the cell.
— See how to create multiple sets of component data for a symbol in a cell in
“Adding component data to symbols in the pickmenu” on page 175.
Automation 12.0
Page 137
Symbols
Entering the database using the pickmenu
If you press down <Ctrl> while clicking on a symbol in the pickmenu, you enter the
database. Here you can see the components that have got the picked symbol as
the first symbol in the Symbol field of the database. — See “Database settings” on
page 598 and/or the PC|SCHEMATIC Database manual.
It is also possible to right-click on the symbol in the pickmenu, and choose Database.
Select the desired component in the database and click OK.
Alternative electrical symbols
When you fetch a component via the database — for instance by using the pickmenu — it is some times possible to choose between alternative electrical symbols
for the functions of the component.
If for instance a component has a relay coil and two switch functions, the switch
functions can be used as either a switch, a make contact or a break contact.
When you get the pickmenu for such a component, it could look like this:
Alternative electrical symbols
(1-2-3)
Alternative electrical symbols
(1-2-3)
When you choose one of these alternative symbols, the other alternatives for the
function disappears.
If for instance you choose the symbol for the make contact for the first switch function, the two alternative symbols for switch and break contact disappears form the
pickmenu for the component.
— Please also see “Symbols with states” on page 139.
Other options for using alternative symbols
There exists many other ways to use alternative symbols than just the example
above.
Power control circuit symbols can for instance exist in a normal version and a version for one-line diagrams. You can also choose whether to use PLC modules or
single I/O symbols.
— See how to specify the alternative symbols in the database in “Specifying alternative electrical symbols via the database” on page 584.
Automation 12.0
Page 138
Symbols
Symbols with states
Symbols with states can also be placed in the pickmenu. When a symbol in the
pickmenu has states, a dark blue triangle is displayed in the lower-right corner of
the cell in the pickmenu.
You can specify whether to display a submenu automatically, as described in
“Automatic popup of submenus in the pickmenu” on page 174. When you let the
mouse rest over the state for a symbol, the title for the state is displayed, if a title for
the state exists.
— See “Symbols with states” on page 162, “Symbols with states for single line diagrams” on page 398 and “Creating symbols with states” on page 692.
Sub drawings in the Pickmenu
When you click on a subdrawing in the Pickmenu, you get the sub drawing in the
crosshairs, and can place it in the project.
If the sub drawing contains data for different models, you select the model like this:
1) Let the cursor rest over the subdrawing shortly
2) Click on the desired model
When you choose to place the sub drawing on a mechanical page, the mechanical
symbols for the sub drawing are placed on the page.
— See how to place sub drawings in the Pickmenu in “Placing sub drawings in the
Pickmenu” on page 177.
THE RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE FOR SUB DRAWINGS
IN “MANUAL PLACING OF SUB DRAWINGS” ON PAGE 247 YOU CAN READ
MORE ABOUT THE NORMALLY RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE FOR PLACING
SUB DRAWINGS USING THE SUBDRAWINGS TAB IN THE EXPLORER WINDOW.
READ MORE ABOUT SUB DRAWINGS IN THE CHAPTER “SUB DRAWINGS” ON
PAGE 244.
Possibilities and limitations when using the pickmenu
You have the option of creating 999 different pickmenus. By clicking the up- and
down arrows in the left side of the pickmenu, you can jump from one pickmenu to
another. — See how to place symbols in the pickmenu in “Adapting the Pickmenu”
on page 173.
The pickmenu can be moved around on the screen as an ordinary window in Windows, and can also be docked. When it is docked it will always be displayed on the
screen. You can read more about this in “Docking the Pickmenu” on page 25.
Automation 12.0
Page 139
Symbols
2. Fetching symbols using the Symbol menu
Click the Symbols button and the Symbol menu button — or press the short-cut
key [F8], which can be applied from all commands.
In the Symbol menu you then pick the symbol you need:
Placing the found symbol
Click on the desired symbol and click OK — or double-click on the desired symbol
—, and you return to your diagram with the symbol in the cross hairs.
Place the symbol in the project, and press <Esc> to remove the symbol from the
cross hairs.
POSSIBILITIES IN THE SYMBOL MENU
— SYMBOL LIBRARIES / PROJECT SYMBOLS IN THE SYMBOL MENU ................(P. 141)
— REPRESENTATION OF SYMBOLS IN THE SYMBOL MENU ..............................(P. 141)
— SEARCHING IN THE SYMBOL MENU ...........................................................(P. 142)
— BOOKMARKS IN THE SYMBOL MENU..........................................................(P. 143)
— ENTERING THE DATABASE VIA THE SYMBOL MENU ....................................(P. 146)
— CREATING NEW SYMBOLS FROM THE SYMBOL MENU .................................(P. 146)
AUTOMATIC UPDATE OF THE SYMBOL MENU
IF SYMBOLS, OR THE CONTENTS OF THE SYMBOL DIRECTORY DISPLAYED IN
THE SYMBOL MENU CURRENTLY, ARE CHANGED FROM OUTSIDE THE PROGRAM — E.G. VIA WINDOWS EXPLORER OR OTHERS ON THE NET — THE
SYMBOL MENU IS UPDATED AUTOMATICALLY.
Automation 12.0
Page 140
Symbols
Displaying symbol libraries / project symbols in the Symbol menu
When you wish to locate symbols in the Symbol menu, you can choose which
symbols to display, in the following way:
Display Library via Folders
Click the Select Libraries from Folders button. You then get an explorer structure
in the left-hand side of the Symbol menu, where you can find the folder in which
the desired symbol library is placed.
In the folder Pcselcad on the C:\-drive, you find the folder Symbol. In this folder
you find a number of sub folders containing various symbol libraries.
When you have chosen a folder here, such as EN60617, you see these symbols
displayed in the window in the Symbol menu. When there are more symbols than
can be displayed in the window, there will be a scroll bar in the window.
The contents of the symbol libraries is described in “Symbol folders” on page 217.
If you need to know more about changing folders and opening files, please read
“Windows” on page 21.
Selecting Libraries via Alias
Click on the Select Library from Alias button. Hereby a list of the created aliases
in the left-hand side of the Symbol menu. Each of these aliases points on a folder,
which contains a symbol library.
When installing Automation, aliases for the installed symbol libraries are created
automatically.
YOU CAN USE ALIASES, WHICH POINTS ON SYMBOL LIBRARIES PLACED ALL
OVER THE WORLD.
— Read more about alias in “Show directory alias” on page 820.
Showing the Project Symbols
Click on the Show Project Symbols button. Hereby all symbols in the project are
displayed.
Show the most recently used symbols
Click on the History button. Hereby the last 50 symbols fetched via the Symbol
menu are displayed. This also includes symbols fetched via the Symbol menu
when working in other projects.
Representation of symbols in the Symbol menu
In the upper right-hand corner of the Symbol menu, you will find three buttons to
specify how the symbols are displayed in the Symbol menu:
Automation 12.0
Page 141
Symbols
Symbols displayed as Large icons
When you click on the Large icons button, the
symbols are displayed in the Symbol menu.
When placing the mouse cursor over a symbol,
the Title, Name and Type of the symbol is displayed as a hint.
Symbol names displayed in a List
When you click on the List button, a list of the symbol file names are displayed.
When placing the mouse cursor over a symbol
name, the symbol is displayed in the right-hand side
of the menu, and the Title, Name and Type of the
symbol is displayed as a hint.
Symbol names displayed with Details
When you click on the Detail button, a list of the symbol file names is displayed,
containing detailed information on the selected symbols.
When placing the mouse cursor over a line in the list, the symbol is displayed in the
right-hand side of the menu.
Searching in the Symbol menu
When you need to search after a symbol in
the selected library, click the Search button
— or press [Ctrl+f].
A search field is then displayed. Here you can type in the text you are searching for.
Click on the down-arrow to the right of the Search button to specify which type of
information you are searching for:
Click here, and specify
which type of information
you are searching for
Then type in the symbol text you are searching for in the search field. As you type
in the text, the program will select the first symbol in the symbol library, having a
symbol text beginning with the text you have typed in so far. To jump to the next
symbol matching the text, click the Search again button — or press [F3].
Automation 12.0
Page 142
Symbols
It makes no difference for the program whether the text has been written as upper
case or lower case letters.
Begins with/Contains
If you take no special action, the program starts searching for texts beginning with
the text you type in. When you wish to search for a text that just exists somewhere
in the selected text type, click on the Begins with/Contains button, so that it changes appearance from T... to ..T...
When this happens, the program searches for the text fragments anywhere in the
selected text types.
To return to searching for texts beginning with the typed in text, click on the Begins
with/Contains button again, so that it changes appearance from ..T.. to T....
Bookmarks in the Symbol menu
When the Symbol menu displays aliases or folders, it is possible to insert bookmarks. When you click on a bookmark, you jump down to the selected bookmark in
the folder.
Click on the
bookmark
Creating a bookmark in the Symbol menu
To create a bookmark, right-click on a symbol in
the Symbol menu, and choose Create bookmark.
You then enter the dialog box Create Bookmark:
Type in the name of the bookmark, and click OK.
The bookmark is now displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the dialog box,
when you select the alias or library in question in the Symbol menu.
Automation 12.0
Page 143
Symbols
Editing or Deleting created bookmarks
To edit or delete a created bookmark, right-click on the bookmark and choose Edit
bookmark or Delete bookmark.
Bookmarks and copying symbol libraries
Information about bookmarks are saved in the relevant symbol libraries. This has
the following consequences:
1) When there is access to the library from other PCs on the network, the bookmarks can also be seen from these PCs.
2) When you copy the library, the applied bookmarks are included automatically.
Hierarchical displaying of symbols in the Symbol menu
In Automation, the symbols are placed in different folders, without any hierarchical
structure (see “Bookmarks in the Symbol menu” on page 143 also).
When you click the Symbol groups button in the Symbol menu, you get the
option of creating your own hierarchical structure, which can make it easier for you
to find the symbols. You then enter the folder Symbol Grp, which is placed under
Pcselcad\Symbol:
Here you can create your own grouping of the symbols, which you already have
access to.
This is done by first creating a structure of
folders with relevant names. In these folders, you create the so-called groups, and
it is in these groups that you can place the
symbols. Please note, that it is not possible to place the symbols in a folder, they
can only be placed in a group.
Example on creating a hierarchical
structure
1) Create the first folder: Right-click on
the folder Symbol Grp, and select
Add folder. Type in the folder name
Contacts, and click OK.
2) Create sub folders: Right-click on
the folder Contacts, and create the sub folder Make, just like you created the
first folder. Under the Contacts folder, you also create the sub folders Break
and Switch.
Automation 12.0
Page 144
Symbols
3) Create a group: Right-click on the folder Switch and select Add group. Type
in the group name 1P, and click OK. In this group 1P, you can now place symbols.
SYMBOLS ARE NOT PLACED DIRECTLY IN THE GROUPS
THE SYMBOLS ARE NOT PLACED DIRECTLY IN THE CREATED GROUPS. IN
STEAD, A LINK (OR A REFERENCE) IS CREATED TO THE FOLDER WHERE THE
SYMBOL IS PLACED IN THE SYMBOL MENU. WHEN A SYMBOL IS CHANGED
VIA THE EDIT SYMBOL FUNCTION, THE SYMBOLS ARE THEREFORE AUTOMATICALLY CHANGED IN ALL THE GROUPS, WHICH REFERS TO THE THE EDITED
SYMBOL.
THE SAME SYMBOL CAN APPEAR IN DIFFERENT GROUPS.
You have now created a hierarchical structure, containing a group, in which you
can place symbols.
Placing symbols in a hierarchical structure
To place symbols in a group in the hierarchical structure, do this:
1) Select the group in the left side of the Symbol menu.
2) Right-click in the right side, and select Add symbol:
1) Select group
2) Right-click and select Add symbol
3) The dialog box Get symbol is now displayed: Select the folder where the
symbol is placed, by clicking on the folder in the left side of the window.
Automation 12.0
Page 145
Symbols
4) Now find the symbol in the right side of the window, and double-click on the
symbol to add it to the group. You can also drag the symbol from the Get
symbol window, and place it in the group:
4) Double-click on
the symbol, or drag
it into the group
3) Find the folder
where the symbol
is placed
Remove symbol from group
If you wish to remove a symbol from a group, right-click on the symbol, and select
Remove symbol.
Entering the database from the Symbol menu
To find symbols in the database which has attached symbols of a specific type, do
the following:
1) Enter the Symbol menu.
2) Find the desired symbol, and click on it.
3) Click on the Database button, and you enter the Database menu.
In the database you now see all the components which has the selected symbol as
the first symbol in the Symbol field in the database. — See “Database settings” on
page 598 and/or the PC|SCHEMATIC Database manual.
— Read more about fetching symbols via the database in “Fetching symbols from
the database” on page 147.
Creating symbols or Editing existing from the Symbol menu
To create a new symbol, click on the Create new symbol button.
When you wish to edit an existing symbol, click on it in the Symbol menu, and
click on the Edit symbol button.
— Read more about this in “Creating Symbols” on page 676.
Automation 12.0
Page 146
Symbols
3. Fetching symbols from the database
If you already know which components you are going to use, you can fetch the
symbol directly from the database.
Entering the database
Click the Symbols button, press down <Ctrl> and click the Symbol menu button.
You then enter the database directly, if it is on (See “Using the database” on
page 561 for how to turn a database on). You can also press the short-cut key [d].
Choose e.g.
Fabricate
Select
component
group
Components
Searching
and navigation
OPTIONS IN THE DATABASE MENU
— SELECTING A SYMBOL IN THE DATABASE ..................................................(P. 147)
— PLACING SELECTED SYMBOLS FROM THE DATABASE .................................(P. 148)
— DISPLAY THE PICKMENU FOR THE COMPONENT AGAIN ...............................(P. 148)
Selecting a symbol in the database
Click on a folder, for instance Automatic switches / connection material, and
choose e.g. a Fabricate in the upper right-hand corner of the dialog box, and
select a component.
Select for instance the component with EAN number 4022903075387 — as displayed above. Click OK.
— Read more about searching in the Database menu in “Using the database” on
page 561.
Automation 12.0
Page 147
Symbols
Placing the selected symbols from the database
A special pickmenu, containing all the electrical symbols for the component, now
appear on the screen.
If the component consists of just one symbol, you automatically get this symbol in
the cross hairs.
Otherwise, click on the symbol you want to use, and place it where you want it.
When you click on a symbol, the pickmenu disappear automatically.
Displaying the pickmenu for the component again
To make the pickmenu reappear, choose Functions => Show available again or
press the short-cut key [Ctrl+F9]. Please refer to “The function Show available” on
page 224 for further details.
— See also “The function Show available window” on page 226.
4. Typing in the symbol file name directly
When you have activated Symbols and press the short-cut key [k], you enter this
dialog box:
Type in the file name of the symbol you want, and press <Enter>. The program now
search the contents of the folder you used last time you used the Symbol menu. If
the program does not find the symbol there, the program searches the symbol
libraries with alias — as described in “Show directory alias” on page 820.
If the program can not find a matching symbol, you will enter the Symbol menu. If
there exists a symbol in the Symbol menu whose name starts with the text you
typed in, it will be selected.
— In “Automatic creation of symbols” on page 190 you can see how to create symbols directly from this dialog box.
Automation 12.0
Page 148
Symbols
5. Typing in the Article Number directly
When you have activated Symbols and choose Functions => Database => Find
Article — or press the short-cut key [v] — you enter this dialog box:
Here you type in as much you can remember of the article number, and click OK.
You then enter the database, which displays all components having an article number matching what you typed in.
If you typed in 40 — as in the figure above — the database will look like this:
Click on the desired component, and click OK. You now get the electrical symbol
for the component in the cross hairs — or a pickmenu containing all electrical symbols for the component.
If you type in a complete article number, you get the symbol directly in the cross
hairs without entering the database menu.
Automation 12.0
Page 149
Symbols
6. Typing in the Symbol Type directly
When you have activated Symbols and choose Functions => Database => Find
Type — or press the short-cut key [b] — you enter this dialog box:
Here you type in as much you can remember of the symbol type, and click OK.
You then enter the database, which displays all components having a symbol type
matching what you typed in.
If you typed in S you get a list of all components in the database of a type starting
with S — similar to explained above. Click on the desired component, and click
OK. You now get the electrical symbol for the component in the cross hairs, or a
pickmenu containing all electrical symbols for the component.
If you type in a complete type specification, you get the symbol directly in the cross
hairs without entering the database menu.
UPPER AND LOWER CASE CHARACTERS IN THE DATABASE
WHEN YOU TYPE IN THE SYMBOL TYPE, THE PROGRAM DISTINGUISHES BETWEEN UPPERCASE AND LOWERCASE LETTERS WHEN YOU ARE APPLYING A
DATABASE FORMAT, WHICH IS ABLE TO MAKE THIS DISTINCTION.
IF FOR INSTANCE YOU ARE USING AN ACCESS DATABASE, THERE WILL BE
NO DISTINCTION BETWEEN UPPER AND LOWER CASE CHARACTERS.
THE DBASE FORMAT, ON THE OTHER HAND, MAKES THIS DISTINCTION.
Automation 12.0
Page 150
Symbols
PLACING
AND
NAMING
SYMBOLS
When you have got a symbol in the cross hairs — using one of the ways mentioned
in “Fetching symbols” on page 135 — you can place it by clicking where you wish
to place it on the drawing.
When you place the symbol, you will automatically be asked about the Component data in the following dialog box:
When the component has an attached reference designation, it is displayed here
Reference designations and sub
names are edited
here
In the dialog box Component data above you type in the component name, and
other relevant information. — Please refer to “Texts connected to symbols” on
page 104 for details about the contents of these text fields.
If you have selected the symbol via the database, all the fields are filled out automatically — except for the symbol/component name.
Click OK when you are satisfied with the settings, or click Cancel to cancel the
changes in the contents of the dialog box.
Press <Esc> to remove the symbol from the cross hairs.
CHANGES CAN BE TRANSFERRED TO ALL SYMBOLS FOR THE COMPONENT
WHEN TEXT PARAMETERS ARE CHANGED IN THE DIALOG BOX COMPONENT
DATA, THE MESSAGE ALL=CHANGE ALL SYMBOLS FOR THE COMPONENT IS
DISPLAYED IN THE UPPER-LEFT CORNER OF THE DIALOG BOX.
IF YOU THEN CLICK THE ALL BUTTON IN THE DIALOG BOX, THE CHANGES IN
THE FIELDS NAME, TYPE, ARTICLE NO, FUNCTION AND THE REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS ARE TRANSFERRED TO ALL THE OTHER SYMBOLS FOR THE
COMPONENT. AT THE SAME TIME ALL SYMBOLS FOR THE COMPONENT ARE
UPDATED FROM THE DATABASE, AS DESCRIBED IN “UPDATE FROM DATABASE WHEN CHANGING SYMBOL ARTICLE NO” ON PAGE 223.
IF YOU CLICK OK, DATA IS ONLY CHANGED FOR THE SELECTED SYMBOL.
Automation 12.0
Page 151
Symbols
Automatic naming of symbols
When you activate the Auto name button, the symbols you place are assigned the
next available symbol name for that type of symbol without entering the Component data dialog box.
The button is located in the Symbol toolbar on the upper part of the screen. — See
“The Symbol toolbar” on page 171.
AUTO NAMING OF SYMBOLS ON AUTOMATIC PROJECT GENERATION
WHEN GENERATING PROJECTS AUTOMATICALLY, THE SYMBOLS IN THE
CREATED PROJECT CAN BE NAMED CONSECUTIVELY AUTOMATICALLY.
— READ MORE ABOUT THIS IN “GENERATING AND UPDATING PROJECTS VIA
EXCEL” ON PAGE 614, “MERGING PROJECTS VIA EXCEL” ON PAGE 625 AND
“AUTO NAME SYMBOLS DURING GENERATION” ON PAGE 630.
How not to enter the dialog box Component data automatically
If you do not want to enter this dialog box each time you place a symbol, you can
disable the function by deselecting Ask for names in Settings => Pointer/
Screen. — See “Pointer/Screen” on page 815.
OPTIONS IN THE DIALOG BOX COMPONENT DATA
— SPECIFYING THE COMPONENT NAME ........................................................(P. 153)
— DISPLAYING/EDITING THE PARTS OF A COMPONENT NAME ........................(P. 154)
— SPECIFYING TYPE AND ARTICLE NO..........................................................(P. 154)
— SPECIFYING FUNCTION ............................................................................(P. 155)
— VISIBLE/INVISIBLE TEXTS ..........................................................................(P. 155)
— THE TAB GENERAL ..................................................................................(P. 155)
— THE TAB REF.DESIGN. .............................................................................(P. 156)
— THE TAB REFERENCE ..............................................................................(P. 157)
— CHANGING CONNECTION DATA.................................................................(P. 157)
— THE TAB SYMBOL DATA ...........................................................................(P. 159)
— COPYING COMPONENT DATA ....................................................................(P. 159)
— COLLECTING INFORMATION FROM THE DATABASE......................................(P. 159)
— ATTACHING UNIT DRAWINGS TO SYMBOLS .................................................(P. 159)
Automation 12.0
Page 152
Symbols
Specifying the Component name
In the Name field in the dialog box Component data you can either type in a
name, or use one of the following options:
BUTTON
FUNCTION
Increase the number in the symbol name by one.
Decrease the number in the symbol name by one.
Gives you the next available symbol name for the
relevant symbol type.
Gives you a list, where you can choose between
the already used symbol names.
Gives you a selected list of symbol names for all
relevant symbols in the actual situation.
Automatic counting in the Component data dialog box
If you press down <Ctrl> when you click on + in the dialog box Component data,
the names of the following symbols of the same type that you place, will be increased by one as you place them in the project.
When this function is activated, you will see a + in front of the Name field in the dialog box.
If you press down <Ctrl> when you click on -, they will automatically be decreased
by one. A - will be displayed in front of Name when this function is activated.
If you press <Ctrl> while clicking on ?, subsequently placed symbols will automatically be assigned the next available symbol name. When this function is activated,
a ? will be displayed in front of the Name field.
Other options for naming symbols
To see how to rename more symbols at the same time, please refer to “Changing
symbol names in an Area” on page 180.
Please note that you can also change the symbol texts directly on the diagram
page, as described in “Editing the symbol texts directly on a Diagram page” on
page 105.
More advanced ways to change texts directly on diagrams are described in "Locking text types" and “Counting on texts” on page 116.
Current path names in symbol names
To include current path names in symbol names automatically, please refer to
“Naming symbols due to page and current path number” on page 370.
Automation 12.0
Page 153
Symbols
Button for Displaying/Editing the parts of a Component name
The text for the Name field in the dialog box Component data is also a button,
which you can click on. When clicking this Name button, you enter the following
dialog box:
Click here and choose
between the applied
reference designations
In this dialog box you can see and edit the different parts of the symbol name:
Name (-), Function (=), Location (+) and Sub name.
— Please also see “The tab Ref.design.” on page 156 and “Sub names on symbols” on page 160.
Options for the Type and Article no fields
For the fields Type and Article no in the dialog box Component data, you can either
type in data, or fetch these via the Used and
Used related buttons.
Here the Used button displays all used types
and article numbers in the project, while the
Used related button displays all used types
and article numbers in the project for symbols of the same type.
In the appearing dialog box you can either
choose type or article number separately, or
both at the same time.
— Article number and type data can also be
transferred automatically when choosing
components via the database, as described in “Fetching symbols from the database” on page 147.
Update from database when changing article number
When changing the Article no for a symbol, all symbols for the component are
updated, if you subsequently select Change all symbols for the component and
click OK in the Component data dialog box. If the new article number exists in the
database, the symbols for the component are also updated with component data
from the database.
The options for how this is done can be specified in Settings => Database =>
Update Components when changing Article No. => Settings, as described in
“Update from Database when changing symbol Article no” on page 223.
— See also “Updating symbols from the database” on page 166.
Automation 12.0
Page 154
Symbols
Options for the Function field
For the Function field in the dialog box Component data, you can either type in
data, or apply the buttons Used, Count up and Count down.
The Used button displays the currently applied texts in the project, while the Count
up / Count down buttons counts up/down on the current function text.
Visible texts
By setting a check mark in the Visible fields, you determine which information will
be displayed in the project. Read more about the texts in this dialog box in “Texts
connected to symbols” on page 104.
Please note that the texts will only be displayed in the project if you have not disabled this in Settings => Text/Symbol defaults — see “Texts displayed in the project
(general setting)” on page 123.
The tab General
On the tab General in the dialog box Component data you can see information
about the symbol, such as the symbol file name, the symbol type, scale, visibility
and rotation angle.
Quantity
The field Quantity is for instance used for single line diagrams (see “Single line
diagrams” on page 397), and specifies how many occurrences of the component
the symbol represents.
For instance this can be used if you need five support symbols and only want to
place one symbol on the drawing. In the project lists, five support symbols will then
be included.
Symbol type
By clicking the down-arrow in the field Symbol type in the dialog box Component
data you can change the symbol type. — Read more about symbol types in “Symbol types” on page 686.
Automation 12.0
Page 155
Symbols
Symbol data in Electrical and Mechanical lists
You can also specify whether the symbol shall be represented in electrical and/or
mechanical lists.
When you select Electrical, the symbol will be represented on terminals-, cablesand PLC lists and in connections list files, if the symbol contains the type of information you choose to include in the various lists.
If you select Mechanical, the symbol will be represented in components- and parts
lists.
When you place a symbol, both Electrical and Mechanical are selected automatically, unless specified otherwise in the symbol definition. — See “Symbol settings:
Advanced” on page 688.
Visible
When Visible is not selected, the symbol is not displayed on print — See “Making
objects invisible” on page 62.
Include in Mechanical Load
If Include in Mechanical Load is selected for the symbol, a mechanical symbol
will be placed for the symbol during mechanical load, if a mechanical symbol exists
for the component in the database.
Please note that this setting is selected by default, and that the setting covers all
symbols for the component.
— Read more about mechanical load in “Mechanical Load from the Database” on
page 616.
The tab Ref.design.
When you use reference designations in the active project, the tab Ref.design. will
also appear in the dialog box Component data.
From here you choose the reference designations for the symbol, as described in
“Reference designations for symbols” on page 336. — Another way of selecting
reference designations for the symbol, is described in “Button for Displaying/Editing the parts of a Component name” on page 154.
— See also “Show full Reference designation” on page 338 and “Individual control
of reference designations with line breaks from Component data” on page 338.
Automation 12.0
Page 156
Symbols
The tab Reference
In Automation all symbols can have attached references. For symbols which does
not have attached references by default, you will therefore find an extra Reference
tab in the dialog box Component data.
— Read more about the use of this tab in “References on symbols” on page 357.
Changing Connection data
If you click on the tab Conns., and click in one of the text fields, you can change
the connection texts for the symbols connection points.
If the connection names are changed in this dialog box, they are set to be visible
automatically.
This can also be done from the dialog box Connection data, as described in
“Symbol Connection points” on page 182.
Changing connection Name from the Component data box
From the dialog box Component data you can edit the symbol connection names
in two ways:
CONNECTION NAMES WITH VARIABLE PART IN THE SYMBOL DEFINITION
If there exists a variable part in the connection name either in the PINDATA information from the database or in the symbol definition — see “Connection data with
Automation 12.0
Page 157
Symbols
a variable part in the name” on page 681 —, there will exist an extra text field in the
dialog box Component data.
Type in the variable part, and
the connection names are updated
Here you can type in the variable part of the connection name. If there is a question mark, this represents one single character. If there is an asterisk, you can
type in all of the connection name. This can for instance be applied for terminal
symbols. — See “Wildcards/jokers” on page 540 for further information about the
wildcards ? and *.
Please note in the figure above that the connection names ?1 and ?2 are both
changed to 61 and 62 respectively, when 6 is written in the text field for the variable
part of the connection name.
When you have selected the text field Variable part of pin name, the buttons
Count up, Count down, and Next free for automatic counting has effect on this
text field:
Click the
+ button
These button functions as described in “Specifying the Component name” on
page 153.
— Please refer to “Symbols with variable connection names” on page 589 and
“Connection data with a variable part in the name” on page 681.
EDITING CONNECTION NAMES DIRECTLY FROM THE NAME FIELD IN COMPONENT DATA
You can also change the connection names directly from the Name field in the
Component data dialog box. If you type in the Name -K1:13,14, the connection
points are named 13 and 14 respectively. The connection names are changed
Automation 12.0
Page 158
Symbols
according to the numbering order of the connection points in the definition of the
symbol. — For further details about this, please refer to “Place connection points”
on page 679.
If the connection names are changed in the Component data dialog box, they are
automatically set to be Visible.
The tab Symbol Data
When a symbol is created containing extra datafields — see “Extra symbol Datafields in symbols” on page 691 — the tab Symbol Data — will also appear.
Click on the tab Symbol Data and type in the relevant values.
When you place a symbol containing datafields of the type Project data or Page
data, which does not exist in the project, you will be asked whether to include
these datafields in the project.
Copying Component data
If you wish to copy component data from one symbol to another, please refer to
“Transfer component data for Symbols” on page 55.
Collecting information from the database
Information about the symbol can be collected directly from the database, which
you enter by clicking Database. Here you find the appropriate component, and
click OK.
When you have selected the symbols for the component from the database, all text
fields, except the Name field, are filled out with information from the database.
— Read more about this in “Using the database” on page 561.
Attaching Unit drawings to Symbols
If you connect a unit drawing to the symbol, you do this by clicking on Unit. This is
elaborated in “Attach a symbol on a diagram to the unit drawing” on page 558.
Automation 12.0
Page 159
Symbols
SUB
NAMES ON SYMBOLS
In Automation sub names on symbols can be handled intelligently.
What is sub names on symbols?
Sub names on symbols are applied where a component contains functions, which
must be identified separately.
This could for instance be the case for a reversing contactor with two coils, where it
must be possible to identify which contacts that are controlled by the individual
coils. The names of the two coils could here be -Q1.Q1 and -Q1.Q2.
Another example could be a push-button with a build-in lamp, where the symbols
could be named -S1.S and -S1.P respectively.
FUNCTIONALLY UNDERSTOOD AS DIFFERENT COMPONENTS
SYMBOLS FOR THE SAME COMPONENT, WHICH HAS DIFFERENT SUB NAMES,
ARE FUNCTIONALLY UNDERSTOOD AS DIFFERENT COMPONENTS IN THE PROJECT, WHILE THEY IN PARTS LISTS ARE UNDERSTOOD AS PARTS OF THE
SAME COMPONENT.
IF A COMPONENT THEREFORE CONTAINS TWO COILS WITH THE NAMES Q1.Q1 AND -Q1.Q2, THESE ARE EACH ASSIGNED THEIR OWN REFERENCE
CROSS IN THE PROJECT, BUT ARE REPRESENTED AS ONE COMPONENT IN
THE PARTS LIST.
Specifying sub names on symbols
To specify a sub name for a symbol, do this:
1) Enter the dialog box Component data for the symbol — e.g. by double-clicking on the symbol.
2) In the dialog box Component data: Click on Name:
2) Click here
3) In the dialog box Name: Click in the field Sub name, and type in a sub name
— or use the buttons Count up, Count down, Next free or Used related to
specify the sub name.
Automation 12.0
Page 160
Symbols
4) Click OK, and click OK in the dialog box Component data.
SUB NAMES CAN ONLY BE SPECIFIED IN THE DIALOG BOX NAME
SUB NAMES CAN ONLY BE SPECIFIED IN THE DIALOG BOX NAME.
THEREFORE, IF YOU WRITE -Q1.1 IN THE FIELD NAME IN THE DIALOG BOX
COMPONENT DATA, THIS IS UNDERSTOOD AS THE COMPONENT NAME, AND
NOT AS A COMPONENT NAME FOLLOWED BY A SUB NAME.
BECAUSE OF THIS, THE SUB NAME IS NOT DISPLAYED IN THE NAME FIELD IN
THE DIALOG BOX COMPONENT DATA.
Sub names can be specified in the database
Sub names can also be specified via the database, as described in “Specifying
symbol sub names from the database” on page 595.
Sub names included in lists
Sub names on components can also be included in all electrical lists. For this purpose, all datafields containing a component name, have included the option With
sub name in the dialog box DataField. — See “Datafields” on page 107.
Automation 12.0
Page 161
Symbols
SYMBOLS
WITH STATES
Symbols can be placed with different states on the project pages,
so that the symbols change appearance when their state number is
changed.
This is only possible for symbols,
which have been designed with
different states. — See how to create symbols with states in “Creating symbols with states” on
page 692.
Select a state for the symbol
When you click to place a symbol
with a special state in the project,
you must select the state in the
Component data dialog box —
see the figure to the right.
Select the state to display
for the symbol
When you subsequently need to
change the symbol state, enter the Component data dialog for the symbol, select
a new state, and click OK.
— Please also see “Symbols with states for single line diagrams” on page 398 and
“Placing symbols with selected states in the pickmenu” on page 176.
SHIFT STATE WITH <SHIFT + SPACEBAR>
WHEN YOU HAVE SELECTED A SYMBOL CONTAINING STATES, YOU CAN SHIFT
BETWEEN THE STATES BY PRESSING <SHIFT> WHILE PRESSING THE
<SPACEBAR>. THIS IS ALSO THE CASE WHEN YOU HAVE THE SYMBOL IN THE
CROSS HAIRS.
Automation 12.0
Page 162
Symbols
MULTIPLACING
SYMBOLS
In Automation it is possible to place multiple symbols of the same kind in one
single operation — for instance when placing terminals.
Do this:
Example:
Place terminal
symbols here
1) Select a symbol, e.g. a terminal
from the pickmenu.
2) Right-click on the page, and
select Start Multiplacement.
(See the figure above).
3) A "line" now emerges from
where you right-clicked, ending
in the cross hairs. Move the cursor so that the line crosses all of
the lines that you wish to place
the symbols on. — See also “Skipping line segments when multiplacing symbols” on page 164.
4) Right-click on the page, and select Execute Multiplacement.
2) Right-click here
4) Right-click here
5) In the dialog box Component data: Specify symbol names and click OK.
— See also “Placing and Naming symbols” on page 151 for how to name
connection names for terminals directly from the Symbol menu.
Automation 12.0
Page 163
Symbols
6) The terminals are now placed with assigned connection names:
Skipping line segments when multiplacing symbols
To skip one or more line segments when multiplacing symbols, do this:
The two lines in the
middle are skipped
1
2
3
4
1) Select a symbol, e.g. a terminal, from the pickmenu. Right-click, and selectStart Multiplacement — see the figure above.
2) Click before the lines you wish to skip.
3) Press <Ctrl> and click after the lines you wish to skip.
4) Right-click after the lines you wish to place symbols on, and select Execute
multiplacement.
— See also “Multiplacing symbols” on page 163.
Automation 12.0
Page 164
Symbols
NAVIGATION
BETWEEN SYMBOLS FOR THE SAME COMPONENT
When you have selected a symbol and choose View => Goto symbol — or if you
right-click on a symbol and choose Goto symbol — you can select which of the
other symbols for the component to jump to in the project:
In the Goto symbol function, you have the following options:
• Mechanical: Hereby you jump to the mechanical drawing, when such a drawing
exist. The mechanical symbol for the component is selected, and the cross
hairs points out the symbol.
• Diagram: The first of the diagram symbols for the component is selected, and
the cross hairs points out the symbol.
• Next: The next diagram symbol for the component is selected, and the cross
hairs points out the symbol.
• Previous: The previous diagram symbol for the component is selected, and the
cross hairs points out the symbol.
• Select: Here a menu containing all symbols for the component is displayed. For
each symbol you see the names of the first two connection points, as well as
the symbol and page type, the page number and reference designation (if
any). When you select a symbol in the menu, the symbol is selected in the
project, and the cross hairs points out the symbol.
JUMPING BETWEEN SYMBOLS BY CLICKING ON REFERENCES ON THE PAGE
PLEASE ALSO SEE “AUTOMATICALLY UPDATED REFERENCES” ON PAGE 355,
IN PARTICULAR “AUTOMATIC JUMP BETWEEN REFERENCES ON DOUBLECLICK” ON PAGE 355. HERE YOU SEE HOW TO JUMP BACK AND FORTH BETWEEN THE SYMBOLS FOR THE COMPONENT, BY DOUBLE-CLICKING ON REFERENCES PLACED NEXT TO THE SYMBOLS ON THE PROJECT PAGES.
Automation 12.0
Page 165
Symbols
UPDATING
SYMBOLS FROM THE DATABASE
To make sure that e.g. the type texts and/or the connection names for the symbols
for a component — or for all symbols on a page or in the project — matches the
given information for the specified EAN numbers in the database, do the following:
UPDATING SYMBOLS WHEN CHANGING ARTICLE NUMBERS
WHEN CHANGING THE ARTICLE NUMBER FOR A SYMBOL, ALL SYMBOLS FOR
THE COMPONENT CAN ALSO BE UPDATED FROM THE DATABASE.
— SEE “UPDATE FROM DATABASE WHEN CHANGING SYMBOL ARTICLE NO”
ON PAGE 223 AND “UPDATE FROM DATABASE WHEN CHANGING ARTICLE
NUMBER” ON PAGE 154.
1) Select the symbol(s) you wish to update from the database. If no symbols
are selected, all symbols in the project — or on the selected page — can be
updated.
2) Choose Functions => Database => Update from Database.
3) You now enter the dialog box Update from Database:
Automation 12.0
Page 166
Symbols
Here you have the following options:
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
UPDATE ONLY
THIS OPTION IS ONLY DISPLAYED WHEN YOU HAVE NOT
SELECTED ANY SYMBOLS ON THE PROJECT PAGE.
WHEN YOU SELECT THIS OPTION, ONLY THE SYMBOLS ON THE
PAGE ARE UPDATED (AS WELL AS ALL RELATED COMPONENTS IN
THE PROJECT).
WHEN YOU DO NOT SELECT THIS OPTION, ALL COMPONENTS IN
THE PROJECT ARE UPDATED.
COMPONENTS ON
THE CURRENT
PAGE
TYPE TEXTS
YOU CAN HERE CHOOSE EITHER DO NOT UPDATE, UPDATE MISSING ONLY OR UPDATE ALL.
FUNCTION TEXTS
IF YOU IN THE DATABASE SETTINGS HAVE SPECIFIED THAT THE
PROGRAM SHALL TRANSFER CONTENTS TO THE FUNCTION FIELD
FOR SYMBOLS, YOU WILL ALSO GET THE OPTIONS DO NOT
UPDATE, UPDATE MISSING ONLY AND UPDATE ALL FOR FUNCTION TEXTS.
(THIS IS SPECIFIED IN SETTINGS => DATABASE => DATABASE
SETUP => COMPONENT DATA IN THE FUNCTION FIELD — SEE
“TRANSFERRING ARTICLE DATA TO SYMBOLS AND LINES” ON
PAGE 600).
UPDATE CONNEC-
UPDATES ALL CONNECTION POINTS, SO THAT THEY ARE ASSIGNED THE CONNECTION POINT NAMES DESCRIBED IN THE DATABASE.
TION POINTS
CHECK FOR CORRECT SYMBOLS
ISSUES A WARNING FOR EACH PLACE ANOTHER SYMBOL HAS
BEEN USED, THAN THE ONE SPECIFIED IN THE DATABASE FOR
THE ARTICLE NUMBER, AND FOR EACH PLACE THERE E.G. HAS
BEEN USED A BREAK CONTACT TOO MUCH, COMPARED TO
WHICH FUNCTION THE COMPONENT CONTAINS ACCORDING TO
THE DATABASE.
FOR SECURITY REASONS, YOU SUBSEQUENTLY HAVE TO MAKE
THE NECESSARY CHANGES MANUALLY.
CHECK FOR
UNKNOWN ARTICLE
NO.
CHECK FOR MISSING ARTICLE NO.
ISSUES A WARNING FOR EACH PLACE ARTICLE NUMBERS HAVE
BEEN USED, WHICH DOES NOT EXIST IN THE DATABASE.
FOR SECURITY REASONS, YOU SUBSEQUENTLY HAVE TO MAKE
THE NECESSARY CHANGES MANUALLY.
ISSUES A WARNING FOR EACH PLACE NO ARTICLE NUMBERS
HAVE BEEN SPECIFIED.
FOR SECURITY REASONS, YOU SUBSEQUENTLY HAVE TO MAKE
THE NECESSARY CHANGES MANUALLY.
Select the desired settings, and click OK.
4) The type texts for the symbols and/or connection names are now updated,
and you get a status for the update. Here you can click on each individual
warning in the window, and the program points out the symbol in the project.
The window remains on the screen until you click the Close button in the
upper-right corner.
Automation 12.0
Page 167
Symbols
MOVING
AND
DELETING
PLACED SYMBOLS
In the following it is described how to move and delete symbols in Automation.
You can also cut and paste symbols, as described in “Cutting and Pasting areas”
on page 239.
Deleting a placed symbol
You can delete a placed symbol in two different ways:
a) Deleting a symbol and Redrawing the lines
1) Click the Symbols button, and press <Esc> to deselect the Pencil.
2) Click the Delete button, and the dialog box Delete is displayed:
Here you see how many components
are found with this name in the project
The number of symbols that
will be deleted, if you choose
Name
The number of symbols that
will be deleted, if you choose
Component
3) You now have the following options:
Click on Symbol: Only the selected symbol is deleted.
Click on Component: All symbols for the selected component is deleted (in
the figure above, you can see that the physical terminal, from which the symbol is selected, consists of two symbols).
Click on Name: All symbols with this name are deleted (the terminal row in
the figure above consists of 2 physical components, represented by 12 symbols in the project).
Click Cancel: No action is taken.
— If you select Close lines, the lines are closed for all deleted symbols —
whenever this is possible. If you do not select Close lines, the lines are parked.
The symbol is now deleted, and the line which the symbol was placed on, is now
closed — if this is possible.
b) Deleting a symbol and Parking the lines
1) Click on the Symbols button —to start working with symbols.
Automation 12.0
Page 168
Symbols
2) Press down <Ctrl> and click the Delete button: You are now asked whether
to delete all symbols with the current symbol name: Answer Yes or No.
The symbol is now deleted, and the lines which the symbol was connected to, are
parked.
a) Click on the
Delete button
b) Press down <Ctrl> and
click the Delete button
Deleting more than one symbol
You can also delete more than one symbol at the same time, by selecting the symbols at the same time — as described in “Changing symbol names in an Area” on
page 180 — and then delete them as described above.
Moving a placed symbol
You can move a placed symbol in two different ways:
a) Moving a symbol with Connected lines
1) Click on the Symbols button — to start working with symbols.
2) Click on the symbol, press down the mouse button, and drag the symbol to a
new location.
The symbol is now moved, and is still connected to the same lines as before.
b) Moving a symbol and Parking the connected lines
1) Click on the Symbols button — to start working with symbols.
2) Press down the <Ctrl> key, and drag the symbol to a new location.
Automation 12.0
Page 169
Symbols
The symbol is now moved, and the lines which it was previously connected to, now
becomes connected.
a) Drag the symbol to
a new location
b) Press down <Ctrl>
and drag the symbol
to a new location
Moving more symbols at the same time
You can also move more symbols at the same time by selecting the relevant symbols — as described in “Changing symbol names in an Area” on page 180 — and
then move them as described above.
Moving symbols with overlapping connection points
When two symbols are placed so that their connection points are connected
directly, and one of the symbols are moved, a connecting line is automatically
drawn between the two previously connected connection points.
Automation 12.0
Page 170
Symbols
THE SYMBOL
TOOLBAR
When you have selected a symbol, you get information about the symbol in the
symbol toolbar:
T: The file name of the symbol you last had in the cross hairs
N: The name of the currently selected symbol
S: The scale of the symbol
Automatic naming of symbols
When the Auto Name button is activated, symbols are automatically assigned the
next available symbol name when placed in the project.
The automatic naming function can also be started/stopped by choosing Functions => Auto Name.
Scaling symbols
If you want to scale one or more symbols up or down, you can
use Symbol scale. You can scale a symbol by picking a scale
factor from the drop down list and press <Enter>, or type in a
value and press <Enter>. This can be done either when you have got the symbol in
the cross hairs, or by selecting the symbol(s), typing in a value and then click the
Transfer properties button. Symbol scale is rarely used in electrical diagrams (not
standard).
Read more about scaling symbols in “Symbol settings: Advanced” on page 688.
Mirroring symbols
Select a symbol, click the Mirror symbol vertically button, and the symbol will
mirrored vertically. Or click the Mirror symbol horizontally button, and the symbol
will be mirrored horizontally.
Rotating symbols
By clicking the Rotate symbol button, you can rotate the selected symbol — see
“Rotating a selected object” on page 52.
Choose symbol type in an area on the screen
When you are working with symbols, and mark up an area on the screen using the
mouse, you can specify which of the symbols in the area to select. Do the following:
1) Choose which type of symbols to select: AUTO (= the most common symbols in the area), Symbols (all symbols, which are not wire numbers or signals), Signals, Wire numbers or All (all symbols of any type in the area).
2) Select the area using the mouse, and release the mouse button.
Automation 12.0
Page 171
Symbols
The selected symbols in the area are now selected.
1) Choose symbol type
3) The selected type of symbols are selected in the area
2a) Click here
2b)Press down the mouse button and
drag the mouse cursor over the screen
Selecting symbols using Select all or by selecting in areas
When you choose Edit => Select All => Everything on page (short-cut key
[Ctrl+a]), or when you select symbols in an area, all symbols in the area becomes
selected, no matter the type.
Automation 12.0
Page 172
Symbols
ADAPTING
THE
PICKMENU
In the pickmenu you can place the symbols you use the most for easy access.
Below the following aspects are elaborated,
— See how to fetch symbols — and other drawing objects — from the pickmenu in
“Fetching symbols from the Pickmenu” on page 136.
The pickmenu can also contain line types, text types and arcs. — Read more about
this in “Lines in the Pickmenu” on page 71, “Texts in the Pickmenu” on page 122
and “Circles / Arcs in the Pickmenu” on page 97.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— PLACING SYMBOLS IN THE PICKMENU .......................................................(P. 173)
— PLACING SYMBOLS IN THE PICKMENU WITH COMPONENT DATA ..................(P. 173)
— INSRETING A SYMBOL/DRAWING OBJECT IN ALL PICKMENUS .......................(P. 173)
— CREATING A NEW MENU IN THE PICKMENU ................................................(P. 175)
— SPECIFYING COMPONENT DATA IN THE PICKMENU .....................................(P. 175)
— PLACING SYMBOLS IN THE PICKMENU VIA THE DATABASE...........................(P. 176)
— PLACING SYMBOLS WITH SELECTED STATES IN THE PICKMENU ..................(P. 176)
— RIGHT-CLICKING IN THE PICKMENU ...........................................................(P. 178)
Placing symbols in the pickmenu
To place a symbol directly in an empty cell in the pickmenu, you have to have a
symbol in the cross hairs, and then click inside an empty cell in the pickmenu. You
can fetch the symbol from either the Symbol menu or from a drawing.
Or, you can right-click inside an empty cell in the pickmenu and choose Place
symbol, which brings you into the Symbol menu, where you click your way to the
symbol you want to place in the pickmenu, and click OK.
Include component data when inserting a symbol in the pickmenu
When you hold a symbol in the cross hairs, and press down <Ctrl> while placing
the symbol in the pickmenu, the component data is also transferred to the symbol
in the pickmenu.
Inserting a Symbol / Drawing object in all
Pickmenus
Displayed in
all pickmenus
To insert one or more drawing object(s) to be displayed
in all pickmenues, do the following:
Displayed in selected
pickmenu only
Automation 12.0
Page 173
Symbols
1) Right-click on the pickmenu, select Properties, and you enter the dialog box
Pickmenu properties:
2) Correct the number of fixed cells
2) Set the number of fixed cells, click OK, and the new cell(s) are displayed:
Place a new symbol
/ drawing object
3) Place a new symbol / drawing object in the cell, as described in “Placing
symbols in the pickmenu” on page 173 or “Include component data when
inserting a symbol in the pickmenu” on page 173.
4) The symbol is now represented in all pickmenues.
Removing fixed cells from the pickmenues
To remove a number of symbols from being displayed in all pickmenues, right-click
on the pickmenu, select Properties, and reduce the number of Fixed Cells to
desired number of cells. Please note that the right-most fixed cells are removed
first.
Automatic popup of submenus in the pickmenu
You can specify whether to display a popup menu for symbols with states (see
“Symbols with states” on page 162) or for symbols with multiple sets of article data
attached (see “Symbols with multiple sets of data in the Pickmenu” on page 137),
when you let the mouse rest over the symbol in the pickmenu.
To do this, right-click in the pickmenu, and
choose Properties. You then enter the dialog box Pickmenu properties, where you
select Automatic popup of submenus.
Under Popup delay you can specify
whether the popup menu appears instantly,
when the mouse cursor rests over a symbol with states / sets of atricle data, or
Automation 12.0
Page 174
Symbols
whether to insert a delay before the popup menu appears. To insert a delay has the
advantage that submenus are not displayed when the mouse cursor just passes
the pickmenu, in order to make selections in other of the program menus or toolbars.
When Automatic popup of submenus is not activated, small buttons are displayed in the pickmenu in
the relevant cells. When you click this button, the submenu is displayed.
Click for submenu
Creating new menus in the Pickmenu
To create a new menu in the pickmenu, do the following:
1) Right-click on a cell in the pickmenu (and not one of the tabs), and select
Create new Menu.
2) The menu is now created: Right-click on a cell in the pickmenu (and not one
of the tabs), and select Properties.
3) In the dialog box Pickmenu properties: Name the menu, and click OK.
Deleting a menu
To delete a menu, do the following:
1) Select the menu by clicking on the tab for the menu at the bottom of the pickmenu.
2) Right-click on a cell in the pickmenu (and not on one of the tabs), select
Delete Menu, and answer OK to delete the menu.
Adding component data to symbols in the pickmenu
You can attach multiple sets of component data to the symbols in the pickmenu.
To do this, right-click on a symbol in the pickmenu and choose Component Article
Data. You then enter the Component data dialog box:
Here you have the following options:
Automation 12.0
Page 175
Symbols
Create a new line with component data
Click the Plus button. In the new empty line you can either type in component data
by clicking in the relevant fields, or click the DB button to enter the Database menu
to select a component. — You can read more about the Database menu in “About
the Database menu” on page 565.
When you have filled out a component line in the dialog box, and then click the DB
button, you are asked whether to overwrite the selected line, when returning from
the database. You also get the option of choosing Add, to create a new line with
component data.
Deleting a line with component data
Click on the line you wish to delete, and then click the Minus button.
Multiple symbols of the same kind in the pickmenu
Placing multiple symbols of the same kind in the pickmenu, is also an option. When
you place a symbol which exists in the pickmenu already, you are informed about
this.
When you let the mouse cursor rest over one of the symbols in the pickmenu, the
symbol title is displayed both below the symbol (as a hint), and at the bottom of the
screen.
Placing symbols in the pickmenu using the database
It is also an option to place a symbol in the pickmenu using the database. When
you right-click on an empty cell in the pickmenu, and choose Place symbol, you
enter the Symbol menu, where you click on the Database button in the dialog box.
You now enter the database, where you choose the desired component, and click
OK. The symbol and its attached component data is hereby being transferred to
the pickmenu.
If the component contains more than one symbol, the first of its symbols is placed
in the pickmenu. — See “The function Show available” on page 224.
Placing symbols with selected states in the pickmenu
You can also place symbols, with a specified state selected, in the symbol toolbar.
To transfer the selected state to the symbol toolbar, press down <Ctrl> when clicking the symbol in the symbol toolbar.
— Read more about symbols with states in “Symbols with states” on page 162 and
“Creating symbols with states” on page 692.
Automation 12.0
Page 176
Symbols
Placing sub drawings in the Pickmenu
In order to place sub drawings in the Pickmenu, this is required:
1) Use a database for Automation, which contains a field for sub drawings.
2) A unique article number must be created for each sub drawing, that you wish
to place in the Pickmenu.
3) The article number for each individual sub drawing in the database must
contain a link to the sub drawing, that you wish to place in the Pickmenu. —
See how to do this in “URL links” on page 610, especially “Example for subdrawings” on page 611.
In order to place a sub drawing in the Pickmenu, do this:
1) Place a symbol in the Pickmenu.
2) Right-click on the symbol in the Pickmenu, and choose Component Article
Data.
3) In the dialog box Component data: Click the Database button.
4) In the Database menu: Select the article number for the sub drawing and
click OK.
5) In the dialog box Component data: Click OK.
The sub drawing can now be placed in projects via the Pickmenu, as described in
“Sub drawings in the Pickmenu” on page 139.
THE RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE FOR SUB DRAWINGS
YOU CAN READ MORE ABOUT SUB DRAWINGS IN THE CHAPTER “SUB DRAWINGS” ON PAGE 244. THERE YOU CAN ALSO READ ABOUT THE RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE FOR PLACING SUB DRAWINGS USING THE SUBDRAWINGS
TAB IN THE EXPLORER WINDOW.
Automation 12.0
Page 177
Symbols
Right-clicking in the pickmenu
To the left in the pickmenu title bar the name of the
menu is displayed. To the right there are two
arrows, with which you can scroll back and forth
between the various pickmenus.
If the active pickmenu contains more symbols than
can be shown at a time, there will also be a scroll
bar at the bottom of the pickmenu.
Insert new cell
Right-click on a filled out cell in the pickmenu,
choose Insert Cell, and an empty cell is inserted
where you right-clicked.
Delete cell
Right-click on a cell and choose Delete Cell. The
cell is now deleted. This goes for empty cells as
well cells containing symbols.
Create new menu
Right-click on the pickmenu, and choose Create new Menu.
Give a menu a title
Right-click and choose Properties, and type in a title for the active pickmenu. Here
you can also determine the size of the pickmenu on the screen. Click OK. The title
can be seen after the number of the pickmenu.
Go to a specific pickmenu
Right-click and choose Go to Menu. You now get a survey of the menus, containing their numbers and titles. Click on the menu you wish to use.
Delete a menu
Right-click and choose Delete Menu. The displayed pickmenu — and all of its
symbols — will be deleted.
Automation 12.0
Page 178
Symbols
Information about the symbol
Right-click on the symbol in the pickmenu and choose Symbol information.
Automation 12.0
Page 179
Symbols
CHANGING
SYMBOL NAMES IN AN
AREA
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— CHANGING MORE THAN ONE SYMBOL NAME ..............................................(P. 180)
— THE NAMING ORDER OF SYMBOLS ............................................................(P. 181)
— OTHER OPTIONS......................................................................................(P. 181)
Changing more than one symbol name
When you want to change more than one symbol name at the same time, you can
select the symbols by dragging a window around them, right-click inside the
selected area, and choose Component data.
You then enter the Component data dialog box.
In the Component data dialog box you apply the automatic counting facility by
typing in the name of the first symbol, pressing <Ctrl> while clicking on ?, and then
Automation 12.0
Page 180
Symbols
click OK. — Please refer to “Automatic counting in the Component data dialog box”
on page 153 for further details.
The symbol names are now changed. Click outside the selected area to deselect
the symbols.
The naming order of the symbols
It is important how you select the symbols. If you click in the left-hand side of the
screen, and then drag a window to the right, the numbering of the symbols will be
carried out from left to right.
If you select the window from right to left, the symbol names are named from the
right to the left. Thus, the counting direction follows the movement you make when
you select the window.
If you select the symbols by <Ctrl>-clicking, the symbols are named in the order
you selected them.
Other options
See how to do the same for connection points in “Choosing connection points in
Areas” on page 184.
You can also change the symbol texts directly on the diagram page, as described
in “Editing the symbol texts directly on a Diagram page” on page 105.
Other advanced ways to change texts directly on diagrams are described in “Locking text types” on page 115 and “Counting on texts” on page 116.
RENAME SYMBOLS - OR INSERT SYMBOL NAMES
IN “RENAME SYMBOLS” ON PAGE 278 YOU CAN SEE HOW TO RENAME
SELECTED SYMBOLS — OR HOW TO RENAME ALL PROJECT SYMBOLS.
IF YOU NEED TO INSERT NEW/AVAILABLE SYMBOL NAMES OR CONNECTION
NAMES, YOU CAN SEE HOW TO DO THIS IN “INSERT NEW SYMBOL NAMES OR
CONNECTION NAMES” ON PAGE 284.
Automation 12.0
Page 181
Symbols
SYMBOL CONNECTION
POINTS
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— CONNECTION POINTS FOR SYMBOLS CAN BE SELECTED.............................(P. 182)
— SPECIFYING CONNECTION DATA ...............................................................(P. 182)
— EDITING CONNECTION TEXTS FROM COMPONENT DATA DIALOG BOX ..........(P. 183)
— EDIT NEXT/PREVIOUS FOR CONNECTION POINTS ......................................(P. 183)
Connection points for symbols can be selected
The connection points for the symbols can
be selected as well as the symbols themselves.
On the figure to the right, a connection point
of a terminal symbol is selected.
Specifying Connection data
If you right-click on a symbols connection point and then choose Connection data,
you can change the connection data for the connection point — e.g. the connection
name.
Symbol name
Connection name
— If you accidentally select the whole symbol, and not just the connection point,
just right-click on the connection point again.
In this dialog box you can type in connection data, and specify which connection
point texts is visible on the diagram. The connection point texts are described in
“Connection point texts” on page 106.
Automation 12.0
Page 182
Symbols
The Visible setting only applies for the selected connection
point. The texts are only visible if they are allowed to be so by
the over-all visibility settings for connection texts. Please refer
to “Texts displayed in the project (general setting)” on
page 123 for further details.
The function of the four buttons in the dialog box, is described
in “Specifying the Component name” on page 153.
With reference
— See “With reference” on page 681.
No dot generation
— See “No dot generation” on page 681.
Connection data as Info Tips
When the cross hairs is placed above a connection point, the connection data for
the connection point is displayed as an Info Tip.
Connection name displayed in the toolbar Symbols
When a connection point is selected, the connection name
is displayed in the symbol name field in the toolbar Symbols.
This also applies for invisible connection names.
Editing connection texts from the Component data box
When you click on the Conns. tab in the Component data dialog box, you can edit
the connection texts by clicking in the relevant fields, and then type in the texts. —
Please refer to “Changing Connection data” on page 157.
Edit Next/Previous for Connection points
When you have selected a connection point, you can jump back and forth between
the connection points for the same symbol, by pressing [F5] and [F6] — or by
choosing Edit => Next or Edit => Previous. You jump between the connection
points according to their connection numbers.
The function also applies for symbol texts.
Automation 12.0
Page 183
Symbols
CHOOSING
CONNECTION POINTS IN
AREAS
When you have activated the Symbols function, start dragging a window around
an area and press <Ctrl> when releasing the mouse button, you select the connection points in the area. The symbols in the area are not selected.
If you press <Ctrl> and click on connection points outside the area, these will also
be included. If you press <Ctrl> and click on a selected connection point, it
becomes deselected.
Select the connection points by
pressing <Ctrl> when you release
the mouse button
Press <Ctrl> and click on the
unwanted connection points
in the area
When you have selected an area and deselected the unwanted connection points
— as displayed above — you right-click inside the area and choose Connection
data.
Then apply the automatic counting facility by
typing in the first Name (1), pressing <Ctrl>
while clicking on +, and then click OK. The
selected connection points are then renumbered automatically.
— Please refer to “Automatic counting in the
Component data dialog box” on page 153 for
further details.
Then rename the remaining connection
points one by one.
Numbering order for <Ctrl> click
If you select the connection points one by
one by pressing <Ctrl> while clicking on the
connection points, they will be renumbered
according to the order in which you selected
them.
Automation 12.0
Page 184
Symbols
PINSWOP
Letting the connection points of symbols swop places is an option, under the name
pinswop. This can be done within the same symbol, as well as between symbols.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— PINSWOP FOR SYMBOLS WITH TWO CONNECTION POINTS ..........................(P. 185)
— PINSWOP IN AREAS FOR SYMBOLS WITH TWO CONNECTION POINTS ...........(P. 185)
— FREE PINSWOP ........................................................................................(P. 186)
— MOVING CONNECTION POINTS ..................................................................(P. 186)
Pinswop for symbols with two connection points
To perform a pinswop on a symbol with two connection points, you first click the
Symbols button, and right-click on the symbol. Then choose Pinswop, and the
two connection points of the symbol swop places.
Pinswop in Areas for symbols with two connection points
To perform a pinswop on all symbols with two connection points within an area, you
also click on the Symbols button first, select an area, and right-click within the
area. Then choose Pinswop, and the connection points of all symbols with two
connection points within the area swop places.
In this way you can for instance easily change a terminal row, from having the output side turning upwards to downwards. — Please refer to “Creating terminal symbols” on page 697 for further details about the input- and output side of terminals.
The connection points in the area for the symbols not having two connection points
are left unchanged.
The function can also be activated by choosing Edit => Pinswop.
Automation 12.0
Page 185
Symbols
Free Pinswop
Swopping connection points between symbols, and within symbols having more than
two connection points, is also an option.
To do this, you also have to activate the
Symbols button. Then right-click on one of
the two connection points, you want to swop
places.
Now choose Pinswop, and you get a rubber
band in the cross hairs. Then click on the
connection point you want to swop with, and
the connection points swop places.
Please note, that this swopping can be performed within the same symbol, or from one
symbol to another.
Moving connection points
To move a connection point, do this:
1) Activate the Symbols button, right-click on the connection point, and choose
Move.
2) You now get the connection point in the cross hairs: Click where you wish to
place the connection point.
When you move connection points on symbols, connected lines are moved also.
DO NOT MOVE CONNECTION POINTS ON STANDARD SYMBOLS
THE POSSIBILITY TO MOVE CONNECTION POINTS IS DESIGNED FOR SPECIAL
PURPOSES, SUCH AS BLOCK SYMBOLS.
CONNECTION POINTS CAN NOT BE MOVED OUTSIDE THE FRAME OF THE
SYMBOL (DISPLAYED WHEN SELECTING SYMBOLS).
Automation 12.0
Page 186
Symbols
REPLACING
SYMBOLS
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— REPLACING SYMBOLS AUTOMATICALLY .....................................................(P. 187)
— CONNECTION POINTS WHEN REPLACING SYMBOLS ....................................(P. 189)
— TEXT PROPERTIES WHEN REPLACING SYMBOLS .........................................(P. 189)
— REPLACING OLDER VERSIONS OF SYMBOLS ..............................................(P. 189)
Replacing symbols automatically
Automatic replacing of all occurrences of a symbol in a project is also an option.
If you decide to use e.g. an open contact instead of a close contact, you can
replace the symbols in the project.
To do so select one of the open contacts, and choose Functions => Replace
symbol (short-cut key [F4]). You then enter the following dialog box:
Click here to keep
the position of the
function text
Click here to replace all symbols
in the project or
on the page
Choose a symbol
in the Symbolmenu
Click here to select
the symbol
When you enter the dialog box, it is presumed that you wish to keep the contents/
value of the symbol texts from the old symbol, while the positions of the texts follows the text-positions for the new symbol.
The symbol text Value when replacing
When you set a check mark for a Value for some of the texts for the present symbol, these texts are not replaced when you change symbol.
Automation 12.0
Page 187
Symbols
The I/O status and Symboltype for the symbol
By selecting/deselecting I/O status you specify whether to keep the I/O status for
the old symbol, or to use the I/O status for the new symbol.
By selecting/deselecting Symboltype, you specify whether to keep the symboltype
for the old symbol, or to use the symboltype for the new symbol.
The symbol text Position when replacing
You can for instance enable Position for the function text of the present symbol.
This ensures you, that the location and the orientation of the function text remains
unchanged, even though you change symbol.
The symbol text Visibility when replacing symbols
Likewise you can specify whether the selected Visibility shall remain unchanged
for the new symbol, or whether the visibility shall be specified by the symbol definition for the new symbol. — By keeping the visibility for the original symbol when
replacing terminal symbols, you can therefore avoid having to change the visibility
for the names of the terminal symbols after the replacement.
Replace all symbols in the project or on the page
Select Replace all in project in order to replace all symbols, of the selected type,
in the project. If you wish to replace all symbols of the selected type on the active
page in the project, select Replace all on page.
If you do not select any of these options, only the selected symbol will be replaced.
Selecting a new symbol
Click on Select at the bottom of the dialog box, to choose which symbol you wish
to use instead.
You then enter the Symbol menu, where for instance you choose the symbol 0707B02.
1) Find the 60617
folder
2) Type in fx. 07-07B02
3) Click on the symbol
4) Click OK
Click OK. — See “Fetching symbols using the Symbol menu” on page 140.
You now return to the dialog box Replace Symbol, where you click OK.
Automation 12.0
Page 188
Symbols
The symbol(s) have now been replaced in the project.
— Please note, that it is possible to undo the replace symbol function.
Connection points when replacing symbols
If the connection points of the old and the new symbol are not placed on identical
positions, you get a warning:
Click OK. However, you can still choose to replace the symbol(s) by clicking OK in
the Replace Symbol dialog box.
YOU ONLY GET THIS WARNING WHEN THE CONNECTION POINTS ARE CONNECTED ELECTRICALLY. WHEN YOU CLICK OK THE NOT MATCHING CONNECTION POINTS ARE PARKED.
If the new symbol has less connection points than the old one, you get an error
message. If the new symbol has more connection points, this will be accepted
when it has connection points on the same locations as the old one.
Transferring connection point texts when Replacing symbols
For symbols with just one connection point, the Replace symbol function also
transfers connection point texts from the old symbol to the new symbol, when
these connection points does not have the same position.
When the symbols have more than one connection point, and some of these connection points does not have the same positions, the connection point texts are
transferred when the connection points are created with the same name in the
symbol libraries.
Text properties when replacing symbols
The text properties for the symbol texts follows the definition of the new symbol.
Replacing older versions of symbols
Using the Replace symbols function you can replace all the old versions of the
project symbols. You can see that a newer version exists of a symbol, if it has a
question mark (?) in its symbol file name.
Automation 12.0
Page 189
Symbols
AUTOMATIC
CREATION OF SYMBOLS
In Automation it is possible to create rectangular and circular symbols automatically, by entering their dimensions. This can both be done "on the fly" while working
on a project, and by specifying the symbol dimensions via the database.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— AUTOMATIC CREATION OF SYMBOLS — USING THE SYMBOL GENERATOR ...(P. 190)
— AUTOMATIC CREATION OF SYMBOLS — BY SYNTAX ..................................(P. 192)
— SYNTAX FOR DIRECT CREATION OF SYMBOLS ............................................(P. 193)
— AUTOMATIC CREATION OF ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS FROM THE DATABASE .....(P. 194)
— AUTOMATIC CREATION OF MECHANICAL SYMBOLS FROM THE DATABASE ....(P. 194)
When you want Automation to generate symbols for you automatically, while
working on a project, you can do this in two ways:
a) Using the Symbol generator: Read “Automatic generation of symbols —
using the Symbol generator” on page 190. (If you enter the Symbol
generator this way, you can furthermore save the symbol, and continue
working on the symbol, as described in “Creating Symbols” on page 676).
b) By manually typing in the syntax for the appearence of the symbol: Read
“AUTOMATIC CREATION OF ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SYMBOLS - BY SYNTAX” ON
PAGE 192.
Automatic generation of symbols — using the Symbol generator
You can enter the Symbol generator in four different ways:
a) Select Symbols and click the Symbol generator button.
b) Select Functions => Symbol generator.
c) Select Symbols and click the Symbol menu button. In the Symbol menu:
Click the Symbol generator button.
d) When editing symbols: Click the Symbol generator button.
You now enter the Symbol generator.
Options in the Symbol generator
In the Symbol generator you specify the design of the symbol. In the window in
the top-right corner of the dialog box, you can see the symbol, based on the pre-
Automation 12.0
Page 190
Symbols
sent settings. The syntax for the generated symbol is displayed in the title bar for
the dialog box:
Here the syntax for the generated symbol is displayed
Here the symbol is displayed
based on the specified settings
SELECT RECTANGULAR OR CIRCULAR
At the top of the dialog box, you select whether to create a Rectangular or a Circular symbol, and specify Width/Height or Radius.
LINE COLOR AND FILL COLOR
Under Line color, you select which color to use for the lines in the symbol. If you
select Filled, you can also select a fill color.
CONNECTIONS: NUMBER, NAMING AND POSITION
You can place connections to the symbol on the top, at the
bottom, and at the
right and the left side
of the symbol.
All of these places,
you can either specify a number of connections (which
names the connections 1,2,3,...), or specify the names by typing in a name list. — Please remember
to see the selected connections in the upper-right corner of the dialog box.
Automation 12.0
Page 191
Symbols
SPECIFYING A DESIGN CHARACTER
In the right side of the dialog box, you can specify
a designation character for the symbol. Please
note that it is not necessary to place a dash (-)
before the symbol name, because the program
can handle this for you automatically for all symbols in the project. — See “Preceding “-” in symbol names” on page 339.
ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL SYMBOL
By default the symbol is created as an electrical
symbol, but if you select Mechanical symbol, it
is created as a mechanical symbol.
Beyond the different properties connected to
these two different types of symbols, the texts are
placed and oriented differently for the two symbol
types.
POSITION OF CONNECTIONS
Under Position of connections you can choose
between:
- Inside symbol: The connections are placed on the symbol, and the connection
texts are placed inside the symbol.
- Outside symbol: The connections are placed on the symbol, and the connection texts are placed outside the symbol.
- Outside with lines: The connections are placed outside the symbol, with connecting lines to the connections. You can specify the length of the connecting
lines in the field Line length.
Automatic creation of electrical and mechanical symbols - By
syntax
When you need to create a simple symbol quickly, do the following:
1) Click the Symbols button, and press the [k] button. The dialog box Place
Symbol is displayed:
Automation 12.0
Page 192
Symbols
2) Type in the dimensions of the symbol, and the
number of connection points — see “Syntax for
automatic creation of symbols” on page 193.
3) Place the symbol in the project, and you enter
the dialog box Component data.
4) Specify the component data — for instance just
the symbol name — and click OK.
You have now created a symbol, which you have placed directly in the project.
Symbol type for automatically created symbols
Symbols, which are created automatically, are assigned the symbol type Normal.
SYNTAX
FOR AUTOMATIC CREATION OF SYMBOLS
ACCORDING TO IEC / EN STANDARDS
WHEN YOU GENERATE SYMBOLS AUTOMATICALLY ON ELECTRICAL PAGES,
THE IEC / EN STANDARDS FOR PLACING TEXTS ARE APPLIED AUTOMATICALLY.
Two types of symbols can be created directly: Circle- and Box symbols.
Circle symbols
When you type #r40mm, the program creates a circle with radius 40 mm as a symbol.
Box symbols
To create a box symbol with the dimensions 20x30 mm, type #x20mmy30mm.
Specifying connection points
To assign two connection points to the left and to the right, add l2r2 after the physical dimensions of the symbol. The letter l stands for "left", the letter r stands for
"right".
To assign two connection points on each side of the symbol above, you must therefore write #x40mmy50mml2r2.
When you write l2, the counting is done top-down. If you write l-2, the counting is
done bottom-up.
Accordingly, you can write t for "top" and b for "bottom". If you also wish to specify
the connection point names, you can write these in brackets in stead of the number
of connection points.
Thus you can write #x40mmy50mmt(13,21)b(14,22). Hereby you get a symbol
with the dimensions 40x50, with the connection points 13 and 21 on the top, and
the connection points 14 and 22 at the bottom.
Automation 12.0
Page 193
Symbols
Connecting line for connection points
To place a 2,5mm connecting line to the connection
points in the symbol, add a "-" to the end of the format
string.
E.g.:
#x40mmy20mmt2b2-
All connection points are hereby assigned a 2,5mm
connecting line.
Placing the connection point names
If you take no special action, the connection point names are placed outside the
symbol. When you want these to be placed inside the symbol, write i at the end of
the text. If you write #x10mmy20mml2r2i, you get a symbol with two connection
points to the left and two to the right, where the connection point names are placed
inside the symbol.
For symbols placed on mechanical pages, the names are typically placed inside
the symbol, while they are typically placed on the outside for symbols on electrical
pages.
Automatic creation of Electrical symbols via the Database
To create a symbol directly from the database, type in the symbol dimensions in
the PCSTYPE field for the component.
Read more about the syntax in “Syntax for automatic creation of symbols” on
page 193.
Automatic creation of Mechanical symbols via the Database
To any component in the database, you can attach a mechanical symbol. The
name of the file you have saved this symbol in, you can write in the MECTYPE
field.
Creating a Mechanical symbol automatically
When you wish Automation to automatically create a symbol with the dimensions
30x50 mm, you must write #x30mmy50mm in the MECTYPE field. If you in stead
write #r40mm, the program creates a circle with radius40 mm as a mechanical
symbol. Read more about this in “Syntax for automatic creation of symbols” on
page 193.
— Read more about mechanical symbols in “Mechanical symbols” on page 593.
Automation 12.0
Page 194
Symbols
SHOW
NET
If you right-click on a connection point of a symbol — or on a signal symbol — and
choose Show net, you can see which symbols are connected to the same potential.
Wire numbers in the net
It is also specified which connection points on the symbols are connected to the
potential, and the position of the symbols are also displayed.
After the name of the net, the wire numbers in the net are displayed in brackets, in
the title bar of the dialog box.
If you double-click on one of the lines, you return to the diagram, and the cross
hairs point out the location of the connection point of the chosen symbol.
Generate connections lists
To generate a connections list file, choose Lists => Connections List File.
— Read more about generating list files in “Exporting List Files” on page 629.
— See also “Connections list for wire numbering” on page 391.
Automation 12.0
Page 195
Symbols
SIGNAL
SYMBOLS
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— WHAT IS A SIGNAL SYMBOL ......................................................................(P. 196)
— THE APPEARANCE OF SIGNAL SYMBOLS ....................................................(P. 197)
— DESIGNING SIGNAL SYMBOLS ...................................................................(P. 197)
— PLACING SIGNAL SYMBOLS WHEN DRAWING LINES .....................................(P. 197)
— SIGNAL SYMBOLS WITH REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ..................................(P. 200)
— PLACING SIGNAL SYMBOLS ON PARKED LINES ...........................................(P. 201)
— PLACING SIGNAL SYMBOLS DIRECTLY .......................................................(P. 201)
— VARIANT NAMES ON SIGNAL SYMBOLS ......................................................(P. 202)
— INSERT REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ON SIGNALS AUTOMATICALLY ..............(P. 203)
— UNREFERRED SYGNAL SYMBOLS ..............................................................(P. 203)
— IMPLIED SIGNALS FOR TERMINALS AND CABLES .........................................(P. 204)
What is a signal symbol
A special kind of symbols are called signal symbols. They are used when you start
or end a conducting line on a non electrical point in a diagram, or simply wish to
name an electrical potential for easy identification.
A signal symbol can be placed in all electrical points, and the signal symbol specifies an electrical connection.
All signal symbols with the same name are connected electrically
To identify an electrical connection from a point, you place a signal symbol, and
assign a name to this symbol.
The program views all signal symbols with the same signal name as the same
electrical connection (potential). This means that all signal symbols for instance
using the name L1 are connected electrically.
Please note that it is only the name of the potential, that identifies the electrical
connection. This means that you can use the signal symbol itself for different
potentials, if only you remember to assign different names to the signal symbols.
— See “Automatic insertion of electrical potentials” on page 74.
Automation 12.0
Page 196
Symbols
The appearance of signal symbols
Signal symbols can for instance look
as displayed to the right:
Various types of signal symbols are
located on the symbol folder, in the
sub folder MISC.
To distinguish the signal symbols from
other types symbols, they all have
names starting with SG.
Designing signal symbols
See how to design your own signal
symbols in “Creating Signal Symbols”
on page 717.
Placing signal symbols when drawing lines
Activate the Pencil, click on Lines, and make sure the Conducting lines button is
activated (Highlighted).
Then click on the diagram where you want the signal symbol to be located.
You now enter the dialog box Signals:
Parking
If you wish to wait to connect the conducting line, you can park the line. To do this
click on Parking, and then click OK. Hereby you get a conducting line with no electrical connection.
However, this is a temporary solution only, which gives you the option to return
later on, and then assign a name to the signal.
— See how to locate parkings in a project in “Design Check” on page 310.
Automation 12.0
Page 197
Symbols
Placing the signal symbol
If you, on the other hand, wish to place a signal symbol, click on Signal.
SPECIFY SIGNAL NAME
In the field Signal name you can either type in a name, or use one of the following
options:
BUTTON
FUNCTION
INCREASE THE NUMBER IN THE SIGNAL NAME BY
ONE.
DECREASE THE NUMBER IN THE SIGNAL NAME BY
ONE.
GIVES YOU THE NEXT AVAILABLE SIGNAL NAME OF
THE SYMBOL TYPE CHOSEN.
GIVES YOU A LIST, WHERE YOU CAN CHOOSE BETWEEN THE SIGNAL NAMES ALREADY USED IN THE
PROJECT.
GIVES YOU A LIST OF USED VARIANT NAMES FOR
THE SELECTED SIGNAL SYMBOL — SEE “VARIANT
NAMES ON SIGNAL SYMBOLS” ON PAGE 202.
You can also click on the down-arrow in the field Signal name. This gives you the
option to choose between predefined signal names.
— See the section “Frequently used signal symbol Names” on page 720 to see
how you can add names to this list by yourself.
Automation 12.0
Page 198
Symbols
SIGNAL NAMES ASSIGNED FROM FUNCTION TEXT / IO ADDRESS
WHEN YOU START A LINE FROM A CONNECTION POINT, AND LET IT END WITH
A SIGNAL, AN EXTRA BUTTON IS DISPLAYED IN THE SIGNALS DIALOG BOX.
WHEN YOU CLICK THIS BUTTON, THE SIGNAL NAME IS FETCHED FROM THE
FUNCTION TEXT FROM THE CONNECTION POINT, FROM WHICH THE LINE
STARTED:
WHEN THE LINE STARTS FROM A PLC CONNECTION POINT — AS IN THE
FIGURE ABOVE —, YOU CAN THEREFORE EASILY ASSIGN THE ADDRESS FOR
THE PLC CONNECTION TO THE SIGNAL NAME. THE SHORT-CUT KEY FOR
THIS FUNCTION IS <ALT+S>.
SELECT SIGNAL SYMBOL
When you click the up- and down-arrow in the Signal symbol field in the right
hand side of the dialog box, you can scroll between the signal symbols that are
known to the system. The chosen symbol will then be shown in the dialog box.
— See how to place signals in this menu in the section “Frequently used signal
symbols” on page 719.
ROTATE OR MIRROR THE SIGNAL SYMBOL
Below the symbol itself, you can click the buttons Mirror vertically or Rotate to
mirror or rotate the symbol.
SIGNAL SYMBOLS FOLLOWING THE LINE DIRECTION
When you select Place in line direction, the signal symbol will follow the direction
of the line. When you also select Place name on line, the name of the signal symbol will be displayed above the line. The program memorizes the selected settings
for the different signal symbols in the project — for up to 25 different signal symbols.
PAGE REFERENCES ON SIGNAL SYMBOLS
In With reference you can assign the symbol reference texts, that refers to the
other places the same signal symbol is being used.
Automation 12.0
Page 199
Symbols
Selecting Show from/to sets references to the nearest previous and to the next
following page on which the same signal name occur.
Clicking on Show all will show references to all places the same signal name
occurs. The program can handle references of an unlimited length.
When you select Show all and In Column, you can specify the maximum number
of references in each column in the field Max. Number of references pr. column.
If you click in the field Reference text, you can type in the reference text, that will
be displayed in front of the reference — such as Page_.
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ON SIGNAL SYMBOLS
When you wish to include reference designations in the signal name, you can do
two things:
a) Click on Select, and you get the option of selecting references via the dialog
box Reference designations, as described in “Reference designations for
symbols” on page 336, or:
b) Click on the button Insert current page Function/Location aspect for the
fields Function and/or Location. This assigns the function/location aspect to
the signal name.
If you click the Delete button for the fields Function / Location, the displayed function/location aspect is deleted.
If you click on Show full Reference designation, the full reference designation is
displayed for the symbol. If not, only parts of the reference designation different
from the page reference designation, are displayed.
CLICK OK WHEN THE SETTINGS ARE OK
When you are contempt with the settings, click OK, otherwise click Cancel.
Automation 12.0
Page 200
Symbols
Placing signal symbols on parked lines
To get the signal symbol in the cross hairs, click the Symbols button, and fetch a
signal symbol — just like you would fetch any other symbol. Read more about this
in “Fetching symbols” on page 135.
When you have the signal symbol in the cross hairs, you can place it on a parked
line. — See “Parking” on page 197.
When you click on the parking point on the drawing, you enter this dialog box:
Because you have already selected a signal symbol, you are not asked about this
here. Fill out the dialog box following the guidelines given above.
Placing signal symbols directly
You can place a symbol in the cross hairs — for instance via the Symbol menu —
and place it by clicking on the page. This makes you enter the Signal data menu,
which you fill out and click OK.
The program now automatically activate the Lines command, and you get a line in
the cross hairs, starting from the signal symbol.
If you delete the line later on, the signal symbol remains on the page.
Signal symbols can also be placed directly on the connection point of a symbol, or
on a conducting wire.
Automation 12.0
Page 201
Symbols
Variant names on signal symbols
Automation handles variant names on signal symbols:
What are variant names on signal symbols used for?
Variant names on signal symbols are applied for specifying branches of the same
signal.
This being for instance the source point from which three signals with the name L1
branches off. These three branches can for instance be named L1:1, L1:2 and
L1:3.
The program sees these as the same signal.
Furthermore, the signal flow follows the variant names. You can change variant
name on a page, where for instance the name in the left-hand side is L2:4 and in
the right-hand side is L2:5. — See the figure below.
This makes it possible to keep track of the signal flow.
This supports the correct automatic placing of wire numbers for signals, and can
make the diagrams mounting correct, with respect to signals.
Reference to
other project
page (doubleclick to jump)
Supply panel
Using Variant names, you can follow the signal branches in the project
Comments on variant names
Comments can be attached to variant names, as for instance L1:1 (230 VAC).
Show signal
When you select Functions => Show signal, you enter a dialog box from where
you select a signal name according to the same principle as described in “Find all
symbols with identical names” on page 227.
Automation 12.0
Page 202
Symbols
When you have selected a signal name and click OK, the selected signal is displayed in green on all project diagram pages, while everything else is displayed in
red.
To deselect the function, choose Functions => Show signal again.
Insert Reference designations on Signals automatically
When you wish to let Automation insert reference designations on signal symbols
automatically, choose Settings => Project data => Reference designations, and
select Insert Reference designations on Signals.
When you place signal symbols on pages with assigned reference designations,
the signal symbol will then get these reference designations.
When you place signal symbols in areas with assigned reference designations, the
signal symbol will then also get these reference designations.
Insert Reference designations on Signals is by default not selected when installing the program. You can always place reference designations manually.
SIGNAL NAMES WITH REF. DESIGNATIONS ACCORDING TO EN61346
A SEMICOLON (;) IS AUTOMATICALLY PLACED BETWEEN SIGNAL NAMES AND
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS, AS PRESCRIBED IN EN61346.
Unreferenced signal symbols
If you wish to set all unreferenced signal symbol in the project invisible, just choose
Functions => Special Functions => Set unreferenced signal symbols invisible.
— See also “Unreferenced cable symbols” on page 216.
Automation 12.0
Page 203
Symbols
Implicit references for terminal and cable connection points
In some cases references/connections between connection points will be implicit:
Implicit signals for terminals only connected on the internal or external
side
When two terminal symbols with the same names and the same connection
names, both connection points have activated With reference, and both are only
connected in one end, they are understood as two representations of the same
symbol.
References will automatically be displayed for the connection points:
Understood as the
same symbols
References are
inserted
The terminal symbols in the figure above are understood as representations of the
same symbols, because:
1) They have same connection names (1U2, 1V2 and 1W2) for the same terminals (=G1+A2-X4)
2) With reference is activated for the connection points on the terminal symbols, and
Automation 12.0
Page 204
Symbols
3) Both sets of terminals are only connected in one end
To select multiple connection points:
Remember to press <Ctrl> before
releasing the mouse button
Set With reference on the
connection points for both
rows of terminals
Automation 12.0
Page 205
Symbols
Implicit signals on cable wires
When two cable symbols with the same names and the same cable wire names,
and the cable wire connection points for both cables have activated With reference, and the cable wire connection points for both cables are only connected in
one direction, the cable wires for the symbols are understood as two representations of the same cable wires for the same symbol.
Understood as the
same cable wires
Inserted
The cable wires in the figure above are understood as the same symbols, because:
1) They have the same cable wire names (BN, BK and BU) for the same cable
(=G1+A2-W1)
2) With reference is activated for the cable wire connection points for both of
the cable symbols, and
3) Both sets of cable wires are only connected in one direction
Set to With reference
on the connection points
for both cables
Automation 12.0
Page 206
Symbols
TERMINAL
SYMBOLS
When you place terminal symbols, you indicate which connection points are input,
and which are output for the terminal. This is important when you fill out the terminals lists of the project. — Read more about terminals lists in “Creating a Terminals
list” on page 739.
— See “Multi layer terminals” on page 208.
— See “Multiplacing symbols” on page 163.
Input and Output on terminal symbols
On the terminal symbol itself, the output
connection point is solid red.
If you want to change whether a connection point is input or output, you click the
Symbols button, right-click on the connection point, and choose Connection data.
Clicking on the down-arrow in the Main
type field in the Connection data dialog
box, enables you to choose whether the
connection point is of the type input or output — or ext/output, ext/input, int/output or int/input for terminals with additional status PLC, which you can read more
about in “Creating terminal symbols with an additional status” on page 699, “Terminal symbols with additional status PLC” on page 700 in particular.
For terminals Extension is set to TERM — or to TERM/PLC, see “Creating terminal symbols with an additional status” on page 699, “Terminal symbols with additional status PLC” on page 700 in particular.
If you accidentally select the entire symbol instead of the connection point, then
right-click on the connection point once more.
Automation 12.0
Page 207
Symbols
Changing connection names for terminal rows
See “Renumbering pinnumbers for a terminal row using Select name” on
page 229.
Designing terminal symbols
See how to design terminal symbols in “Creating terminal symbols” on page 697.
MULTI
LAYER TERMINALS
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— ON MULTI LAYER TERMINALS ....................................................................(P. 208)
— MULTI LAYER TERMINALS ON DIAGRAM PAGES...........................................(P. 208)
— MULTI LAYER TERMINALS ON MECHANICAL PAGES .....................................(P. 209)
On multi layer terminals
In order to handle multi layer terminals, an extra column have been added in the
component grouping named Pos.no., that specifies which layer on the terminal the
terminal symbol refers to.
— See “Component Grouping” on page 546.
Multi layer terminals on diagram pages
When a multi layer terminal with more than one terminal symbol is placed via the
database, the first placed symbol from the database pickmenu is assigned
Pos.No. 1. The next placed is assigned number 2 etc.
3
2
The numbers marks
the order in which the
symbols are placed
- and thereby their
assigned Pos.No.
1
Automation 12.0
Page 208
Symbols
The position numbers can be specified/changed in Functions => Component
Grouping.
1
2
3
Multi layer terminals on Mechanical pages
The connection point having the connection number 1 on the mechanical symbol,
is assigned the connection number from the connection point having Pos.No. 1 on
the symbol on the diagram.
Terminal symbols
Definition on
Mechanical symbol
on electrical diagram Mechanical symbol in the project
Pos.No. 1
Pos.No. 2
Pos.No. 3
Automation 12.0
Page 209
Symbols
WORKING
WITH CABLE SYMBOLS
This section deals with how to apply cable symbols on your diagrams.
— See “Creating cable symbols” on page 701 and “Creating busbar symbols” on
page 703.
The database in Automation can contain information about cable wire names. If
you are using the database, the names of the cable wires can therefore be supplied automatically.
When you work with cables you enter different dialog boxes when selecting the
cable wires, depending on whether the system has cable wire names for the cable
or not.
You can find cable symbols in the pickmenu, and by opening the folder MISC from
the Symbol menu. In the database, you will find cables in the folder Flexible
cables.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— PLACING CABLE SYMBOLS WITHOUT WIRE NAMES FROM THE DATABASE .....(P. 210)
— PLACING CABLE SYMBOLS WITH WIRE NAMES FROM THE DATABASE ...........(P. 213)
— PLACING SYMBOLS FOR THE SAME CABLE IN ONE OPERATION ....................(P. 214)
— MOVING CONNECTION POINTS FOR CABLE WIRES ......................................(P. 214)
— ADDING CABLE WIRES TO PLACED CABLES ................................................(P. 215)
— REMOVING CABLE WIRES FROM PLACED CABLES .......................................(P. 215)
— ADDING A SCREEN ON A PLACED CABLE ...................................................(P. 216)
— REVERSE DIRECTION ON PLACED CABLES .................................................(P. 216)
— UNREFERENCED CABLE SYMBOLS ............................................................(P. 216)
— SETTINGS FOR DEFAULT CABLE DIRECTION ...............................................(P. 217)
Placing cable symbols without Cable wire names from the Database
When you have a cable symbol in the cross hairs, you place it next to some of the
wires you want to include into the cable. You then enter the Cable data dialog box:
Specify the number
of wires in the cable
Automation 12.0
Page 210
Symbols
Number of cable wires in the cable
In the field No. of Wires, you can specify how many wires that exists in this cable.
When this amount of wires have been placed, it will not be possible to place any
more wires for this cable. — If the cable is fetched via the database, the field No. of
Wires is filled out automatically.
NUMBER OF WIRES IN COMPONENTS LISTS
WHEN CREATING COMPONENTS LISTS, IT IS POSSIBLE TO INSERT INFORMATION ABOUT THE NUMBER OF WIRES AND USED WIRES FOR THE CABLES IN
THE LIST VIA THE DATAFIELD CABLE WIRES.
Filling out the dialog box Cable data
Apart from this, you can fill out the dialog box Cable data as described in “Placing
and Naming symbols” on page 151. Click OK.
The illustration below is a part of a larger drawing, where the three vertical lines are
wires.
When you place the cable, a rubber band now starts in the reference point of the
symbol, and ends up in the cross hairs. This indicates that you can now point out
which wires to include in the cable.
You have two options: Pointing out the wires individually, or selecting more than
one wire at the time:
Pointing out individual cable wires
Click on the wires you want to include one at a time. Each time you click on a wire,
you are asked to type in Connection data.
Automation 12.0
Page 211
Symbols
When you click OK the symbol expands to include this wire as well.
When you do not wish to include more wires into the cable you press <Esc>, and
the "rubber band" disappears. If the number of cable wires is specified in the dialog
box Cable data, the "rubber band" disappears when the specified number of cable
wires have been placed in the project.
Pointing out more than one cable wire in a single operation
When you have placed the cable symbol — and a thin line (the "rubber band")
starts in the reference point of the symbol, and ends up in the cross hairs — you
can mark up a window over the wires, which you wish to include in the cable:
Click here
Keep the mouse button pressed down,
and drag the mouse cursor across the wires
Release the mouse button
when all wires are included
When you release the mouse button, you enter the dialog box Connection data,
from where you can name cable wires — for instance by using automatic counting:
Automation 12.0
Page 212
Symbols
If for instance you write 1 in the Name field, press down <Ctrl> while clicking on +,
and then click OK, the three wires in the example will get the names 1, 2 and 3
respectively. — See e.g. “Automatic naming of symbols” on page 171.
When you are using a cable with specified wire names from the database, the
selected wires are automatically assigned wire names according to the order in
which the wires appear in the database.
Place cables with Cable wire names from the database
When you use the database, you can let the database supply the cable wire names
automatically.
The procedure for selecting the cable symbol, and pointing out the cable wires is
the same as described in “Placing cable symbols without Cable wire names from
the Database” on page 210.
Only, when you select a cable wire, you enter this dialog box instead:
Here you choose which of the cable conductors you wish to apply, and click OK.
Each time you enter this dialog box, you can see which cable wire names are Available and which are Used.
If you have changed a cable wire name to a name unknown to the database, you
also see the tab Unknown.
— Please note that it is also possible to choose cable wires from the tab Used.
This makes it possible to display the cable wire more than one place in the project.
Automation 12.0
Page 213
Symbols
Placing symbols for the same cable in a single operation
You can place more than one symbol for the same cable at different locations in the
diagrams, in a single operation. When these symbols have the same cable name,
the program knows they represent the same cable.
Select the cable symbol only once
When you place a cable symbol and include some cable wires in the cable, and
then click exactly over, or exactly under, the cable symbol, a new cable symbol with
the same cable name is placed in the diagram:
1
2
3
To do as in the figure above, do the following:
1) Place the cable symbol -W3 and include the cable wires in the cable
2) Do not press <Esc> to stop including cable wires, but click vertically under
the -W3 cable symbol
3) A new cable symbol with the name -W3 is placed in the diagram
FREE PLACING OF THE SUBSEQUENT CABLE SYMBOL
When you need to place the other cable symbol for the same cable anywhere in
the diagram, do the following:
1) Place the cable symbol -W3 and include the cable wires in the cable
2) Do not press <Esc> to stop including cable wires, but press <Ctrl>, and click
where you wish to place the next cable symbol
3) A new cable symbol with the name -W3 is now placed where you clicked
Moving connection points for cable wires
It is possible to move the connection points for a cable in relation to the cable symbol. The connection points can only be moved along the axis of the symbol, and
can not be moved to the opposite side of the reference point of the symbol. To
move a connection point, do the following:
1) Make sure that the Symbols button is activated, right-click on the connection
point, and select Move
Automation 12.0
Page 214
Symbols
2) You now get the connection point in the cross hairs: Click where you wish to
place the connection point.
Moving connection points for cable wires in areas
If you select the connection points in an area — by dragging a window over them
and pressing <Ctrl> when releasing the mouse button — you can also move the
selected connection points for the cable in the area.
Adding wires to cables
If you want to add another wire to the cable after having deselected the cable symbol, first make sure the Symbols button is activated, then right-click on the cable
symbol, and choose Add cable core. A rubber band now radiates from the reference point and ends in the cross hairs.
Now click on the wire(s) that are to be included in the cable, and each time you
click on a wire, the symbol expands to include this wire as well.
If you are using a cable with color codes from the database, you will be asked to
select color codes for each individual wire, as described in “Place cables with
Cable wire names from the database” on page 213.
You can also select more than one wire in one operation, as described in “Pointing
out more than one cable wire in a single operation” on page 212.
Press <Esc> when you have finished.
Removing a wire from a cable
If you later on want to remove a core from the cable, you make sure the Symbols
button is activated, right-click on the connection point for the wire you want to
exclude, and choose Delete.
Automation 12.0
Page 215
Symbols
Adding a screen to a placed cable symbol
THE CABLE SYMBOL MUST HAVE A SCREEN CONNECTION POINT
TO USE THE FUNCTION ADD CABLE SCREEN, THE APPLIED CABLE SYMBOL
MUST HAVE A CONNECTION POINT FOR A CABLE SCREEN IN ITS SYMBOL
DEFINITION.
— SEE “CONNECTION POINT FOR CABLE SCREEN” ON PAGE 701.
To add a cable screen to a placed cable symbol, do this:
1) Click the Symbol button — to work with symbols.
2) Right-click on the cable symbol, and choose Add Cable screen.
3) In the dialog box Connection data: Type in a name for the cable screen, and
click OK.
4) A connection point for the cable screen is now inserted on the cable symbol,
the program changes to the Lines command automatically, and initiates the
drawing of a line starting from the connection point for the cable screen:
5) Change line type if necessary, and connect the line to the desired symbol.
LINE SETTINGS MEMORIZED FOR CABLE SCREENS
THE PROGRAM AUTOMATICALLY USE THE LINE SETTINGS, THAT YOU USED
THE LAST TIME YOU CONNECTED A CABLE SCREEN.
AFTER CONNECTING THE CABLE SCREEN, THE PROGRAM AUTOMATICALLY
SWITCH BACK TO THE LINE SETTINGS, THAT YOU USED BEFORE CONNECTING
THE CABLE SCREEN.
— READ MORE ABOUT LINE SETTINGS IN “THE LINES TOOLBAR” ON
PAGE 66.
Reversing the cable direction
To reverse the direction of the cable, right-click on the reference point of the cable,
and choose Reverse direction.
The direction is of importance when the cable lists are filled out.
Unreferenced cable symbols
When you create a project by using sub drawings or sub projects, where one end
of a cable is displayed on one project page, and the other end is displayed on
Automation 12.0
Page 216
Symbols
another project page, it may occur that one end of a cable is not used in a project.
If With reference is activated for the cable connection points, these will be unreferenced.
These cables can be set to be invisible by choosing Functions => Special Functions => Set unreferenced cable symbols invisible.
— See also “Unreferenced signal symbols” on page 203.
Default Cable direction
In Settings => Text/Symbol default you can specify the cable direction as an
over-all setting, vertically as well as horizontally.
USING ACCESSORY
SYMBOLS
To specify that a symbol needs an accessory, do this:
1) Make sure the Symbols button is activated,
right-click on the symbol, and choose Place
accessory (or choose Functions => Place
Accessory).
2) You now get the accessory symbol in the cross
hairs: Click where you wish to place the accessory symbol — e.g. next to the symbol.
Support symbol for -Q1
3) In the dialog box Component data: The accessory symbol is automatically
assigned the name of the selected symbol (here -Q1). Type in the article
number for the accessory, or click on Database, to select the accessory
component in the database.
Data from accessory symbols are included in the lists, but
the accessory symbol itself is not included when printing
the diagram pages.
SYMBOL
FOLDERS
The symbols in Automation are located in various folders, depending on their use.
When you wish to fetch a symbol, it is a good idea to
know in which folder the symbol is located.
Typically, the symbols will be located in folders under the
folder c:\Pcselcad\symbol. Here is a survey of the contents of these folders:
Automation 12.0
Page 217
Symbols
FOLDER
CONTENTS
ALARM
SYMBOLS FOR ALARM SYSTEMS. NOT STANDARD.
BUILDING
SYMBOLS FOR GROUND PLAN DRAWINGS: DOORS, WINDOWS, WHITE GOODS
ETC.
DB60617
SYMBOLS CREATED BECAUSE OF THE DATABASES FOR THE PROGRAM. THE
SYMBOLS FOLLOWS THE STANDARD EN 60617.
DEMOMEC
EXCLUSIVELY MECHANICAL SYMBOLS FOR SWITCHBOARD DRAWINGS. AT PRESENT THE FOLDER ONLY CONTAINS EXAMPLES USED IN "AUTOMATION PROJECT TUTORIAL" IN THE PCschematic Tutorial MANUAL.
EIB
SYMBOLS FOR INTELLIGENT BUILDING INSTALLATION (EIB).
EN1861
SYMBOLS ACCORDING TO EN 1861, REFRIGERATING SYSTEMS AND HEAT
PUMPS - SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAMS AND PIPING AND INSTRUMENT DIAGRAMS LAYOUT AND SYMBOLS.
EN60617
THE FOLDER CONTAINS SYMBOLS ACCORDING TO THE EUROPEAN STANDARD
IEC/EN 60617, GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS FOR DIAGRAMS.
THE SYMBOLS FOLLOWS EN 81714-2, CONSTRUCTION OF GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS. THE SYMBOL NAMES FOLLOWS THE EN 61346 STANDARD FOR LETTER
CODES.
PC|SCHEMATIC HAS A LICENSE FOR USING THE IEC STANDARDS.
THE SYMBOLS ARE SAVED UNDER THEIR SERIAL NUMBER, FOR INSTANCE 0402-14.
IF A SYMBOL IN THE IEC STANDARD IS ONLY SHOWN AS A MAKE-FUNCTION
(N/O, NORMALLY OPENED SYMBOL), AN EVENTUAL CORRESPONDING BREAKFUNCTION (N/C, NORMALLY CLOSED SYMBOL) WILL THEN HAVE A B INSTEAD
OF THE LAST HYPHEN - AND AN S IF THE OPPOSITE IS THE CASE.
POWER CONTROL CIRCUIT SYMBOLS, THAT ARE NOT COVERED BY THE IEC
STANDARDS, HAVE BEEN ASSIGNED A NAME STARTING WITH H FOLLOWED BY
AN IEC SERIAL NUMBER, WHERE 0 IS EXCLUDED. THE FIRST HYPHEN HAVE
BEEN REPLACED BY THE NUMBER OF CONTACTS. FOR INSTANCE: H7303-04.
AT THE SAME TIME A NUMBER OF SYMBOLS NOT SHOWN IN IEC HAVE BEEN
CREATED, FOLLOWING THE STANDARD.
THE SYMBOLS ARE DESIGNED WITHOUT A MINUS IN FRONT OF THE SYMBOL
NAMES. THIS IS BECAUSE THE PROGRAM AUTOMATICALLY INSERTS A MINUS
IN FRONT OF THE NAMES OF THE SYMBOLS YOU PLACE IN THE PROJECTS, IF
YOU CHOOSE SETTINGS => POINTER/SCREEN AND SELECT INSERT - IN
FRONT OF SYMBOL NAMES — SEE “POINTER/SCREEN” ON PAGE 815.
IF YOU CHOOSE FUNCTIONS => SPECIAL FUNCTIONS => PREFIX ALL SYMBOL NAMES WITH -, A MINUS IS INSERTED IN FRONT OF ALL SYMBOL NAMES IN
THE SYMBOLS IN THE PROJECT.
FLOWCHAR
SYMBOLS FOR (COMPUTER) FLOWCHARTS.
HEAD
DRAWING HEADERS, FORMULAS FOR PARTS LISTS AND TABLES OF CONTENTS
AND UNIT TABLES FOR UNIT DRAWINGS.
IBIICONS
IBI LIBRARY, DESIGNED BY COWI A/S.
IECINST
SYMBOLS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, FROM EN 60617, GRAPHICAL
SYMBOLS FOR DIAGRAMS - PART 11: ARCHITECTURAL AND TOPOGRAPHICAL
INSTALLATION PLANS AND DIAGRAMS.
IECPNEU
SYMBOLS FOR PNEUMATICS AND HYDRAULICS, FROM EN 60617, FLUID
POWER SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS - GRAPHIC SYMBOLS AND CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS ACC. TO ISO 1219 AND BASIC SYMBOLS ACC. TO EN 60617.
MISC
SPECIAL SYMBOLS, WHICH ARE NOT OFFICIAL STANDARD, BUT ARE INCLUDED
IN Automation: SIGNAL SYMBOLS, CABLE SYMBOLS, LOGOS, PLC REFERENCE SYMBOLS ETC.
Automation 12.0
Page 218
Symbols
FOLDER
CONTENTS
PLC346
PLC SYMBOLS WITH LETTER CODES ACCORDING TO EN 61346. THE PLC
SYMBOLS ARE CREATED IN COOPERATION WITH A BOARD OF PLC VENDORS.
NOT STANDARD.
USER
FOLDER FOR YOUR OWN SYMBOLS.
Automation 12.0
Page 219
Functions on Component Level
FUNCTIONS ON COMPONENT LEVEL
When you are working with symbols in Automation, the individual symbol will frequently just be one symbol among other symbols for the functions in a component.
Therefore, there are both functions for working on symbol level and component
level.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN SYMBOLS AND COMPONENTS ......................(P. 221)
— FETCHING SYMBOLS FOR A COMPONENT VIA THE DATABASE .....................(P. 222)
— UPDATING FROM THE DATABASE WHEN CHANGING ARTICLE NO. ...............(P. 223)
— THE FUNCTION SHOW AVAILABLE .............................................................(P. 224)
— THE FUNCTION SHOW AVAILABLE WINDOW ................................................(P. 226)
— FINDING SYMBOLS BASED ON THE SYMBOL NAME .....................................(P. 227)
— SELECT COMPONENT ...............................................................................(P. 231)
— PLACE AVAILABLE SYMBOLS FOR A COMPONENT .......................................(P. 231)
— For other ways to get a survey of the symbols in the project, please refer to “The
Object Lister” on page 296.
— See also “Fetching symbols” on page 135 and “Placing and Naming symbols”
on page 151.
Automation 12.0
Page 220
Functions on Component Level
THE
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN
SYMBOLS
AND
COMPONENTS
Components containing more than one function, have an electrical symbol for each
function in the component.
These electrical symbols can be placed freely in the diagram pages in the project.
To specify that two symbols belongs to the same component, they must have the
same symbol name.
Symbols for -K1, placed on different project pages
(Two electrical symbols, and one mechanical)
When you type in the same symbol name for two electrical symbols in a project,
this specifies that they are part of the same component — please also see “Function assemblys” on page 222.
When you choose a component via the database, you automatically get its electrical symbols on the screen, and can place these in the diagrams. — See “Fetching
symbols for a Component from the Database” on page 222.
Automation 12.0
Page 221
Functions on Component Level
— See “Update from Database when changing symbol Article no” on page 223
also.
Function assemblys
When you are working with advanced contactors, the symbols for -K1 can be an
assembly of several components.
The program knows that two — or more — symbols belong to the same component when they have the same name and article number.
This also applies for terminal rows and other function assemblys.
— See “Sub names on symbols” on page 160 also.
Symbols, lists and databases
When you have attached article numbers to the symbols on the diagrams, the program can update lists automatically by fetching the necessary information from the
database.
— Read more about this in “Using the database” on page 561.
Practically all components in the component vendor databases for Automation
also have an attached mechanical symbol, which can be used for mechanical layouts. — Read more about this in “Mechanical Load from the Database” on
page 616.
FETCHING
SYMBOLS FOR A
COMPONENT
FROM THE
DATABASE
When you place the electrical symbols for a component using the
database, you get a pickmenu for the electrical
symbols available for the
component. These symbols can then be placed
in the project diagrams.
This is described in
further detail in “Fetching
symbols from the database” on page 147.
Placing symbols using
the database, enables you to generate project lists automatically. You will find the
relation between components, databases and automatic updating of lists described
in further detail in “Using the database” on page 561.
Automation 12.0
Page 222
Functions on Component Level
UPDATE
FROM
DATABASE
WHEN CHANGING SYMBOL
ARTICLE
NO
When the Article no is changed for one of the symbols for the component, it is
possible to have the component updated from the database, as described in
“Update from database when changing article number” on page 154.
Therefore, if you have changed Article no for one symbol for the component -K1,
and subsequently select Change Data for all symbols for the component and
click OK in the dialog box Component data, all symbols for the component -K1 are
updated.
Settings for updating individual components via the Database
The settings for how to update via the database, are specified the following way:
1) Choose Settings => Database.
2) Select Update components when changing Article No., and click on Settings.
3) You now enter the dialog box Update from Database:
4) Here you specify how to update the symbols for individual components when
changing article number — see a description of the options in “Updating
symbols from the database” on page 166.
UPDATING COMPONENT, PAGE OR PROJECT
IT IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO UPDATE COMPONENTS WITHOUT CHANGING
ARTICLE NUMBER, AND TO UPDATE ALL COMPONENTS ON THE ACTIVE PAGE,
OR IN THE ENTIRE PROJECT.
— SEE HOW TO DO THIS IN “UPDATING SYMBOLS FROM THE DATABASE” ON
PAGE 166.
Automation 12.0
Page 223
Functions on Component Level
THE
FUNCTION
SHOW
AVAILABLE
When you place a symbol via a pickmenu from the database, the pickmenu disappears.
To get the pickmenu for the component back on screen, right-click on one of the
electrical symbols for the component — e.g. the one you just placed —, and
choose Show available.
— See also “The function Show available window” on page 226.
You now see the electrical symbols for the component, that has still not been used
in the project.
Also, you can click on a symbol and choose Functions => Show available, or
press the short-cut key [F9].
Show available again
When you choose Functions => Show available again, or press the short-cut key
[Ctrl+F9], the pickmenu for the component is displayed again. This makes it easier
to work with for instance PLC’s and multi terminals.
Lists of Used names in the dialog box Show available
When you have selected Symbols, and choose Functions => Show available,
you enter the following dialog box:
When you click on the Used names button you get a list of all the components that
are used in the project.
When you click on the Used names with available symbols button, a list of all
project components with available symbols is displayed.
Click on the component you want to use electrical symbols from, and you enter a
pickmenu for the component. This way you can fetch symbols from components,
that are placed on other pages in the project.
IF A SYMBOL CONTAINS FUNCTION OR TYPE INFORMATION, THIS INFORMATION IS TRANSFERRED TO THE OTHER SYMBOLS FOR THE COMPONENT
WHEN YOU USE THE SHOW AVAILABLE FUNCTION.
IF THE DATABASE CONTAINS INFORMATION ABOUT FUNCTION OR TYPE, THIS
INFORMATION IS ADDED TO THE PLACED SYMBOL IN STEAD.
Automation 12.0
Page 224
Functions on Component Level
BUTTON FOR SELECTED LIST FOR ACTUAL FUNCTION
WHEN A BUTTON WITH THE SAME APPEARANCE AS THE USED NAMES WITH AVAILABLE
SYMBOLS BUTTON APPEARS IN A DIALOG BOX, IT CAN GIVE YOU A SELECTED LIST, BASED
ON THE NEEDS IN THE ACTUAL SITUATION.
WHEN FOR INSTANCE YOU ARE ABOUT TO PLACE A BREAK CONTACT, THE PROGRAM DISPLAYS THE POSSIBLE NAMES FOR A BREAK CONTACT — SUCH AS FOR INSTANCE THE
NAMES FOR THE APPLIED CONTACTORS AND PUSH-BUTTONS. WHEN FOR INSTANCE YOU
ARE PLACING A TERMINAL, ONLY NAMES FOR THE APPLIED TERMINALS ARE DISPLAYED.
Wildcards/jokers in Show available
You can also use wildcards/jokers in the dialog box Show available — as described in “Wildcards/jokers” on page 540.
Show available for Mechanical symbols
When only a mechanical symbol is placed for a component, Show available can
also be used for placing the electrical symbols for the component. Read more
about this in “From Mechanical to Electrical drawing” on page 625.
Automation 12.0
Page 225
Functions on Component Level
THE
FUNCTION
SHOW
AVAILABLE WINDOW
The function View => Show available window displays all components in the project, that has available functions/symbols.
Update the contents
of the window
You can also right-click on the page, and choose Show available window.
Pickmenus for components - via the Show available window
When you double-click on one of the components in the Show available window,
you get a pickmenu for the component, containing symbols for all available functions in the component:
The Show available window remains on screen when you double-click on a component in the list, and you therefore continuously have easy access to all components with available functions/symbols in the project.
The window is closed by clicking the Close button in the dialog box.
Select name window for components - via the Show available
window
If you click on a component in the window, and then click the Show where the
component is placed button, the Select name window is displayed for the component.
— See “Find all symbols with identical names” on page 227.
Automation 12.0
Page 226
Functions on Component Level
FINDING
SYMBOLS BASED ON THE
COMPONENT NAME
THE SELECT NAME FUNCTION CAN BE USED FOR :
— FINDING SYMBOLS IN THE PROJECT QUICKLY
— EDITING COMPONENT DATA FOR MORE THAN ONE SYMBOL AT THE TIME
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— FIND ALL SYMBOLS WITH IDENTICAL NAMES ..............................................(P. 227)
— SEARCHING FOR MORE COMPONENTS USING WILDCARDS .........................(P. 228)
— JUMP TO THE NEXT SYMBOL IN THE SELECT NAME LIST AUTOMATICALLY ....(P. 228)
— CHANGING SYMBOL REF. DESIGNATIONS USING SELECT NAME...................(P. 229)
— RENUMBER CONNECTION NAMES FOR TERMINAL ROW USING SELECT NAME(P. 229)
— See “Select Component” on page 231 also.
Find all symbols with identical names
When you want to get a survey of where the electrical symbols for the component
are placed in the project, you choose Functions => Select name.
You then enter a dialog box where you specify the name of the component:
When you wish just to find the symbols for a specific component, type in the component name, and press <Enter>.
When you need a list of component names in the project, click the Used names
button, select a name from the list of component names, and click OK.
When there is more than one symbol with the same name, the Select name window is displayed:
Automation 12.0
Page 227
Functions on Component Level
Here you can see all the places the symbol name occurs in the project, as well as
different information about the symbols; their connection names, symbol types,
which project page they are placed on, the page type of this page, and their position on the page.
You can remove symbols from the window by selecting them and press <Delete>.
(Please note that this does not remove the symbols from the project, but only from
the Select name window). Read more about selecting in “Selecting objects in the
Object Lister” on page 298.
The contents of the window can be sorted as described in “The sorting order of the
data in the Object Lister” on page 298.
Searching after more components using Wildcards
When you wish to find all components of a specific type, or do you not know all of
the component name, you can use the so-called wildcards — as described in
“Wildcards/jokers” on page 540.
When for instance you write * and click OK all project symbols are selected, as if
you had pressed <Ctrl> and selected the symbols one at the time.
If you have followed the naming standard about - in symbol names, you can also
write *-*, whereby all project symbols are selected — except wire number symbols
and signals (when these do not contain a "-" in their symbol names).
Jump to a symbol from the Select name list
When you click on the different electrical symbols in the Select name box, you
automatically jump to where the selected symbols are placed in the project —
having the cross hairs pointing out the symbol.
You can also activate the function by right-clicking on a symbol, and then choose
Select Name.
Automation 12.0
Page 228
Functions on Component Level
Changing the symbol reference designations using Select name
When for instance you wish to change reference designations, you can do the following:
1) Activate the Symbols button, right-click on the page and choose Select
Name.
2) In the dialog box Select Name: Write for instance *+A1* (see “Searching
after more components using Wildcards” on page 228) and click OK.
3) In the window Select Name: Remove the symbols from the list, which you do
not wish to change the reference designations, and click on the Component
data button in the toolbar for symbols.
4) In the dialog box Component data: Click on the tab Ref. design. and click
on Select.
5) In the dialog box Reference designations: Select the new reference designation — for instance +A2 —, and click OK.
6) In the dialog box Component data: Click OK.
7) In the window Select name the new reference designations are now displayed. Click the Close button in the upper right-hand corner to close the
window.
Renumbering pinnumbers for a terminal row using Select name
Do you wish to renumber pinnumbers for a terminal row, so that the pinnumbers
increase from the start to the end of the project, do the following:
1) Click on the Symbols button, right-click on the page and choose Select
Name.
Automation 12.0
Page 229
Functions on Component Level
2) In the dialog box Select Name: Click on the Used button, select the terminal
row (for instance =G1+A2-X3) and click OK — hereby all symbols for
=G1+A2-X3 are selected in the project:
3) In the Select name window: Click on the
column header Position so that the displayed arrow in the field points upwards
— hereby the symbols are sorted according to the order they are placed on the
pages.
Click here
4) Click on the column header Page so that the displayed arrow in the field points upwards —
hereby the symbols are sorted in page order, and
according to the order they are placed on the project pages.
Click here
5) Click on the Component data button in the toolbar for symbols.
6) In the dialog box Component data: Assign names to the pinnumbers —
write for instance -X3:1, press down <Ctrl> and click on +, and click OK. The
pinnumbers are hereby incremented according to the order in which they are
placed in the list (and hereby in the order in which they are placed in the project).
Please note that existing holes in the numbering disappears at the same time.
Changing component data for the selected symbols
Changing component data from the Select name dialog box is done like this:
Automation 12.0
Page 230
Functions on Component Level
1) Select the symbols in the Select name dialog box.
2) Click on the Object data button — on the top of the screen —, to change
article data for all of the selected symbols at the same time.
3) In the Component data dialog box: Click for instance on Database and
select a new component in the database.
SELECT COMPONENT
If you right-click on a symbol and choose Select Component, you select to all
symbols having the same name and the same article number as the selected symbol.
This is an option because a component can consist of several parts, each having
their own article number.
— See “Finding symbols based on the Component Name” on page 227 also.
PLACE
AVAILABLE
SYMBOLS
If you want to place all symbols which have not been placed for a component, you
choose Functions => Place available Symbols. You then enter this dialog box,
where you click on Load selected and type in the symbol name.
Click OK, and the cross hairs changes appearance to a pencil. Click where you
want the remaining symbols to be placed.
The symbols are now placed on top of each other.
In order to separate the symbols, drag a window around them, right-click within the
selected area, and use the Space function — as described in “The Space function”
on page 60.
If you choose Load all in the dialog box, all unused symbols for all components in
the project will be placed.
If you choose Load selected and for instance write -K*, all symbols starting with K are placed. — Read more about this in “Wildcards/jokers” on page 540.
Automation 12.0
Page 231
Areas
AREAS
In Automation you use the Area command when you want to select all symbols,
lines, texts and circles from an area in a project.
To work with areas, start by clicking on the Area button, or by pressing the shortcut key [a].
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— SELECTING OBJECTS IN AREAS ................................................................(P. 232)
— INTELLIGENT COPYING OF AREAS .............................................................(P. 233)
— ASSIGNING REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS WHEN COPYING AREAS .................(P. 235)
— MOVING OR DELETING SELECTED AREAS ..................................................(P. 237)
— CUTTING AND PASTING AREAS .................................................................(P. 239)
— MOVING OR COPYING AREAS TO OTHER PROJECT PAGES ..........................(P. 238)
— MAKING AREAS INVISIBLE .........................................................................(P. 237)
— ROTATING AREAS ....................................................................................(P. 241)
— SCALING AREAS ......................................................................................(P. 241)
— COPYING AREAS TO SYMBOL DEFINITIONS ...............................................(P. 243)
INSERTING SUB DRAWINGS
PLEASE NOTE THAT YOU CAN ALSO INSERT SUB DRAWINGS — “SUB DRAWINGS” ON PAGE 244.
SELECTING
ALL TYPES OF OBJECTS IN AN AREA
Click on the Area button. Mark up a window. All object types within the window will
now be selected. If you want to exclude any objects, press the <Ctrl> key and click
on the objects.
If you also want to select objects outside the area, press down <Ctrl> and click on
the objects.
— Read more about selecting objects in “Selecting objects” on page 49.
Automation 12.0
Page 232
Areas
INTELLIGENT
COPYING OF AREAS
When you want to copy an area in Automation you click the Area button, and use the
mouse to select the area you want to copy
— see “Selecting all types of objects in an
area” on page 232.
You can then either:
a) Click on the Copy button on the upper
part of the screen, and then click
where you wish to place the copy
b) Right-click inside the selected area
and choose Copy, and click where you
wish to place the copy
c) Click inside the area, press down
<Ctrl> and drag the copied area to
where you wish to place the copy
When you place the copied area, you enter
a dialog box, where you specify the directions for renaming the names in the copied area:
Automation 12.0
Page 233
Areas
The options in this dialog box depends on which types of symbols exists in the
copied area.
FULFILLING STANDARDS WHEN COPYING AREAS
ESPECIALLY IN CONNECTION WITH NAMING OF TERMINALS, DETAILED RULES APPLIES FOR
NAMING/NUMBERING. THUS MOTOR TERMINALS, SUPPLY TERMINALS AND INPUT- AND OUTPUT TERMINALS ARE NUMBERED ACCORDING TO DIFFERENT PRINCIPLES.
WHEN YOU COPY AN AREA THE PROGRAM FIRST EXAMINES WHETHER THE AREA IS DRAWN
ACCORDING TO THE RULES IN EN60204-1,14.2.1 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE RUNS. IF THIS
IS THE CASE, THE PROGRAM THEN ANALYSE WHICH TERMINAL TYPES IT CONTAINS, AND
RENAMES THESE ACCORDING TO THE DIFFERENT PRINCIPLES.
BECAUSE NO HOLES ARE ALLOWED IN THE NUMBERING, THE PROGRAM ALSO KEEPS
TRACK OF WHICH NAMES/NUMBERS ARE USED FOR THE DIFFERENT TYPES OF TERMINALS.
Renaming symbols when copying areas
If you want to renumber the symbols in the area, click on Rename symbols. If you
want to renumber all symbols in the area, so that they start from a specific number,
you specify this number in the field Start No. (0=Next avail.).
When you only want to assign the next available symbol name to the symbols, just
type 0 in this field. If for instance you write 20, the symbols are renumbered starting
from 20.
When you do not want to renumber the symbols, click on Do NOT rename Symbols.
Please note that you can copy the area as many times as you want. Press <Esc>
for removing the copied area from the cross hairs.
Page/Current path numbers in symbols in copied areas
If you use page/current path numbers in the names of the copied area, the names
will adjust to the new page/current path numbers automatically.
Renaming terminals when copying areas
With respect to renumbering terminals, you can here choose between the following
options:
OPTION
CONSEQUENCE
DO NOT RENAME
TERMINALS
NEITHER THE TERMINALS NOR THEIR CONNECTION POINTS ARE
RENUMBERED.
RENAME TERMINALS
ONLY THE TERMINAL NAMES ARE RENUMBERED, NOT THEIR CONNECTION POINTS.
RENAME TERMINAL
CONNECTION POINTS
THE NAMES OF THE TERMINAL CONNECTION POINTS ARE RENUMBERED, THE TERMINAL NAMES ARE NOT CHANGED. — SEE “FULFILLING
STANDARDS WHEN COPYING AREAS” ON PAGE 234.
Automation 12.0
Page 234
Areas
Renaming wire numbers when copying areas
If the copied area contains wire numbers, you can click on Rename Wire Numbers. This assigns the next available wire numbers to the copied area. The wire
numbers are assigned according to the principle you have used to apply for wire
numbering — See “Automatic wire numbering” on page 377.
Copying an area to another page
If you want to move the copied area to another project page, see how to do this in
“Moving or Copying areas to other pages” on page 238.
ASSIGNING REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS WHEN COPYING AREAS
If reference designations are used in the area you copy, the button Ref.des. is displayed in the dialog box Rename symbols. This gives you the option to assign
other — or new — reference designations to the copied area.
When you click the Ref.des. button, you enter this dialog box:
In the columns Designation and Description the current reference designations
are displayed along with their descriptions.
REF. DESIGNATIONS FOR SUB DRAWINGS, PAGES AND FULL PROJECTS
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES HOW TO EDIT REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS WHEN
COPYING AREAS. YOU HAVE THE EXACT SAME OPTIONS WHEN COPYING FULL
PAGES AND WHEN INSERTING STANDARD PROJECTS.
Automation 12.0
Page 235
Areas
See symbols using the listed reference designations
When you click on the line for one of the refernce designations in the dialog box, a
Show symbols button is displayed. When you click on this button, all symbols
using this reference designation in the copied area are displayed.
Editing a reference designation
If you wish to edit a reference designation, first click on the line with the reference
desgination. Then click on the down-arrow in the column New designation, and
you get the option of selecting a new reference designation:
By default (Unchanged) is selected, but you get the option of choosing by all
applied reference designations in the project. You can also choose (none), to
delete this reference designation from the symbols in the copied area.
CREATING A NEW REFERENCE DESIGNATION
When you need to create a new reference designation, click the Create new button
to the right in the dialog box, and you enter the dialog box Reference designations, from which you can create new reference designations. — See how to do this
in “Defining reference designations for the project” on page 325, in particular
“Specifying function/location reference designations” on page 326.
ASSIGNING TEMPORARY REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
When you can not decide how to name reference designations in the copied area,
you can create temporary reference designations, which you can use until you
have found the correct names. You do this by clicking the Create Temp button in
Automation 12.0
Page 236
Areas
the right-hand side in the dialog box. Hereby all reference designations in the dialog box are assigned a temporary reference designation:
These temporary refernce designations are assigned a ~ sign after the reference
designation prefix. This temporary reference designation is created from the initial
reference designation, so that =G1 becomes =~G1. If this temporary value is alreday used in the project, the temporary reference designation with the next available
name using the same referenceletter is applied. If =~G1 is used, =~G2 is then
used in the project — if not used already. The description remains unchanged, with
a preceeding ~ character.
The temporary reference designations are deleted automatically, when they are no
longer used in the project.
MOVING
OR
DELETING
SELECTED AREAS
Moving and deleting of areas is done as described in “Working with selected
objects” on page 51.
If you want to move an area to another page in the project, please see “Moving or
Copying areas to other pages” on page 238.
MAKING
AREAS INVISIBLE
— See “Making areas invisible” on page 63.
Automation 12.0
Page 237
Areas
MOVING
OR
COPYING
AREAS TO OTHER PAGES
When you have an area in the cross hairs — when moving or when copying — you
can move the area to another page in the project.
This is done by clicking the page tab for the relevant page, which brings you to the
new page, where you still carry the area in the cross hairs.
Click to place the area.
When you have a copied area in the cross hairs, you can change project page by
pressing the [PageUp] and [PageDown] buttons, or by using the Explorer window.
— See “Copying an area from one project to another” on page 511 also.
The dialog box Rename Symbols can be deactivated after first
placement
When you have copied an area and
insert it for the first time, you enter
the dialog box Rename Symbols.
Here you specify how to rename the
copied symbols.
When you select Do NOT show this
dialog at next placement, these
settings are memorized the next
time the area is placed — and dialog
box is therefore not displayed.
When placing a new copied area,
the dialog box appears again.
Click here NOT to show
the dialog box again
Renaming settings are memorized for copying Areas
The settings in the dialog box Rename Symbols are memorized by the program.
Component grouping when copying terminals
When copying terminals — individually or in areas and pages — Automation
keeps the individual component grouping, so that the copied symbols are separated from the originals.
— See “Component Grouping” on page 546.
Copying an area to another project
When you have the area in the cross hairs, you can copy it to another project by:
a) Clicking on the other project in the Explorer window, and press [Ctrl+v].
b) Following the description in “Copying an area from one project to another” on
page 511.
Automation 12.0
Page 238
Areas
CUTTING
AND
PASTING
AREAS
You can cut and paste an area in the following way:
1) Click on the Area button, and select the area by dragging a window over it
with the mouse.
2) Click on the Cut button, or right-click inside the area and choose Cut.
Select the area and
choose Cut (or Copy)
The area is deleted and the
connected lines are parked
3) The area is deleted: Shift to another page — if necessary — and click the
Paste button. You now get the area in the cross hairs.
4) Click where you wish to place the area, and you are asked how/whether to
rename the symbols in the area, as described in “Intelligent copying of areas”
on page 233. Select the appropriate options, and click OK. — See the figure
below.
Automation 12.0
Page 239
Areas
5) The area is now placed at its new position, with updated symbol names.
Parked connection point
Connected to
existing line
Click to place the area, and rename the symbols
Lines are cut along the edges of areas when copying
When cutting a connected area, Automation cuts the lines connected to the area,
along the edges of the selected area. Where the area is cut out, the connecting
lines are parked.
When you place the area, the lines in the area are connected to other lines, if you
place them on these. Otherwise, the lines are parked.
Only lines are cut. Symbols, texts and circles can not be cut in two this way.
USING THE CUT FUNCTION FOR OTHER COMMANDS
THE CUT FUNCTION CAN ALSO BE USED WHEN WORKING WITH SYMBOLS,
TEXTS, LINES AND CIRCLES.
Automation 12.0
Page 240
Areas
ROTATING
AREAS
You have also got the option to rotate an entire
area. All kinds of objects in the area — symbols, texts, lines and circles/arcs — will be
rotated.
First click the Area button, and then select the
area you want to rotate by dragging a window
around it.
Click inside the area, keep the mouse button pressed down
and move the mouse. Press [spacebar]. Hereby the area is
rotated around the point the mouse is pointing at.
Every time you press [spacebar] the area is rotated 90
degrees counter-clockwise.
When you have selected the area, you can also click the
Move button, click in the angle field in the command toolbar,
and type in the angle in which the area is to be rotated.
SCALING
AREAS
You can use scaling when you make drawings as well as when you create/edit
symbols (see “Creating Symbols” on page 676).
To scale an area do the following:
1) Click on the Area button, and mark up the area you want to scale
2) Choose Edit => Scale
3) Type in a scaling factor. — If for
instance you want the area in
half size, you type in 0,5. In
double size, you type in 2
4) Click OK
The area have now been scaled. If you are editing a symbol, this can require adaptation of texts, and moving of the reference point, because they are now placed in
another distance to the scaled objects.
— See for instance how to scale a company logo, to make it fit a drawing header in
“Placing a Company Logo on a drawing header” on page 731.
Automation 12.0
Page 241
Areas
Scaling texts in areas
When you have selected an area and choose Edit => Scale, it is possible to specify whether to scale the free texts in the area. This is done by choosing Scale free
texts in the dialog box:
Scaling everything on a page
If you want to scale everything on the entire page, you activate the Area button,
choose Edit => Select all => All on page, and choose Edit => Scale as above.
Read more about selections in areas in “Selecting objects” on page 49.
Specifying the scale of the page
You can also specify the scale of the entire page. — Read more about this in “Setting the scale of the page” on page 469.
Automation 12.0
Page 242
Areas
COPYING
AREAS INTO
EDIT
SYMBOL MODE
To copy an area from a project drawing into a symbol,
do the following:
1) Click the Area button, and select the area you
wish to copy.
2) Right-click, and choose Copy.
3) Click on the Symbols button, and then on the
Symbol menu button.
4) In the Symbol menu: Click on the Create new
Symbol button.
5) In the Edit symbol mode: Choose Edit =>
Paste.
6) You now get the area in the cross hairs: Click to
place the area in the symbol definition.
7) Press <Esc> to remove the area from the cross
hairs.
The copied area is now inserted in the Symbol editor.
Copying an area from
a diagram to a
symbol definition
ALL SYMBOLS IN THE INSERTED AREA ARE
AUTOMATICALLY CONVERTED TO LINES WHEN
THE AREA IS INSERTED IN THE SYMBOL DEFINITION.
You can now place the connection points for the new
symbol, edit the symbol etc. as described in “Creating
Symbols” on page 676.
COPYING
AREAS BETWEEN PROJECTS
THE COPIED AREA CAN ALSO BE INSERTED
DIRECTLY INTO ANOTHER Automation PROJECT, BY JUMPING TO THE OTHER PROJECT,
AND CHOOSING EDIT => PASTE.
Automation 12.0
Page 243
Sub drawings
SUB DRAWINGS
In Automation it is possible to save parts of diagrams as sub drawings, which you
can then drag directly into project pages in other projects. This is in Automation
called Drag’n Draw.
— Hereby you can also drag project pages or full projects into the active project.
All of the symbols in the sub drawings can have individual article data attached,
and you can — as a general setting — specify the settings for how to rename the
symbols, when the sub drawings are placed in projects.
Furthermore you can create different sets of model values for each individual sub
drawing, so that you can choose between placing e.g. a 1 kW or a 15 kW motorstarter circuit when placing the sub drawings.
You can also apply the sub drawings in connection with automatic project generation, as described in the Project generator manual.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— THE SUBDRAWINGS TAB IN THE EXPLORER WINDOW ................................(P. 245)
— ON INSERTING SUB DRAWINGS .................................................................(P. 246)
— MANUAL PLACING OF SUB DRAWINGS .......................................................(P. 247)
— PLACING SUB DRAWINGS BY DRAG’N DRAW ..............................................(P. 252)
— DRAG’N DRAW SETUP ..............................................................................(P. 253)
— CREATING SUB DRAWINGS FOR MANUAL PLACING .....................................(P. 255)
— EDITING SUB DRAWINGS ..........................................................................(P. 256)
— CREATING SUB DRAWINGS BY COPYING FROM PROJECTS ..........................(P. 256)
— ON PAGES AND SUB DRAWINGS FOR DRAG’N DRAW ..................................(P. 259)
— CREATING PROJECT PAGES FOR AUTOMATIC PLACING OF SUB DRAWINGS ..(P. 260)
— PREPARING SUB DRAWINGS FOR DRAG’N DRAW / AUTOMATIC PLACING .....(P. 265)
— THE FUNCTION OF THE INSERTION POINTS ................................................(P. 267)
— INSERTING VARIABLES IN SUB DRAWINGS, PAGES AND PROJECTS .............(P. 269)
— CREATING MODEL DATA FOR SUB DRAWINGS ............................................(P. 272)
— INVISIBLE AREAS AND SUB DRAWINGS .......................................................(P. 275)
— SUB DRAWINGS WITH INTELLIGENT LINE CONNECTION ...............................(P. 276)
SUB DRAWINGS IN NETWORKS
WHEN YOU ARE WORKING IN A NETWORK, IT COULD BE A GOOD IDEA TO
PRODUCE A SET OF STANDARD SUB DRAWINGS, AND PLACE THESE IN A FOLDER, WHICH EVERYBODY HAS ACCESS TO IN THE NETWORK.
Automation 12.0
Page 244
Sub drawings
THE EXPLORER
WINDOW:
THE SUBDRAWINGS
TAB
In the Explorer window in the lefthand side of the screen, you find the
tab SubDrawings.
From here you can fetch the sub drawings and projects/project pages,
which you choose to drag into the
active project.
If the Explorer window is not displayed on the screen, please read
“General settings for the Explorer
window” on page 291.
— Read more about the Explorer
window in “The Explorer window:
The Projects tab” on page 291.
Specifying what to display on the SubDrawings tab
To select — and lock — which folder to display the
contents of on the SubDrawings tab, you can
right-click on the folder in the tab.
You can then choose between:
Show from here: The SubDrawings tab displays
the contents of the selected folder.
One level up: The SubDrawings tab displays the
contents of the folder one level above the selected
folder.
Show all: The SubDrawings tab displays everything you have access to from your PC.
Other options in the right-click menu
(Click on Folder)
Beyond this, you can choose between:
Place: Hereby you get the selected sub drawing in
the cross hairs, and can place it in the active project, as described in “Manual placing of sub drawings” on page 247.
Insert: This places the sub drawing on the diagram page. Is only possible on pages containing
insertion points.
Edit: Hereby the selected sub drawing is opened
in the Edit sub drawing mode, and you can edit
the sub drawing, as described in “Editing sub drawings” on page 256.
New: Hereby the program enters the Edit sub
drawing mode, from which you can create a new
sub drawing, as described in “Creating sub drawings by Copying from projects” on page 256.
(Click on Sub drawing)
Automation 12.0
Page 245
Sub drawings
Delete: Hereby the selected sub drawing is deleted. It is not possible to delete forlders from the SubDrawings tab.
Rename: Hereby you can rename the selected sub drawing.
Drag’n Draw setup: — See “Drag’n Draw setup” on page 253.
ON
INSERTING/PLACING SUB DRAWINGS
When inserting sub drawings in Automation, this can be done in two different
ways:
1) Manually: When you drag the sub drawing from the SubDrawings tab into
the project page, you get the sub drawing in the cross hairs, and place it
manually on the project page. — See “Manual placing of sub drawings” on
page 247.
2) By Drag’n Draw / Automatic placing of sub drawings: When you drag the sub
drawing from the SubDrawings tab, and release it as soon as it is over the
project page, the sub drawing is connected automatically e.g. to the drawn
potentials on the pages. — See “Placing sub drawings with drag’n draw” on
page 252.
For both methods applies: Control of Article data, Texts and
Model data
When applying both methods, the symbols in the sub drawings can contain article
data — e.g. from the database. Furthermore, all texts can be controlled via variables, and you can select between different sets of model data for the sub drawings,
if variables and/or sets of model data, that have been created for sub drawings.
For manual placing of sub drawings
All sub drawings can be placed manually.
You can start by creating sub drawings for manual placing, and later prepare them
for applying drag’n draw.
For Drag’n Draw
To get the full benefit of applying drag’n draw, you need to make some extra preparations, as described in “On Pages and Sub drawings for Drag’n Draw” on
page 259.
Having made these preparations, you achieve a faster workflow — and you have
made practically speaking all of the necessary preparations for applying sub drawings for automatic project generation, as described in the Project generator
manual.
Automation 12.0
Page 246
Sub drawings
MANUAL
PLACING OF SUB DRAWINGS
To insert a sub drawing manually — see “On inserting/placing sub drawings” on
page 246 — on the active project page, do the following:
1) Click on the SubDrawings tab in the Explorer window.
If the Explorer window is not visible, press <Ctrl+F12> or choose Settings
=> Pointer/Screen and select Explorer window).
2) Click on the name of the desired sub drawing, and drag it into the project
page.
3) You now get the sub drawing in the cross hairs, and click where you wish to
place the sub drawing in the project.
1) Click here
2) Click on the sub drawing, and
drag it into the project page
3) Click where you
want to place
the sub drawing
4-6) The symbols in the sub drawing are renumbered automatically
If the sub drawing contains Model data
4) If different models have been created for the selected sub drawing, you enter
the dialog box Rename symbols, in which you select which model you want
to apply. — Read more about this in “Inserting sub drawings: With model
data” on page 248.
The sub drawing is now inserted: Symbols are renamed and Article numbers added
5) The sub drawing is now placed in the project page, and:
— The symbols have been renumbered automatically (see “Drag’n Draw
Automation 12.0
Page 247
Sub drawings
setup” on page 253)
— The symbols in the placed sub drawing contains the same article numbers, texts and variables as the sub drawing in the SubDrawings tab.
THE SUB DRAWING IS NOW INSERTED
THE SUB DRAWING IS NOW INSERTED IN THE PROJECT, AND YOU CAN
CONTINUE WORKING WITH THE SYMBOLS, LINES ETC. IN THE SUB DRAWING, JUST AS IF YOU HAD DRAWN IT FROM SCRATCH.
— Please also see “Creating Project pages for aut. placing of sub drawings” on
page 260 and see how to apply sub drawings for automatic project generation in
the Project generator manual.
Sub drawings displayed in window
When you click on a sub drawing in the
SubDrawings tab, the sub drawing is
displayed in a small window, so that
you can see which sub drawing you are
selecting.
To select the sub drawing, double click
on the name of the sub drawing — or
click and drag in the same operation.
Hereby you get the sub drawing in the
cross hairs, and you can place it in the
project.
Inserting sub drawings: With model data
When you insert a sub drawing — see
“Manual placing of sub drawings” on
page 247 —, where the sub drawing
have different sets of model data attached, you can select which model to
apply at the bottom of the dialog box
Rename symbols:
When you have selected which model
data to assign to the inserted sub drawing, you can click the Variables button in the upper-right corner of the dialog box,
and the values of variables for the model are displayed:
Automation 12.0
Page 248
Sub drawings
Here you can edit data — if necessary — by double clicking on a field and then editing the text. When you have placed the sub drawing in the project, you can edit the
texts in via this dialog box, as described in “Editing variables for inserted sub drawings” on page 249.
Click OK, and click OK in the dialog box Rename symbols.
Variable markers (/@..) in sub drawings are removed when sub drawings are placed in projects.
— See also “Drag’n Draw setup” on page 253, “Drag’n Draw settings: For model
data” on page 253 in particular.
— See also how to create models for a sub drawing in “Creating Model data for sub
drawings” on page 272.
THE PURPOSE OF VARIABLES
VARIABLES MAKES IT POSSIBLE TO EDIT SOME OF THE DATA, THAT CAN BE
INCLUDED IN A SUB DRAWING.
— READ MORE ABOUT THIS IN “INSERTING VARIABLES IN SUB DRAWINGS,
PAGES AND PROJECTS” ON PAGE 269, SPECIALLY “INSERTING VARIABLE
MARKERS ON A SUB DRAWING (OR ON A DRAWING TEMPLATE)” ON
PAGE 269.
Editing variables for inserted sub drawings
To edit the text fields, which had variables on an inserted sub drawing, do this:
1) Select the project page on which the sub drawing is inserted.
2) Choose Edit => Variables.
3) You now enter the dialog box Variables.
Click on the variable
field, and the cross hairs
points out its position
on the page
Here you see a survey of all variables on the page. If more than one sub drawing is inserted on the page, these are all displayed in the dialog box. When
in doubt about which datafield is listed in the dialog box, click on it in the dialog box, and the cross hairs points it out on the diagram page.
Automation 12.0
Page 249
Sub drawings
4) Double-click on one of the fields in the dialog box, and edit the text. Continue
like this until all relevant texts are edited.
5) Click OK.
You can also edit the texts in the sub drawing exactly as you would edit any other
text in Automation.
Sub drawings: Changing the selected model
When you have placed a sub drawing containing model data, you can subseqeuntly change the selected model:
1) Right-click on the page, and select Variables:
2) In the dialog box Variables: Right-click on the column header for the section
(sub drawing), for which you wish to change model.
3) You now see all of the models for the sub drawing. Click on the desired
model:
2) Right-click here
3) Select new model
Automation 12.0
Page 250
Sub drawings
The model data for the sub drawing are now changed.
It is possible to change model data for any sub drawing in the project. You can also
do this for sub drawings, that has been placed in the project by automatic project
generation.
Scope for changing models
All other symbols in the project, that are a part of the applied symbols in the sub
drawing, will be updated according to the new model automatically.
This meaning, that if the sub drawing e.g. contains a symbol with the name -K3, all
project symbols for the component -K3 will be updated with the new data.
When the newly selected model implicates that some symbols change state, this
will also be the case for the implicated symbols outside the sub drawing.
Automation 12.0
Page 251
Sub drawings
PLACING
SUB DRAWINGS WITH DRAG’N DRAW
To place sub drawings by applying the drag’n draw technique, both the sub drawing
and the pages they are placed in, must be prepared for drag’n draw / automatic
placing. — See “On Pages and Sub drawings for Drag’n Draw” on page 259.
When the project pages and the sub drawings are prepared, you can place the sub
drawings like this:
1) Click on the SubDrawings tab in the Explorer window.
(If the Explorer window is not visible, then choose Settings => Pointer/
Screen and select Explorer window).
2) Click on the name of the desired sub drawing, drag it into the project page,
and release it as soon as it is over the project page — or just press the <Ctrl>
key and click on the sub drawing. Hereby the sub drawing is placed automatically on the project page, and connects automatically to e.g. the electrical
potentials on the page:
1) Click here
2) Click on the sub drawing, drag it over the
project page, and release the mouse button
The sub drawing is placed automatically, and connected to the
existing e.g. electrical potentials. The symbols in the sub drawing
are renamed automatically.
If variables are placed in the sub drawing, or if you can select different sets of
model data for the sub drawing, you now get the option of specifying which data to
insert in the sub drawing. You can read more about this by continuing the explanation under “If the sub drawing contains Model data” on page 247.
Automation 12.0
Page 252
Sub drawings
DRAG’N DRAW
SETUP
When sub drawings are placed automatically in project pages, Automation can
rename symbol names in these sub drawings automatically.
To specify how to do this, right-click somewhere inside the SubDrawings tab, and
select Drag’n Draw setup:
Here you specify whether to rename symbols in the sub drawings you insert, and
how to rename these symbols. — Read more about this in “Intelligent copying of
areas” on page 233.
Beyond this, you have the following options:
Keep page numbers
Because you can also drag full pages / projects into the active project, you can
select Keep page numbers to specify that you wish to keep the existing page
numbers, so that these are not changed when you drag new pages into the project.
This includes both the page numbers in the active project, and the page numbers
in the project / the project pages, which you drag into the project.
Drag’n Draw settings: For model data
When you select Show dialog if sub drawing contains model data, you always
enter the dialog box Rename symbols — see “Manual placing of sub drawings” on page 247, “Inserting sub drawings: With model data” on page 248 in
particular — when placing a sub drawing containing model data. From this dialog
box you can select which model you wish to place.
If the option is not selected, the sub drawing is placed without model data, or with
the data from the original sub drawing, if the sub drawing contains data values.
Update from database after Model selection
When you select Update from database after Model selection, the sub drawing
is updated from the database, when you select the model.
If this option is not selected, the symbols in the sub drawing are assigned exactly
the same data values as the sub drawing.
Automation 12.0
Page 253
Sub drawings
When you select Update from database after Model selection, a Setup button
appears in the dialog box: Click on it, and you enter the dialog box Update from
database:
Here you specify how to perform the update from the database. These options are
described in “Updating symbols from the database” on page 166.
Automation 12.0
Page 254
Sub drawings
CREATING
SUB DRAWINGS FOR MANUAL PLACING
A sub drawing can be any project, containing one single
diagram page. — See also “Creating sub drawings by
Copying from projects” on page 256.
For instance you can create a sub drawing like this:
Enter the Edit Sub drawing mode
1) In the SubDrawings tab in the Explorer window:
Right-click in the folder that you wish to place the
sub drawing in, and choose New:
2) Automation now changes to the Edit sub drawing mode, which you can see because the Page
type field at the bottom of the left toolbar blinks
green. You can now create a new sub drawing.
Blinks green in the
Edit sub drawing
mode
3) Draw a sub drawing — for instance as displayed in
the figure above — and attach article data from the
database to the symbols, if necessary. It has no
importance where on the page you draw the sub drawing.
— You can also insert a copied area from an existing
project, as described in “Creating sub drawings by
Copying from projects” on page 256.
4) Continue as described in “Inserting e.g. variable markers and/or model data” on page 257.
LAYERS ARE FLATTENED TO ONE LAYER
WHEN YOU PLACE A SUB DRAWING IN A PROJECT, THE LAYERS IN THE SUB
DRAWING ARE FLATTENED, SO THAT ALL INFORMATION IN THE SUB DRAWING
IS PLACED IN ONE LAYER ONLY. THE LAYER STRUCTURE IN THE SUB DRAWING IS THEREFORE LOST, WHEN THE SUB DRAWING IS PLACED IN THE PROJECT.
DO NOT INCLUDE LOGOS IN SUB DRAWINGS.
Automation 12.0
Page 255
Sub drawings
EDITING
SUB DRAWINGS
To edit a sub drawing, right-click on the sub drawing in the SubDrawings tab in the
Explorer window, and choose Edit. Hereby you can edit the sub drawing as
described in “Creating sub drawings for manual placing” on page 255.
CREATING
SUB DRAWINGS BY
COPYING
FROM PROJECTS
If you wish to create a sub drawing based on existing
material from a project, you can do like this:
Copying the desired area
1) Click the Area button.
2) Select the area you wish to copy, right-click in
the area, and choose Copy — see the figure to
the right.
Entering the Edit sub drawing mode
3) On the SubDrawings tab in the Explorer window: Right-click on the folder you wish to place
the sub drawing in, and select New:
4) Automation now change to the Edit sub drawing mode, which you can see because the
Page type field at the bottom of the left toolbar
blinks green. You can now create a new sub
drawing.
Copying an area from
a project ...
Blinks green in the
Edit sub drawing
mode
SAVE COPIED AREAS USING SAVE AS
IN STEAD OF CHOOSING NEW, YOU CAN CHOOSE SAVE AS. YOU
ENTER THE DIALOG BOX SAVE AS, WHERE YOU TYPE IN THE NAME OF
THE SUB DRAWING AND CLICK SAVE. THE SUB DRAWING IS THEN
CREATED, AND IS DISPLAYED IN THE SELECTED FOLDER IN THE SUBDRAWINGS TAB.
TO EDIT THE SUB DRAWING, YOU MUST THEN RIGHT-CLICK ON IT AND
CHOOSE EDIT.
Automation 12.0
Page 256
Sub drawings
Inserting the copied area
5) Right-click on the page and choose Paste.
6) You are now asked whether to rename the symbols in the area — and get the option of
changing reference designations (if any) in the
area:
— See which options you have in “Intelligent
copying of areas” on page 233.
Select the desired settings and click OK.
7) The copied area is now displayed including all
component data and reference designations for
the symbols in the area. — See the figure to the
right. Press <Esc> to remove the copied area
from the cross hairs.
Inserting a copied area
when creating a new
sub drawing
Adapting the sub drawing
8) Now adapt the copied area, so that it becomes exactly the sub drawing you
want.
Inserting e.g. variable markers and/or model data
9) If you want to, you can now place variable markers in the sub drawing, as
described in “Inserting variables in Sub drawings, Pages and Projects” on
page 269, and you can create different sets of model data for the sub drawing, as described in “Creating Model data for sub drawings” on page 272.
10) If you wish to use the sub drawing for drag’n draw or in automatic project
generation, you must also place insertion points in the sub drawing, as
described in “The function of the insertion points” on page 267. (It might be
easier to place the insertion points in the project before you copy the area —
see "Points to consider in Project generation" in the Project generator
manual).
Saving the sub drawing
11) When you have adapted the sub drawing, click on the Save button, and you
enter the Save as dialog box. Here the same folder is selected as the one
you clicked on in the SubDrawings tab, when you chose New.
Assign a name to the sub drawing, and click Save.
Automation 12.0
Page 257
Sub drawings
12) Choose File => Close to leave the edit sub drawing mode.
You have now created a new sub drawing from a copied area in a project, and have
inserted the sub drawing in a folder, which is accessible from the SubDrawings
tab in the Explorer window.
SUB DRAWINGS FOR DRAG’N DRAW / AUTOMATIC PLACING
IF YOU WISH TO USE THE SUB DRAWING FOR DRAG’N DRAW / AUTOMATIC
PLACING, YOU MUST ALSO READ “ON PAGES AND SUB DRAWINGS FOR
DRAG’N DRAW” ON PAGE 259 AND “PREPARING SUB DRAWINGS FOR
DRAG’N DRAW / AUT. PLACING” ON PAGE 265.
Automation 12.0
Page 258
Sub drawings
ON PAGES
AND
SUB
DRAWINGS FOR
DRAG’N DRAW
To apply the automatic functions in Automation for drag’n draw / automatic placing
of sub drawings, you need to create:
1) The project pages where you place the sub drawings. Here you must specify
the area in which you can place sub drawings on the page.
2) The sub drawings which Automation shall be able to place automatically on
the project pages. Here you must specify how much space the sub drawing
needs when it is placed in a project.
The project pages are created just like you create sub drawings — see “Preparing
Sub drawings for Drag’n Draw / Aut. placing” on page 265. Here it is also described
how to place the so-called insertion points, used for specifying the size of sub drawings and for specifying in which area sub drawings can be placed on project
pages.
On project pages you will — as opposed to sub drawings — also place a drawing
header.
Variable markers and Models
In project pages you can, just as for sub drawings, insert variable markers for the
texts in the page / sub drawing, that you wish to specify the contents of, when you
drag the page or sub drawing into the project.
For sub drawings you can furthermore specify different sets of model data, which
you can choose between when placing the individual sub drawing.
+ 4x
Project page prepared for
automatic placing of sub
drawings by drag’n draw
=
+ 4 sub drawings
for drag’n draw
= Automatic filled out
project page
Example
An example on creating a drawing template can be found in “Creating Project
pages for aut. placing of sub drawings” on page 260.
Automation 12.0
Page 259
Sub drawings
CREATING PROJECT
PAGES FOR AUT. PLACING OF SUB DRAWINGS
When using drag’n draw you can make Automation place sub drawings on project
pages automatically.
To get full benefit of this powerful tool, you must first create a project page, on
which you specify within which area the sub drawings can be placed automatically.
As you will see, you will only have to create this page once.
Page Templates prepared for automatic placing of sub drawings
To see the design of a page template prepared for automatic placing of sub drawings, do this:
1) Choose File => New, and you enter the dialog box New:
2a) Click on the tab Normal pages
2b) Click on Template
to create/edit a page
template
Or: Click
on Project
when creating drawing
templates
2c) Click on PCS-L1-L2-L3-PEN
2d) Click OK
2) Click on the tab Normal pages, click on Template in the right-hand side,
click on the page PCS-L1-L2-L3-PEN, and click OK.
AUTOMATIC PROJECT GENERATION: CREATING DRAWING TEMPLATES
WHEN YOU WISH TO CREATE A DRAWING TEMPLATE FOR AUTOMATIC GENERATION OF PROJECTS — SEE "CREATING DRAWING TEMPLATES FOR AUTOMATIC PROJECT GENERATION" IN THE Project generator MANUAL — YOU
MUST CHOOSE PROJECT, AND SAVE THE CREATED PROJECT IN THE FOLDER
WHERE YOU KEEP DRAWING TEMPLATES. — SEE "SETTINGS FOR THE PROJECT GENERATOR" IN THE Project generator MANUAL.
Automation 12.0
Page 260
Sub drawings
3) Zoom in on the upper left corner of
the page. Here an insertion point symbol is placed, as you can see in the
figure to the right.
4) In the other end of the electrical
potentials, there is placed another
insertion point symbol. These two
symbols specifies the area in which
subdrawings can be placed automatically. It is important that these two
symbols are aligned.
Insertion point symbol
5) Choose File => Close to exit the page
template.
THE INSERTION POINTS SPECIFIES WHERE THE SUB DRAWINGS ARE
INSERTED
THE TWO INSERTION POINT SYMBOLS SPECIFIES THE AREA IN WHICH
Automation CAN NOW PLACE THE SUB DRAWINGS AUTOMATICALLY.
— READ MORE ABOUT INSERTION POINT SYMBOLS IN “THE FUNCTION OF THE INSERTION POINTS” ON PAGE 267.
— SEE "POINTS TO CONSIDER IN PROJECT GENERATION" IN THE
Project generator MANUAL ALSO.
Placing insertion points on project pages for automatic placing of sub
drawings
If you are creating your own page template, that you wish to prepare for automatic
placing of subdrawings, you can place the insertion point symbols like this:
1) Start by opening an existing page template, as described in “Page Templates
prepared for automatic placing of sub drawings” on page 260. You might
choose to click on BlankPage, to start on an entirely new page.
2) Insert a drawing header, electrical potentials and whatever you wish to place
in the page template.
3) Click on the Symbols button and then on the Symbol menu button.
4) In the Symbol menu: Choose the Alias or the folder MISC, select the symbol
INSPOINT.SYM, and click OK. — Read more about the Symbol menu in
“Fetching symbols using the Symbol menu” on page 140.
5) Place the insertion point symbol — for instance at the righthand side of L1.
6) Insert another insertion point symbol — for instance at the
left-hand side of L1 — and press <Esc> to remove the symbol from the cross hairs. It is important that the two insertion
point symbols are aligned.
7) Click on the Save button.
Automation 12.0
Page 261
Sub drawings
8) In the dialog box Save: Write for instance the name Example.std, select the
folder Pcselcad\Standard\Template\Normal, and click Save.
(If you have created a drawing template for automatic generation of projects,
you must remember to save it in the folder where you save drawing templates. — See "Settings for the Project Generator" in the Project generator
manual).
9) Choose File => Close to close the page.
You have now created a template page, prepared for automatic placing of
sub drawings by drag’n draw.
Automation 12.0
Page 262
Sub drawings
Placing sub drawings automatically on a project page
THE FOLLOWING IS BASED ON THAT YOU USE A TEMPLATE PAGE — AS
DESCRIBED ABOVE —, PREPARED FOR AUTOMATIC PLACING OF SUB DRAWINGS BY DRAG’N DRAW.
IF YOU HAVE CREATED A DRAWING TEMPLATE FOR AUTOMATIC GENERATION
OF PROJECTS, YOU MUST IN STEAD DRAG IN THIS PAGE FROM THE FOLDER
YOU HAVE SPECIFIED AS DEFAULT FOLDER FOR DRAWING TEMPLATES AND
SUB DRAWINGS FOR THE CREATED TEMPLATE — SEE "SETTINGS FOR THE
PROJECT GENERATOR" IN THE Project generator MANUAL.
This is how you place a subdrawing automatically on a project page using drag’n
draw:
1) Insert a new page that is prepared for automatic insertion of subdrawings:
Choose File => New. In the dialog box New, click on the tab Normal pages,
and double-click on PCS-L1-L2-L3-PEN:
1a) Click on the Normal Pages tab
1b) Double-click on PCS-L1-L2-L3
2) When you have clicked OK in the Settings dialog box, you can see the two
insertion points on L1, as described in “Page Templates prepared for automatic placing of sub drawings” on page 260.
3) In the Explorer window: Open the folder Pcselcad\Standard\Subdrawing,
click on the sub drawing PCSMOTOR3.PRO (which have already been prepared for drag’n draw — see “Preparing Sub drawings for Drag’n Draw / Aut.
placing” on page 265), drag the sub drawing into the project page, and
release it as soon as you have dragged it out of the Explorer window.
4) You are now asked whether and how to rename the symbols in the subdrawing, and also get the option of choosing a subdrawing model, at the bottom
of the dialog box. Click OK.
5) Automation have now placed the sub drawing on the page automatically,
and have connected the sub drawing to the electrical potentials on the page.
Automation 12.0
Page 263
Sub drawings
6) Now drag the sub drawing PCSMOTOR3.PRO into the project page three
more times. The sub drawing have now been placed four times on the page
by using drag’n draw:
— If you could only get room to place the sub drawing three times on the
page, this is because the insertion points on the page are placed too close to
make room for four sub drawings on the page. For the future use of the page,
you might therefore consider to make room for exactly four sub drawings on
the page. — See e.g. "Points to consider in Project generation" in the Project
generator manual, "Creating sub drawings as Modules" in particular.
AUTOMATIC RENAMING AND ARTICLE DATA
ALL SYMBOLS, TERMINALS AND CABLES HAVE HEREBY BEEN RENAMED
AUTOMATICALLY. FURTHERMORE ALL SYMBOLS CONTAIN DATA FROM THE
DATABASE, BECAUSE THE PLACED SUB DRAWING CONTAINED ARTICLE NUMBERS FOR THE SYMBOLS.
— SEE “DRAG’N DRAW SETUP” ON PAGE 253 TO SEE HOW TO SPECIFY THE
SETUP FOR RENAMING ETC. WHEN APPLYING DRAG’N DRAW.
Subsequent update of text fields with variables
Though the variable markers are removed when placing the sub drawings, you still
have the option of editing text fields from the sub drawing, which had variables.
— See “Editing variables for inserted sub drawings” on page 249.
Automation 12.0
Page 264
Sub drawings
PREPARING SUB
DRAWINGS FOR
DRAG’N DRAW / AUT.
PLACING
When a sub drawing has been prepared for automatic placing, Automation can
automatically place the sub drawing correct, when you drag it into a page which
has been prepared for this. — See “Placing sub drawings with drag’n draw” on
page 252.
— See how to prepare project pages for automatic placing of sub drawings by
drag’n draw in “Creating Project pages for aut. placing of sub drawings” on
page 260.
SUB DRAWINGS FOR AUTOMATIC GENERATION OF PROJECTS
WHEN YOU WISH TO APPLY A SUB DRAWING FOR AUTOMATIC PROJECT
GENERATION, IT MUST BE PREPARED FOR AUTOMATIC PLACING.
— READ MORE ABOUT THIS IN "GENERATE AND UPDATE PROJECTS AUTOMATICALLY" IN THE Project generator MANUAL. PLEASE PAY ATTENTION
TO THE GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ON CREATING SUB DRAWINGS IN
"POINTS TO CONSIDER IN PROJECT GENERATION".
1) Open an existing sub drawing, or draw a new one, as described in “Creating
sub drawings for manual placing” on page 255, or copy an area from an
existing project, and create a sub drawing from this area, as described in
“Creating sub drawings by Copying from projects” on page 256.
2) Click on the Symbols button, and then on the Symbol menu button.
3) In the Symbol menu: Choose the Alias or the folder MISC, choose the symbol INSPOINT.SYM, and click OK. — See e.g. the figure under “Placing
insertion points on project pages for automatic placing of sub drawings” on
page 261 or read more about the Symbol menu in “Fetching symbols using
the Symbol menu” on page 140.
4) Place the two insertion points, so that they mark how much space the sub
drawing needs horizontally during the automatic placing — see “The function
of the insertion points” on page 267 (and see "Points to consider in Project
generation" in the Project generator manual).
The left
insertion point
The right
insertion point
5) If you also wish to control the texts in the sub drawing (e.g. for automatic project generation — see the Automation): Insert some so-called variable markers, which makes it possible to control the texts of the sub drawing when
placing the sub drawing (or to control the texts from a project definition file
during automatic project generation). Read how to do this in “Inserting variables in Sub drawings, Pages and Projects” on page 269.
Automation 12.0
Page 265
Sub drawings
6) If the sub drawing shall contain sets of model data — which you subsequently will be able to choose between when placing the sub drawing by
drag’n draw —, then also create these, as described in “Creating Model data
for sub drawings” on page 272.
7) Save the sub drawing in a folder where you place sub drawings. — If the sub
drawing shall be used for automatic generation of projects, you can for
instance save it in the folder which is set to Default folder for drawing templates and sub drawings, as described in "Settings for the Project Generator" in the Project generator manual.
You have now created a sub drawing, which can be used for drag’n draw / automatic placing, as described in “Placing sub drawings with drag’n draw” on page 252.
There you can also see a complete workflow for placing sub drawings on project
pages using drag’n draw.
Automation 12.0
Page 266
Sub drawings
THE
FUNCTION OF THE INSERTION POINTS
When you only wish to apply a sub drawing for manual placing, you do not need to
place insertion point symbols on the sub drawing. However, if you need to be able
to insert the part drawing automatically — by drag’n draw or by automatic project
generation —, it must have two insertion points. — See “Insertion points and automatic placing of sub drawings” on page 267.
The left insertion point on the part drawing is the point you get in the cross hairs,
when you place the sub drawing manually. You could therefore choose to insert just
one single insertion point with just this purpose.
The insertion point symbols of the sub drawings are removed when you place the
sub drawing on a project page.
The created insertion point symbols are not displayed when printing project pages.
This is because they are created using the color NP.
Insertion points and automatic placing of sub drawings
When using automatic placing of sub drawings, there exists two sets of insertion
points:
1) The insertion points of the sub drawing: They tell the program how much
space the sub drawing needs when it is placed automatically.
2) The insertion points of the project page: They tell the program where sub
drawings can be placed on the page. (The project page can be fetched
directly from a template page, or it can be a drawing template — see “On
Pages and Sub drawings for Drag’n Draw” on page 259).
During the automatic placing the sub drawing is placed so that its left insertion
point is placed on the left insertion point of the project page. The left insertion point
of the project page is then moved, so that it now is placed on the position of the
right insertion point of the sub drawing. The insertion points of the sub drawing are
deleted from the page.
The left insertion point of the project The left insertion point of the project
page before inserting the sub drawing page after inserting the sub drawing
A sub drawing can not be placed automatically if there is not enough room for this
sub drawing between the insertion points on the project page.
Automation 12.0
Page 267
Sub drawings
Insertion points and automatic project generation
During automatic project generation — see "Generate and Update projects automatically" in the Project generator manual — the situation mentioned above
would result in inserting an extra project page, on which the sub drawing would be
placed.
Placing the insertion point symbols carefully
When applying insertion point symbols, you must be careful to let the insertion
points for the sub drawings match the electrical lines on the drawing templates, on
which the sub drawings are going to be placed.
1
2
3
Project page
Sub drawing
It is important to make sure of the following (observe the figure above):
1) Place the insertion point symbols on the sub drawing so that they are at the
same height as the uppermost parked line.
2) Also place the insertion point symbols on the project page on the uppermost
of the phases to which the sub drawing is going to be connected.
3) Adjust the vertical distance between the parked lines on the sub drawing to
the distance between the phases on the project page.
4) Make sure to place the insertion points on the sub drawing so that there are
room enough for the texts, which can be inserted via automatic project generation.
— Please also read "Points to consider in Project generation" in the Project generator manual. Here you will find a survey of additional aspects to consider, when
creating sub drawings.
SUB DRAWINGS CAN ALSO BE PLACED VERTICALLY
ABOVE YOU FIND A DESCRIPTION OF PLACING SUB DRAWINGS FROM THE
LEFT TO THE RIGHT.
PLEASE NOTE THAT SUB DRAWINGS CAN ALSO BE PLACED VERTICALLY
FROM THE TOP TO THE BOTTOM.
Automation 12.0
Page 268
Sub drawings
INSERTING
VARIABLES IN
SUB
DRAWINGS,
PAGES
AND
PROJECTS
When a sub drawing contains variables, you can for instance control symbol article
numbers, symbol datafields e.g. containing motor data, or free texts placed under
electrical circuits. —See e.g. “Manual placing of sub drawings” on page 247.
To do this you must:
1) Insert variables in the sub drawing, as described in “Inserting variable markers on a sub drawing (or on a drawing template)” on page 269.
2) Create a variable list, as described in “Creating a variable list for a sub drawing / drawing template” on page 271.
When applying sub drawings for automatic project generation, you can control all
texts and names in the project. — See the Project generator manual.
Inserting variable markers on a sub drawing (or on a drawing
template)
When you wish to create variables, you do this by inserting so-called variable markers in the project. All data can be controlled via these variables.
To insert a variable marker, you write /@1 behind the first text in the sub drawing /
project, that you wish to turn into a variable. Then you write /@2 behind the next,
then /@3, and so on, until all variables in the sub drawing have been specified.
The text with the variable @1 is placed
in the first text column in the project
definition file.
The text with the variable @2 is placed
in the second text column etc.
CREATE A VARIABLE LIST
WHEN YOU HAVE PLACED THE RELEVANT VARIABLES ON THE PAGE, CHOOSE
TOOLS => CREATE VARIABLE LIST IN (SUB) DRAWING TO CREATE A VARIABLE LIST FOR THE SUB DRAWING (OR DRAWING TEMPLATE).
When you right-click on the page and choose Variables, you can subsequently
see the created variables and edit them, if you wish to.
— Please also see “Editing variables for inserted sub drawings” on page 249 and
“Manual placing of sub drawings” on page 247.
Automation 12.0
Page 269
Sub drawings
Variables specifying parts of a project text
A variable can also be inserted so that it is only part of an otherwise constant project text. This is specified by placing the variable between the characters "<" and
">".
When for instance you write -M</@1>, and the variable @1 is assigned the value
7, this results in the text -M7.
This can for instance be useful if you are using a system where several symbols in
a sub drawing must always have the same number. If for instance the symbols in
the sub drawing shall be named -F1, -Q1, -W1 and -M1 one place, and -F2, -Q2,
-W2 and -M2 in the next, this can be controlled using a single variable: -F</@1>,
-Q</@1>, -W</@1> and -M</@1>.
DEFAULT VALUE FOR INSERTED VARIABLES
When an inserted variable has a text between the "<"-character and a "/"-character, this is regarded as the default value for the variable.
This can for instance be applied when creating project definition files, so that you
can make it clear to yourself what to insert at this exact position in the file. If for
instance you write Control of <MOTOR/@1>, the variable @1 will get the value
MOTOR in the project definition file.
Sub drawings with model data
If you wish to create different sets of variable values for a sub drawing, so that you
can choose between different models when placing the sub drawing, please read
“Creating Model data for sub drawings” on page 272.
VARIABLES ON ORDINARY PROJECT PAGES
YOU CAN ALSO INSERT VARIABLES ON ORDINARY PROJECT PAGES.
Variables for Page title and Page data
On drawing templates — and in ordinary project pages — you can also insert variables on
all Page data datafields, and in the Page
title.
When you have inserted these variables in
the pages, and have executed Tools => Create variable list, you can choose Edit =>
Automation 12.0
Page 270
Sub drawings
Variables. Here the created variables for the page will always be placed in the first
section:
Variables for Page article data - including the page reference
It is also possible to create variable for Page article data for pages (Name, Type,
Article no and Function) on drawing templates for automatic project generation
via Excel.
When you wish to be able to control the
page reference designation, place a variable marker in the Name field in the Page
article data dialog box for the page.
You enter the dialog box Page article
data by right-clicking on the page, and
then choose Page article data.
Variables on Symbol datafields
If you are using symbols with specially created symbol datafields — see “Extra
symbol Datafields in symbols” on page 691 —, you can also insert variables on
these.
Creating a variable list for a sub drawing / drawing template
When you have placed the relevant variables on the page, choose Tools => Create variable list in (Sub) drawing. You have now created a variable list.
Click OK.
Automation 12.0
Page 271
Sub drawings
CREATING MODEL
DATA FOR SUB DRAWINGS
You can use the same sub drawing for representing different models for e.g. a
motorstarter circuit. Hereby you use one single drawing, but attach different article
data / texts to the symbols in the sub drawing.
The same sub drawing can therefore be used for e.g. a 55 kW and a 250 kW
motorstarter circuit.
VIDEO ABOUT SUB DRAWINGS WITH MODEL DATA
ON WWW.PCSCHEMATIC.COM UNDER VIDEOS, YOU CAN SEE A VIDEO
ABOUT HOW TO WORK WITH SUB DRAWINGS WITH MODEL DATA.
To create models for a sub drawing, do this:
1) Draw the sub drawing, as described in “Creating sub drawings for manual
placing” on page 255 or “Creating sub drawings by Copying from projects” on
page 256. — If the sub drawing shall be used for drag’n draw, please also
see “Preparing Sub drawings for Drag’n Draw / Aut. placing” on page 265.
2) Insert variable markers on the texts in the sub drawing, that are different from
model to model. — See “Inserting variables in Sub drawings, Pages and Projects” on page 269.
Creating models for a sub drawing
3) While you are working on the sub drawing (in the Edit sub drawing mode):
Right-click on the page, and choose Variables:
4) In the dialog box Variables: Click on Add model:
5) In the dialog box New model: Type in the name on the new model you wish
to create, and click OK.
6) In the dialog box Variables: Double-click in the fields for the different variables in the model, and type in the data for the model — or right-click on the
Automation 12.0
Page 272
Sub drawings
field and select Database, and you enter the Database menu, from which
you select the desired component:
Double-click in the
fields, and type in
the data
Creating a new model by copying data
7) Click on Add model and type in a title for the new model.
8) Right-click on the first created model, and choose Copy model data:
9) Right-click on the new model, and choose Paste model data:
10) Answer OK to overwrite the model data for the new model (do not select to
insert the title), and the data are inserted as data for the new model.
11) For the text fields you wish to edit: Double-click on the field, and edit the
contents. — Or right-click on the field and select Database, and you enter
the Database menu, from which you select the desired component.
Automation 12.0
Page 273
Sub drawings
12) Click OK.
You have now created model values for a sub drawing. The created sets of model
values, are the model values you can choose from, when the sub drawing is placed
in a project. — See “Manual placing of sub drawings” on page 247, “Inserting sub
drawings: With model data” on page 248 in particular.
LINE ARTICLE DATA CAN ALSO CONTAIN VARIABLES
LINE ARTICLE DATA IN SUB DRAWINGS CAN ALSO CONTAIN VARIABLES. THIS
APPLIES FOR BOTH DRAG’N DRAW AND IN CONNECTION WITH AUTOMATIC
PROJECT GENERATION.
Creating a model variable
For use in automatic project generation, you can create a so-called model variabe,
so that you via the project definition file can specify which of the models in the sub
drawings to insert.
Read more about this in "Create model variable" in the Project generator manual.
Model data: Options when right-clicking
When you right-click in the dialog box Variables when creating model data, you get
the following options:
Database: Gives you the option of
choosing components from the database. Appears when right-clicking on an
S.Article or a S.Type variable.
Model title: You can edit the title for the
selected model.
Model variable: See “Creating a model
variable” on page 274.
Insert model: Inserts a new model
where you have clicked.
Add model: Adds a new model.
Delete model: Deletes the selected model.
Move left: Moves the selected model one position to the left. — See also “Drag
and drop Models in the dialog box” on page 274.
Move right: Moves the selected model one position to the right. — See also “Drag
and drop Models in the dialog box” on page 274.
Copy model data: Copies the values for the selected model — see “Creating a
new model by copying data” on page 273.
Insert model data: Inserts the copied model values — see “Creating a new model
by copying data” on page 273.
Drag and drop Models in the dialog box
To move a model to another position in the dialog box, you can click on the title of
the model, and drag it to another position in the dialog box.
Automation 12.0
Page 274
Sub drawings
INVISIBLE
AREAS AND SUB DRAWINGS
When inserting sub drawings, you can subsequently make parts of these sub drawings invisible, as described in “Making objects invisible” on page 62.
Automation 12.0
Page 275
Sub drawings
SUB
DRAWINGS WITH INTELLIGENT LINE CONNECTION
To create sub drawings with intelligent line connection, you must use a line connection symbol, as described in “Creating Line Connection symbols” on page 709.
This line connection symbol can for instance be placed as displayed in the figure
below.
Insert e.g. the
line connection
symbol here
Controlled via variable marker in the symbol name
To control the connection, you must insert a variable marker in the symbol name.
When the variable in the name gets the same value as one of the connection
points — e.g. 3 —, the wire, which is connected to the symbol, will connect to
where connection point 3 is placed. It can therefore be controlled if for instance a
wire in a sub drawing connects to L1, L2 or L3.
This aspect can therefore be different depending on which model of the sub drawing you choose. Below the models L1, L2 and L3 have been created:
Automation 12.0
Page 276
Sub drawings
When you place the sub drawing in a project, you can therefore get the following
result by placing the three different models:
Model L1 selected
Model L2 selected Model L3 selected
When the sub drawing is placed on the project page, the line connection symbol is
converted to an ordinary line, and is therefore no longer a symbol.
Automation 12.0
Page 277
Rename symbols
RENAME SYMBOLS
When you select Tools => Rename symbols, you enter the dialog box Rename
selected symbols, from which you can rename the used symbols in the project.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— GENERERAL INFO ON THE DIALOG BOX RENAME SELECTED SYMBOLS ........(P. 278)
— SELECTING SYMBOLS IN THE DIALOG BOX .................................................(P. 280)
— DIRECTION FOR RENUMBERING SYMBOLS .................................................(P. 281)
— SPECIFY START VALUE ............................................................................(P. 282)
— SHOW NEW SYMBOL NAMES .....................................................................(P. 282)
— NAMING WHEN RENUMBERING TERMINALS ................................................(P. 282)
— INSERTING SYMBOL NAMES OR CONNECTION NAMES .................................(P. 284)
— SORTING ON COLUMN CAPTIONS ..............................................................(P. 285)
INSERT SYMBOL / CONNECTION NAMES
IT IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO RIGHT-CLICK ON A SYMBOL IN THE PROJECT, AND
SELECT INSERT NAME. — READ MORE ABOUT THIS IN “INSERT NEW SYMBOL
NAMES OR CONNECTION NAMES” ON PAGE 284.
GENERAL
INFO ON THE DIALOG BOX
RENAME
SELECTED SYMBOLS
When you select Tools => Rename symbols, you enter the dialog box Rename
selected symbols:
When you wish to rename symbols in the project, do this:
Automation 12.0
Page 278
Rename symbols
1) Select which symbols to rename — see “Selecting symbols in the Rename
symbols dialog box” on page 280.
2) Specify a direction for renaming the symbols — see “Direction for renaming
symbols” on page 281.
3) Specify how to rename terminals (if any) — see “Naming when renaming terminals” on page 282.
4) Specify a start number for the renamed symbols, see which names this will
result in, and execute the renaming — see “Specify Start value for Renaming
symbols” on page 282.
The function Rename selected symbols can also be handy when you wish to
keep control of the symbol names when merging projects.
WORKS ONLY WHEN USING FREE NAME FORMAT FOR SYMBOLS
THIS FUNCTION ONLY WORKS IF YOU USE FREE NAMING FORMAT FOR THE
SYMBOLS IN THE PROJECT — THIS MEANING THAT YOU DO NOT USE CURRENT PATH NUMBERING.
IF YOU DO NOT USE FREE NAMING FORMAT, THE FUNCTION CAN ONLY BE
USED FOR RENAMING TERMINALS.
Which symbol names are renamed
Only symbol names ending with a number, are renamed/renumbered. If a symbol
name contains a number before a letter, this number is not changed.
Undo renumbering
Please note that it is possible to undo the renaming by using the Undo function
after closing the dialog box Rename selected symbols.
Automation 12.0
Page 279
Rename symbols
SELECTING
SYMBOLS IN THE
RENAME
SYMBOLS DIALOG BOX
When you click on Execute, all symbols listed in the dialog box Rename selected
symbols are renamed.
You can select which symbols to rename in three different ways:
1. Selecting/deselecting in the list
When you select symbols in the list, you can use the <Shift> and/or the <Ctrl> key,
as you normally do in Windows, and e.g. in the Object Lister. — See “Selecting
objects in the Object Lister” on page 298.
The selected symbols can then either be selected or deselected:
• If you click on Select in the right-hand side of the dialog box: The selected symbols are now the only symbols in the list.
• If you click on Deselect in the right-hand side of the dialog box: The selected
symbols are deleted from the list. (You can also press the <Delete> button to
delete the selected symbols from the list).
2. Selecting by specifying symbol names
In the field Select name(s) you can type in which symbols
you wish to select, among the names already displayed in the
list.
Then click on Select in the right-hand side of the dialog box. Now only symbols
fulfilling the entered criterion are displayed.
3. Selecting project symbols by right-clicking
You can also select multiple symbols in the project — before entering the dialog
box Rename selected symbols:
3a) Select the symbols by dragging a window over them with the mouse — if
necessary please see “Selecting objects” on page 49, in particular “Selecting
more objects of the same kind in one window” on page 49.
Automation 12.0
Page 280
Rename symbols
3b) Right-click and select Rename (see the figure below) — or select Tools =>
Rename symbols.
3c) You now enter the dialog box Rename selected symbols, where only the
selected symbols are displayed:
THE OTHER SYMBOLS FOR THE COMPONENT ARE ALSO RENAMED
PLEASE NOTE, THAT ONLY THE SELECTED SYMBOLS ARE DISPLAYED IN THE
DIALOG BOX. WHEN A COMPONENT HAS MORE SYMBOLS IN THE PROJECT,
WITH THE SAME NAME AS THE SELECTED SYMBOL, ALL SYMBOLS FOR THE
COMPONENT ARE RENAMED IN THE PROJECT.
DIRECTION
FOR RENAMING SYMBOLS
When you rename symbols, it is only their position in the project, that determines
which names the symbols are assigned.
The direction for the renaming always starts from the first project page, and ends at
the last project page.
How the renaming is performed on the individual
project page, can be specified in the upper-left corner of the dialog box Rename selected symbols.
Here you select one of the four corners, to specify
from which corner to start the renaming.
Furthermore, you specify the numbering direction
Vertical or Horisontal.
Automation 12.0
Page 281
Rename symbols
What is important for which number a component is assigned, is therefore the first
time a symbol for the component appears in the project.
— The function and location aspects in reference designations (if any) remains
unchanged under the renaming.
SPECIFY START
VALUE FOR
RENAMING
SYMBOLS
When you wish to specify a start value for the renamed symbols, type in the number in the Start value field.
Hereby the new symbol names starts with e.g. the number 100.
SHOW
NEW SYMBOL NAMES BEFORE RENAMING SYMBOLS
When you have selected which symbols to rename, have specified a direction for
the renaming, and have specified a start value (optional), you are ready to execute
the renaming.
Before you do this, you can click the Show button in the right-hand side of the dialog box. The new names are now displayed in the column New Name — see the
figure above.
When you are satisfied with the new names, click the Execute button, and the
listed symbols are renamed in the project.
UNDO THE RENAMING
PLEASE NOTE THAT IT IS POSSIBLE TO UNDO THE RENAMING BY USING THE
UNDO FUNCTION, AFTER CLOSING THE DIALOG BOX RENAME SELECTED
SYMBOLS.
NAMING
WHEN RENAMING TERMINALS
In the dialog box Rename selected symbols
you can specify how to rename the terminals in
the list.
You have the following options:
OPTIONS
ACTION
DO NOT RENAME
NO TERMINALS AND NO TERMINAL CONNECTION POINTS ARE RENAMED.
TERMINALS
Automation 12.0
Page 282
Rename symbols
OPTIONS
ACTION
RENAME TERMINALS
ONLY THE TERMINALS ARE RENAMED. TERMINAL CONNECTION
POINTS ARE NOT RENAMED.
RENAME TERMINAL
CONNECTION POINTS
THE TERMINAL CONNECTION POINTS ARE RENAMED. TERMINAL
NAMES ARE NOT RENAMED. — SEE “FULFILLING STANDARDS WHEN
COPYING AREAS” ON PAGE 234.
— These options are precisely the same as the options for intelligent copying of
areas. See more about this in “Intelligent copying of areas” on page 233.
RULES FOR RENAMING TERMINALS
TERMINAL CONNECTION NAMES ARE ONLY RENAMED WHEN THESE ARE
NUMBERS. TERMINAL CONNECTION NAMES ARE ONLY RENAMED WHEN BOTH
(/ALL) CONNECTION NAMES FOR A TERMINAL ARE IDENTICAL.
Example on renaming terminals
When you select e.g. Rename Terminal Connection Points, and click on Show,
you can see the new connection names for the terminals in the column New
Pinno:
— See also “Insert new Symbol names or Connection names” on page 284.
Automation 12.0
Page 283
Rename symbols
INSERT
NEW
SYMBOL
NAMES OR
CONNECTION
NAMES
It is also possible to use the Rename selected symbols dialog box to insert new
symbol names or connection names in the project:
1. Insert new symbol names
To insert e.g. three new symbol names starting from -P2 in the project, do this:
1a) Select -P2 in the project.
1b) Select Functions => Rename symbols — or right-click on -P2 and select
Insert name.
1c) In the dialog box Insert name: Click in the Insert new names field, and type
in how many names to insert:
1d) Click on Execute.
The symbol -P2 is hereby renamed to -P5, and the subsequent -P symbols are
renamed correspondingly. (-P3 are renamed to -P6 — etc.).
The symbol names -P2, -P3 and -P4 are now available in the project.
2. Insert new connection names on terminals
To insert e.g. five new connection names in terminal -X1, starting from connection
4, do this:
2a) Select the terminal which has the connection 4 in the project.
2b) Select Functions => Rename symbols. (Or right-click directly on the terminal symbol and select Insert name).
2c) In the dialog box Insert name: Click in the Insert free names field, and type
in how many connection names to insert:
2d) Click on Execute.
The new connection names are now inserted for the terminal, according to the
same principle as described in “Insert new symbol names” on page 284.
Automation 12.0
Page 284
Rename symbols
SORTING
ACC. TO COLUMN NAMES IN THE DIALOG BOX
When you open the dialog box Rename selected symbols, the information in the
dialog box are sorted by symbol name, but if you wish to e.g. sort according to
type, you just click on the column caption Type.
When you wish to sort in reverse order, just click on the column caption again. The
sorting is alphabetical/numerical.
All columns can be sorted in both directions.
Automation 12.0
Page 285
Inserting images
INSERTING IMAGES
If you want to insert an image on a page in your project, you choose Insert =>
Insert Picture. You can choose this function independent from which type of drawing objects you are working with.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES HOW TO INSERT AN IMAGE IN A PROJECT.
You now enter the dialog box Open, where you determine which file to insert into
the project, and click Open.
Here you can choose between inserting the image with or without a link. — Se
more about this on the figure above.
The file types you can open from here are
either .bmp files, .jpg files, metafiles or
enhanced metafiles.
If you need to insert other file types/image
formats, it is possible that you can insert the
image as an OLE object, which is described
in “Inserting files from other programs / OLE”
on page 647.
When you have opened the image, it is placed in the cross hairs, and you click
where you want to place it on the page.
Move, delete, copy or rotate inserted image
If you want to select an image, you click the Area button, and then click on the reference point of the image — or, alternatively, drag a window around the reference
point.
Automation 12.0
Page 286
Inserting images
If you right-click on the selected image, this menu appear:
Here you determine to either move, copy, delete or rotate the selected image.
Images can not be rotated.
Scaling an image
When you want to change the size of an image, do like this:
1) Double-click on the image
2) Point on one of the corners of the image, so that the mouse pointer changes
to a two-way arrow
Point at the corner, and drag until
the desired size is achieved
3) Press the mouse button, drag the image to the desired size, and release the
mouse button
4) Click somewhere outside the image, to deselect the image
You can also scale an image by choosing Edit => Scale, as described in “Scaling
areas” on page 241.
Automation 12.0
Page 287
Inserting images
Automation 12.0
Page 288
Survey and Reference
Designations
This section describes functions, which gives
you a survey of projects:
- The Explorer ..................................................... (p. 291)
- The Object Lister..............................................(p. 296)
- Find and Replace .............................................(p. 306)
- Design check.................................................... (p. 310)
- Printing ............................................................... (p. 314)
- The Explorer as Project/Symbol menu ........ (p. 321)
- Reference designations .................................(p. 322)
The Explorer window: The Projects tab
THE EXPLORER WINDOW: THE PROJECTS TAB
The Explorer window contains two different tabs: The Projects tab and the SubDrawings tab. This chapter describes the Projects tab, as well as the general options in the Explorer window. The SubDrawings tab is described in “Sub drawings”
on page 244.
In the Projects tab in the Explorer window, you can display all types of information
about the active projects, and can navigate back and forth between the project
pages in all of the open projects. Furthermore, you can edit Project data, Page
Data and component data directly from the Explorer window.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— GENERAL SETTINGS FOR THE EXPLORER WINDOW ...................................(P. 291)
— DISPLAYING AND HIDING INFORMATION IN THE PROJECTS TAB ..................(P. 292)
— EDITING PROJECT, PAGE AND ARTICLE DATA FROM THE PROJECTS TAB ...(P. 292)
— SELECTING SYMBOLS FROM THE PROJECTS TAB ......................................(P. 294)
— JUMPING BETWEEN PROJECT PAGES IN DIFFERENT PROJECTS ..................(P. 295)
— UPDATING THE PROJECTS TAB ................................................................(P. 295)
— CLOSING PROJECTS FROM THE PROJECTS TAB ........................................(P. 295)
GENERAL
SETTINGS FOR THE
EXPLORER
WINDOW
You can specify where to place the Explorer window, as explained in “Docking
Windows and Toolbars” on page 24.
If you do not want to use the Explorer window, you can turn it off by choosing Settings => Pointer/Screen, and deselect Explorer window.
View Explorer window
View => Explorer window is a menu point which shows/hides the Explorer window, if Explorer window has been selected in Settings => Pointer/Screen. The
function has the short-cut key <Shift+F12>, so that you can show/hide the Explorer window quickly.
The Explorer window in Edit symbol mode
When you are designing symbols — being in the Edit symbol mode — you most
likely do not need the Explorer window.
Therefore you can choose Settings => Pointer/Screen => Explorer window and
subsequently deselect Show in Edit symbol, which specifies whether to show the
Explorer window in the Edit symbol mode.
Automation 12.0
Page 291
The Explorer window: The Projects tab
DISPLAY
AND
HIDE
INFORMATION IN THE
EXPLORER
WINDOW
In the Projects tab in the Explorer window,
you can display all the information attached to
a specific object, by clicking the small triangle
icon next to the object. — Please see the
figure to the right.
Click here to open
To stop displaying the extra information, click
the triangle icon once again.
Click here to clos
If for instance you click on the triangle icon in
the Project Data line above, you see the project data for the project.
As you can see, the symbol in the Project
Data line has now changed to a different triangle icon. When you click on this triangle, the
project data datafields are hidden, and the
Explorer window looks like the first figure
again.
CHANGING DATA FROM THE
TAB
PROJECTS
From the Projects tab in the Explorer window you can change project data, page
data and component data.
Editing Project data from Projects tab
To edit Project data from the Projects
tab, right-click on the line Project data,
and choose Edit Project data.
You then enter the dialog box Project
data, from where you can edit the project
data for the project. This dialog box is
described in “Project and Page data” on
page 111.
Make the changes and click OK.
Editing the contents of a single Project data datafield
When you want to edit the contents of a single Project data datafield — for instance
Customer name — you right-click on the datafield in the Explorer window, and
choose Edit Customer name. You then enter a dialog box where you make the
changes and click OK.
Editing Page data and Project data
Page data datafields are changed directly from the Projects tab in the Explorer
window, as described in “Editing the contents of a single Project data datafield” on
page 292.
Automation 12.0
Page 292
The Explorer window: The Projects tab
When you edit a Page data datafield, you also get the option of changing the contents of all Page data datafields of the chosen type in the entire project by choosing
Change on All Pages.
The contents of Page data datafields can also be edited from the Object Lister
(short-cut key [F7]), as described in “Editing Page data in the Object Lister” on
page 304.
Editing Component data from the Projects tab in the Explorer
window
When you want to edit the Component data for at symbol, this can be done by
right-clicking on the symbol in the Projects tab in the Explorer window, and
choosing Edit Symbol Data.
This brings you into the dialog box Component data, where you edit the component data and click OK.
You can also make changes in article data for cables and signals from the Projects
tab in the Explorer window.
Component data and cable article data can also be changed directly from the
Object Lister (short-cut key [F7]), as described in “Check and edit component
data and cable data” on page 303.
Automation 12.0
Page 293
The Explorer window: The Projects tab
SELECTING
A
SYMBOL
ON A PAGE
Next to each symbol in the Projects tab in the Explorer window, you’ll find a small
symbol icon. When you click the icon, the symbol is selected in the project. When
you click the icon for a page, the selected page is displayed:
Show the project page
Show/select the symbo
In the project PCSMOTORDEMO2 you can for instance do this in the Projects tab:
Click the triangle icon next to PCSMOTORDEMO2 and click the triangle icon next
to Pages. You now get a survey of all the pages in the project.
Now click the triangle icon next to the chapter Diagrams, and click the triangle icon
next to the page 6:Diagram 2. You can now see that you can get more information
about Page Data, Components, Cables and Signals on the page.
Open Components, and then open =W1+A1-K1.
You can now see all the symbols on the page for the selected component — in this
case two.
When you click on the symbol icon next to the relay symbol, the symbol is displayed/selected in the project, as displayed below:
When you then click on the symbol icon next to the make contact, the cross-hairs
then points out the make contact for you.
The line you clicked on can contain information about the connection names for the
symbol (A2, A1), the type of the symbol (Relay), the symbol file name (07-15-01)
and the title of the symbol. Due to the size of the Explorer window, you will probably not be able to see all that information. If you let the mouse pointer rest a
short while over the line, the entire line will be displayed.
Please note, that you can do the same for Cables and Signals.
Automation 12.0
Page 294
The Explorer window: The Projects tab
JUMP
BETWEEN PAGES IN MORE THAN ONE PROJECT
When you have more than one project open at
the time, you can find all the open projects in the
Projects tab in the Explorer window.
When you open Pages for the projects, you can
jump back and forth between the pages in the different projects, just by clicking on the page icon
for the relevant project page.
By opening Project Data for the projects, you can
for instance compare project data for the projects.
UPDATING
THE
EXPLORER
WINDOW
When you delete a project page, which is displayed in the Explorer window, this page is also
deleted from the Explorer window.
CLOSING
PROJECTS FROM THE
PROJECTS
TAB
If you want to close a project from the Projects tab in the Explorer window, rightclick on the project file name and choose Close.
You can also right-click on a project in the Projects tab in the Explorer window,
and choose Go to. This activates the last page you worked on in the project.
Automation 12.0
Page 295
The Object Lister
THE OBJECT LISTER
To navigate quickly in your projects, you can use the Object Lister.
The Object Lister makes it possible for you to locate any given component in a
project and/or information about the applied symbols/components.
From the Object Lister you can also edit component data, PLC I/O data, page
data and free texts for all of the project. Furthermore, you can print and create files
containing selected information to for instance Excel.
— See also “The Explorer window: The Projects tab” on page 291 and “Find and
Replace” on page 306.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— ON THE DIALOG BOX OBJECT LISTER .......................................................(P. 297)
— SELECTING OBJECTS VIA THE OBJECT LISTER ..........................................(P. 298)
— LOCKING THE OBJECT LISTER TO A REFERENCE DESIGNATION ..................(P. 298)
— THE SORTING ORDER OF DATA IN THE OBJECT LISTER ..............................(P. 298)
— SELECTING OBJECTS ...............................................................................(P. 298)
— COUNTING ON SELECTED OBJECTS ..........................................................(P. 299)
— DISPLAYING INFORMATION .......................................................................(P. 300)
— PRINTING ................................................................................................(P. 300)
— SAVE TO FILE ..........................................................................................(P. 301)
— CHOOSING NEW COMPONENTS IN THE DATABASE ......................................(P. 301)
— SEARCHING.............................................................................................(P. 302)
— SHOWING THE NUMBER OF FOUND OBJECTS .............................................(P. 302)
— EDITING SYMBOL AND CABLE DATA VIA THE OBJECT LISTER .....................(P. 303)
— EDITING PLC I/O DATA VIA THE OBJECT LISTER .......................................(P. 303)
— EDITING PROJECT TEXTS VIA THE OBJECT LISTER .....................................(P. 304)
— EDITING PAGE DATA VIA THE OBJECT LISTER ...........................................(P. 304)
— OBJECT LISTER FOR ONE COMPONENT .....................................................(P. 304)
— TEXT LINKS IN THE OBJECT LISTER...........................................................(P. 305)
Automation 12.0
Page 296
The Object Lister
ON
THE
OBJECT LISTER
DIALOG BOX
To enter the Object lister you choose Functions => Object Lister, or press the
short-cut key [F7]:
Lock Object Lister
to reference designation
Update
Choose which type of
objects to display
View object
in project
Edit data
Fetch data
from database
Search
Click on an
object, and it
is displayed
in the project
Save as file
e.g. for Excel
For scrollling up/down
and left/right in the list
By clicking in the upper-left corner you determine whether to find Symbols, Signals, Texts, Wire numbers, Cables, PLC I/O, Pages or Reference frames.
Please note, that the dialog box is not filled out until you have chosen one of these
options.
If you, as above, have chosen Symbols, all project symbols will appear in alphabetical order — independently of which page you are working on at present.
THE OBJECT LISTER REMAINS ON SCREEN
THE OBJECT LISTER REMANIS ON SCREEN WHILE YOU ARE WORKING WITH
THE PROJECT. WHEN THE OBJECT LISTER DISPLAYS DATA, THE PROGRAM
UPDATES THESE DATA AUTOMATICALLY, WHEN YOU MAKE CHANGES IN THE
PROJECT.
— THE OBJECT LISTER CAN BE SET TO BECOME TRANSPARENT, WHEN YOU
ARE WORKING ON THE DRAWING AREA, WHILE YOU LET THE OBJECT LISTER
REMAIN ON THE SCREEN — SEE “POINTER/SCREEN” ON PAGE 815.
Signals in the Object Lister
When you select Signals in the Object
Lister, the signal references are also displayed:
+ before the reference, means that the signal is With reference, and displays From/
To.
Automation 12.0
Page 297
The Object Lister
* before the reference, means that With reference is not selected, and displays
All.
- before the reference, means that With reference is not selected.
SELECTING
OBJECTS DIRECTLY FROM THE
OBJECT LISTER
If for instance you have chosen to work with Symbols, and wish to find the symbol
=G1+A2-Q2 in the project, scroll down to it and double-click on =G1+A2-Q2. This
automatically places you on the page in the project where the symbol is located,
and the symbol will be selected.
This also applies for other types of objects in the Object Lister.
LOCKING
THE
OBJECT LISTER
TO A REFERENCE DESIGNATION
When you click on the Lock list to reference
designation button, you enter the dialog box
Reference designation, from which you can
select which reference designation to display
in the Object Lister.
Only objects with this reference
designation is displayed
Subsequently, only objects with the selected
reference designation are displayed in the
Object Lister. In the title bar of the Object
Lister, you can see the selected reference
designation.
Show all objects with any reference designation again
To make the Object Lister displays objects with any project designation again,
click on the Lock list to reference designation button, and select Top node =
none for both the function and the location aspect in the dialog box Reference
designations.
THE
SORTING ORDER OF THE DATA IN THE
OBJECT LISTER
Initially the objects will be sorted by symbol name (page name and text contents
respectively), but if you want them sorted by for instance article, click on the
column heading Article.
When you wish to see the objects in reverse order, click the column heading again.
The sorting order is alphabetical/numerical. You can sort all columns in both directions.
SELECTING
OBJECTS IN THE
OBJECT LISTER
Selecting objects in the Object Lister follows the common Windows guidelines:
Selecting a single object in the Object Lister
To select one single object in the Object Lister, just click on it.
Automation 12.0
Page 298
The Object Lister
Choosing a block of objects in the Object Lister
To select a block of objects listed in succession in the Object Lister, click on the
first object in the block, and press down <Shift> while clicking on the last object in
the block.
Selecting and deselecting single objects in the Object Lister
To select more than one object individually, press down <Ctrl> while clicking on the
objects. When you wish to deselect a selected object, without deselecting the other
selected objects, you must also press down <Ctrl> while clicking on the obeject.
Selected objects and Printing in the Object Lister
When you have selected more than one object when clicking on Print in the
Object Lister, only the selected objects are printed. When only one object is
selected, all of the list is printed. — See “Printing from the Object Lister” on
page 300.
This also applies when you click on Save to save a file. — See “Save as File from
the Object Lister” on page 301.
Example on choosing objects in the Object Lister
To select the selected objects in the Object Lister below, do the following:
1) Click on the first object in
the list.
2) Press down <Shift>, and
click on the last object in the
list.
3) Press down <Ctrl>, and
click on the object you wish
to deselect.
1
3
2
The chosen objects can now for instance be printed, saved to a file, or the article
data for the selected objects can be edited.
COUNTING
ON SELECTED OBJECTS IN THE
OBJECT LISTER
When you have selected more than one object in the Object Lister, it is possible to
apply the automatic counting functions in the program for various of the object
texts.
When for instance you wish to change the function texts (the PLC addresses) for
the output on a PLC, do the following:
1) In the Object Lister: Click on PLC I/O — to work with PLCs.
2) Click on the Pencil — to edit texts in the Object Lister.
Automation 12.0
Page 299
The Object Lister
3) Select the relevant symbols — see “Selecting objects in the Object Lister” on
page 298 —, and press <Enter> or <F2>:
2) Click the Pencil
3a) Click here
3b) Press down
<Shift> and
click here
3c) Press <F2>
or <Enter>
4) You now get the option to change the selected texts automatically, as described in “Changing a text” on page 112. Click OK.
DISPLAYING
INFORMATION IN THE
OBJECT LISTER
Under the menu point View, you can specify
which information to display in the Object
Lister for the different types of objects.
If for instance you choose View => Symbols,
you can see which information that is displayed for symbols in the Object Lister.
Viewing the different types of information can
be selected/deselected by placing/removing a
check mark in front of each type of information.
When a check mark is placed in front of a type
of information which is dimmed, this specifies
that this information can not be deselected in
the Object Lister.
Removing a column from the Object Lister by right-clicking
When you right-click on a column heading in the
Object Lister, a right-click menu appears, from
which you can also specify not to display a
column in the Object Lister.
In the example to the right there is right-clicked
on the column heading Function, and a rightclick menu appeard. When Function is
deselected, this column is no longer displayed in
the Object Lister.
PRINTING
FROM THE
OBJECT LISTER
When you have selected more than one object, only the selected objects are printed, when you click on Print. When only one object is selected, all of the list is printed. — Read more about selecting objects in “Selecting objects in the Object
Lister” on page 298.
Automation 12.0
Page 300
The Object Lister
When you click on Print, you enter the dialog box Print, in which you choose printer and print the selected.
SAVE
AS
FILE
FROM THE
OBJECT LISTER
When you have selected more than one object, only the selected objects are
saved, when you click on Save. When only one object is selected, all of the list is
saved. — Read more about selecting objects in “Selecting objects in the Object
Lister” on page 298.
When you click on Save you enter the dialog box Save. Here you can save the
selected objects in three different ways:
1) Text files (*.txt): The file is saved in column format.
2) Comma separated (*.csv): The file is saved in comma separated format.
3) Microsoft Excel (*.xls): The file is saved in Microsoft Excel format.
Select file type, type in a file name, and click OK.
EXCEL MUST BE INSTALLED
IT IS ONLY POSSIBLE TO SAVE IN EXCEL FORMAT WHEN EXCEL IS INSTALLED
ON THE PC.
THIS IS BECAUSE Automation LETS EXCEL HANDLE THE SAVING. THIS WAY
YOU ARE NOT DEPENDANT OF WHETHER Automation CAN HANDLE THE
VERSION OF EXCEL INSTALLED ON YOUR PC.
CHOOSING
NEW COMPONENTS IN
DATABASE
VIA
OBJECT LISTER
This is only possible when working with Symbols or Cables in the Object Lister:
When you click the DB button, you enter the database, located at the article number of the chosen component. You can then change the component in the project
by choosing another article number in the database.
Only the selected symbol(s) in the Object Lister have their data changed. — See
“Selecting objects in the Object Lister” on page 298.
Automation 12.0
Page 301
The Object Lister
SEARCHING
IN THE
OBJECT LISTER
When you click on the Find button, you can search among the selected objects in
the Object Lister.
Click here and
choose what to
search for
Type in the search
text and press <Enter>
Click on the Down arrow, and choose which type of text you wish to search on.
When for instance you choose Type this is marked in the column Type.
Shows that you are
searching on Type
Then type in the search text. While you are typing in the text, the Object Lister
automatically jumps down to the first object in the list, that matches what you have
typed in for the moment.
Click on the Search again button to find the next object in the list, that matches
what you have typed in. When no objects matches what you have typed in, the
Search again button is dimmed.
Automation can either search for texts that begins with what you have typed in, or
just contains the text.
This depends on whether the Begins with button is activated, or the Contains button is activated. The button is placed to the right of the Find again button, and
changes appearance between Begins with and Contains when you click on it.
SHOW
USED AND COUNT
When you select Show used and
count, each symbol name will only
be displayed once in the list.
You can also see how many times
each symbol is used in the project.
When you double click on a symbol name in the list, you get the same detailed information about the symbol as you
can see in “Object lister for selected symbol” on page 304.
To return to the list of all project symbols, select Show used and count again.
Automation 12.0
Page 302
The Object Lister
CHECK
AND EDIT COMPONENT DATA AND CABLE DATA
When you click on Symbols
and then click the Pencil, you
can correct the article data for
the symbols directly from the
Object Lister.
If for instance you want to
change the symbol type, click
in the Type field for the relevant symbol, and make the change.
When you click on Cables you can make similar changes for Cable data.
See how to edit article data for more than one cable at the time in “Editing PLC I/O
data via the Object Lister” on page 303.
EDITING PLC I/O
DATA VIA THE
OBJECT LISTER
To edit PLC I/O data in Automation, click on PLC I/O in the Object Lister.
You can then choose either Used I/O — which gives you all used PLC I/O symbols
in the project — or From reference symbols — which gives you all mentioned
connection points in the PLC reference symbols in the project.
When you click on the Pencil, you can start editing PLC I/O data directly from the
Object Lister.
Searching for PLC I/O data is done as described in “Searching in the Object Lister”
on page 302.
See how to edit PLC I/O data for more than one PLC symbol at a time in “Counting
on selected objects in the Object Lister” on page 299.
PLC I/O data can be saved to a file — for instance in Excel format — as described
in “Save as File from the Object Lister” on page 301.
Automation 12.0
Page 303
The Object Lister
CHECKING
AND EDITING PROJECT TEXTS VIA THE
OBJECT LISTER
It is a good idea to check the project texts by
clicking on Texts. If you need to make corrections, click the Pencil, and click in the text
field you wish to edit.
The changes is transferred to the diagrams
automatically.
When you want to jump to the text in the project, first deactivate the Pencil, then doubleclick on the text in the Object Lister.
— See how to edit more than one text at a
time in “Counting on selected objects in the Object Lister” on page 299.
EDITING PAGE
DATA IN THE
OBJECT LISTER
When you click on Pages, you
get a survey of all the project
pages.
When you then click the Pencil,
you get the option of editing the
page titles.
OBJECT
LISTER FOR SELECTED SYMBOL
If you select a symbol when you are working in the
project — for instance -F1 — and press [F7], you will
get a survey of all the places -F1 is used in the project.
Alternatively you can right-click on a symbol, and
choose Show used.
You then get the following survey of the symbol:
These functions are also available for signals and wire numbers.
Because the Object Lister remains on the screen, you can subsequently select
another symbol in the project, and click the Update button in the Object Lister.
This updates the Object Lister with information from the component, you have
selected now.
When you want the list on print, click on Print. Click Save to save it as a file.
Automation 12.0
Page 304
The Object Lister
Click on the Pencil to correct the component data, or click the DB button to find the
symbol in the database.
TEXT
LINKS IN THE
OBJECT LISTER
Information about linked text is also displayed in the Object Lister.
— See “Text links” on page 128.
Automation 12.0
Page 305
Find and Replace
FIND AND REPLACE
To find objects in projects quickly, you either use the Object Lister — see “The
Object Lister” on page 296 — or the Find function, which is described in this chapter.
The Object Lister gives you the possibility to locate components in the project and/
or locate article data for the applied symbols/components. Also, you can change
texts using the Object Lister.
The Find function gives you the option to find symbol texts, and the replace function gives you the option to replace them as well.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— FIND SYMBOL TEXTS ...............................................................................(P. 306)
— REPLACE SYMBOL TEXTS.........................................................................(P. 308)
— THE DIALOG BOX FIND AND REPLACE REMAINS ON SCREEN.......................(P. 308)
— NEGATED AND UNDERLINED TEXTS IN FIND AND REPLACE ........................(P. 309)
— Other ways to find symbols quickly are described in “Functions on Component
Level” on page 220.
FINDING
SYMBOL TEXTS
If you want to find symbol texts, you choose Edit => Find (short-cut key [Ctrl+f])
and enter this dialog box:
Click here to see a list containing
project texts of the chosen Text type
Automation 12.0
Page 306
Find and Replace
Here you type in the type of text you want to find, and state which type of symbol
text you want to find, and in which direction you want the search carried out. The
search direction determines whether you search the full project, the page you are
working on, or in the direction forwards or backwards. — Please note that if you
search for Symbol datafields, you search for the values in the symbol datafields.
Correspondingly, you can only replace the values of the symbol datafields, and not
their names.
When you set Text type to All, Automation search in all texts types in the project.
Found text
When a text is found, the text is displayed in the dialog box.
Text recognition
If you select Match Case, you will only find the texts using upper case and lower
case letters exactly the way you type them in. If you write X1, the text x1 will not be
found. However, this text will be found if you have not selected Match case.
If you select Find Whole Text Only, you will only find the symbol texts that contains exactly the letters/characters you typed in. If you have typed in Component, it
will not find the text Component A38. But this text will be found if you have not
selected Find Whole Text Only.
Please note, that if you have not selected Find Whole Text Only, the program will
find all texts having the text you typed in as a part of the text. If you typed in tact, it
would find the text contact.
Searching with Reference designations
When searching for symbols with reference designations, it is possible only to specify either the location or the function part of the reference designation.
If you type in the search text =G1-Q1 and select Match Whole text only, you will
therefore also find the symbols for the component =G1+A2-Q1.
Zoom during Find and Replace
When a found text is selected on a diagram, it is sometimes an advantage to zoom
in on the symbol. In the Zoom in mm field you specify how close you want to zoom
in on the found text.
Find next symbol
When you want to find the text in the project, you click on Find Next, and the next
text matching the search criteria will be found.
If you exit the Find dialog box, you will find the next text matching the search criteria by choosing Edit => Find next, or by pressing the [F3] key.
Automation 12.0
Page 307
Find and Replace
REPLACING
SYMBOL TEXTS
If you want to find and replace symbol texts, you choose Edit => Replace and
enter this dialog box:
Click here to see a list containing
project texts of the chosen Text type
You specify what you want to find as explained above, and in the Replace with
field you type in the text you want to replace.
When you have clicked on Find Next, and a symbol text has been found, you click
on Replace to replace the text. After replacing the text, you automatically jump to
the next text matching the search criterion.
If you do not want to change the text you have found, just click on Find next, and
you jump to the next text matching the search criterion.
Clicking on Replace All will replace all matching texts in the specified area.
Click on Close when you have finished.
— Please note that if you search for Symbol datafields, you search for the values
in the symbol datafields. Correspondingly, you can only replace the values of the
symbol datafields, and not their names.
Find and Replace for connection names
Connection names can also be replaced from the dialog box
Replace. If you wish to replace the connection name 13 for
the symbol -Q1, write -Q1:13 in the Find What field, and
only write the new connection name in the Replace with
field — e.g. 23 — because the program knows that it is the
connection name, that is going to be replaced.
FIND
AND
REPLACE
REMAINS ON SCREEN
When you have chosen Find and Replace, the dialog box remains on screen while
you perform operations, so that you can continue searching easily.
— The Find and Replace dialog box can be set to be transparent, when working
on the drawing area while the Find and Replace dialog box remains on screen —
see “Pointer/Screen” on page 815.
Automation 12.0
Page 308
Find and Replace
NEGATED
AND
UNDERLINED
TEXTS IN
FIND
AND
REPLACE
In the dialog boxes for Edit => Find and
Edit => Replace you can search for
negated and underlined texts.
To search for a negated text, do the following:
1) Type in the text, and select the part
of the text that is negated.
2) Right-click on the selected, and
choose Negate.
Searching for underlined texts takes place
by choosing Underline.
To neutralise the negation of a text, select
the text, right-click and choose Negate
again. To neutralise the underlining of an underlined text, choose Underline.
Automation 12.0
Page 309
Design Check
DESIGN CHECK
The designcheck function can give you some help checking your design.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— PERFORMING A DESIGN CHECK ................................................................(P. 310)
— THE DESIGN CHECK DIALOG BOX..............................................................(P. 311)
— THE DESIGN CHECK ERROR MESSAGES ....................................................(P. 312)
— DISABLING USED MORE THAN ONCE IN THE SYMBOL DEFINITION ................(P. 313)
USE THE DESIGN CHECK FUNCTION FREQUENTLY
IT IS A GOOD IDEA TO APPLY THE DESIGN CHECK FUNCTION FROM TIME TO
TIME WHILE YOU ARE DRAWING. THIS WAY YOU DO NOT HAVE TO BOTHER
WITH TOO MANY ERROR MESSAGES AT THE SAME TIME.
PERFORMING
A
DESIGN
CHECK
To activate the function, choose Functions => Design Check, which gives you the
following options:
Automation 12.0
Page 310
Design Check
Select which of the options you want your project checked for. To maintain a survey, it might be a good idea to check the project for one design check option at the
time.
— Please note that the check for Mounting correct only appears if you have chosen to work in mounting mode. — See “Mounting correct drawing” on page 92.
ACTIONS PERFORMED BEFORE DESIGN CHECK CAN NOT BE UNDONE
WHEN EXECUTING A DESIGN CHECK, THE PROJECT IS AUTOMATICALLY OPTIMISED.
THEREFORE, YOU DO NOT HAVE THE OPTION TO UNDO THE ACTIONS MADE
BEFORE EXECUTING THE DESIGN CHECK.
WHEN YOU ACTIVATE THE DESIGN CHECK FUNCTION, LINES WHICH HAVE
BEEN EDITED ARE CORRECTED TO BE CONTINUOUS LINES.
Click on OK.
If the design check finds errors of the selected types, you will get a list of errors and
warnings — as described in “The Design Check dialog box” on page 311. Otherwise, you will be told that no errors have been found.
THE DESIGN CHECK
DIALOG BOX
When you choose Functions => Design Check, and click OK to execute a design
check, you enter the dialog box Design Check:
This dialog box remains on screen while you are working in the project. — The dialog box can be set to be transparent, as described in “Pointer/Screen” on
page 815.
Here you have the following options:
Double-click on errors in the list
When you double-click on an error message in the list, the program jumps to the
place in the project, which have provoked the message, and the relevant object is
pointed out by the cross hairs.
Update the Design Check list
When you have made changes in the project, you can click the Update list button.
This automatically updates the list according to the performed changes.
Automation 12.0
Page 311
Design Check
When you have corrected the errors on the list, there may still be errors in the project, due to subsequent obsolete errors.
Therefore it is a good idea to perform another design check, once you have corrected the errors mentioned in the original list.
Accordingly, it may happen that correcting one error will make more than one error
message disappear.
Design check settings
When you click the Design Check settings button, you enter the Design Check
menu, from where you specify which types of design check you wish to perform.
The design check list is automatically updated according to these directions.
Save and Print
Furthermore, you have the following options:
Click on the Save button to save the list in a file.
Click the Print button to print the list.
Close the Design Check list
To close the design check list, click the Close button in the upper right-hand corner
of the dialog box.
ERROR
MESSAGES
When you perform a design check, you may see the following error messages,
accompanied by information about the page on which the error occurs, and the
coordinates for exactly where on the page it occurs:
ERROR MESSAGE
SIGNIFIES
MISSING SYMBOL NAME
THE SYMBOL ON THE POSITION STATED HAVE NOT BEEN ASSIGNED A SYMBOL NAME.
MISSING CONNECTION
YOU HAVE NOT ASSIGNED A NAME FOR THE CONNECTION POINT
OF THE SYMBOL ON THE STATED POSITION.
NAME
CONNECTION K1:14 IS
USED IN SEVERAL NETS
THE CONNECTION POINT WITH THE CONNECTION POINT NAME 14
IS USED IN MORE THAN ONE ELECTRICAL POTENTIAL.
L1 AND L2, ARE USED
THE SIGNAL NAMES L1 AND L2 ARE USED IN THE SAME NET.
IN THE SAME NET
ONLY ONE CONNECTION IN NET L7
YOU HAVE DRAWN A CONDUCTING LINE WITH JUST A SIGNAL SYMBOL — AND NOTHING ELSE. A CONNECTION TO A SYMBOL, OR TO
ANOTHER SIGNAL SYMBOL, COULD BE MISSING.
PARKED LINE
YOU HAVE PARKED A LINE ON THE STATED POSITION.
MORE SIGNALS IN SAME
POINT
YOU HAVE PLACED MORE THAN ONE SIGNAL SYMBOL AT THE SAME
POSITION.
X1:1U1 IS NOT CON-
THE CONNECTION POINT IS NOT CONNECTED.
NECTED
If you are having difficulties handling errors in your project, please contact your
local support service.
Automation 12.0
Page 312
Design Check
DESELECT USED
MORE THAN ONCE IN THE
SYMBOL
DEFINITION
It is possible to deselect Functions => Design Check => Used more than once
for individual symbols via the symbol definition for a symbol.
This is because it for some symbols — specially for pneumatics symbols — is allowed to have more connection points with the same name.
— Read more about this in “No double check” on page 682.
Automation 12.0
Page 313
Printing
PRINTING
In Automation you can choose between just printing out the page you are presently working on, without changing any page settings, or specify which pages you
wish to print, and how they shall be printed etc.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— OPENING THE PRINT DIALOG BOX ............................................................(P. 314)
— THE RIGHT-HAND SIDE OF THE DIALOG BOX ..............................................(P. 315)
— SELECT PAGES .......................................................................................(P. 315)
— SETUP ....................................................................................................(P. 317)
— CHOOSE PRINTER ...................................................................................(P. 318)
— BATCH PRINTING .....................................................................................(P. 318)
— IF DIAGRAMS ARE MINIMIZED WHEN PRINTING............................................(P. 318)
— EXPORTING PDF FILES ...........................................................................(P. 319)
— EXPORTING DWG/DXF FILES ..................................................................(P. 320)
If you only want to print out the page you are working on, and do not wish to make
changes in the printer settings, click the Print this page button.
OPENING
THE
PRINT
DIALOG BOX
The printing dialog box shown below is activated by choosing File => Print or by
clicking on the Print pages button on the program toolbar. The short-cut key is
[Ctrl+p].
Automation 12.0
Page 314
Printing
THE
RIGHT-HAND SIDE OF THE
PRINTER
DIALOG BOX
The right-hand side of the dialog box is identical for the tabs Select pages, Setup
and Printer. Here you get an overview of what printing a page will result in.
You can also determine the number of copies, whether you want the pages printed
in reverse order, or if you only want to print pages changed later than a specified
date.
Projects are printed out as one document. This means the printing can not be
interrupted by other jobs on a network printer.
When printing more than one copy of the project, an information is sent to the printer, specifying the number of copies. — This, however, requires that the printer driver is able to handle this information. If the printer driver can handle the information
"10 copies", this is obviously a lot faster than if the program should send the project
to the printer ten times.
When more than one page and more than one copy is chosen, you can also
choose Collate, if the chosen printer driver can handle the collate information.
If you wish to display the pages in the dialog box Print as they are printed, click on
Print with preview.
The print settings are saved when you click on Close, and are in effect the next
time you print pages.
Printing for Revision
If you are working on a revision — see “Revision
control” on page 790 — and select From date, you
get the option of choosing From revision date.
This makes it possible only to print pages which
has been changed since the start of the revision.
— See “Printing during revision control” on page 791 also.
SELECT
PAGES
Choosing the Select
pages tab, you specify
which pages to print.
If you want to print
page 2 to 4 in the project, you click on page
2, and press down
<Shift> while clicking
on page 4.
If you, on the other
hand, want to select
page 1 and 3, you click
on page 1, and press
down <Ctrl> while
clicking on page 3.
If you choose All
pages, Even pages, Odd pages or Current page, the selected pages are singled
out in the list of project pages.
Automation 12.0
Page 315
Printing
Pages marked with a preceeding ! character, have been changed since the project
was opened.
Pages marked with a preceeding + character, have been changed since the project
was last saved.
Printing Chapters and Dividers
When you click the Print pages button and click on the tab Select pages, you
have the option to handle chapters and dividers easily:
This for instance makes it possible to print dividers on a different type of paper.
All pages in the chapter
are printed
Only Dividers are
printed
Prints all selected pages
apart from the selected
dividers
When you are printing on a duplex printer, you can also specify not to print dividers
on duplex, by clicking on Dividers NOT duplex. This checkbox is dimmed if the
selected printer can not handle duplex.
Printing layers
If you click on Show layer settings, you can specify which layers on the drawing to
print. — See “Printing pages with layers” on page 468.
If you select Dim not active layers, will those layers, which are dimmed when displayed on screen, also be dimmed when printing. This is only an option when there
exists more than one layer on the page.
— Read more about this in “The Layer menu” on page 466.
Automation 12.0
Page 316
Printing
SETUP
Selecting Setup enables you to
define margins and orientation. But
to do this, you first have to select
Paper and margin setup.
When you click Adjust to printer,
the program gives you the printable
area of your printer through the figures in the margin fields.
When you have done this, you will
see the area, specified by the margin settings, displayed by a red dash
line. At the same time you will see
the area the drawing fills out, indicated by a fully drawn rectangle.
Also there are a number of functions, which make it easier to alter the printout to
meet your requirements. The drawing can be scaled up and down, and can be
moved on the paper.
If you want a margin with room for holes in the paper, you must set the left margin
to 20mm.
If you click on Auto below Orientation, Automation automatically orientates the
page according to the paper.
If you deselect Centre drawing and set Scale to and Orientation to Auto, your
drawing will be adapted to the chosen printer — with respect to the location and
scaling.
If you choose Even pages under Mirror margin, the margin will be mirrored for the
even pages in the project — In this context the first page in the project is page
number 1. If you choose Odd pages the margin of the odd pages will be mirrored.
When you choose Duplex the project will be printed in duplex. — Margins are only
mirrored when you choose Even pages or Odd pages.
Choose Color when you want to print the project in color.
On black and white printers, selecting Color gives you a printout using a grey tone
scale. Please note that your printer might convert some colors to the color white.
The color white will not be seen on the print.
Print zoom
To print a zoom, do the following:
1) Click on the Zoom button, and make a zoom — see “Zoom” on page 38.
2) Click the Print pages button, and click on the tab
Settings.
3) Choose Print zoom. If you need to move the
selected zoom, click on the arrows next to Move
drawing. When you press down <Shift> while
clicking the arrows, the zoom is moved with three
times bigger steps.
Click here to move the
chosen zoom
Automation 12.0
Page 317
Printing
4) Click on Print, and the chosen zoom is printed.
Print test page
If you are having difficulties printing the drawing on your printer, click Print test
page. This will make the printer print out a test page, displaying the printable area
of your printer, drawn with a thin line along the edges. The right, left, top and bottom margins will also be printed in figures. These are given using one thousandth
of a millimetre, making 5865um equal to 5.865mm. These settings are specified in
your printer driver, and therefore are not changeable from the Automation program. If the test print does not include all four lines, you have not chosen the correct printer driver for your printer.
A biased left or right margin, suggests that the printer is not feeding the paper correctly. If the printable area is biased towards the left- or the right hand side, placing
the paper differently in the tray might help.
If you are having further difficulties, please contact your local supplier.
CHOOSE PRINTER
The last option is the Printer tab, which opens up the general Windows Print
setup dialog box. The settings in this dialog box have lower priority than the ones
you define in the rest of the dialog box Print, and can be overruled.
When all settings have been set, click on Print in the right hand side of the dialog
box.
The last used printer and settings for each printer is memorized by the program.
Alternative PC|SCHEMATIC font
— See “Applying the Arial font for printing to PDF files” on page 320.
Displaying the printer name as a hint
When you let the mouse cursor rest over
the Print pages button, the name of the
selected printer is displayed as a hint.
BATCH
PRINTING
Read more about this in “Batch printing” on page 804.
IF
DIAGRAMS ARE MINIMIZED WHEN PRINTING
When printing, Automation squeezes all objects in the work area for each diagram
page. This may result in that the drawing might be placed in e.g. the lower-left corner of the printed page. This is because objects are placed outside the frame of the
normal diagram page.
Read more about this in “The Zoom All function during DWG/DXF import” on
page 640 and “The Zoom All function” on page 39.
Automation 12.0
Page 318
Printing
EXPORTING PDF
FILES
In Automation you can export the active project as a PDF file.
You can start the export in two ways:
a) Choose File => Export => As PDF, or
b) Choose File => Save as and choose PDF fiels (*.pdf) below File type at the
bottom of the dialog box.
This brings you into the dialog box PDF export:
Specify the resolution
in the PDF file
The page size
in the PDF file
Select which layer to print
via the Layer menu
In the dialog box you have the following options:
Active reference links
When you select Active reference links, links are inserted on the following
objects in the PDF file:
- Active links between symbols in project pages
- Active links from components in lists to components in the project
- Active links from chapter tables of contents to the mentioned project pages
As you can see, the generated PDF files contains almost all links and references
from the original project files.
Symbol popup information
When you select Symbol project information, the generated PDF file will contain
popup information for the symbols in the project pages.
Automation 12.0
Page 319
Printing
Fonts when creating PDF files
When printing a project as a PDF file, all PC|SCHEMATIC fonts will be turned into
graphics. Due to the search facilities in the Acrobat program, it is possible to
search on texts using Windows fonts in the PDF file.
Please note, that it is not correct to use Windows fonts on diagram pages according to the standards.
APPLYING THE ARIAL FONT FOR PRINTING TO PDF FILES
When a project is printed to a PDF file, it is possible to substitute the PC|SCHEMATIC font with the Arial font, which is the Windows font most similar to a CAD font.
This function is specially designed for creating PDF files.
This makes it possible to apply the PC|SCHEMATIC font in the project, and to get
texts which you can search on in the PDF file. These texts will also become
smoother in the PDF files than texts using the PC|SCHEMATIC font.
To do this, you must select the Printer tab, and select Alternative PC|SCHEMATIC font: Arial.
SPECIAL CHARACTERS IN PDF FILES
If you change texts written with the PC|SCHEMATIC font to a Windows font, negation and underlining will give an incorrect result. The earth character and other
special characters may also give incorrect results, depending on which font you
use. — See “Special characters when changing the PC|SCHEMATIC font to a Windows font” on page 119.
SPECIAL CHARACTERS AND WINDOWS
THE FONTS YOU GET WITH OLDER VERSIONS OF WINDOWS, DOES NOT CONTAIN SPECIAL CHARACTERS. WHEN A SPECIAL CHARACTER DOES NOT EXIST
IN A SELECTED FONT, A SQUARE IS DISPLAYED IN STEAD OF THE SPECIAL
CHARACTER.
THE FONTS YOU GET WITH WINDOWS VISTA AND SUCCEEDING VERSIONS
CONTAINS SPECIAL CHARACTERS.
THE PC|SCHEMATIC FONT CONTAINS THE NECESSARY SPECIAL CHARACTERS.
Command files for converting projects to PDF format
It is possible to create command files, which automatically saves Automation projects as PDF files. Read more about this in “Command files for saving projects as
PDF, DWG and DXF files” on page 803.
EXPORTING DWG
AND
DXF
FILES
In Automation you can both export and import DWG and DXF files. Read more
about this in “DWG and DXF files” on page 640.
Automation 12.0
Page 320
Windows Explorer as Symbol/Project menu
WINDOWS EXPLORER AS SYMBOL/PROJECT MENU
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— USING THE WINDOWS EXPLORER AS A PROJECT MENU ............................(P. 321)
— USING THE WINDOWS EXPLORER AS A SYMBOL MENU ..............................(P. 321)
USING
THE
WINDOWS EXPLORER
AS A
PROJECT
MENU
In Automation it is possible to use Windows Explorer as a kind of Project menu.
When you have opened Windows Explorer, you can therefore drag project files
from the Explorer to the Automation program, whereby the projects are opened.
When you select several projects at a time, all of the selected projects will be opened in Automation:
Select the files in the
Explorer, and drag
them over to the activ
Automation program
USING
THE
WINDOWS EXPLORER
AS A
SYMBOL
MENU
In Automation it is possible to apply Windows explorer as a kind of Symbol
menu.
As described for projects, you can apply the Windows Explorer to drag symbols
into an open project. Hereby you get the symbol directly in the cross hairs in Automation. You can therefore apply the Windows Explorer as an alternative symbol
menu, which you can keep open while working with Automation.
You can only fetch one symbol at the time from the Windows Explorer.
If you open two copies of Windows Explorer, you can apply the one to open projects from, and the other to fetch symbols from.
Automation 12.0
Page 321
Reference designations
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
In Automation you can apply reference designations in the naming of your symbols. This makes it for instance possible to follow the IEC/EN 61346 standard
(IEC750 previously) for naming of symbols.
The reference designations in Automation can be defined freely, and is therefore
not tied up to a specific standard. This makes it both possible to follow an internal
company standard, and to follow changing international standards. If you need to
change standard for using reference designations, this is also an option.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— ON REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ................................................................(P. 322)
— DEFINING REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ......................................................(P. 325)
— REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR SYMBOLS ...............................................(P. 336)
— REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR PAGES ...................................................(P. 340)
— REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS IN AREAS ON PAGES ......................................(P. 342)
— REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR CHAPTERS .............................................(P. 346)
— REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR MORE THAN ONE PAGE AT A TIME............(P. 346)
— REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS VIA CHAPTER TABS ........................................(P. 349)
— DATAFIELDS FOR SPECIFYING REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS IN PROJECTS .....(P. 351)
— LISTS ACC. TO FUNCTION OR LOCATION ASPECT ......................................(P. 352)
LEARN MORE ABOUT REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
IN THE BOOK "ELECTRO-TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ACCORDING TO
STANDARDS", YOU CAN READ MORE ABOUT APPLYING REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS IN ELECTRO-TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION. THE BOOK IS PUBLISHED BY PC|SCHEMATIC A/S, AND IS NOW IN ITS 2. EDITION.
ON
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
— Please skip this explanation if you are already familiar with reference designations.
Reference designations are used for identifying components, functions or locations
where e.g. a component is placed. The reference designation for a component
must be placed next to the symbol in the diagram, and on / next to the physical
component, where it is placed/mounted.
A reference designation must consist of a prefix, followed by a capital letter, followed by an integer. For instance -M01.
A reference designation must be attached to one of three different aspects, depending on how you need to observe what the reference designation describes:
- When you observe a function (function aspect), the prefix = is applied
- When you observe a location (location aspect), the prefix + is applied
Automation 12.0
Page 322
Reference designations
- When you observe a product (product aspect), the prefix - is applied
For a symbol you can see the following three reference designations:
Function ref. designation
(function aspect)
Symbol name
/ Product ref. designation
(product aspect)
Location ref. designation
(location aspect)
The reference designation in the block =M1+R2-K5 is interpreted like this:
The product/component -K5 exists in the location +R2 and is attached
to the function =M1.
PRODUCT REFERENCE DESIGNATION / SYMBOL NAME
IN STEAD OF THE PRODUCT REFERENCE DESIGNATION FOR A SYMBOL, THE
TERM SYMBOL NAME IS USED IN THE REST OF THIS MANUAL.
In the example above the function designation =M1 specifies that the symbol/component is a part of the function =M1. This could for instance be "Pumping1". The
location designation +R2 — for where the component is placed — could for
instance be "Hall2".
The product designation -K5 is used to identify the component among the components being a part of Pumping1 (=M1), which also exist in Hall2 (+R2).
By using the reference designation system with the three different aspects, you can
for instance describe a complete industrial plant. The reference designation
system gives you the possibility to make one list containing all products, another
containing all functions, and a third containing all locations required to identify everything in the industrial plant.
It is possible to specify that all symbols on a project page e.g. belongs to Pumping1
(=M1) which is located in Hall2 (+R2). If you had specified the reference designation =M1+R2 in the title block of the drawing header in the example above, you
would only have need to display the reference designation -K5 next to the symbol.
If there exists a symbol/component which is not attached to the reference designations for the page, Automation automatically displays those of the reference
designations for the symbol, which differs from the reference designations for the
page.
Automation 12.0
Page 323
Reference designations
Before creating the reference designations, you should have a survey of which
functions, as well as which switchboards/racks/drawers or other location aspects,
you will need in your project.
Character for specifying full reference designation (exclude concatenation)
If the character > is displayed in front of a reference designation — e.g. >-K1 —
this means that -K1 is the full reference designation for the component. -K1 therefore uniquely identifies the component.
Please note, that this character can therefore also appear when you have forgotten
to specify a reference designation for the component.
The > character is called "exclude concatenation", which you can read more about
in “Use full exclude of concatenation” on page 331.
Automation 12.0
Page 324
Reference designations
DEFINING
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR THE PROJECT
To create reference designations in your project, you enter Settings => Project
data, which is the only place in Automation where you can see anything about
reference designations, as long as no reference designations have been defined in
the project.
Click here
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS MUST BE DEFINED FIRST
IT WILL NOT BE POSSIBLE TO REFER TO REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
ANYWHERE IN Automation UNTIL YOU HAVE CREATED REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS IN THIS DIALOG BOX. HAVING DONE THIS, HOWEVER, YOU CAN
SELECT REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS IN SETTINGS => PAGE DATA AS WELL
AS IN THE DIALOG BOX COMPONENT DATA.
Here you click on Reference designations, and enter the dialog box Reference
designations:
Select how to
show the ref.
designations
For cables and
signals
General settings
for the project
In the dialog box Reference designations you can create and edit the Function
and Location aspects for the reference designations.
Automation 12.0
Page 325
Reference designations
The first time you enter the dialog box, no Function or Location aspects will be
specified.
OPTIONS IN THE DIALOG BOX REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
— DISPLAYING REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS IN THE DIALOG BOX......................(P. 326)
— SPECIFYING FUNCTION/LOCATION ASPECTS .............................................(P. 326)
— SEE USED FUNCTION/LOCATION ASPECTS ................................................(P. 328)
— SORTING FUNCTION/LOCATION ASPECTS BY COLUMN ...............................(P. 329)
— EDITING FUNCTION/LOCATION ASPECTS ...................................................(P. 329)
— DELETING FUNCTION/LOCATION ASPECTS ................................................(P. 330)
Displaying reference designations in the dialog box Reference
designations
In the upper-left corner of the dialog box Reference designations you can specify
how to display the reference designations in the dialog box:
Display reference designations as hierarchy / Tree
When you click the Show as tree button, the reference designations are displayed
as a hierarchical structure — see below.
The reference designations are hereby displayed as a folder structure, just like a
folder structure you would find in the Windows Explorer, with similar possibilities for
copying, deleting structure parts etc.
Display reference designations as a list
When you click the Show as list button, the reference designations are displayed
as a list, with all of the reference designations displayed at the same level — see
below.
Hierarchial display of
reference designations
List display of
reference designations
Specifying function/location reference designations
When you want to add a function aspect, click on the New button next to the Function window — or press the [Insert] key, if you have already selected a function
aspect in the dialog box.
Automation 12.0
Page 326
Reference designations
You then enter the dialog box New:
The character = will be suggested as the first sign in the reference designation, but
you can also use a character of your own choice.
If the dialog box displays reference designations in list form, and a function reference designation is selected in the dialog box, the dialog box New will be filled out
with this reference designation — as for instance =G1 in the dialog box above. This
is a help for when you type in many reference designations starting with the same
text.
Type in the name of the new function aspect and click OK.
IEC / EN STANDARD
THE CHARACTERS = AND + ARE IEC / EN STANDARD FOR REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS.
Then type in the description for the reference designation.
Click OK.
If you are displaying the reference designations as a list — see “Displaying reference designations in the dialog box Reference designations” on page 326 — the
function aspect is placed below the selected function aspect in the dialog box.
Click on New again — or press the [Insert] key — to add more function reference
designations.
Location reference designations are specified correspondingly.
Automation 12.0
Page 327
Reference designations
See used reference designations
When you wish to see which reference designations are currently
used in the project, click on Marked
used. This inserts a + in front of the
used reference designations.
This + remains visible until the dialog
box is closed. The next time the dialog box is opened, the + characters
are removed.
See on which page the reference designations are used
If you wish to see on which page a reference designation is used, you can rightclick on the reference designation and choose Show pages — or click on the reference designation and press the <spacebar> —, and the pages are displayed in
the right-hand side of the dialog box:
If you see the reference designations in list form, you can also double-click on the
reference designation, to see on which pages the reference designation is used.
If you then right-click on a page, and choose Go to page, the selected page is displayed in the project:
If you right-click on a page, and choose Show list of objects, a list is displayed,
containing all the objects on the page with the selected reference designation:
In the left-hand side of the list, you can see the type of the objects. The list can be
printed, or saved as a file.
Automation 12.0
Page 328
Reference designations
Sorting reference designations by columns
Please note: This only applies for displaying reference designations as a list — see
“Display reference designations as a list” on page 326.
In the dialog box Reference designations you can sort the reference designations
alphabetically based on the columns Function aspect, Location aspect and
Description for function and location aspects.
This is done as described in “The sorting order of the data in the Object Lister” on
page 298.
Dragging a reference designation to a new position in the dialog box
Reference designations
When you wish to move a reference designation to another position in the list of
reference designations, do this by clicking on the reference designation, and then
drag it to the desired position:
Click here
Drag the line to the
desired position
Release the mouse
button
The function/location aspect is placed just below the function/location aspect, that
you point on when you release the mouse button. If you drag a function/location
aspect beyond the top or the bottom of the list, the list starts scrolling. The last
used function/location aspect will be memorized for the next time the dialog box is
opened.
— See “The mouse” on page 23 for further details about drag and drop.
Editing reference designations
If you wish to change a function/location aspect, right-click on it and choose Edit
— or press the [F2] key.
If you change a reference designation, and there exists other reference designations starting with this reference designation, you will be asked whether these
should be changed also. If you change the reference designation =G1 to =G2, you
can for instance have the reference designation =G1A2 changed to =G2A2 automatically.
Changing reference designations for more than one page
To change reference designations for more than one page at a time, see “Edit reference designations for more than one page” on page 346.
Changing reference designations for Chapters
Changing reference designations for a full chapter, see “Editing reference designations for chapters” on page 346.
Automation 12.0
Page 329
Reference designations
Deleting reference designations
To delete a reference designation, click on it and click Delete — or press the
[Delete] key. You can also right-click, and select Delete unused, to delete the unused reference designations.
Inserting reference designations on signals
When you wish to assign signal references to signals, you must select Insert Reference designations on Signals — please refer to “Insert Reference designations
on Signals automatically” on page 203.
Inserting the location aspect for cables
Because no location aspect is typically assigned to cables (a cable runs from one
location to another), you can choose Settings => Project data => Reference
designations, and select/deselect the check mark next to Insert Location designations on Cables.
Hereby you specify whether to automatically insert a location aspect for a cable,
when the cable is placed on a page with reference designations.
FORMAT
FOR REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
In the dialog box Reference designations: Click on Setup in the lower-left corner,
to enter the dialog box Reference Designation format. Here you specify how to
display reference designations in the project:
Here the result
of the setup is
displayed
In lists
The consequences of the selected settings are displayed in the right-hand side of
the dialog box. You have the following options:
General order: Location aspect before Function aspect
By default, the function aspect is displayed before the location aspect. When you
select Location aspect before Function aspect, the location aspect is displayed
before the function aspect. This applies to all project pages.
Automation 12.0
Page 330
Reference designations
In schematic pages: Product aspect (name) first
When you select Product aspect (name) first, the product aspect (the name) is
displayed first in the reference designation. In not selected, the product aspect
(name) is placed last in the reference designation. This applies all project pages
except lists.
In schematic pages: Reference designations with line breaks
By selecting New line after first aspect and/or New line after second aspect,
you can split the reference designation in multiple lines.
— See “Individual control of reference designations with line breaks from Component data” on page 338 and “The tab Ref.design.” on page 156.
Use full exclude of concatenation
— See “Use full exclude of concatenation” on page 331.
Format at other locations: Product aspect (name) first
When you select Product aspect (name) first at the bottom of the dialog box, the
product aspect (name) will be displayed first in lists. If not selected, the product
aspect (name) is displayed last in lists.
USE
FULL EXCLUDE OF CONCATENATION
In the dialog box Reference Designation format, you can select/deselect Use full
exclude of concatenation.
What is concatenation?
Concatenation means "joining two character strings end to end", and is used in this
context to describe how you understand the reference designations displayed on
the project pages.
In order to make the reference designations take up less space on the project
pages, it is implied that the reference designation for the page (or reference frame)
is also a part of the symbol name — even though the page reference designation
does not appear in front of the symbol name on the page. If the page has the reference designation =G1+A1, and the symbol name -P1 is displayed on the page,
you will interpret this as the symbol has the reference designation =G1+A1-P1.
The page reference designation and the symbol name has hereby been concatenated.
CHARACTER FOR "EXCLUDE CONCATENATION"
WHEN THE CHARACTER > IS THE FIRST CHARACTER IN THE REFERENCE
DESIGNATION, THIS MEANS THAT THE REFERENCE DESIGNATION IS THE FULL
REFERENCE DESIGNATION FOR THE SYMBOL. THE DISPLAYED REFERENCE
DESIGNATION SHALL THEREFORE NOT BE CONCATENATED WITH THE PAGE
REFERENCE DESIGNATION.
IF IT THEREFORE SAYS >+A1-P1 FOR A SYMBOL, THEN +A1-P1 IS THE FULL
REFERENCE DESIGNATION FOR THE SYMBOL.
Automation 12.0
Page 331
Reference designations
The way that Automation 9.0 — and previous versions — have handled displaying
the reference designations on the schematic pages, corresponds to not activating
Use full exclude of concatenation.
If you do activate Use full exclude of concatenation, there will not exist any possibilities for misunderstandings in how to interpret reference designations on project pages, which is elaborated in the examples below:
Example without Use full exclude of concatenation
Example on four symbols, where the page reference is =G1+A1, and where Use
full exclude of concatenation is not activated:
Symbol ref.
designation:
-P1
+A1-P1
=G1+W1-P1
=G1+A1-P1
(The Page ref. designation is =G1+A1)
Explanation:
1) The name >-P1 is displayed: This means that the full reference designation
is displayed, which is correct.
2) The name -P1 is displayed: Because the displayed reference designation
does not start with the > character, this is interpreted as that the page reference designation must be concatenated with the displayed symbol name.
The symbol reference designation will therefore be interpreted as =G1+A1P1, which is not correct, because =G1 is not part of the symbol reference
designation.
3) The name +W1-P1 is displayed: Because it does not start with the > character, we must concatenate with the page refernce designation. Because the
location aspect is included in the name, we will only concatenate with the
function aspect. Therefore the reference designation will be interpreted as
=G1+W1-P1, which is correct.
4) The name -P1 is displayed: Because it does not start with the > character,
we must concatenate with the page reference designation. You will therefore
understand the reference designation as =G1+A1-P1, which is correct.
Automation 12.0
Page 332
Reference designations
Example with Use full exclude of concatenation
Example on four symbols, where the page reference is =G1+A1, and where Use
full exclude of concatenation is activated. (This means that everywhere possible,
Automation will use full exclusion of concatenation):
Symbol ref.
designation:
-P1
+A1-P1
=G1+W1-P1
=G1+A1-P1
(The Page ref. designation is =G1+A1)
1) The name >-P1 is displayed: This means that the full reference designation
is displayed, which is correct.
2) The name >+A1-P1 is displayed: This again means that the full reference
designation is displayed, which is correct.
3) The name +W1-P1 is displayed: Because it does not start with the > character, we must concatenate with the page refernce designation. Because the
location aspect is included in the name, we will only concatenate with the
function aspect. Therefore the reference designation will be interpreted as
=G1+W1-P1, which is correct.
4) The name -P1 is displayed: Because it does not start with the > character,
we must concatenate with the page reference designation. You will therefore
understand the reference designation as =G1+A1-P1, which is correct.
Close the dialog box Reference Designations
Click on Close, and then on OK under Project data, to return to your project.
IMPORT
AND
EXPORT
OF REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
Reference designations can be exported/imported to/from Excel (*.xls files) and to/
from commaseparated files (*.csv files).
If you right-click in the Function or Location
window in the dialog box Reference designations, you get the option of exporting or importing reference desinations, by choosing
Export or Import respectively.
If you have right-clicked in the Functions window, you can also choose Export Functions,
as you can choose Export Locations if you
right-clicked in the Locations window.
If no reference designations have been defined in the project yet, an Import button will also appear in the right-hand side of
the dialog box.
Automation 12.0
Page 333
Reference designations
When you choose to export reference designations, you enter a dialog box, where
you specify where to save the reference designations file, and specify whether to
save the file as an Excel file or as a CSV file.
Format for Reference designations files
The applied format for reference designations files, is displayed in the figure below:
Format in
Excel files
Format in
CSV files
Automation 12.0
Page 334
Reference designations
Importing reference designations
When you import reference designations, you enter the following dialog box:
To the left in the dialog box, you can see the status for the different reference designations:
+
NEW REFERENCE DESIGNATION, WHICH IS ADDED TO THE PROJECT.
GREEN SQUARE
REFERENCE DESIGNATION, WHICH ALREADY EXISTS IN THE PROJECT.
YELLOW SQUARE
THE REFERENCE DESIGNATION ALREADY EXISTS IN THE PROJECT,
BUT HAS ANOTHER DESCRIPTION. AFTER IMPORTING, THE IMPORTED
DESCRIPTION FOR THE REFERENCE DESIGNATION WILL BE USED IN
THE PROJECT.
If you do not wish to import some of the reference designations, select the
unwanted reference designations in the dialog box, and click the Remove button in
the right-hand side of the dialog box:
Then import the remaining reference designations by clicking OK.
Automation 12.0
Page 335
Reference designations
REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS FOR SYMBOLS
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS WHEN PLACING SYMBOLS ...............................(P. 336)
— EDITING REF. DES. FOR ALREADY PLACED SYMBOLS ..................................(P. 339)
— EDITING REF. DES. USING THE SELECT NAME FUNCTION ............................(P. 339)
— PRECEEDING "-" IN SYMBOL NAMES ..........................................................(P. 339)
— INSERTING REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR SIGNAL SYMBOLS ...................(P. 339)
Selecting Reference designations when placing symbols
When you have activated the reference designations in the Project data dialog
box, you can apply reference designations when you place symbols in the project.
Click here
IF THE TAB REF.DESIGN DOES NOT APPEAR
IF THE REFERENCE DESIGNATION PART OF THE DIALOG BOX DOES NOT
EXIST, THIS IS BECAUSE NO REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS HAVE BEEN DEFINED
IN THE PROJECT DATA DIALOG BOX. — SEE HOW TO CREATE THESE IN
“DEFINING REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR THE PROJECT” ON PAGE 325.
Automation 12.0
Page 336
Reference designations
Choosing reference designations when placing symbols
When you click on on the tab Ref. design. and then Select, you enter this dialog
box:
ONLY CREATED ASPECT TYPES DISPLAYED
WHEN PLACING SYMBOLS, THE DIALOG BOX REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
ONLY DISPLAYS THE ASPECT TYPES, WHICH HAVE BEEN CREATED IN THE
PROJECT.
IF FOR INSTANCE YOU HAVE NOT CREATED A LOCATION REFERENCE DESIGNATION ’+’ THIS PART OF THE DIALOG BOX IS NOT DISPAYED, AND THE FUNCTION REFERENCE DESIGNATION WINDOW FILLS ALL OF THE DIALOG BOX.
Here you select the desired reference designation, and click OK. If one of the
aspects shall not be a part of the symbol name, you click on Top node = none
under the aspect.
If you wish to create a new reference designation, click on New, and create the
reference designation — see “Specifying function/location reference designations”
on page 326.
When you return to the Component data dialog box, you can see the reference
designation on the tab Ref. design. in the lower part of the dialog box.
Automation 12.0
Page 337
Reference designations
Displaying the page reference designation and the most recently applied
reference designations
When you click on the down-arrow next to the Function field, the function reference designation for the page and the most recently applied function reference
designations are displayed. You can then select a function reference designation in
the list.
The function reference designation for the page and the most recently applied
function reference designation are displayed in the top of the list.
Click here
... and select the aspect here
You can do just the same for location reference designations.
SHORT-CUT KEYS
These functions has the short-cut keys <Ctrl+f> for function reference designations
and <Ctrl+l> for location reference designations. The Ref.design. tab is automatically displayed when the short-cut keys are pressed.
Show full Reference designation
Because the page can be assigned a reference designation, and because the symbol can be placed in an area on the page containing reference designations, only
the part of the reference designations that are different from the page or the area is
displayed.
If you wish to display the full reference designation, select Show full Reference
designation.
— See “Character for specifying full reference designation (exclude concatenation)” on page 324 also.
Individual control of reference designations with line breaks from Component data
Under Settings => Project data => Reference designations => Setup you can
specify that the reference designations are displayed in more that one line, as a
general setting for the project.
In the dialog box Component data on the tab Ref.design., you can — for the
selected symbol — deselect this setting by removing the check mark in the check
box Reference designation with line break: Project controlled.
When the check mark is removed, you get the following option:
Automation 12.0
Page 338
Reference designations
You can then select/deselect Reference designation with line break for the
selected symbol, independant of the general project settings.
Type in the symbol name / product reference
Now type in the symbol name and click OK.
Editing reference designations for placed symbols
When you want to assign reference designations to a group of placed symbols, do
the following:
1) Click the Symbols button and select the symbols
2) Right-click on the selected symbols, and choose Component data
3) In the dialog box Component data: Click on the tab Ref.design. and click
on Select
4) In the dialog box Reference Designations: Choose reference designation
and click OK
5) In the dialog box Component data: Click OK
6) Click somewhere on the page — to deselect the symbols
You have now assigned reference designations to the selected symbols.
Editing reference designations using the Select name function
— See “Changing the symbol reference designations using Select name” on
page 229.
Preceding “-” in symbol names
The symbols in the EN60617 folder does not have a preceding “-” in their symbol
names.
Therefore enter Settings => Pointer/Screen and
select Insert - in front of symbol names. All symbols you place in the following, will have a preceding
“-” in their symbol names.
Adding "-" in already placed symbols
If you have an old project without "-" in the symbol names, this prefix can be added
automatically to all symbols in the project, by choosing Functions => Special
Functions => Prefix all symbol names with -.
Inserting reference designations on signal symbols and symbol
references
— See “Reference designations on symbol and signal references” on page 360.
Automation 12.0
Page 339
Reference designations
REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS FOR A FULL PAGE
It is also possible to specify reference designations for a full page.
To do this you enter Settings => Page data.
Click here
Here you click on Select under Reference designations, and enter the dialog box
Reference designations:
Then click on the reference designations you wish to select for the page and click
OK.
You now return to the dialog box Page data.
The page reference is not displayed on the page
Please note, that it is not displayed on the project page, that reference designations have been attached to it. — See “Inserting a drawing header displaying reference designations” on page 341.
Click OK.
ALREADY PLACED SYMBOLS ARE NOT ASSIGNED NEW REF. DESIGNATIONS
SYMBOLS ALREADY PLACED ON THE PAGE, WILL NOT AUTOMATICALLY GET
THE NEW REFERENCE DESIGNATION FOR THE PAGE.
SYMBOLS PLACED AFTER ASSIGNING THE REFERENCE DESIGNATION WILL
AUTOMATICALLY GET THE NEW REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR THE PAGE.
Automation 12.0
Page 340
Reference designations
Symbol names on pages with assigned reference designations
Every symbol you place on a page with reference designations, are assigned the
reference designation of the page — unless you specify otherwise for the individual
symbols in their respective Component data dialog boxes.
Because the symbols are conceived as belonging to the reference designation of
the page, this reference designation is not displayed as a part of the symbol name
on the page. Reference designations will only be displayed when they are different
form the reference designation of the page.
Using the Show available function on pages with reference designations
When you via the Show available function place symbols for a component, which
have already been assigned a reference designation, this symbol keeps the assigned reference designation.
The page reference designation displayed in the Status line
In the status line at the bottom of the
screen you can see the reference
designation of the page along with the
page title. Click OK.
The page reference designation
Page reference designation displayed as popup information
When you let the mouse cursor rest over a page
tab, the page reference designation is displayed in
the popup information.
Inserting a drawing header displaying reference designations
If you do not take action yourself, the reference designation of the page is not displayed on the project page itself. Therefore it is a good idea to place a drawing header on the page, in which the reference designation of the page is displayed.
To do this, you must place the datafield Reference designation of the type Page
data in the drawing header. — See “Datafield for reference designations in projects” on page 351.
Please refer to “Creating Drawing Headers” on page 721 for further details on
creating drawing headers.
Inserting a datafield with reference designations
You can also place the datafield directly on the page.
To do this choose Insert => Insert datafield. Then click on Page Data, choose the
datafield Reference designation, and click OK.
The datafields Next used page and Previous used page can also display the
reference designation of the pages they refer to.
Automation 12.0
Page 341
Reference designations
REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS FOR
AREAS
ON PAGES
It is also possible to specify that areas on pages shall
have an attached reference designation.
To do this choose Insert => Insert Reference Frame.
You then get a pencil in the cross hairs, and draw a
frame for the area with the reference designation.
THE PROGRAM MEMORIZES THE LINES SETTINGS
THE PROGRAM AUTOMATICALLY USES THE LAST APPLIED LINES SETTINGS
FOR INSERT REFERENCE FRAME.
AFTER DRAWING THE REFERENCE FRAME, THE PROGRAM AUTOMATICALLY
CHANGES TO THE LINES SETTINGS, WHICH YOU WERE USING BEFORE INSERTING THE REFERENCE FRAME.
— READ MORE ABOUT LINES SETTINGS IN “THE LINES TOOLBAR” ON
PAGE 66.
When you have drawn the frame, you enter this dialog box:
Here you select the relevant reference designation as described in “Selecting Reference designations when placing symbols” on page 336, and click OK.
You now return to the above dialog box, where the selected reference designation
is displayed.
Because the page also can have assigned a reference designation, the only the
part of the reference designation which is displayed is the part which is different
from the reference designation of the page.
Show full Reference designation
When you want the full reference designation to be displayed, select Show full
Reference designation.
Automation 12.0
Page 342
Reference designations
Show Function description and Show Location description
If you select Show Function
description and/or Show Location description, the function
description and/or the location
description for the reference frame
will be displayed. Here the description for the function aspect will be
placed starting in the upper-left
corner of the frame, while the location will be placed starting in the
lower-left corner of the frame.
Both texts can be moved freely,
and their text data can be edited,
as for other texts in the program. —
See “Moving symbol texts on a Diagram page” on page 106 and “Specifying text
properties / Appearance of text” on page 118.
If the frame is moved, the texts are moved relative to the frame, which is also the
case for the reference designation text.
Individual control of reference designations with line break
— See “Individual control of reference designations with line breaks from Component data” on page 338.
Click OK
When the dialog box is filled out, click OK.
DRAW THE REFERENCE FRAME BEFORE PLACING THE SYMBOLS
WHEN YOU CREATE REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR AREAS YOU FIRST
DRAW THE FRAME, AND THEN PLACE THE SYMBOLS IN THE FRAME. THIS WAY
THE SYMBOLS ARE ASSIGNED THE REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR THE
AREA.
Editing reference designations for areas
If you want to change the reference designation for
the area, click the Lines button, right-click on the
frame, and choose Reference Frame data.
You then enter the dialog box Reference Frame data,
as described in “Reference designations for Areas on
pages” on page 342. Here you type in the new reference designations for the area / reference frame.
Automation 12.0
Page 343
Reference designations
When you change the reference designation on a reference frame, you are asked
whether/how to change the reference designations for symbols placed inside the
reference frame with the previous reference designation for the frame.
Specifying which symbols inside the frame to assign new reference
designations to
In this dialog box you specify how/whether to update the symbols:
- Do NOT change Reference Designations on symbols: The reference designations remains unchanged for the symbols inside the reference frame
- Change symbols with Ref. "=G1+A1" to "=G2+A2": Symbols with the same
full reference designation as the reference frame, are updated
- Change symbols with Ref. "=G1" or "+A1": You get the option to further specify whether the function and/or location aspect to change for symbols with
matching function/location aspect inside the frame
Change symbols outside the frame with same names
If you choose Change symbols outside the frame with same names, all symbols outside the frame are changed, if they have the same symbol name and reference designation, as any of the symbols inside the frame.
If the reference frame is placed on a page, which you have just copied into the project, you will typically not select this option — so that you do not change names on
other project pages by accident.
When there are symbols inside the reference frame, which are part of a component, for which there also are placed symbols outside the reference frame, it can
be important that Change symbols outside the frame with same names is
selected. This ensures you that all symbols for the same component still have the
same reference designations. — If this is not the case, the program will no longer
understand these symbols as being parts of the same component.
Show/Edit list of symbols being placed
If you choose Show/Edit list of symbols being placed, you subsequently enter a
dialog box where you can see which symbols Automation will change reference
Automation 12.0
Page 344
Reference designations
designations for. Here you can also specify not to assign new reference designations to some of the symbols in the list, by removing the check mark for these symbols in the list. — See also “Show/Edit list of symbols being changed” on page 350.
Click OK
Make the desired changes in the dialog box Change Reference designations,
and click OK.
See all reference frames in the project
To see all areas with reference designations in the project, you can enter the
Object Lister and choose Reference Frames.
— See “The Object Lister” on page 296.
Automation 12.0
Page 345
Reference designations
EDITING
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR CHAPTERS
To assign the same reference designation to a full chapter, enter the Page menu
— as described in “Edit reference designations for more than one page” on
page 346 —, select all pages in the project, and change the reference designations
for the pages.
YOU MUST ASSIGN REF.DES. MANUALLY TO NEW PAGES IN CHAPTERS
WHEN YOU INSERT A NEW PAGE IN A CHAPTER, THE PAGE IS NOT ASSIGNED
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS AUTOMATICALLY.
YOU MUST DO THIS MANUALLY, AS DESCRIBED IN “REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR A FULL PAGE” ON PAGE 340.
— Please refer to “Change reference designations via chapter Divider pages” on
page 349 also.
EDIT
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR MORE THAN ONE PAGE
To edit reference designations for one or more pages in one operation, do this:
1) Click the Pagemenu button, or select View => Select page.
2) In the Page menu: Select the pages for which you wish to change reference
designations — eg. by pressing down the <Ctrl> key, and clicking on the
pages one by one.
3) Click on Article data.
IF THE PAGES DO NOT HAVE IDENTICAL REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
IN THE DIALOG BOX PAGE ARTICLE DATA: IF THE TEXTS FUNCTION AND/OR
LOCATION ARE DIMMED, THIS MEANS THAT THE SELECTED PAGES DO NOT
HAVE IDENTICAL REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS.
NOTE: If dimmed,
only the ref.des. of the
pages can be changed
IF THIS IS THE CASE, IT IS ONLY POSSIBLE TO EDIT THE REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR THE PAGES. THE REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR THE SYMBOLS WILL NOT BE CHANGED.
Automation 12.0
Page 346
Reference designations
4) In the dialog box Page article data: Click on Select under Reference designations:
2) Select the pages
3) Click on Article data
4) Click on Select, and
select reference designations
5) In the dialog box Reference designations: Select the new reference designations, and click OK. What to do next depends on whether the selected
pages had identical reference designations:
If the pages did NOT have identical reference designations
6a) If the selected pages did not have
identical reference designations, do
the following in the dialog box Page
article data: Click on one — or both
— of the reference designations, to
Click here to confirm the
confirm that you wish to select this refselected reference designation
erence designation. This causes
Function and/or Location to be written in black, and the selected pages are assigned the reference designation
— which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog box Page article data.
(Please note, that only the pages, and not the symbols on the pages, will
have their reference designations changed — as described in the box “If the
pages do not have identical reference designations” on page 346).
Klik OK.
If the pages did have identical reference designations
6b) If the selected pages had identical reference designations, you enter the
dialog box Change Reference Designations. Here you get the option of
Automation 12.0
Page 347
Reference designations
changing reference designations for the implicated symbols:
— Read about the options in this dialog box in “Options in the dialog box
Change Reference Designations” on page 349.
Choose how to change reference designations for the involved symbols, and
click OK. If you have chosen Show/Edit list of symbols being changed,
please also see “Show/Edit list of symbols being changed” on page 350.
Click OK in the Page menu
7) You now return to the Page menu: Click OK.
Automation 12.0
Page 348
Reference designations
CHANGE
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS VIA CHAPTER
DIVIDER
PAGES
To change reference designations via a chapter tab, do this:
1) Click on the page tab for the divider page for
the chapter (The chapter front page).
2) Select Settings => Page data, and click on
Select below Reference designations.
3) In the dialog box Reference designations: Choose reference designations,
and click OK.
Options in the dialog box Change Reference Designations
4) You now enter the dialog box Reference designations:
Here you are asked whether to change reference designations on the pages
in the chapter having the same reference designations as the divider page,
and which directions to apply for changing the symbols. You have the following options:
OPTION
EFFECT
CHANGE REFERENCE DESIG-
SELECT THIS OPTION IN ORDER TO CHANGE REFE-
NATIONS ON CHAPTER PAGES
RENCE DESIGNATIONS FOR THE CHAPTER PAGES
HAVING THE SAME REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS AS THE
DIVIDER PAGE.
YOU WILL NOT BE ABLE TO SELECT THE OPTIONS
BELOW, BEFORE YOU HAVE SELECTED THIS OPTION.
DO NOT CHANGE REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ON
CLICK HERE IN ORDER NOT TO CHANGE REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS ON ANY SYMBOLS.
SYMBOLS
CHANGE SYMBOLS WITH
REF. "X" TO "Y"
CLICK HERE TO CHANGE BOTH THE FUNCTION AND
THE LOCATION REFERENCE DESIGNATION.
CHANGE SYMBOLS WITH
REF. "X" OR "Y"
CLICK HERE TO CHANGE EITHER THE FUNCTION OR
THE LOCATION REFERENCE DESIGNATION.
Automation 12.0
Page 349
Reference designations
OPTION
EFFECT
CHANGE SYMBOLS WITH
FUNCTION REFERENCE
DESIGNATION "X" TO "Y"
FIRST CHOOSE CHANGE SYMBOLS WITH REF. "X" OR
"Y": THEN CLICK HERE ONLY TO CHANGE FUNCTION
REFERENCE DESIGNAITON.
CHANGE SYMBOLS WITH
LOCATION REFERENCE
DESIGNATION "X" TO "Y"
FIRST CHOOSE CHANGE SYMBOLS WITH REF. "X" OR
"Y": THEN CLICK HERE ONLY TO CHANGE LOCATION
REFERENCE DESIGNATION.
CHANGE SYMBOLS ON OTHER
PAGES WITH SAME NAME AS
CLICK HERE, SO THAT YOU ALSO CHANGE REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS FOR SYMBOLS OUTSIDE THE CHAPTER,
ON THIS PAGE
WHICH ARE A PART OF THOSE OF THE COMPONENTS
IN THE CHAPTER, WHICH WILL HAVE THEIR REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS CHANGED.
SHOW/EDIT LIST OF SYMBOLS
BEING CHANGED
CLICK HERE TO GET A LIST OF WHICH SYMBOLS THAT
ARE GOING TO BE CHANGED. IN THIS LIST YOU CAN
DESELECT SYMBOLS, FOR WHICH YOU DO NOT WISH
TO CHANGE REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS.
Show/Edit list of symbols being changed
5) If you have chosen Show/Edit list of symbols being changed, you now
enter the following dialog box:
Click here for different views
Click here to select/deselect symbols
Remove the check mark in front of the symbols, that shall not have their reference designations changed, and click OK.
6) In the dialog box Settings: Click OK
You have now changed reference designations for the desired pages and symbols.
Automation 12.0
Page 350
Reference designations
DATAFIELD
FOR REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS IN PROJECTS
When you wish to place a datafield containing reference designations in a list or on a diagram
page, do the following:
The full ref. designation is shown
Only the Function aspect
Only the Location aspect
1) Choose Insert => Insert
Datafield.
2) In the dialog box Datafield:
Click on Project Data, and
choose the datafield Reference designation.
3) Choose the relevant part of
the reference designation —
as displayed in the figure to
the right.
4) Click OK.
The Reference designation itself is sho
The attached description is shown
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER
WHEN REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ARE BEING PRINTED VIA THIS DATAFIELD,
THEY ALWAYS APPEAR IN ALPHABETHICAL ORDER.
Specify which reference designations to display
When you have selected the datafield Reference designation in the Project data group, you can choose only to
display a limited part of the reference designations.
This is done in the field First,last, where you type in the number of the first and the
last reference designation you wish to display.
When for instance you type in 1,20 the first 20 reference designations are displayed, if you type in 21,40 the subsequent 20 reference designations are displayed. This way it is possible to list the reference designations over several pages
or and/or columns, when a project contains many reference designations.
Automation 12.0
Page 351
Reference designations
LISTS
FOR EACH
FUNCTION
OR
LOCATION
When you apply reference designations, it is possible to create separate lists for
each Function or Location in the project.
This is done by clicking on the list in the project you want divided following these
criteria. Here you choose Lists => List settings and enter the dialog box List
setup, where you click on the Criteria tab.
If you want a list of every symbol having the Function aspect =P1 — which for
instance could be a pump — you fill out the Criteria tab like this:
Or fill out the Criteria tab like this to get a list of the assembly +A1:
— Please refer to “Specifying Criteria for the components to include” on page 539
for further details on criteria on lists.
Automation 12.0
Page 352
References
This section describes the use of references in
PC|SCHEMATIC Automation:
- Automatically updated references ...............(p. 355)
- Contact mirrors and Reference crosses .....(p. 362)
- Reference system settings ............................(p. 367)
Automatically updated references
AUTOMATICALLY UPDATED REFERENCES
When you place more than one symbol for the same component in a project, the
program can automatically create references between these symbols on the project pages.
Next to each symbol you can therefore see references to the other symbols for the
same component. The appearance of these references you can determine yourself.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— INSERTING A REFERENCE SYSTEM ............................................................(P. 355)
— AUTOMATIC JUMP BETWEEN REFERENCES ON DOUBLE-CLICK ....................(P. 355)
— REFERENCES ON SYMBOLS ......................................................................(P. 357)
— APPEARANCE OF REFERENCES ................................................................(P. 360)
— REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ON SYMBOL AND SIGNAL REFERENCES ............(P. 360)
— REFERENCES FOR PLCS .........................................................................(P. 361)
— Please see to “Contact mirrors and Reference crosses” on page 362.
— Please also see “Navigation between symbols for the same component” on
page 165.
INSERTING
A REFERENCE SYSTEM
In order to let the program create appropriate references, you must first create/
adapt the reference system for the diagram pages, so that it meets your demands.
Read more about this in “Setting up the current paths” on page 367.
AUTOMATIC
JUMP BETWEEN REFERENCES ON DOUBLE-CLICK
To jump to a symbol which is referred to, do the following:
1) Double-click on the reference.
Double-click on the reference, and the referred symbol is selected
Automation 12.0
Page 355
Automatically updated references
2) The program now automatically jumps to the project page, where the referred to symbol is placed. The referred symbol is selected by the cross hairs.
Automatic jump to reference from reference cross
Correspondingly you can double-click on the reference in a reference cross or in a
contact mirror:
Double-click here to return
to the relay coil symbol
Double-click on the reference in the reference cross
and the referred symbol is selected
When you double-click on the reference for a symbol in the reference cross/contact
mirror, you return to the symbol with the symbol having the symbol type Relay.
SYMBOL REFERENCES ARE ACTIVE IN ALL COMMANDS
WHEN YOU DOUBLE-CLICK ON A REFERENCE FOR A SYMBOL, Automation
JUMPS TO THE REFERRED SYMBOL — NO MATTER IF YOU WORK WITH
LINES, TEXTS, CIRCLES, SYMBOLS OR AREAS.
Automation 12.0
Page 356
Automatically updated references
REFERENCES
ON SYMBOLS
In Automation you can apply references on all types of symbols.
How the reference appears for a symbol, primarily depends on the symbol type of
the symbol. However, some symbols are created without symbol type, and therefore has no references.
Inserting references on symbols without reference
To insert references on symbols without references — or to change the selected
reference for a symbol — do the following:
1) Click on the Symbols button, right-click on the symbol, and choose Component data — or double-click on the symbol.
2) In the dialog box Component data: Click on the Reference tab, choose
With reference and then either Master reference or With reference, and
click OK.
Choosing the reference type Master reference
If you select the reference type Master reference, a list is created next to the symbol, containing references to the other symbols having the same symbol name — if
these are set to With reference.
It is possible to set more than one symbol with the same symbol name to Master
reference. However, from the symbols set to With reference, there are only a
reference to the first symbol with Master reference in the documentation.
References can be placed in columns. How many references to place in each
column, is specified in the field Max. Number of references pr. column.
When you choose Master reference for PLC symbols, a PLC I/O reference cross
is placed next to the symbol.
Automation 12.0
Page 357
Automatically updated references
Choosing the reference type With reference
When you choose the reference type With reference, there will be placed a reference next to the symbol, which refers to the symbol(s) that has the same symbol
name and are set to Master reference.
When there are no symbols with the same symbol name which are set to Master
reference, a reference is placed to the preceding and the succeeding symbol in
the project. Hereby a chain of references between symbols with the same symbol
name is created. This makes it easy to run through the project and find all symbols
having the same symbol name. All you need to do is to double-click on the references, and you jump to the next — or previous — symbol in the chain.
Sub names and references
If you only want references between symbols with the same subnames within a
component, do this:
1) Double-click on one of the symbols for the component.
2) In the dialog box Component data: Click on the Reference tab at the bottom of the dialog box.
3) In the Reference tab: Select Only reference to symbols with same sub
name.
If Only reference to symbols with same sub name is not selected, references
will appear for all symbols with the same name, no matter what their sub names
are.
Symbol type and References
The symbol type is specified in the symbol definition — see “Creating Symbols” on
page 676; see "Symbol types" in particular.
However, you can change the symbol type for a symbol like this:
1) Click on the Symbols button — to work with symbols.
2) Right-click on the symbol and choose Component data.
3) Click on the General tab, and click on the down-arrow in the Symbol type
field:
Click here to choose
symbol type
Automation 12.0
Page 358
Automatically updated references
4) You can now choose between the following symbol types:
SYMBOL TYPE
STANDARD REFERENCES FOR THE SYMBOL TYPE
NORMAL
THE SYMBOL IS NOT ASSIGNED REFERENCES — UNLESS SPECIAL
ACTION IS TAKEN.
RELAY
A REFERENCE CROSS/CONTACT MIRROR IS CREATED FOR THE SYMBOL,
WHEN PLACED ON A DIAGRAM.
OPEN
THE SYMBOL WILL BE CONCEIVED AS AN OPEN CONTACT, AND THERE
WILL BE PLACED A REFERENCE TO THE SYMBOL IN THE REFERENCE
CROSS/CONTACT MIRROR BELOW THE RELAY COIL SYMBOL FOR THE
COMPONENT. THE SYMBOL WILL ALSO GET A REFERENCE TO THE RELAY
COIL SYMBOL, WHEN THE SYMBOL IS PLACED IN THE PROJECT.
CLOSE
THE SYMBOL WILL BE CONCEIVED AS A CLOSE CONTACT, AND THERE
WILL BE PLACED A REFERENCE TO THE SYMBOL IN THE REFERENCE
CROSS/CONTACT MIRROR BELOW THE RELAY COIL SYMBOL FOR THE
COMPONENT. THE SYMBOL WILL ALSO GET A REFERENCE TO THE RELAY
COIL SYMBOL, WHEN THE SYMBOL IS PLACED IN THE PROJECT.
SWITCH
THE SYMBOL WILL BE CONCEIVED AS A SWITCH, AND THERE WILL BE
PLACED A REFERENCE TO THE SYMBOL IN THE REFERENCE CROSS/CONTACT MIRROR BELOW THE RELAY COIL SYMBOL FOR THE COMPONENT.
IN REFERENCE CROSSES, THERE WILL BE A REFERENCE TO THE SYMBOL IN BOTH THE OPEN AND THE CLOSE CONTACT SIDE. THE SYMBOL
WILL ALSO GET A REFERENCE TO THE RELAY COIL SYMBOL, WHEN THE
SYMBOL IS PLACED IN THE PROJECT.
MASTER
THE SYMBOL WILL HAVE REFERENCES TO ALL OTHER SYMBOLS OF THE
SAME SYMBOL NAME. FOR INSTANCE HAND OPERATED CONTACTS
REFERENCE
WITH
REFERENCE
REFERS EITHER TO A SYMBOL WITH MASTER REFERENCE, OR TO SYMBOLS IN THE CLOSEST PROCEEDING OR SUCCEEDING CURRENT PATH,
WHICH ARE PART OF THE SAME COMPONENT.
TERMINAL
THE SYMBOL IN NOT ASSIGNED REFERENCES — UNLESS SPECIAL
ACTION IS TAKEN.
PLC
THE SYMBOL IN NOT ASSIGNED REFERENCES — UNLESS SPECIAL
ACTION IS TAKEN.
NON CONDUC-
THE SYMBOL IN NOT ASSIGNED REFERENCES — UNLESS SPECIAL
ACTION IS TAKEN.
TING
SUPPORT
THE SYMBOL IN NOT ASSIGNED REFERENCES — UNLESS SPECIAL
ACTION IS TAKEN.
5) Choose symbol type and click OK.
ALL SYMBOL TYPES CAN BE CREATED WITH ACTIVE WITH REFERENCE
ALL SYMBOL TYPES CAN BE CREATED WITH WITH REFERENCE ACTIVE VIA
THEIR SYMBOL DEFINITION. — READ MORE ABOUT THIS IN “CREATING SYMBOLS” ON PAGE 676, “SYMBOL SETTINGS: REFERENCE” ON PAGE 689 IN
PARTICULAR.
Automation 12.0
Page 359
Automatically updated references
APPEARANCE
OF REFERENCES
To specify the appearance of the reference, do the following:
1) Choose Settings => Text/Symbol defaults.
2) Click on References.
3) Then click on Symbol reference to specify the appearance of the symbol
references.
4) You now get the following options:
5) Now choose Reference format and Separator and brackets if necessary.
6) When you wish also to change the appearance of the text, click the Text properties button, as described in “Specifying text properties / Appearance of
text” on page 118.
7) Click OK.
8) Choose Functions => Update references — and the changes are displayed in the project.
When you wish to change the appearance for references for signal symbols, just
choose Signal reference in step 3 above.
REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS ON SYMBOL AND SIGNAL REFERENCES
To let references for symbols contain reference designations for the page that are
referred to, do the following:
1) Choose Settings => Text/Symbol defaults.
2) Click on References.
3) Then click on Symbol reference to specify the appearance of the references
for symbols.
Automation 12.0
Page 360
Automatically updated references
4) Now choose a reference format with reference designations, as displayed in
the figure below:
5) Click OK.
Signal symbol references with reference designations
You can, correspondingly, activate reference designations for signal symbols by
choosing Signal reference in stead of Symbol reference in the procedure above.
REFERENCES
FOR
PLCS
— See "Jumping between PLC ref. symbols and PLC I/O symbols" på side 444.
Automation 12.0
Page 361
Contact mirrors and Reference crosses
CONTACT MIRRORS AND REFERENCE CROSSES
When displaying references for symbols with the type Relay — see “References on
symbols” on page 357 — you can either use reference crosses or contact mirrors.
This chapter describes how to use reference crosses and contact mirrors in the
program.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— ON CONTACT MIRRORS ...........................................................................(P. 363)
— ON REFERENCE CROSSES .......................................................................(P. 364)
— CHOOSING BETWEEN CONTACT MIRRORS AND REFERENCE CROSSES .......(P. 365)
— CONTACT MIRRORS ARE CREATED AUTOMATICALLY BY THE PROGRAM .......(P. 365)
— Please read “Setting up the current paths” on page 367 to see how to set the
reference system on the project pages.
— Please also read “Automatically updated references” on page 355 for general
information on references in Automation.
CONTACT MIRRORS GIVES QUICK ACCESS TO AVAILABLE SYMBOLS
CONTACT MIRRORS ALSO GIVES YOU THE OPTION TO GET THE AVAILABLE
SYMBOLS FOR A COMPONENT IN THE CROSS HAIRS RIGHT AWAY.
Automation 12.0
Page 362
Contact mirrors and Reference crosses
ON CONTACT
MIRRORS
If you have set the program to use contact mirrors — see
“Choosing between contact mirrors and reference crosses”
on page 365 — and place a symbol with an article number
from the attached database, the other symbols for the component are displayed at the bottom of the page.
Thus contact mirrors are a graphical representation of the
other symbols for the component. The contact mirror is placed under the symbol for the component, which has the
symbol type Relay.
When for instance you place a relay coil symbol via the
database, the other symbols for the component are displayed below the relay coil symbol at the bottom of the page
— as displayed on the figure to the right. In the contact mirror for the relay coil symbol you see a three-poled open
contact, a close contact and an open contact.
Contact mirrors and changes in the article
number
When you change the article number for a symbol, the contact mirror will be changed, so that it matches the information about the article number in the database.
Contact mirror
for the symbol
Symbol with the
type Relay
Direct jump to the other symbols for the component
For the symbols, which are already placed in the project, a reference to their location is displayed. When you double-click on one of these symbols, you jump
directly to the symbol in the project. — See “Automatic jump between references
on double-click” on page 355.
Get available symbols from the contact mirror directly into the
cross hairs
When you double-click on one of the symbols in the contact mirror, which is not placed in the project, you get the
symbol in the cross hairs, and can then place it in the project.
When a symbol is deleted from the project, the reference
to the symbol is removed from the contact mirror, and you
can once again see that the symbol is available in the
contact mirror.
Double-click on an
available symbol,
and you get it in the
cross hairs
Automation 12.0
Page 363
Contact mirrors and Reference crosses
ON
REFERENCE CROSSES
When you are using reference crosses, a reference
cross is displayed under all symbols of the symbol
type Relay.
Under the open contact in the reference cross, references to all the open contacts for the component are
displayed. Also, references to all the close contacts
are displayed below the close contact in the reference cross.
When you double-click on one of these references,
you jump directly to the symbol in the project, which
the reference refers to. — See “Automatic jump between references on double-click” on page 355.
Available symbols are not displayed in
reference crosses
Click here, and you
jump directly to the
symbol, which is
referred to
Available symbols for the component are not displayed in the reference cross.
When you are using reference crosses, you therefore do not have the option to get
available symbols directly in the cross hairs, as when you use contact mirrors —
see “Get available symbols from the contact mirror directly into the cross hairs” on
page 363.
Reference crosses for symbols with sub names
For components containing symbols with sub names, independent reference crosses are created for each of the relay coil symbols for the component, which has
independent sub names.
Hereby components with several functions can be separated functionally on the
project pages, and still appear as one component in the project lists.
— See "Sub names on symbols" på side 160, especially "Functionally understood
as different components" på side 160.
Automation 12.0
Page 364
Contact mirrors and Reference crosses
CHOOSING
BETWEEN CONTACT MIRRORS AND REFERENCE CROSSES
To choose whether to use contact mirrors or reference crosses in Automation, you
must click the Project data button, and click on either Reference cross or Contact mirror in the lower-left corner of the dialog box, and click OK.
You can, at any time, choose whether you wish to use contact mirrors or reference
crosses.
If Contact mirror is activated without an attached database, the contact mirrors
only contains the symbols, which are used in the project.
SWITCHING BETWEEN CONTACT MIRRORS AND REF. CROSSES
YOU CAN CHOOSE TO USE CONTACT MIRRORS WHILE WORKING WITH THE
PROJECT, AND THEN SWITCH TO REFERENCE CROSSES WHEN DELIVERING
THE PROJECT. — OR VICE VERSA.
HOWEVER, THE DATABASE MUST BE ATTACHED WHEN CHOOSING TO WORK
WITH CONTACT MIRRORS, BECAUSE THE PROGRAM THEN RUNS THROUGH
THE PROJECT, IN ORDER TO CREATE CONTACT MIRRORS. IF THE DATABASE
IS NOT ATTACHED AT THIS TIME, AVAILABLE CONTACTS ARE NOT DISPLAYED.
CONTACT
MIRRORS ARE CREATED AUTOMATICALLY
In Automation the program creates the contact mirrors for you automatically, so
that they contains all the relevant symbols. When for instance you place a relay coil
symbol from a component from the database, the program automatically creates a
contact mirror containing the other symbols for the component under the relay coil
symbol in the project.
If you later place other symbols with the same symbol name in the project, where
these symbols does not have an article number — or has an unknown article number — the symbols are added to the bottom of the contact mirror. When these symbols are deleted in the project, they are removed from the contact mirror.
Creating contact mirrors without using the database
When you are working without an attached database, and place a symbol with the
symbol type Relay, no contact mirror is created for the symbol.
Automation 12.0
Page 365
Contact mirrors and Reference crosses
The contact mirror is not created until you place another symbol with the same
symbol name in the project. After this, symbols will be added to the contact mirror
as you place more symbols with the same symbol name. The symbols will therefore appear in the order in which they are placed in the project.
When a symbol is placed using an attached database, the contact mirror for the
symbol is memorized, also when the database is no longer attached. This applies
as long as the article number for the symbol remains unchanged.
Contact mirrors for symbols without article numbers
What is mentioned above, only applies when you are working with an attached
database, and place a symbol without an article number — or a symbol with an
unknown article number.
When you assign an article number to a symbol, the contact mirror for the symbol
is created/re-organized according to the order of the symbols for the component in
the database (In the PCSTYPE field in the database — see “Database settings” on
page 598).
Automation 12.0
Page 366
Current path numbers / Reference System
CURRENT PATH NUMBERS / REFERENCE SYSTEM
The reference system / current path numbers is a coordinate system you can use
on your diagrams. It will be used when you refer to the position of the individual
components, for instance in a reference cross. The current path numbers / reference systems can be located along the horizontal or vertical axis, or along both
axis simultaneously.
You can determine to let the number of the current path, and/or page a symbol is
located on, be part of the name of the symbol. This is called current path naming.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— SETTING UP THE CURRENT PATHS ...........................................................(P. 367)
— THE HORIZONTAL REFERENCE SYSTEM ....................................................(P. 368)
— THE VERTICAL REFERENCE SYSTEM .........................................................(P. 368)
— COPYING THE REFERENCE SETTINGS........................................................(P. 369)
— CHANGING THE REFERENCE CROSSES......................................................(P. 369)
— NAMING SYMBOLS ACCORDING TO CURRENT PATH NUMBERS ....................(P. 370)
— SYMBOL NAMES WHEN MOVING OR COPYING ...........................................(P. 372)
— CURRENT PATH NUMBERS AND AUTOMATIC PROJECT GENERATION ............(P. 373)
— NAMING DUE TO CHANGES IN THE PAGE MENU .........................................(P. 373)
SETTING
UP THE CURRENT PATHS
To determine where and how to locate the current path numbers, you choose Settings => Page data => References.
You then enter the Reference system setup dialog box:
Automation 12.0
Page 367
Current path numbers / Reference System
HORIZONTAL
REFERENCE SYSTEM
In the field Active on the tab Horizontal you determine whether you want to use
references along the x-axis on your diagram or not.
In the Main reference check box you determine whether these current path numbers are to be used when referring between symbols.
If Main reference is selected a reference cross will be placed on the diagram for
each individual symbol having a relay status (See “Symbol types” on page 686).
These will be filled out with references to the contacts of the same component. If
Main reference is deselected, no reference crosses will be placed on the diagram.
In the fields X position (mm) and Y position (mm), you determine where to place
the first current path; in the Distance (mm) field you determine the distance between the current paths; and in Number you choose how many current path numbers you want on the chosen page.
In the Start value field, you determine the start value of the first current path on the
diagram, and in Counting direction you choose whether to count from left to right,
or from right to left.
If you want the current paths on the different pages in the project to be numbered
in succession, select the Continuous check box. If the page you are working on
has no preceding diagram, the field will be dimmed and can not be selected.
If you have selected Continuous on a page and then change the initial value, you
automatically change the initial value on the first of the coherent pages.
In the Reference symbol position field you determine the position of the reference crosses.
By clicking on the Text properties button, you determine the size of the characters/figures in the numbering of the current paths.
Default settings
If you want to see the present default settings for the tab Horizontal, you click the
Show defaults button. The default settings are displayed as long as the button is
pressed down.
To load the defaults for the tab Horizontal, you click the Load defaults button.
VERTICAL
REFERENCE SYSTEM
By clicking on the tab Vertical you will be able to determine corresponding settings
for the current path numbers along the vertical axis. If you wish, you can use letters
instead of numbers.
Automation 12.0
Page 368
Current path numbers / Reference System
COPYING
THE REFERENCE SETTINGS
If you want these settings for the current path numbers
to be used on the diagrams you create from now on, you
click on the tab Default, and then click on the Save as
default button. Hereby you save all settings made on
the tabs Horizontal and Vertical.
Please note, that clicking on the Save as standard button will not effect any pages in the project.
If you want to update the other pages in the project with
the chosen settings, you click on Update.
Hereby you update all pages having the Page function
Normal, the Page type Diagram, and also the same
Page size as the page you are working on at present.
Check marks in the check boxes Active, Main reference and Continuous are not updated/changed.
— Read more about Page type and Page function in “Pages and Chapters” on
page 485.
CHANGING
THE REFERENCE CROSSES
The reference crosses are defined as symbols, so in order to change these, you
have to change their symbol definitions. — See “Creating Symbols” on page 676.
You choose which reference cross to use in the project by first choosing Settings
=> Text/Symbol defaults, then click on Others, on Reference cross, and on
Add. You then enter the Symbol menu, where you select the symbol for the reference cross you wish to use.
The reference crosses are defined as symbols, so when you wish to change these,
you must edit their symbol definitions. — See “Creating Symbols” on page 676.
If you enter Settings => Text/Symbol defaults, click on Reference and then on
Reference cross, you can edit the appearance of the text in the reference crosses
by clicking on the Text properties button. Please note, that the appearance will
only be changed for the reference crosses that are placed in the project after you
made the changes.
You can also choose which separator to use in the reference crosses:
Then choose Functions => Update references and the entire project is updated
with the new references.
Automation 12.0
Page 369
Current path numbers / Reference System
NAMING
SYMBOLS DUE TO PAGE AND CURRENT PATH NUMBER
If you want the page and the number of the current path, in which the symbols are
located, to be part of the symbol names, you can let Automation handle this automatically.
To arrange this, you choose Settings => Text/Symbol standards, and click on
Symbols, and then on Name.
In the field Name format you can choose between different formats for the symbol
names.
When you click the Browse button, you can see which symbol types the settings
applies for:
Please note that the selected name formats always applies for symbols of the type
Normal, Relay and Main reference.
Name formats
You can here choose between the following name formats:
THE NAME FORMAT FREE
If you choose Free, the symbol names become exactly as you type them.
THE NAME FORMAT K1/5
If you choose K1/5, the location of the symbol will automatically be included as the
last part of the symbol name.
After the letter (K) follows the page number (1) a separator (/) and the number of
the current path (5) in which the symbol is placed.
If you have chosen this type, you can specify which separator should be used between the page number and the current path number. You do this in the Separator
field.
Automation 12.0
Page 370
Current path numbers / Reference System
THE NAME FORMAT 1K5
If you choose 1K5, the page number will be located before, and the current path
number after the code letter.
THE NAME FORMAT K5
If you choose K5, only the current path number is included in the symbol name.
This only makes sense if you are using Continuous current path numbers.
THE NAME FORMAT K15
If you choose K15, the last digit specifies the current path number. Other digits
after the code letter specifies the page number. If for instance it says -P146 on the
diagram page, this refers to page 14, current path 6. This format can only be used
if the current path numbers does not exceed one character — e.g. 0 to 9.
THE NAME FORMAT K105
If you choose K105, the last two digits specifies the current path number. Other
characters after the code letter specifies the page number. If for instance it says
-P1406 this refers to page 14, current path 6. This format can only be used if the
current path numbers does not exceed two characters — e.g. 0 to 99.
NAMING FORMATS WITH CURRENT PATH NUMBERS AND THE
IEC/EN 61346 STANDARD
THE STANDARD IEC/EN 61346 DOES NOT MENTION CURRENT PATH NUMBERING.
IF YOU USE THE FORMAT K1/5 OR 1K5, THIS WILL BE IN CONTRADICTION TO
THE NAMING RULES IN THE STANDARD.
BUT IF YOU CHOOSE THE FORMAT K5, K15 OR K105, AND EXPLAINS THE
SIGNIFICANCE OF THE APPLIED FORMAT IN THE DOCUMENTATION, YOU CAN
FOLLOW THE STANDARDS IN THIS CONTEXT.
Changing symbol names to current path names
When you in this dialog box specifies that current path numbers shall be included
in the symbol names, this only has an effect for the symbols you place succeedingly.
If you want to include current path numbers in the placed symbols, choose Functions => Special Functions => Create CurrentPath Numbers on all Symbols.
You are then asked whether to rename all symbols. Click OK.
The option Create CurrentPath Numbers on all Symbols is only displayed when
you have specified that current path numbers shall be included in the symbol
names in the project.
Generation names
If you place more symbols of the same type in the same current path, the symbols
will still be assigned unique names.
If for instance you place a lamp in current path sixteen on page three, it gets the
name H3.16. If you then place more lamps in the same current path, they’ll be
assigned the names H3.16.1 and H3.16.2 — and so on. In this context the additi-
Automation 12.0
Page 371
Current path numbers / Reference System
ons are called generation names, and are added to be able to distinguish between
the symbols.
The generation names are assigned according to the order in which you place the
symbols, and has nothing to do with their position in the current path.
In the Second separator field, you determine which sign will be used to separate
the generation name from the current path number.
Save as default
If you want the chosen settings to be in effect for any new project you create, you
click on the Save as default button.
If you want to load the present default settings for symbol names, you click the
Load defaults button.
If you just want to see the defaults, you click the Show defaults button, which only
displays the defaults as long as you keep the mouse button pressed down.
Symbol names in previously created projects will not be affected.
— Read more about default settings and about this dialog box in “Texts displayed
in the project (general setting)” on page 123.
Changing between name format types
If you change from using the name format Free to a name format with included current path numbers, this will not have any effect on symbols already placed in your
project. The change only concern the symbols you place after having made the
changes.
If you want to change symbol names for symbols, that have been named using the
name format Free, in order to make them follow page and current path numbers,
you must do as described in “Make a symbol regain its adaptability” on page 373.
If you change from one current path name format to another, the changes will
affect all symbol names, which contains the correct page and current path number
for the symbol.
During moving or copying, symbols having these name formats, furthermore have
the capability to have their names corrected, corresponding to page and current
path numbers of their new location.
SYMBOL
NAMES WHEN MOVING OR COPYING
If you copy a symbol with a current path name, the copy of the symbol automatically receives a name corresponding to which page/current path you place it on.
If you, on the other hand, move a symbol, you will be asked whether or not to
rename the symbol.
If you answer Yes, the symbol is assigned a name corresponding to the new location of the symbol.
If your answer is No, the symbol keeps its old name, but at the same time it loses
the ability automatically to be assigned a current path name during moving/copying.
Copying or moving more objects at the same time, follows the same directions as
mentioned above.
Automation 12.0
Page 372
Current path numbers / Reference System
Make a symbol regain its adaptability
If you have a symbol that has lost its adaptability, you can manually change its
name to what it should be called, according to its present location.
This makes the symbol name regain its adaptability.
NAMING
DUE TO CHANGES IN THE
PAGE
MENU
When you make changes on project pages in the Page menu, this may have consequences for pages containing symbols with current path names. (You can read
more about this in “The Page menu and current path numbers” on page 489).
If this is the case, you will get a warning. If you answer Yes to rename the symbols,
their names are changed according to the new page and current path numbers. If
you copy/move the symbols later on, they will still be able to be assigned new current path names.
If your answer is No, the symbol names loose their adaptability. Thus, a symbol
having the name K3.5 will remain the name K3.5 on its new location. But the program will no longer recognize this as a current path name. In this case the symbol
will from then on be regarded as a symbol having the name format type Free.
— Se how to let the symbol regain its adaptability in "Make a symbol regain its
adaptability" above.
CURRENT
PATH NUMBERS AND
AUTOMATIC
PROJECT GENERATION
When applying the automatic project generation facilities in Automation, all symbols in the generated project can automatically be assigned current path numbers.
— Read more about this in the Project Generator manual.
Automation 12.0
Page 373
Current path numbers / Reference System
Automation 12.0
Page 374
Wire numbers
This section describes functions for automatic
and manual wire numbering:
- Automatic wire numbering............................. (p. 377)
- Manual wire numbering ..................................(p. 386)
- Wire number files .............................................(p. 389)
Automatic wire numbering
AUTOMATIC WIRE NUMBERING
Automation can assign wire numbers to your drawings automatically. You can also
assign wire numbers manually, and combine these two ways of working.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— STARTING THE AUTOMATIC WIRE NUMBERING ......................................... (P. 377)
— LOCKING THE AUTOMATIC WIRE NUMBERING ............................................ (P. 378)
— FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................ (P. 379)
— POTENTIAL NUMBERING .......................................................................... (P. 379)
— WIRE NUMBERING................................................................................... (P. 380)
— FORMAT ................................................................................................. (P. 383)
— NUMBER SYMBOL ................................................................................... (P. 383)
— EXCLUDE SIGNALS ................................................................................. (P. 385)
— Please refer to “Manual placing of wire numbers” on page 386 to see how to
place wire numbers manually.
STARTING
THE
AUTOMATIC WIRE
NUMBERING
If you want to insert wire numbers automatically on your diagrams, you choose
Functions => Wire numbers. This makes you enter the dialog box Wire numbers, which contains various tabs. Here you determine how the automatic wire
numbering is to be carried out.
If you need to place wire numbers manually, this is described in “Manual placing of
wire numbers” on page 386.
NO UNDO FOR WIRE NUMBERING
BEFORE ASSIGNING WIRE NUMBERS AUTOMATICALLY, IT SHOULD STRESSED
THAT IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO UNDO THIS FUNCTION. THEREFORE, IT IS A
GOOD IDEA TO SAVE THE PROJECT BEFORE ACTIVATING THE AUTOMATIC
WIRE NUMBERING.
When the settings are appropriate, you click either All Pages, This
page or Select pages to carry out the automatic wire numbering,
following the directions you have set up.
When you click on All Pages, the wire numbering is made for all
pages in the project.
When you click on This Page, the wire numbering is only made for
the current page.
Automation 12.0
Page 377
Automatic wire numbering
When you click on Select pages, you enter a special version of the Page menu:
These pages can
be selected
The pages where it is possible to perform wire numbering, are indicated by a green
page icon. Select the pages where you wish to assign wire numbers, and click OK.
If you wish to keep the settings in the dialog box Wire Numbers, but not carry out
the wire numbering right now, click on Close. If you do not wish to keep the new
settings, click Cancel.
Wire numbering settings in the project file
The directions for the wire numbering you set up here, are remembered in the project file. Thus you can perform automatic wire numbering following different guidelines in different projects, if you want.
When you start up a new project, the wire number settings used in the last active
project will be suggested.
Wire numbers in the Object lister
To locate wire numbers in the project, you can use the Object lister, as described in
“The Object Lister” on page 296.
When you use the Show net function, you get access to the same function, as
described in “Show net” on page 195.
LOCKING
THE
AUTOMATIC
WIRE NUMBERING
At the top of the dialog box Wire numbers you can lock the project against wire
numbering/renumbering by selecting Lock the project against wire numbering/
renumbering.
This makes it possible to avoid renumbering a project by mistake.
Automation 12.0
Page 378
Automatic wire numbering
FUNCTIONS
On the wire number tab Functions, you determine the principles for the automatic
wire numbering.
Please observe the warning
Basically, there are two different principles for performing the wire numbering,
namely potential numbering and wire numbering.
Potential numbering
To select potential numbering, you click on Potential numbering in the upper-left
corner of the dialog box.
Hereby each electrical potential is assigned its own wire number. If the same electrical potential is separated by signal symbols (see “Signal symbols” on page 196)
— for instance because it is used on more pages — the same wire number will be
applied each place this potential exists.
The wire number is placed in the middle of the longest line-segment in the potential, but may be moved succeedingly if you wish.
If you want the same wire number on each side of a terminal, you click on Same
number through terminals.
Due to the fact that cables are components of their own right, cable wires will not
be numbered unless you check off Include cable wires.
If you wish to interpret signal variants as unique potentials, select Separate Signal
Variants.
Automation 12.0
Page 379
Automatic wire numbering
Wire numbering
If you want to assign a unique number to each wire in the entire project, you check
off Wire Numbering in the upper-left corner of the dialog box.
THE WIRE NUMBERING IS A QUALIFIED GUESS
IF YOU CANNOT TELL FROM THE DRAWING HOW THE WIRE NUMBERS
SHOULD BE PLACED, YOU CANNOT ASSUME THAT THE PROGRAM CAN
GUESS WHERE THE WIRE NUMBERS SHOULD BE LOCATED!
THE PROGRAM WILL PLACE THE CORRECT AMOUNT OF WIRE NUMBERS
WITHIN THE INDIVIDUAL POTENTIALS, AND YOU WILL THEREFORE RECEIVE
THE CORRECT AMOUNT OF WIRE NUMBERS IN YOUR WIRE NUMBERS FILE. —
BUT THERE IS NO GUARANTEE THAT THE NUMBERS WILL BE LOCATED ON
THE CORRECT WIRES, IF YOU DO NOT DRAW IN MOUNTING MODE.
Therefore, if you want to perform automatic wire numbering, you receive this warning:
Unambiguous drawing
To make it perfectly clear how the wires should be installed, you can make the drawing unambiguous:
1
2
Ambiguous
Unambiguous
On the ambiguously drawn figure above, it is not clear whether the horizontal wire
connects K1 to S1, or from K1 to S2.
On the other hand, the unambiguously drawn figure clearly states that the wire
connects K1 to S2.
It only makes sense to place a wire number on a drawn line, which only represents
one wire. However, on the ambiguous drawing above, it is not clear whether the
Automation 12.0
Page 380
Automatic wire numbering
line from S1 to the connection dot (1), or the line from the connection dot to S2
represents both wires. On the ambiguous drawing, the symbols could be connected in two different ways:
Wire numbers here
Wire numbers here
Option 1
Option 2
In this case, the program must make a qualified guess.
The program guess
Automation will make a guess
which polyline represents more
than one wire. These are not assigned a wire number.
— In this context a polyline is the
line drawn from the connection
point of a symbol to the connection
dot in which the line meets another
line. On the figure, one of the polyline is the line starting in the connection point 13, and ending in the
connection dot.
Numbered
Not numbered
In an electrical potential with for instance three connected symbols, two lines will
be included. The program will then make a guess, that the shortest polyline represents both wires. Please bear this in mind when you draw diagrams.
Numbering order
To specify which corner of the page to start the wire
numbering from, you select one of the four corners.
Also you specify whether the counting direction shall
be Horizontal or Vertical.
Function
In the lower-left corner of the tab, you determine how
to assign wire numbers, and where to place the wire
numbers:
FUNCTION
ACTION
PLACE MISSING
DOES NOT ALTER WIRE NUMBERS THAT HAVE ALREADY BEEN PLACED,
BUT ASSIGNS WIRE NUMBERS TO WIRES WITHOUT NUMBERS.
PLACE MISSING
PLACES NEW WIRE NUMBERS ON WIRES WITHOUT WIRE NUMBERS, AND
AND RENUMBER
ALLOWS ALREADY PLACED WIRE NUMBERS TO KEEP THEIR POSITION ON
THE DIAGRAMS, BUT ALL WIRE NUMBERS ARE RENUMBERED.
Automation 12.0
Page 381
Automatic wire numbering
FUNCTION
ACTION
RENUMBER
THIS FUNCTION IS USED WHEN YOU HAVE PLACED ALL THE WIRE NUMBERS, AND DO NOT WISH TO PLACE MORE NUMBERS. THEREFORE IT
ONLY RENUMBERS ALREADY PLACED WIRE NUMBERS - WITHOUT EXAMINING WHETHER OTHER WIRES LACKS WIRE NUMBERS.
EXISTING
REMOVE EXISTING
AND REPLACE
ALL EXISTING WIRE NUMBERS ARE REMOVED COMPLETELY, AND NEW
WIRE NUMBERS ARE PLACED. THE EARLIER POSITION OF THE WIRE
NUMBERS ARE NOT REMEMBERED.
REMOVE EXISTING
REMOVES ALL WIRE NUMBERS FROM THE PROJECT.
Please notice that the further down you go on the list, the larger is the extent of the
actions. — Please remember that Undo is no option here!
Automation 12.0
Page 382
Automatic wire numbering
FORMAT
FOR AUTOMATIC WIRE NUMBERS
Here you determine the numbering principles for the wire numbers.
FORMAT
ACTION
PREFIX
HERE YOU CAN PLACE A PREFIX, WHICH IS PLACED IN THE BEGINNING OF THE WIRE NUMBERS.
START NUMBER
HERE YOU CAN SPECIFY A START NUMBER FOR THE WIRE NUMBERS.
FIXED DIGITS
HERE YOU STATE WHETHER THE WIRE NUMBERS SHALL CONTAIN
A FIXED NUMBER OF DIGITS — FROM TWO TO NINE.
PRECEDE PAGE NUM-
PLACES THE PAGE NUMBER IN THE FIRST PART OF THE WIRE NUMBER. — CAN ONLY BE CHOSEN IF FIXED DIGITS HAVE BEEN
CHECKED OFF. INSERTION OF A NEW PAGE BETWEEN PAGES,
WHICH USES THIS TYPE OF WIRE NUMBERS, WILL NOT CHANGE
WIRE NUMBERS AUTOMATICALLY.
BER
PAGE SEPARATOR
INSERTS A USER DEFINED SEPARATOR BETWEEN THE PAGE NUMBER AND THE WIRE NUMBER.
RESTART ON PAGE
MAKES THE WIRE NUMBERS START ALL OVER ON EACH PAGE.
— CAN ONLY BE SELECTED IF PRECEDE PAGE NUMBER IS
SELECTED.
SHIFT
SPARES PR. PAGE
RESERVES AN EXTRA POOL OF AVAILABLE WIRE NUMBERS FOR
EACH DIAGRAM PAGE. THUS YOU MAKE ROOM FOR WIRE NUMBERS
THAT ARE APPLIED LATER ON, WITHOUT THIS CAUSING ANY CHANGES TO THE OTHER WIRE NUMBERS IN THE PROJECT.
— DOES NOT MAKE MUCH SENSE IF YOU HAVE CHECKED OFF
RESTART ON PAGE SHIFT.
Please note, that in the right-hand side of the tab, you can see an example on how
the wire numbers would appear in a (fictional) project.
NUMBER SYMBOL
FOR AUTOMATIC WIRE NUMBERING
When you assign a wire number to a wire, this is done by placing a wire number
symbol, having the wire number as its symbol name.
Automation 12.0
Page 383
Automatic wire numbering
When you click on the tab Number symbol, you state which symbol will be used
as the wire number symbol.
If you want to change which symbol is being used, you click on Browse, whereby
you enter the Symbol menu. Here you click on the desired wire number symbol,
and click OK.
You can only apply symbols of the type Wire number.
Position of wire number symbol
In the lower-left corner, you specify whether the wire number symbols are placed
on the Left side or on the Right side of vertical lines.
Design your own wire number symbol
If you want to design your own wire number symbols, you can see how to design
symbols in “Creating Symbols” on page 676.
Automation 12.0
Page 384
Automatic wire numbering
EXCLUDE
SIGNALS FROM AUTOMATIC WIRE NUMBERING
Because some users do not wish to number certain signals, it is possible to determine which signals should be excluded from the automatic wire numbering.
Select the signals you want to transfer and click on the Transfer button, or click on
the Transfer all button to exclude all signals from the automatic wire numbering.
Correspondingly you can select excluded signals in the right hand side of the tab,
and revert them by clicking on the Revert button, or click on the Revert all button
to get all excluded signals back on the included list of signals to be numbered.
Automation 12.0
Page 385
Manual placing of wire numbers
MANUAL PLACING OF WIRE NUMBERS
If you want to make sure that certain wires in the project are assigned specific wire
numbers, you can apply the wire numbers manually.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— FETCHING A WIRE NUMBER SYMBOL.........................................................(P. 386)
— PLACING A WIRE NUMBER SYMBOL ..........................................................(P. 387)
— AUTOMATICALLY INCREMENTING OF WIRE NUMBER NAMES ........................(P. 388)
It is a good strategy to place the wire numbers you want to place first, and then
apply the automatic wire numbering function, as described in “Automatic wire numbering” on page 377.
FETCHING
A
WIRE
NUMBER SYMBOL
The wire numbers are placed by a wire number symbol, which you place on the
line that shall have the wire number.
To fetch a wire number symbol you click on the Symbols and the Symbol menu
button, to enter the Symbol menu. Or press [F8] to enter the menu directly.
Here you choose a wire number symbol — for instance the symbol WIRENO in the
MISC folder — and click OK.
Please note, that this wire number must be of the symbol type Wire number.
Place the wire number symbol in the pickmenu
Also, you can place the wire number symbol in the pickmenu, as described in “Placing symbols in the pickmenu” on page 173.
This speeds up the manual placing of the symbol.
Please refer to “Fetching symbols” on page 135 for further details about fetching
symbols.
Automation 12.0
Page 386
Manual placing of wire numbers
PLACING
A WIRE NUMBER SYMBOL
You now have the wire number symbol in the cross hairs, and click on the wire you
want to place the symbol on.
If the wire already has a wire number, you will get this message:
If you want to place another wire number, click No, and you enter the dialog box
Wire number data.
If Enter Wire Numbers Manually is not selected, the program automatically suggest the next available wire number — according to the wire numbering principle
specified in Functions => Wire Numbers.
If Enter Wire Numbers Manually is selected, you can specify the wire number
names independent of these settings. This way the program supports, that you can
apply a specific numbering principle for the naming of your manually placed wire
numbers.
If you select Protected, the wire number will not be renamed or moved automatically when you change the wire numbers automatically in Functions => Wire
numbers.
Automation 12.0
Page 387
Manual placing of wire numbers
AUTOMATIC
INCREMENTING OF MANUALLY PLACED WIRE NUMBERS
Having selected Enter Wire Numbers Manually, you can for instance type in L1/1,
press down <Ctrl>, and click on Plus. Hereby you activate the automatic incrementing of the manually placed wire number names. Click OK.
When you place the wire number in a potential already having a wire number, you
can select Change all in Potential to L1/1. This way you rename all wire numbers
in the potential. This function is particularly useful when you have copied diagrams
from other projects.
Now click on another wire, and notice that the name of the new wire number now
have been incremented to L1/2. Click OK.
OTHER
FUNCTIONS IN THE DIALOG BOX
By selecting Visible in the dialog box, you specify that the wire number should be
visible on the diagrams.
The buttons +, -, ? and  function as described in “Placing and Naming symbols”
on page 151.
Automation 12.0
Page 388
Wire number Files
WIRE NUMBER FILES
In Automation you can create wire number files for a wire numbering tool. This
chapter describes how to create wire number files.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— CREATING A WIRE NUMBER FILE ...............................................................(P. 389)
— CREATING A CONNECTIONS LIST FILE FOR WIRE NUMBERING .....................(P. 391)
CREATING
A WIRE NUMBER FILE
When you want have your wire numbers saved in a file, you choose Lists => Wire
number file.
You then enter this dialog box:
Here you have the following options:
New or All wire numbers
The program keeps track of which wire numbers have been saved in a file. Therefore clicking on Not yet written (new) only gives you a file with wire numbers,
which have not been written to a wire number file earlier.
If you want all wire numbers in the project included in the file, you click on All.
How many numbers pr. wire
If you only want a single wire number pr. wire, click on 1 number pr. wire, if you
want two wire numbers for each wire, you click on 2 numbers pr. wire.
WIRE NUMBERS PR. CONNECTION
If you choose 1 number pr. connection, one wire number pr. connection is
created. This function only has relevance for potential numbering, where two wires
under the same terminal has the same number, and therefore can use the same
wire number label.
Automation 12.0
Page 389
Wire number Files
Wire numbers to file according to Line color and Line width
It is furthermore possible to create wire number files, which is sorted according to
line color and/or line width for the line on which the wire number is placed.
This makes it possible succeedingly to handle the wire numbers differently in the
wire numbering tool, in which the file is loaded.
To sort the wire numbers, select Sort on Line Color and/or Sort on Line Width.
Specify name and file format for the wire number file
In the field Wire Numbers File you type in the name of the wire number file, as
well as the path that leads to the file. The extension of the file specifies the file format — see the options in the figure below.
By clicking on Browse, you enter the dialog box Save as. Here you can find the folder and/or the file name you want to use for the file, and specify the file format for
the wirenumber file.
OPENING THE WIRE NUMBER FILE
If you select Open list file in the dialog box Wire Numbers File, the wire number
file is subsequently opened in a program according to the file format. If for instance
you selected Microsoft Excel (*.xls), the file is opened in Excel, if you have this
program installed on your PC.
Creating the wire number file
When you click OK, a wire number file is created, which can be loaded in a wire
numbering tool, from which you can print the wire numbers to place on the actual
wires.
Automation 12.0
Page 390
Wire number Files
CONNECTIONS
LIST FOR WIRE NUMBERING
In Automation you can create a connections list file, which contains component
names with connections for all electrically connected components. Hereby a complete connections list is displayed, where name and connection is displayed for
each individual connection.
This list can succeedingly be sent to a wire numbering tool, from which you can
have all the necessary wire numbers printed.
It is also possible to create connections lists with wire numbers, so that the list can
be used for mounting.
Creating a connections list for wire numbering
Choose Lists => Connectionslist for file, and you enter this dialog box:
If you create a connections
list file, which only contains
component names with connections for all of the electrically connected
components, just choose
the datafield Name twice.
When you then select With
Connection Name for both
of these datafields, and set
the one to From and the
other to To.
— Read more about the
options in this dialog box in
Automation 12.0
Page 391
Wire number Files
“Specifying the contents of the file” on page 634, and see “The buttons in the righthand side of the dialog box” on page 633 also.
Settings for Connections lists for file
If you click on Setup, you enter the following dialog box:
Here you have the following options for specifying how to sort the list:
WIRE NUMBERS
The file is sorted by wire numbers, so that the lowest wire numbers are placed first.
COMPONENT NAMES
The file is sorted alphabetically by component names. Thus for instance all wires
attached to the component -K1 comes first, then wires attached to -K2 etc.
COMPONENT DRAWING LOCATION
The file is sorted according to the pages in the project. First comes everything from
page 1, then everything from page 2 etc.
STARTING POINT OF WIRES
The file is sorted by the starting
points, as displayed in the figure to
the right.
1
2
IF YOU NEED TO CREATE
CONNECTIONS LIST FILES
ACCORDING TO OTHER
DIRECTIONS, PLEASE CONTACT PC|SCHEMATIC
3
4
5
6
A/S.
WRITE COMPLETE NETS
If you select Write complete nets, the connections in the same nets are listed in
succession.
INCLUDE CABLES IN LISTS
Select Include cables in lists, in order to include cables in the list.
Automation 12.0
Page 392
Wire number Files
CLICK OK
Select the desired setting, and click OK.
— Read more about lists to files in “Exporting List Files” on page 629.
Automation 12.0
Page 393
Wire number Files
Automation 12.0
Page 394
Single line diagrams
This section describes functions for single line
diagrams:
- Single line diagrams.........................................(p. 397)
- Generating single line diagrams
automatically ...................................................(p. 399)
Single line diagrams
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS
Automation supports single line diagrams — except for PLCs.
This means that you can draw lines that represents several connections. Correspondingly, you can place symbols, representing several symbols of the same
kind.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— SIGNAL NAMES IN SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS ................................................(P. 397)
— CONNECTION NAMES IN SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS .......................................(P. 398)
— SYMBOL NAMES IN SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS ...............................................(P. 398)
— SYMBOLS FOR SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS IN PICKMENU .................................(P. 398)
— SYMBOLS WITH STATES FOR SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS ................................(P. 398)
There are three places where you can specify that a line or a symbol represents
more lines or components. This is in the signal names, the connection names and
the symbol names.
Single line diagrams and lists
These lines and symbols are automatically unpacked in the lists of the project.
When it comes to lists, it therefore makes no difference whether you have created
single line diagrams or ordinary diagrams.
SIGNAL
NAMES IN
SINGLE
LINE DIAGRAMS
As an example, you can draw the signals L1,
L2 and L3 with just single line.
The only thing you need to do, is to assign
the signal name L1,L2,L3 to the signal, as
displayed on figure 2.
On the symbol K1, the connection name of
the contact to the left is set to 1, which specifies it is connected to L1.
Figure 1
The connection name of the contact in the
middle gets the name ,3. This specifies that
it is connected to L2, because L2 is specified as the second signal in the signal name.
Correspondingly, the name ,,5 tells you that
the contact to the right is connected to the
signal L3.
Figure 2
Automation 12.0
Page 397
Single line diagrams
CONNECTION
NAMES IN
SINGLE
LINE DIAGRAMS
On figure 3, the symbol for K1 has
been replaced by a symbol, which
only displays one contact.
However, the three names in the connection points of K1, specify that the
symbol represents a component
having three contacts.
Therefore the connection names still
specify the same connections as on
the other figures.
SYMBOL
NAMES IN
SINGLE
Figure 3
LINE DIAGRAMS
By assigning the names Q1,Q2,Q3 to a symbol, you can in a similar way let a symbol
represent three — or more — symbols of the
same type.
These two figures represent two different ways
of drawing the same connection.
SYMBOLS FOR SINGLE LINE
DIAGRAMS IN PICKMENU
See how to place symbols for single line diagrams in the pickmenu for a component from the database in “Specifying alternative electrical symbols via the database” on page 584.
SYMBOLS
WITH STATES FOR
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS
Symbols can be created with different states, so that the symbols changes appearance when their state number is changed.
Hereby the same symbol can be applied for single line diagrams, where e.g. lines
across the symbol indicates the number of phases used.
— See how to apply symbols with states in “Symbols with states” on page 162.
— See how to create symbols with states in “Creating symbols with states” on
page 692.
Automation 12.0
Page 398
Automatic generation of single line diagrams
AUTOMATIC GENERATION OF SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS
Automation can automatically generate single line diagrams based on multi-line
diagrams and panel drawings.
THIS CHAPTER DESCRIBES
— INSTALLING THE MODULE SINGLELINE DIAGRAM ........................................(P. 399)
— PREPARING FOR AUTOMATIC GENERATION OF SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS .......(P. 400)
— STARTING THE MODULE SINGLELINE DIAGRAM .........................................(P. 400)
— SETTINGS FOR THE MODULE SINGLELINE DIAGRAM ...................................(P. 402)
— Please also see “Single line diagrams” on page 397.
INSTALLING
THE MODULE
SINGLELINE DIAGRAMS
In order to generate single line diagrams automatically in Automation, you must
first install the module Singleline Diagram:
1) Choose File => Modules.
2) Click on Singleline Diagram and click Install.
3) In the dialog box Modules it is now displayed that the module is installed:
Click Close.
The module is activated by choosing Tools => Singleline Diagram.
Automation 12.0
Page 399
Automatic generation of single line diagrams
PREPARATIONS
FOR AUTOMATIC GENERATION OF SINGLE LINE DIA-
GRAMS
In order to be able to generate single line diagrams automatically, you must first do
this:
1) Create single line symbols for the applied components in the diagram.
2) In the applied database: Add a field to the database, which makes it possible
to specify which single line symbol to use for each individual component —
for instance the field SINGLELINESYMBOL.
3) In the applied database: Specify which single line symbol, that belongs to
which of the applied components.
4) Adjust the settings in Automation, so that the program knows from which
database fields to fetch the single line symbols: Choose Settings => Database => Database settings, click on the tab Component data, and specify
in the Singleline symbol field which datafield in the database that Automation fetches single line symbols from.
— See an example on how to do it in “Single line diagram example” on page 403.
GENERATING
A SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
To generate a single line diagram using the Singleline Diagram module, do this:
1) Choose Tools => Singleline Diagram:
1) Click here,
and click the
connectionpoint in the
diagram
2) Click here,
and click a stop
symbol in the
diagram
2) Click on the symbol connectionpoint in the diagram, from which you want the
single line diagram to start, as displayed in the figure "Point out start and end
point for the single line diagram" below.
— If you are creating the diagram based on a file from the Panel Builder, the
start symbol is found automatically.
3) Select a stop symbol, if necessary. — If the selected stop symbol is for
instance 5 symbols away from the startingpoint, the generated single line
Automation 12.0
Page 400
Automatic generation of single line diagrams
diagram will contain all symbols connected with the connection point, which
are up to 5 symbols/levels away from this. See the figure "Point out start and
end point for the single line diagram" below. However, it is seldom necessary
to specify a stop symbol.
4) Click on Generate diagram.
The single line diagram is now generated based on the settings specified on the
tabs Pages and Adjustments.
Point out start and end point for the single line diagram
2) Click on a
Connectionpoint
on a symbol as a
starting point
3) Click on a
symbol as a
stopping point
(if needed)
These symbols are included in the single line diagram, because
they are the same number of levels / number of symbols (5)
away from the starting point, as the selected stop symbol -M2
Automation 12.0
Page 401
Automatic generation of single line diagrams
SETTINGS
FOR THE MODULE
SINGLELINE DIAGRAM
In the dialog box Singleline Diagram there are different settings for how to generate single line diagrams:
The Pages tab
On the Pages tab, you specify how to create the generated pages.
Select drawingheader
You can choose:
- Choose which drawing header(s) to use on the pages.
- Whether to insert reference designations on the pages.
- Whether to place the single line diagrams at the beginning or at the end of the
project, or whether to create the single line diagrams as a new project. If you
choose to let the single line diagrams be a part of the original project, the single
line diagram drawings will be created as a new chapter along with a chapter tab
page.
Automation 12.0
Page 402
Automatic generation of single line diagrams
The Adjustments tab
On the Adjustments tab you specify what to include in the single line diagrams,
and how to place the objects on the page.
Here you specify:
- The margins
- The minimum space between the placed symbols on the pages
- Which symbol texts to display
- The orientation of function texts for symbols
- Whether to include cables and/or terminals in the diagrams
- Whether to display phases in the diagram
SINGLE
LINE DIAGRAM EXAMPLE
If you wish to try the Singlelinde Diagram module, you
can open the project
PCSMOTORDEMO1, start
the Singleline Diagram
module, and generate the
single line diagram, as described in “Generating a single
line diagram” on page 400.
Start from this
connectionpoint
Select the connectionpoint
displayed in the figure to the
right.
Please note that you must use the included Pcsdemo database, in order to be
able to create the single line diagram in this example.
Automation 12.0
Page 403
Automatic generation of single line diagrams
Singleline Diagram and the Panel Builder
If you wish to try the Singleline Diagram module along with the Panel Builder, do
this:
1) Select a test database, which contains the necessary single line symbols for
the components. See how to do this in “Shift database for the Panel builder”
on page 478.
2) Open the Project folder, and open the project PanelDesignExample.pro.
3) Start the Singleline Diagram module and generate the single line diagram
as described in “Generating a single line diagram” on page 400.
Automation 12.0
Page 404
INDEX
INDEX FOR PART 1 AND PART 2
A
Absolute measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Accessory symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Activate next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 736, 850
Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Active, check box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Actual page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Adaptability
symbol names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Adapting the system to your needs . . . . . . . . 767
Add a wire to a cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Add new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488, 507
Additionals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Adjust to printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Adobe Acrobat Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
ALARM, symbol folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Alias
correct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 619
Align grid to 1. Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
All pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
All visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Already placed objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Alternative electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Alternative symbols
and PINDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
for PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Ambiguous drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
ANSI
paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Apply addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Approved components
in Database menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Arcs/circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 97
toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Area button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Areas
change symbol names in . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
change symbol names in, naming order . 181
choosing connection points in . . . . . . . . . 184
copy
between projects . . . . . . . . . . .
into Edit symbol . . . . . . . . . . . .
reference designations intelligently
. . . . . 243
. . . . . 243
. . . . . 235
copy between projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
copy intelligently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
counting on texts in areas . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
scaling texts in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Article data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
on lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
transfer for symbols or lines . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Article number
type in directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Articles from unit drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Ask for Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 816
Assign article number to unit parts list . . . . . . 749
Asterisk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Auto hide scrollbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Autocompletion of texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Automatic
blocking of mouse clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
insertion of electrical potentials . . . . . . . . . 74
line drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
recovery information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
wire numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Automatic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Automatic switches, database folder . . . . . . . 147
B
Background color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Baltic characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768, 829
Barcode scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Base addressing
for PLC’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Batch printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
on net installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
on stand-alone installation . . . . . . . . . . . 804
BDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Black background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Bold text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Bookmarks
in Symbol menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Bottom to top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
BUILDING, symbol folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Busbar symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Busbar, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Busses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
C
Cable list, page function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Cable symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
add wire to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
color codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
implicit references on cable wires . . . . . . 206
invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
place in one operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
remove wire from a cable . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
reverse direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
same cable in more places . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Cables
move
Automation 12.0
Page 407
connection points
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Cables lists
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
list setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Cancel button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Capital letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
CD
component vendors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Change
between projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
between windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
column of data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
created drawing header . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
data field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
free texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
name format types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
symbol in folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
symbol names in Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
symbol names in Area, naming order . . . . 181
symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
text in the cross hair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
chapter tabs collapsed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
choose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Chinese version
PCschematic Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Choose language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 97
align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
convert to lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
half . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
quater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Circles button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 850
Clipboard
copy to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Close, symbol status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Close, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Codepage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 773
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
dotted grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
help objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
object selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Squared grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
squared grid-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Color codes for cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Columns
change column of data fields . . . . . . . . . . 746
lists in columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
COM/OLE automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Combined circuit and connection diagram . . . . .92
Command bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Command toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .850
Company and User name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .828
Company logo
on drawing header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731
remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .745
Component
insert in database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Component databases
how does the database work . . . . . . . . . .562
Component Grouping
and copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Component vendors
CD with databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Components
approved and obsolete in Database menu 605
changing symbol data for Component . . .230
create in database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
from existing project
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
fetching component symbols from database 222
find in database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
functions on component level . . . . . . . . . .220
grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
having several electrical symbols . . . . . . .583
insert new names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
navigation between symbols . . . . . . . . . .165
place available symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
rename selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
direction for renaming . . .
start number . . . . . . . . .
which names are renamed
. . . . . . . . . . .281
. . . . . . . . . . .282
. . . . . . . . . . .279
rrename
when copying areas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
sorting order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
survey of symbols with same Symbol Name 227
Components list, page function . . . . . . . . . . .491
Components lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739
files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Conducting (electrical) lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Conducting lines button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Connection is used in several nets . . . . . . . . .312
Connection names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588, 851
in one line diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
in single line diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
insert new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Connection point button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Connection point texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Connection points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182, 851
choosing in areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
edit next/previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Connections lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Automation 12.0
Page 408
wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Contact mirrors
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
and changing article numbers . . . . . . . . . 363
choose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
created automatically by the program . . . 365
creating without using database . . . . . . . 365
get available symbols in the cross hairs via 363
jump to reference from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
jump to the other symbols for the component .
363
Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coordinate field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy
and component grouping . . . . . . . . . . . .
area form one project to another . . . . . . .
areas between projects . . . . . . . . . . . . .
areas intelligently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
368
460
551
511
243
233
reference designations . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
drawing headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
project into another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
rows of data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
selected objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
symbol names when copying . . . . . . . . . 372
to other programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Copy button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copy properties button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Correct
directories or alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Unit drawing/parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Counting
on texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
on texts in areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Counting direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Counting direction for naming . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Create
cable list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
components list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
diagram page w. list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
drawing headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
PLC lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
signal symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
terminals lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
unit drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Criteria, tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Cross hairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 851
object selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Cross hairs / Small cross hairs . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Cross hairs figure with snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
Cross hairs line displayed right angled . . . . . 816
Ctrl key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Current page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Current path naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Current path numbers
default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
in symbol names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Curved lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Curved lines button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Czech version
PCschematic Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
D
Damaged files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
Data
transfer between objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Data field dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 851
and PLC lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
change column of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
copy rows of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
create symbol data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
page/project data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
reference designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Data symbols
and lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
place in project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
with predefined values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
Data, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687, 713
DATABASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
1. and 2. Searchkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
1.Searchkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
CD from component vendors . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
choose a DB alias in PC|SCHEMATIC . . . 614
choose database from PC|SCHEMATIC Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
choose database menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
choose from other DB program . . . . . . . . 614
choose Menu using other DB programs . . 609
choosing a database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
create component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
from existing project
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Database menu
. . . . 605
. . . . 604
editing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
enter using the pickmenu . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
approved and obsolete components
Product choice or Fabricate choice .
fields
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
find components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
for lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
how does the database work . . . . . . . . . . 562
insert component in database . . . . . . . . . 580
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
menu structures in other DB programs . . . 614
place cable using color codes from database .
file names in
links . . . . . .
Automation 12.0
Page 409
213
place symbol in pickmenu using database 176
programmable barcode scanners . . . . . . 615
searching in the database . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
transfer information from . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
translate fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
update symbols from . . . . . . . 166, 223, 827
use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Database setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Datatemplates
create variablelist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
dBase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
dBASE files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
DDE functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Default vaule
for variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
Default, tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Delete
page with a list on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
selected objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
symbol from folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Delete button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
DEMOMEC, symbol folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Design
cable list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
components list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
data symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
diagram page w. list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
PLC lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
signal symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Terminals lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
unit drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Design Check
dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
double-click on error in list . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
save and print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
update design check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Designcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Diagram
print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Diagram, page type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Diagrams
loop diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
selecting elements in lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Different types of objects, select . . . . . . . . . . 232
Dimmed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 851
Direct access
to menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819, 851
most used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .820
Directory alias
show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .820
Displayed in project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Distance (mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Distance, lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Divider, page function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .851
a window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Explorer window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Symbol pickmenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Document object =>
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651, 652
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Dotted grid color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .773
Double-click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 851
Drag
pages between projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Drag and drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 851
Draw
house walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
inner walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Draw button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Drawing
by measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
measurement objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
standard projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
unambiguous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
with elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Drawing headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .814
add to list of drawing headers . . . . . . . . .729
and copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
and layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
change already created . . . . . . . . . . . . . .745
company logo on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721
insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
predefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730
remove form list of drawing headers . . . . .729
replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Drawing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47, 852
Drawing templates
insert variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
insertion points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .852
Drop down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Dutch version
PC|SCHEMATIC Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
DWG files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
export project as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
export symbol as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
import as symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Automation 12.0
Page 410
open new project by importing . . . . . . . .
DXF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
export project as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
export symbol as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
import as symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
open new project by importing . . . . . . . .
642
640
643
643
645
640
643
641
642
E
Edit
templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Edit =>
Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Convert to lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Copy to Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Data tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Find next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Insert special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Join signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454, 455
Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Pinswop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Select all =>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 619
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Editing symbols for a building . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
EIB, symbol folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
All on layer
All on page
Electrical installations
in different elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Electrical lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Electrical potentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
automatic insertion of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
on lower part of page
on upper part of page
settings for . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Electrical symbols
components having more
create automatically . . . .
............
............
box symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
circle symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connection points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
from database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
583
192
193
193
193
194
place based on placed mechanical symbols 625
Elements of a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469, 852
lines changign elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
select elevated objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Elevation window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Empty lines between Terminal Rows . . . . . . . 543
EN1861 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
EN60204-1,14.2.1, standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
EN60617, symbol folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
EN61346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
signal names according to . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Enter Wire Numbers Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Error
general protection error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Even pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Excel
integration with, survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
place symbols via lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
PLC I/O addressing via . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Explorer window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291, 817
displaying and hiding information . . . . . . . 292
move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Selecting a symbol on a page . . . . . . . . . 294
Export
DWG and DXF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
PLC I/O data to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
project as DWG or DXF file . . . . . . . . . . . 643
symbol as DWG or DXF file . . . . . . . . . . 645
Extend line button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Extended lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Extensions
of list files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
F
FABRICATE (Show all) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Fabricate choice
in Database menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Factor, ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Field headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
File =>
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Close and return to PCschematic project . 651
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 505, 753
New =>
. . . . . . . . . . . . 796
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
PCschematic project file
Open Unit
Print . . . .
Print =>
Select pages =>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Save unit as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
File =>.Send to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
File format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
File type registration, dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 795
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
commasep. files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
place symbols via
DWG/DXF
file names
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
in database fields
from Object Lister
lists as files . . . .
pindata files . . . .
Automation 12.0
Page 411
registering PCschematic filtypes . . . . . . . 795
wire number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Fill character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Filled areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Find Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Find Whole Text Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fixed digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Fixed text direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Flat buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
FLOWCHAR, symbol folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
change symbol in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
delete symbol from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
most used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
symbol folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Follow connected button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 718
Follow connected lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Foreign languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Format file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Formulas
insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Free texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 852
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Ftp
links in database fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Full circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Function aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 325
Functions =>
Auto command change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Auto Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Centre drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Component Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 547
Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Count down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Count up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Database =>
Find Article . . . . . . .
Find Type . . . . . . . .
Insert in Database . . .
Update from Database
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Design Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311
Design Check =>
Used more than once
deselect . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Generate isometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Object Lister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Place Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Place available Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Replace symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Select name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Show available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Show available again . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 224
Show conducting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Show signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Special Functions =>
Convert Branches to Dots . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Convert Dots to Branches . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Convert to Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Create CurrentPath No on all Symb . . . . .371
Exchange Article with Alt. Article on all Symbols
600
Prefix all symbol names with - . . . .339, 816
Set all articles as approved in the database 607
Set unreferenced cable symbols invisible .217
Set unreferenced signal symbols invisible .203
Transfer data from PLCref. to PLCsymb. .447
Transfer data from PLCsymb. to PLCref. .447
Transfer Proj. Texts to Auto Compl. func. .101
Update references
View Jumper Links
Wire numbers . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .360, 369
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
G
General protection error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
General purpose texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
General, tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Generation names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
German version
PCschematic Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 852
Grid display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .815
Ground plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
place symbols on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
with elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Ground plan, page type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Group Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Grouping
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Guess
wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
H
Half circle
Height . .
Help . . . .
Help =>
Http
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
//www.pcschematic.com
. . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Help frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 818
Help objects color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .774
Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817, 852
Home view
set User Home view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
HOMEDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .824
Horizontal reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Horizontal, tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Hot-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
House drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Http
links in database fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Hungarian version
PCschematic Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Hydraulics
place symbols via lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Automation 12.0
Page 412
Hydraulics, symbols
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
I
I/O lists
read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
I/O symbols
create PLC I/O symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
IEC750 standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
IECINST, symbol folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
IECPNEU, symbol folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Ignored, page function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Image
insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Image functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Import
DWG and DXF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
as page in project
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
PLC I/O data from Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Include Additionals from Database . . . . . . . . 535
Include cable wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Include Lines with article data . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Index
on-line manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Indexed variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
Information
automatic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Insert
data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
page for mechanical drawing . . . . . . . . . 616
unit drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Insert - in front of symbol names . . . . . . 339, 816
Insert =>
Insert data field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 834
Insert object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648, 649
Insert Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Insert Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Insert Reference Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Insert sub drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Insert new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
symbols or connection names . . . . . . . . 284
Insertion points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Install modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Installation
pickmenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Installations
LV installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
instdemo.pro, demo project . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Intelligent
copying of areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
reference designations
Interface
database
Internet
. . . . . . . . . . . . 235
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
automatic information and update . . . . . . 765
Interval in minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
Invert text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Sub drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ISO
paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Isometric, page type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Isometrical drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Italic text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
J
JIS
paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Join symbols
define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Jokers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Jumper links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
in lists and terminal plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
K
Keep page zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,
Keep zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,
Komponenter
rename selected
selecting symbols
817
816
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
L
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
and drawing headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
change using the mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
print page with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Left tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Left toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
License key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Licenses
SuperPro monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
tankning licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
transfer licenses by tanking . . . . . . . . . . . 776
transfer licenses via license files . . . . . . . 777
Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 65
article data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Automatic line drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
automatic wire numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
by measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
changing elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
curved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
follow connected lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Automation 12.0
Page 413
in symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
jumper links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
rectangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
select elevated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
slanted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
transfer article data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
types for ground plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Links
edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
in database fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
List =>
Read PLC I/O List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
List files
buttons in the dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
field headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
matching the system you export to . . . . . . 634
reference designations in . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
the contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
the file name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
the format file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
List of dtawing headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
List of used objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
List setup
terminals- cables- and PLC lists . . . . . . . 543
List symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Lists
add to the list of drawing headers . . . . . . 738
as files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
company logo on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
connections lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
data symbols on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
delete page with list on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
diagram page w. list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
for each Higher level or Location . . . . . . . 352
insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
jumper links in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
list symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
missing data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
order in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546, 550
place symbols via lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
predefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
wire numbers
references to location of mechanical symbols
.
622
remove form page
settings . . . . . . .
symbols
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .747
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
sub names in lists
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
unit parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .748
update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
using reference designations . . . . . . . . . .352
XML format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Lists =>
Connections List File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Connectionslist for file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
List Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
List settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533, 534, 543
Parts List File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630, 637
PLC List File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Read Components List =>
Create from diagram page . .
Create from mechanical page
Load from file . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .657
. . . . . . . . .657
. . . . . . . . .654
Update all lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Update lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Update parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Update Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Update Unit Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .750
Wire number file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Load defaults button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Load previous project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .829
Load selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Load standard button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Location aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322, 325
Lock
after system break down . . . . . . . . . . . . .788
delete lock information manually . . . . . . .788
project files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .788
project in use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .788
text types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Logo
insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
loop diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
LV installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
M
Mailto
links in database fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Main reference, check box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Survey of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Manual placing of wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . .386
Mapping
database fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Master reference, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Match Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Maximize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .853
MCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .782
MDAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Automation 12.0
Page 414
free measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
reference points and measurement . . . . . . 89
rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Measurement objects
layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Measures
absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Measures, drawing by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Mechanical drawing
insert page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Mechanical load
from database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
references to mechanical symbols in lists 622
Mechanical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 593, 603
create automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 194
box symbols . . .
circle symbols . .
connection points
from database . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
start by drawing mechanically . . . . . . . . . 625
MECTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 36, 853
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 853
choose database menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
direct access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Microsoft Excel
integration with, survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Microsoft SQL Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Minimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Mirror
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Mirror symbol horizontally button . . . . . . . . . 171
Mirror symbol vertically button . . . . . . . . . . . 171
MISC, symbol folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Missing connection name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Missing data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Missing symbol name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
install and uninstall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
start a module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
update and re-install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
which can you install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
More signals in same point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Mounting correct drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
choosing in an existing project . . . . . . . . . 94
convert from previous verisons . . . . . . . . . 96
convert to automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Mounting mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Mouse
change layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
mouse pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Mouse Chasing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 782
automatic blocking of mouse clicks . . . . . 784
block for clicking on a function . . . . . . . . . 783
disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Mouse pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Move
Explorer window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
origo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
selected objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Survey window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Symbol names when move . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Symbol pickmenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Move button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
MSSQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Multi layer terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
on diagram pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
on mechanical pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Multi symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
fetch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
Multi-level terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Multisignal, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
N
Name format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370, 831
Name format types
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Native drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Navigation
between symbols for component . . . . . . . 165
Negate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Negate text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
Net
tanking licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Net router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
Networks
sub drawings in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
New document button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
New versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
No dot generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
No visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Non conducting symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Non conducting, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Normal, page function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Normal, symbol status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Normal, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Norms
page norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Not yet written (New) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Numbering order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
O
Object Lister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
check project texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
counting on selected objects . . . . . . . . . . 299
Automation 12.0
Page 415
editing PLC I/O data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
printing from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
save as file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
selecting objects in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
show used and count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
typing in PLC I/O data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
change on existing object . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
transfer to more objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Object selection
Cross hairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Object selection color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 853
align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
already placed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
new/draw/place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
select different types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
select elevated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
transfer data between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Obsolete components
in Database menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
ODBC interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 613
Odd pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
OK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
OLE automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
OLE objects
edit links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
On all pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
On this page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
One line diagrams
connection names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
On-line manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
adapt to screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
index-finger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
printing from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
return to PCschematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Only one connection in net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Only show text on data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Open
DWG and DXF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Open dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Open files from Tools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Open, symbol status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Open, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Oracle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 613
Order
in lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546, 550
Origo
move . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ortho 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other programs
copy to . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overall planning . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .816
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
P
Page
page setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
. . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Page data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .813
data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 669
add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
in standard project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
type in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Page Data, data field type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Page format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Page function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .822
Page history buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
copying pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
symbol names when changes . . . . . . . . .373
Page settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 459
Page setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .822
Page shift between Terminal Rows . . . . . . . .543
Page tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817, 853
Page type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .822
Page types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
transfer to other pages
Page zoom
keep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
create new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
create page templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753
drag between projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
insert drawing header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Object Lister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
page history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
reference designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
displaying reference designation on page
.341
remove list form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .747
Pages and layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Panel builder
creating own components . . . . . . . . . . . .477
datafields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
drawing headers for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
try the Panel builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Panle builder
project template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Paper and margin setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 822
Paradox files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Parked line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72, 853
Parts list, page function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Automation 12.0
Page 416
Parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
order in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
prices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Parts/Components list, data field type . . . . . . 725
Password
projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
PBCODE, datafield for Panel builder . . . . . . . 477
PBCURRENT, datafield for Panel builder . . . 476
PBMODULES, datafield for Panel builder . . . 476
PBPHASES, datafield for Panel builder . . . . . 476
PBSYMBOL, datafield for Panel builder . . . . . 477
PC|SCHEMATIC Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
PC|SCHEMATIC PowerDistribution . . . . . . . . . 7
PCschematic
registering filetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
PCSTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Pencil button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Pickmenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 136
attach data to symbol in pickmenu . . . . . 175
enter database from pickmenu . . . . . . . . 138
for installations and pneumatics . . . . . . . 463
place symbol in pickmenu using database 176
place symbol with data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
place wire number symbol in . . . . . . . . . 386
Pin names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
PINDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Pindata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Pindata files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Place
available Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Place missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Place missing and renumber . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
addressing directly from database . . . . . . 437
base addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
choose format file for I/O file . . . . . . . . . . 449
contents of I/O file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
create PLC I/O symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
create PLC ref. symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Data on I/O symbol connection points . . . 442
displaying changes in project acc. to I/O file 451
I/O addressing via Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
I/O data
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
444
436
more than one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
read I/O lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
re-addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
specify I/O file filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
survey over functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
symbol folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
symbol status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
edit
jump PLC ref. symb. / PLC I/O symb. . . .
PLC reference symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . .
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
synchronize PLC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
text links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
typing in I/O data via Object Lister . . . . . . 443
update PLC projects from previous versions 447
workflow
. . . . . . . . 445
. . . . . . . . . 438
working with PLC’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
for PLC’s not in the database
with PLC’s from database . .
PLC functions
Apply addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
PLC list, data field type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
PLC list, page function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
PLC lists
and data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
list setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Pneumatics
pickmenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Pneumatics symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
connection points with same name . . . . . 313
place symbols via lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Pointer/Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Polish characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768, 829
Polish version
PC|SCHEMATIC Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Position of name when placing symbols . . . . . 127
Posno1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Potential numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Potentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
automatic insertion of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
PowerDistribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Precede page number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Predefined drawing headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Predefined lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
on lower part of page
on upper part of page
settings for . . . . . .
Previous versions
update PLC projects from . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Price 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Primary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
batch printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
on net installation . . . . . .
on stand-alone installation
. . . . . . . . . . 804
. . . . . . . . . . 804
chapters and dividers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
from Object Lister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
object lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
page with layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Print pages button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Print test page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Print this page button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Automation 12.0
Page 417
Printer help frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
Printer, tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Product choice
in Database menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Program settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Program toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 854
Programmable barcode scanners . . . . . . . . . 615
Programs
copy to other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Project data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 669
add
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
in standard project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
type in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Project Data, data field type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Project definition file
controlling project texts from . . . . . . . . . . 269
Project menu
Windows Explorer as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Project oriented program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Project settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Project templates
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Projects
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
compressed saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
controlling texts from project definition file 269
copy areas between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
copy project into project . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
copying areas between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
create project templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
from existing project
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
creating project templates . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
drag pages between projects . . . . . . . . . . 510
elements of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
export as DWG or DXF file . . . . . . . . . . . 643
insert logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
insert sub drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
jump between several projects . . . . . . . . 295
lock file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
lock project in use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
open from symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
same project in two versions . . . . . . . . . . 515
searching for texts via Windows . . . . . . . 799
send by e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
simultaneous projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
survey of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
zip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Properties =>
Project data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Q
Qualified guess
Quarter circle . .
Question mark .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
R
Re-addressing
PLC’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Reading direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Recovery information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .828
Re-creating files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .828
Rectangle button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 461
Rectangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
with relative coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Red arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Redraw button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Reducing repetitive strain injuries . . . . . . . . . .782
Reference cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Reference crosses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
choose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
jump to reference from . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Reference designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
data field for specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
displaying on page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
for a page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
in list files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
insert a data field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
insert auto. on signal symbols . . . . . . . . .203
prefix all symbol names with - . . . . . . . . .339
symbol names on pages with assigned . . .341
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Reference letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Reference point button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718
Reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .818, 854
move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679, 724
selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .737
Reference symbol position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Reference symbols
PLC reference symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Reference system
default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Reference system setup, dialog box . . . . . . . .367
Reference text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Reference, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .814
appearence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
automatic update of ref. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
implicit references on cable wires . . . . . . .206
implicit references on terminals . . . . . . . .204
jump to ref. from ref. cross/contact mirror .356
jump to reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
on symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
symbol type and reference . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Register command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .805
Registration
of PCschematic ELautomation . . . . . . . . .805
of PCschematic filetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . .795
Re-install modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .764
Relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Automation 12.0
Page 418
Relay, symbol status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Relay, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Remove
company logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
list from page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
Remove blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Remove existing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Remove existing and replace . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
selected symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 279
symbols from Symbol menu . . . . . . . . . . 690
Renumber existing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Repetitive strain injuries
block for clicking on a function . . . . . . . . 783
Repetitive strain injuries, reducing . . . . . . . 8, 782
Replace
drawing header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Replace All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Replace symbol texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Replace symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
connection points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
text properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Reports
loop reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Reset group numbers button . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Restart on page shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Restarting the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Reverse direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Right-click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 854
select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
short-cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Rotate
areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
selected object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Rotate button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Round buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Round lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Round lines button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Router =>
Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Rows
copy rows of data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Russian characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768, 829
Russian version
PCschematic Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
S
S Article no . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Same number through terminals . . . . . . . . . .
Save
symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save as default button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
104
104
104
379
685
124
Save with backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
Scale
image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
scale factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 688
texts in areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Screen functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
Search
in database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Searchkeys
in database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Secondary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Select
area in all layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
different types of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
elements in lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
elevated objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
everything on a layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
everything on a page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
more objects of same kind . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
object on different layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
on different layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
right-click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
several objects using mouse . . . . . . . . . . . 50
symbol by right-click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
symbol from database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
symbol from pickmenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
symbol from the symbol menu . . . . . . . . . 140
symbol using k-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Select all layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Select Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Select database file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Select pages, tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Select set of characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Selected objects
copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Selection
reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Semi ISOmetric, page type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Semicolon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Send project by e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 809
data base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Settings =>
Cursor/Screen =>
Colors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Database =>
Database settings =>
Component data
Database menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Automation 12.0
Page 419
Database setup => . . .
Component data . .
Component search
Select database file . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 598
. . . . . . . . . . . . 567
. . . . . . . . . . . . 604
. . . . . . . . 613, 614
Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515, 819
Directories =>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 813
Reference designations . . . . . . . . 325, 340
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367, 622
With drawing header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Page setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500, 822
grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
page function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
page type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Database
Page data =>
Page setup =>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 104, 815
Ask for names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Reading direction
Pointer/Screen
Pointer/Screen =>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Reference designations . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
Shortcuts
Project data . .
Project data =>
System =>
Compressed saving .
File type registration
License Tank . . . . .
SuperPro monitor . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
Text/Symbol defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Drawing headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Signal name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Signal symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
symbol data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Text defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
Settings => Page setup
Paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Setup, tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Several projects
jump between projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Short-cut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
learning while working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
user defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Show
symbol texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
Show all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Show available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Show available window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Show defaults button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 368
Show directory alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
Show from/to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Show layer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Show list of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Show message in (ms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .816
Show net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Show popup help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817
Show popup information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817
Show scrollbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817
Show used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Show used and count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Signal buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Signal names
in single line diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Signal symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 854
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717
frequently used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719
frequently used names of . . . . . . . . . . . .720
insert reference designations automatically 203
invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
place directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
place on parked line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
variant names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Signals
Object Lister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Simultaneous
projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Single line diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
connection names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
signal names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
symbol names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
symbols with states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Single line symbols
connection names for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Slanted lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Slanted lines button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 854
Snap button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Sort by name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61, 619
Sorting order
of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Spares pr. Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 112
Specify character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768
Specify symbol status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
SQL Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Squared grid color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .773
Squared grid-10 color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .773
Squares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Standard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768
Standard projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
convert to templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .757
copy into project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Standard/Project file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Standard/Project file, page function . . . . . . . .492
Standards
EN1861 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
EN60204-1,14.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
EN60617 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
EN61346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218, 322
Automation 12.0
Page 420
EN81714-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
IEC/EN60617 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
IEC750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
ISO1219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
page standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Start number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Start value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Starting functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
load project with page open . . . . . . . . . . 802
load project with symbol selected . . . . . . 802
loading specific pages from project . . . . . 802
States
symbols with states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
Straight lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Straight lines button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Straighten lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Sub drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
automatic placing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
by copying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
create variablelist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
insert on project page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
insert variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
insertion points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
invisible areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Sub names
on symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
SuperPro monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Support, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Survey
of projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
of used objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Survey window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 817, 855
move/dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Switch, symbol status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Switch, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Symbol article data =>
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Symbol article data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Symbol Data Field, data field type . . . . . . . . . 725
Symbol Data Fields
data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Symbol defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Symbol definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Symbol folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Symbol manipulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
Symbol menu
bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
create symbol / edit existing . . . . . . . . . . 146
enter the database from . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
representation of symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 141
search in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
select library via alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
select library via folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
show project symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Windows Explorer as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Symbol pickmenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 818
dock/move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Symbol reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Symbol settings button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Symbol texts
replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Symbol toolbar
select symbol type in area on screen . . . . 171
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 133
accessory symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
alternative electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . 584
alternative symbols
PINDATA
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
alternative symbols for PLC . . . . . . . . . . 585
attach unit drawing to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
automatic line drawing/router . . . . . . . . . . 81
busbar symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
cable symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
invisible
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
cables with color codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
change in folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
change names in Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
change names in Area, naming order . . . 181
change type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
changing symbol data for Component . . . 230
component having several electrical . . . . 583
component level functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
connection names for single line symbols 588
connection points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
box symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
circle symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
connection points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
from database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
create data symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
create symbol data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
current path numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
default text settings
create automatically
data symbols
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
with predefined values
data symbols and lists
Database
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
update symbols from
delete . . . . . . . .
delete from folder
Edit symbol mode
default text settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
editing for a building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
enter database using pickmenu . . . . . . . . 138
export as DWG or DXF file . . . . . . . . . . . 645
fetching symbols for component from database
222
insert new symbol names . . . . . . .
invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 284
. . . . . . 62
Automation 12.0
Page 421
join symbols, define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
lines in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
list symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
load another symbol into . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 593
create automatically
show texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
signal busses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
signal symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
in single line diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
sub names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
functionally understood as . . . . . . . . . . .160
included in lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
specified from database . . . . . . . . . . . .161
specify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
what is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
survey of symbols with same Symbol Name 227
symbol manipulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695
invisible
space . . . . . . . . . . . .
specify symbol status
states . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
move reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
multi symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
name format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
names on pages with reference designations .
341
names regain adaptabiblty . . . . . . . . . . . 373
names when changes in Page menu . . . . 373
names when move/copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
navigation between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Object Lister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
open project from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
pickmenu
symbol names
in single line diagrams . . . . . . . . . . .
position of name when placing symbols
. .398
. .127
symbol type and reference . . . . . . . . . . . .358
terminals
attach data to symbol in pickmenu . . . . . 175
enter database using pickmenu . . . . . . . 138
pickmenus for many components . . . . . . 226
place symbol in pickmenu using database 176
place symbol with data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
symbols with states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
place and name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
place available symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
place on ground plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
place via lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
PLC
. . . . . . . . . . . . 704
. . . . . . . . . . . . 707
PLC symbols, working with . . . . . . . . . . . 436
position of name when placing symbols . . 127
reference designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
references on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
create PLC I/O symbols
create PLC ref. symbols
rename
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
. . . . . . . . . . . 690
. . . . . . . . . . . 278
direction for renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
selecting symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
start number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
which names are renamed . . . . . . . . . . 279
replace symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 688
when copying areas
rename from Symbol menu
rename selected . . . . . . . .
select
from database . .
from pickmenu . .
from symbol menu
right-click . . . . . .
using k-key . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
select elevated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
select symbol type in area on screen . . . . 171
select using Explorer window . . . . . . . . . 294
show available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
show net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
multi layer . . . . . . . . . .
on diagram pages . .
on mechanical pages
. . . . . . . . . . .208
. . . . . . . . . . .208
. . . . . . . . . . .209
texts connected to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
transfer article data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
type in Article Number directly . . . . . . . . .149
type in Symbol Type directly . . . . . . . . . .150
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
update
from database . . . . . . . . . . .
when changing article number
. . . . . . . .166
. . . . . . . .166
update from database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
wire number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
with extra connection points . . . . . . . . . . .695
Symbols button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Symbols text
S Article no . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
S Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
S name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
S type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
SYSDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .824
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .828
System break down
lock after . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .788
System breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .828
System Data
data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
System Data, data field type . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
T
Tab key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Table of Contents
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739
data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
On-line manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Table of Contents, data field type . . . . . . . . . .725
Table of Contents, page function . . . . . . . . . .491
Automation 12.0
Page 422
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
create from standard projects . . . . . . . . .
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
insertion points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
on networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page templates
create
752
757
758
758
267
752
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
project templates
create . . . . . . . . . . . .
from existing project
. . . . . . . . . . . 755
. . . . . . . . . . . 757
template projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Terminal plans
jumper links in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Terminal symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
implicit references on terminals . . . . . . . . 204
Terminal, symbol status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Terminal, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Terminals
multi layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
on diagram pages . . .
on mechanical pages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
multi-level terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Terminals list, data field type . . . . . . . . 108, 725
Terminals list, page function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Terminals lists
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
list setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
order in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Test page, print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Text defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Text fields
place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Text link
dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Text links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
create from Symbols command . . . . . . . 129
create from Texts command . . . . . . . . . . 128
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
in PLC I/O lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
indication of linked texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
what is a text link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Text properties
specify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Text properties button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Text/Symbol defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 99
align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
auto completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
auto text
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
delete texts
bold . .
change
change free texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
change in cross hair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
check project texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
connected to symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
controlling from project definition file . . . . 269
counting on texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
counting on texts in areas . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
reference designations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
default text settings
in Edit symbol mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
displayed in the project (overall setting) . . 123
fixed text direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
free texts
default properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
in more than one line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
invert/negate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
italics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
linking texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
lock text types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Object Lister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
scaling texts in areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
searching for texts via Windows . . . . . . . 799
space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
specify text properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
text links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
. . . . . . . 129
. . . . . . . 128
. . . . . . . 132
. . . . . . . 131
. . . . . . . 132
. . . . . . . 128
. . . . . . . 128
toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
type in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
underline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
underlined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
visible text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Texts button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Tile horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Tile vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
create from Symbols command
create from Texts command . .
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
in PLC I/O lists . . . . . . . . . . .
indication of linked texts . . . . .
what is a text link . . . . . . . . .
Toolbars
arcs/circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
dock/move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Tools => . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
Create variable list . . . . . . . . . 269, 270, 271
Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Mouse Chasing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Rename symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Automation 12.0
Page 423
Show textfile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Singleline diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Tools menu
open files from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Top to bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Transfer Group Number button . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Transfer information
from database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Translate
database fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Trim line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Type in texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Types
line types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
symbol types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
U
Unambiguous drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Underline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Underline text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Underlined text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Undo button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Uninstall modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Unit Drawing, page function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Unit drawings
attach to symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
correct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
create using drawing of entire component 750
insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Unit of measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
Unit parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
assign article number to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
correct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
without unit drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Unregister command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
automatic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Update lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Update, button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
User defined short-cut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
User Home view
set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
User name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
USERLIB, symbol folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
V
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
create variablelist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
indexed variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
insertion with default value . . . . . . . . . . . 848
normal variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
possible control via var. in symbol names . 849
that inserts a value in a text . . . . . . . . . . .848
with default value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .848
Variant names
on signal symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Vertical reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Vertical, tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
View =>
Activate Pickmenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Clean screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Go to page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Goto symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Home view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Page history back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Page history forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Previous zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Redraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Select page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 346, 487
Set User Home view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Show available window . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Show object below cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Show texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Survey window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Zoom All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
DWG/DXF
Zoom in .
Zoom out
Visible text . .
W
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108, 119
Width, lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Wildcarts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Window
several windows open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Window =>
Arrange Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Close All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Tile horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
indexing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .798
Windows Explorer
as Project menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
as Symbol menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Wire
add to cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
remove from cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Wire number, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Wire numbers
auto. incr. on manually placed wire no’s . .388
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
connections lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Excl. signals, tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
fetch symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Automation 12.0
Page 424
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
manual placing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Number symbol, tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
numbering order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
place symbol in pickmenu . . . . . . . . . . . 386
place symbol manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
With reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
With reference, symbol status . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
With reference, symbol type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 37, 855
Wrap text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
X
X position (mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x,y position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XML
lists in XML format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
368
622
632
Y
Y position (mm)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Z
Zip
advantages by zipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
on zipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
project files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
keep page zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
previous zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Zoom button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Zoom to page button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Automation 12.0
Page 425
Automation 12.0
Page 426